H100 Manual

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 659

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and electric devices.
* LSLV-H100 is the official name for the H100 series inverters.
* The H100 series software may be updated without prior notice for better performance. To check
the latest software, visit our website at http://www.lsis.com.

Safety Information

Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating
conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death.
Safety symbols in this manual

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or property
damage.

Safety information

•

Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate the
inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging area to the
external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or touch the
internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the power is on or during
operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious property damage.

•

Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has been
turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the cover may
result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.

•

The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a multimeter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or motor cable.

•

Supply earthing system: TT, TN, not suitable for corner-earthed systems

•

This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.

•

Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty, disconnect the
power supply and have the inverter professionally repaired.

•

The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled to
avoid burns.

Safety Information

•

Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get inside the
inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to malfunction or
result in a fire.

•

Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock.

•

Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty.

•

The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to operate a single
phase motor.

•

Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and result
in an electric shock.

Note
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined in
IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LSLV-H100 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the selected MCCB. RMS
symmetrical amperes for recommended MCCB are the following table.
Remarque
Le courant maximum de court-circuit présumé autorisé au connecteur d’alimentation électrique
est défini dans la norme IEC 60439-1 comme égal à 100 kA. Selon le MCCB sélectionné, la série
LSLV-H100 peut être utilisée sur des circuits pouvant fournir un courant RMS symétrique de
100 kA maximum en ampères à la tension nominale maximale du variateur. Le tableau suivant
indique le MCCB recommandé selon le courant RMS symétrique en ampères.
Working
Voltage

UTE100
(E/N)

240V(50/60Hz)

50/65kA

65/100/150kA 65/100/150kA

65/100/150kA

480V(50/60Hz)

25/35kA

35/65/100kA

ABS33c

ABS53c

ABS63c

ABS103c

ABS203c

ABS403c

240V(50/60Hz)

30kA

35kA

85kA

75kA

480V(50/60Hz)

7.5kA

10kA

26kA

35kA

Working
Voltage

UTS150
(N/H/L)

UTS250
(N/H/L)

UTS400
(N/H/L)

35/65/100kA

iii

Quick Reference Table

Quick Reference Table
The following table contains situations frequently encountered by users while working with
inverters. Refer to the typical and practical situations in the table to quickly and easily locate
answers to your questions.
Situation

Reference

I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power source is
applied.

p.17

I want to configure the motor’s parameters.

p.219

Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor.

p.345, p.566

What is auto tuning?

p.219

What are the recommended wiring lengths?

p.40

The motor is too noisy.

p.250

I want to apply PID control on my system.

p.163

What are the factory default settings for P1–P7 multi-function terminals?

p.38

I want to view all of the parameters I have modified.

p.259

I want to review recent fault trip and warning histories.

p.59

I want to change the inverter’s operation frequency using a potentiometer.

p.90

I want to install a frequency meter using an analog terminal.

p.38

I want to display the supply current to motor.

p.55

I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration.

p.104

The motor runs too hot.

p.321

The inverter is too hot.

p.333

The cooling fan does not work.

p.574

I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad.

p.316

I want to display the supply current to motor.

p.316

Table of Contents

Table of Contens
1

Preparing the Installation ............................................................................................1

1.1 Product Identification .................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Part Names......................................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Installation Considerations..................................................................................................... 10
1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation.............................................................. 11
1.5 Cable Selection ............................................................................................................................. 14
Installing the Inverter ................................................................................................ 17

2.1 Mounting the Inverter .............................................................................................................. 19
2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery .................................................................. 23
2.3 Cable Wiring ................................................................................................................................... 26
2.4 Post-Installation Checklist ....................................................................................................... 48
2.5 Test Run ............................................................................................................................................ 50
Perform Basic Operations ......................................................................................... 52
3.1

About the Keypad ....................................................................................................................... 52
3.1.1 Operation Keys ............................................................................................................ 52
3.1.2 About the Display ...................................................................................................... 55
3.1.3 Display Modes ............................................................................................................. 59
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad................................................................................................... 63
3.2.1 Display Mode Selection .......................................................................................... 63
3.2.2 Operation Modes ....................................................................................................... 64
3.2.3 Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode ...................... 66
3.2.4 Switching between Groups in User & Macro Mode ................................. 67
3.2.5 Navigating through the Codes (Functions) .................................................. 68
3.2.6 Navigating Directly to Different Codes ........................................................... 70
3.2.7 Parameter Settings available in Monitor Mode.......................................... 72
3.2.8 Setting the Monitor Display Items .................................................................... 73
3.2.9 Selecting the Status Bar Display Items ............................................................ 75
3.3 Fault Monitoring .......................................................................................................................... 77
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation.............................................. 77
3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips........................................................................... 78
3.4 Parameter Initialization ............................................................................................................ 79
Learning Basic Features............................................................................................. 80
v

Table of Contents

4.1
4.2

4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6

4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10

4.11
4.12
4.13

4.14

4.15
vi

Switching between the Operation Modes (HAND / AUTO / OFF)...................... 83
Setting Frequency Reference ................................................................................................ 88
4.2.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting) ...................................................... 89
4.2.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting) ...................................................... 89
4.2.3 V1 Terminal as the Source...................................................................................... 89
4.2.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2)...... 99
4.2.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input .......................................................100
4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication .............102
Frequency Hold by Analog Input......................................................................................103
Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm) ..................................................................104
Setting Multi-step Frequency .............................................................................................104
Command Source Configuration......................................................................................106
4.6.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device ...................................................106
4.6.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run
commands) ...............................................................................................................107
4.6.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands)..........................................................................................108
4.6.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device .........................109
Forward or Reverse Run Prevention ................................................................................110
Power-on Run..............................................................................................................................111
Reset and Restart.......................................................................................................................113
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ............................................................114
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency.........................................114
4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency .........................................117
4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration.......................................................118
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency ..........................................120
Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration ..........................................................................................121
Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation .....................................................................................124
V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control ......................................................................................125
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation..............................................................................125
4.13.2 Square Reduction V/FPattern Operation .....................................................126
4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation .................................................................................127
Torque Boost................................................................................................................................129
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost .............................................................................................129
4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost ...................................................................................................130
4.14.3 Auto Torque Boost 2 (No Motor Parameter Tuning Required)..........130
Output Voltage Setting ..........................................................................................................131

Table of Contents

4.16 Start Mode Setting....................................................................................................................132
4.16.1 Acceleration Start.....................................................................................................132
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking............................................................................................132
4.17 Stop Mode Setting....................................................................................................................133
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop ....................................................................................................133
4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking ............................................................................................134
4.17.3 Free Run Stop .............................................................................................................135
4.17.4 Power Braking............................................................................................................136
4.18 Frequency Limit .........................................................................................................................137
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency
..........................................................................................................................................137
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values 137
4.18.3 Frequency Jump.......................................................................................................140
4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting.................................................................................................141
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control ...........................................................................142
4.21 Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay Control..............................................144
Learning Advanced Features.................................................................................. 145
5.1
5.2

5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13

Operating with Auxiliary References...............................................................................147
Jog Operation..............................................................................................................................153
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal .................153
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog by Multi-function Terminal
..........................................................................................................................................154
Up-down Operation ................................................................................................................155
3- Wire Operation ......................................................................................................................157
Safe Operation Mode ..............................................................................................................158
Dwell Operation .........................................................................................................................160
Slip Compensation Operation ............................................................................................162
PID Control....................................................................................................................................163
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation ................................................................................................164
5.8.2 Soft Fill Operation ....................................................................................................179
5.8.3 PID Sleep Mode.........................................................................................................181
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) ..........................................................................183
External PID ..................................................................................................................................184
Damper Operation ...................................................................................................................194
Lubrication Operation.............................................................................................................196
Flow Compensation.................................................................................................................197
Payback Counter.........................................................................198
vii

Table of Contents

5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26

5.27
5.28
5.29
5.30
5.31
5.32
5.33
5.34
5.35
5.36
5.37
5.38
5.39
5.40
5.41
5.42
5.43
5.44

viii

Pump Clean Operation...........................................................................................................200
Start & End Ramp Operation ...............................................................................................204
Decelerating Valve Ramping ...............................................................................................206
Load Tuning..................................................................................................................................207
Level Detection...........................................................................................................................209
Pipe Break Detection ...............................................................................................................213
Pre-heating Function...............................................................................................................216
Auto Tuning..................................................................................................................................219
Time Event Scheduling...........................................................................................................222
Kinetic Energy Buffering ........................................................................................................237
Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention) ...................................................239
Fire Mode Operation................................................................................................................240
Energy Saving Operation ......................................................................................................242
5.26.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation ...................................................................242
5.26.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation .............................................................242
Speed Search Operation........................................................................................................243
Auto Restart Settings...............................................................................................................248
Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency Settings) .....................................250
2nd Motor Operation.................................................................................................................251
Supply Power Transition ........................................................................................................253
Cooling Fan Control .................................................................................................................254
Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings ............................................................255
Read, Write, and Save Parameters.....................................................................................256
Parameter Initialization ..........................................................................................................257
Parameter View Lock ...............................................................................................................258
Parameter Lock ...........................................................................................................................258
Changed Parameter Display ................................................................................................259
User Group ....................................................................................................................................260
Easy Start On ................................................................................................................................261
Config (CNF) Mode ...................................................................................................................263
Macro Selection..........................................................................................................................264
Timer Settings .............................................................................................................................265
Multiple Motor Control (MMC)...........................................................................................266
5.44.1 Multiple Motor Control (MMC) Basic Sequence.......................................274
5.44.2 Standby Motor ..........................................................................................................279

Table of Contents

5.44.3 Auto Change ..............................................................................................................280
5.44.4 Interlock ........................................................................................................................286
5.44.5 Aux Motor Time Change ......................................................................................290
5.44.6 Regular Bypass ..........................................................................................................291
5.44.7 Aux Motor PID Compensation ..........................................................................292
5.44.8 Master Follower.........................................................................................................294
5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control...........................................................................300
5.46 Press Regeneration Prevention ..........................................................................................301
5.47 Analog Output............................................................................................................................303
5.47.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output..............................................................303
5.47.2 Analog Pulse Output ..............................................................................................306
5.48 Digital Output .............................................................................................................................309
5.48.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings ..............................309
5.48.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay .............314
5.48.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings ...........................315
5.49 Operation State Monitor........................................................................................................316
5.50 Operation Time Monitor ........................................................................................................318
5.51 PowerOn Resume Using the Communication ...........................................................319
Learning Protection Features ................................................................................. 321
6.1

6.2

6.3

Motor Protection .......................................................................................................................321
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH) ..................321
6.1.2 Motor Over Heat Sensor .......................................................................................323
6.1.3 Overload Early Warning and Trip .....................................................................325
6.1.4 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking ....................................................................327
Inverter and Sequence Protection ...................................................................................331
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection ........................................................................................331
6.2.2 External Trip Signal ..................................................................................................332
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT) ...............................................................333
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss ..........................................................................................334
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration ..........................................338
6.2.6 Low Battery Voltage Warning ............................................................................339
Under load Fault Trip and Warning ..................................................................................340
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection .................................................................................................341
6.3.2 Low Voltage Fault Trip............................................................................................342
6.3.3 Selecting Low Voltage 2 Fault During Operation ....................................342
6.3.4 Output Block via the Multi-function Terminal...........................................343
6.3.5 Trip Status Reset........................................................................................................343
ix

Table of Contents

6.3.6 Operation Mode for Option Card Trip ...........................................................344
6.3.7 No Motor Trip .............................................................................................................345
6.3.8 Broken Belt ..................................................................................................................346
6.4 Parts Life Expectancy...............................................................................................................347
6.4.1 Main Capacitor Life Estimation .........................................................................347
6.4.2 Fan Life Estimation ..................................................................................................349
6.5 Fault/Warning List .....................................................................................................................351
RS-485 Communication Features .......................................................................... 354
7.1
7.2

Communication Standards ..................................................................................................354
Communication System Configuration .........................................................................355
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection ...................................................................355
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters .............................................................357
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ..........................................359
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ...........................................................359
7.3 LS INV 485/Modbus-RTU Communication ..................................................................362
7.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Input ...............................................................362
7.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication .....................................362
7.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication ......................................................364
7.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission ......................................................365
7.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group .....................................................366
7.3.6 LS INV 485 Protocol .................................................................................................367
7.3.7 Modbus-RTU Protocol ...........................................................................................373
7.3.8 Compatible Common Area Parameter .........................................................378
7.3.9 H100 Expansion Common Area Parameter ...............................................382
7.4 BACnet Communication........................................................................................................398
7.4.1 What is BACnet Communication? ...................................................................398
7.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards ...............................................................398
7.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start .............................................................398
7.4.4 Protocol Implementation ....................................................................................401
7.4.5 Object Map..................................................................................................................401
7.5 Metasys-N2 Communication ..............................................................................................410
7.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start ....................................................410
7.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard ........................................................410
7.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map ...............................................................411
Table of Functions .................................................................................................... 415
8.1
x

Drive Group (DRV) ....................................................................................................................415
8.2 ...................................................................... Basic Function Group (BAS)

Table of Contents

420
8.3 Expanded Function Group (ADV) .....................................................................................427
8.4 Control Function Group (CON) ...........................................................................................433
8.5 Input Terminal Group (IN) .....................................................................................................436
8.6 Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT)...........................................................445
8.7 Communication Function Group (COM) .......................................................................451
8.8 Advanced Function Group(PID Functions) ..................................................................458
8.9 EPID Function Group (EPID) .................................................................................................470
8.10 Application 1 Function Group (AP1)................................................................................477
8.11 Application 2 Function Group (AP2)................................................................................483
8.12 Application 3 Function Group (AP3)................................................................................489
8.13 Protection Function Group (PRT) ......................................................................................496
8.14 2nd Motor Function Group (M2) .......................................................................................506
8.15 Trip (TRIP Last-x) and Config (CNF) Mode .....................................................................510
8.15.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)...........................................................................................510
8.15.2 Config Mode (CNF)..................................................................................................511
8.16 Macro Groups..............................................................................................................................516
8.16.1 Compressor (MC1) Group....................................................................................516
8.16.2 Supply Fan (MC2) Group ......................................................................................519
8.16.3 Exhaust Fan (MC3) Group ....................................................................................521
8.16.4 Cooling Tower (MC4) Group ...............................................................................542
8.16.5 Circululation Pump (MC5) Group ....................................................................545
8.16.6 Vacuum Pump (MC6) Group ..............................................................................549
8.16.7 Constant Torque (MC7) Group ..........................................................................558
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 561
9.1

Trip and Warning .......................................................................................................................561
9.1.1 Fault Trips .....................................................................................................................561
9.1.2 Warning Message ....................................................................................................565
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips .................................................................................................566
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults .............................................................................................569
10 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 576
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists .........................................................................................................576
10.1.1 Daily Inspection ........................................................................................................576
10.1.2 Annual Inspection ...................................................................................................577
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspection ..............................................................................................579
10.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement ...............................................................580
xi

Table of Contents

10.3 Storage and Disposal...............................................................................................................584
10.3.1 Storage ..........................................................................................................................584
10.3.2 Disposal.........................................................................................................................584
11 Technical Specification ............................................................................................ 585
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7

Input and Output Specifications .......................................................................................585
Product Specification Details ..............................................................................................591
External Dimensions .............................................................................................................595
Peripheral Devices ....................................................................................................................600
Fuse and Reactors Specifications ......................................................................................603
Terminal Screw Specifications ............................................................................................604
Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors ...............................................................606
11.7.1 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU)............................................................................606
11.7.2 Terminal arrangement...........................................................................................608
11.7.3 Dynamic Breaking (DB)Unit & DB resistor basic wiring ........................612
11.7.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................613
11.7.5 Display Functions .....................................................................................................616
11.7.6 DB Resistors.................................................................................................................616
11.8 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating .............................................................618
12 Applying Drives to Single-phase Input Application .......................................... 622
12.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................622
12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current ..........................................................623
12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance........................................................................624
12.4 Wiring ..............................................................................................................................................625
12.5 Precautions for 1–phase input to 3-phase drive .......................................................625
Product Warranty ............................................................................................................. 626
UL mark .............................................................................................................................. 628
EAC mark ............................................................................................................................ 628
Index ................................................................................................................................... 633

xii

Preparing the Installation

1 Preparing the Installation
This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, correct installation and cable
specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the instructions.

1.1 Product Identification
The H100 Inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive capacity and
power source specifications. Product name and specifications are detailed on the rating plate.
Check the rating plate before installing the product and make sure that the product meets your
requirements. For more detailed product specifications, refer to 11.1 Input and Output
Specifications on page 585.
Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from defects.
Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.

Preparing the Installation

Note
The H100 75/90 kW, 400 V inverters satisfy the EMC standard EN61800-3 without installation of
optional EMC filters.

Preparing the Installation

1.2 Part Names
The illustration below displays part names. Details may vary between product groups.
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

37–90 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

110–132 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

160–185 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

220–250 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

315–400 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

500 kW (3-Phase)

Preparing the Installation

1.3 Installation Considerations
Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the installation
environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product. The table below
details the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter.
Items
Ambient Temperature*

Description
-10 ℃–50 ℃ (40 ℃ and above, 2.5% / ℃ Current Derating search.
50 ℃ 75% of the rated current of the drive if possible)

Ambient Humidity

95% relative humidity (no condensation)

Storage Temperature

- 4–149 °F (-20–65 ℃)

Environmental Factors

An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue or
dust

Altitude

Maximum 3,280 ft (1,000m) above sea level for standard operation.
After that the driver rated voltage and the rated output current derating
by 1% for every extra 328 ft (100m) up to 13,123 ft (4,000m).

Vibration

less than 1.0 G (9.8m/sec2)

Air Pressure

70 –106 kPa

* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the surface of
the inverter.

Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the inverter.

Preparing the Installation

1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation
When selecting an installation location consider the following points:
•

The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.

•

The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of the
inverter.

•

The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that is
fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to allow air
to circulate. The illustrations below detail the required installation clearances.

Preparing the Installation

•

Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the
inverter is to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider the
position of the inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan must be
positioned to efficiently transfer the heat generated by the operation of the inverter.

•

If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side and remove
the vent covers. Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the vent covers. Only the H100
inverters rated for up to 30 kW may be installed side-by-side.

Preparing the Installation

Note
•

The vent covers must be removed for side-by-side installations.

•

Side-by-side installation cannot be used for the H100 inverters rated for 37 kW and above.

•

For the H100 inverters rated for 37 kW and above, if the installation site satisfies the UL Open
Type requirements and there is no danger of foreign objects getting inside the inverter and
causing trouble, the vent cover may be removed to improve cooling efficiency.

•

If you are installing multiple inverters of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance to meet
the clearance specifications of the larger inverter.The H100 inverters rated for up to 30 kW
may be installed side-by-side.

Preparing the Installation

1.5 Cable Selection
When you install power and signal cables in the terminal blocks, only use cables that meet the
required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to the following
information to assist you with cable selection.

•

Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power wiring, to
ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.

•

Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 75 ℃ for power terminal wiring.

•

Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75 ℃ for control terminal wiring.

• The inverters in the range between 15 and 90 kW must be grounded conveniently with fixed
connections.
• The inverters in the range between 5,5kW and 11kW must be grounded with and industrial
connector according to IEC 60309.
• The minimum size of the protective earthing conductor shall comply with the local safety
regulations for high protective earthing conductor current equipment.
•

Only one conductor per terminal should be simultaneously connected

Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications
Ground Wire
Load (kW)

Input/Output Power Wire

mm2

AWG

3.5

mm2

AWG

R/S/T

U/V/W

R/S/T

U/V/W

1.5

2.5

25
1.5

22
1.5

4
16

0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
3-Phase 200 V

5.5
7.5

11
15
18.5
3-Phase 400 V 0.75

Preparing the Installation

Ground Wire
Load (kW)

mm2

Input/Output Power Wire

AWG

mm2

AWG

R/S/T

U/V/W

R/S/T

U/V/W

2.5
4

2.5
2.5

14
12

14
14

6
16

6
10

10
6

10
8

1/0

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11
15
18.5
22
30

37
45

55
75

110
132

50X2

1X2

70X2
95X2

160

50X2
70X2

1/0 x2

95X2

185

70x2
95x2

3/0 x2

120X2

250x2

150X2

300 x2

185X2

220
250

95x2

315

60X4
150X2

2/0 x4,

120X4,
400X2

355

70X4
150X2

3/0 x4

120X4,
400X2

400

95X4
200X2

4/0 x4

120X4,
400X2

500

120X4
350X2

4/0 x4
750X2

185X4,
630X2

* Lugs of the field wiring must be UL approved.
15

Preparing the Installation

Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

Terminals

Wire thickness 1)
mm2

AWG

P1–P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/24/TI

0.33–1.25

16–22

AO1/AO2/CM/Q1/EG

0.33–2.0

14–22

A1/B1/C1/A2/C2/A3/C3/A4/C4/A5/C5

0.33–2.0

14–22

0.75

S+,S-,SG

1) Use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cables for signal wiring.

Installing the Inverter

2 Installing the Inverter
This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation of the H100 series inverters,
including mounting and wiring of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration
diagram provided below to understand the procedures and installation instructions to be
followed to install the product correctly.

Installation Flowchart
The following flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover
equipment installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is referenced in
the steps.

Product Identification (p.1)
Select the Installation Location (p.10)
Mounting the Inverter (p.19)
Wiring the Ground Connection (p.27)
Power and Signal Wiring (p.29)
Post-Installation Checks (p.48)
Turning on the Inverter
Parameter Configuration (p.61)
Testing (p.50)

Installing the Inverter

Basic configuration diagram
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter and
peripheral devices.
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power rating,
capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices (resistor brakes,
contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral devices, refer to 11.4
Peripheral Devices on page 600.

200[V] : 0.75~18.5kW, 400[V] : 0.75~90kW

400[V] : 110~500kW

Installing the Inverter

•

Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more
detailed view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before
operating the inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.

•

Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor installed on the input power supply.

•

If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous situation.
Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these situations.

•

High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly rated
circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.

•

Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be installed within
32.8 ft (10 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 600 kVA. Refer to 11.5 Fuse and
Reactors Specifications on page 603 and carefully select a reactor that meets the requirements.

2.1 Mounting the Inverter
Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below. Before
installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance specifications, and that
there are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External Dimensions on page
595 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
1

Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark the
fixing points.

Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not fully
tighten the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter has been
mounted.

Mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel using the two upper bolts, and then fully
tighten the upper mounting bolts.

200[V] : 0.75~18.5kW, 400[V] : 0.75~185kW

Installing the Inverter

400[V] : 220~500kW

Install the two lower mounting bolts. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the mounting
surface, and that the installation surface can securely support the weight of the inverter.
200[V] : 0.75~18.5kW, 400[V] : 0.75~185kW
20

Installing the Inverter

400[V] : 220~500kW

Installing the Inverter

•

Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The inverter
may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always support the
inverter using the metal frames when moving it.

•

Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that is
suitable for the weight.

•

Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter must be
installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting surface.

Installing the Inverter

2.2 Enabling the RTC (Real-Time Clock) Battery
The H100 series inverter comes from the factory with a CR2032 lithium-manganese battery preinstalled on the I/O PCB. The battery powers the inverter’s built-in RTC. The battery is installed
with a protective insulation strip to prevent battery discharge; remove this protective film before
installing and using the inverter.

ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic components on
the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the components on the PCB with bare
hands while you work on the I/O PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge any
electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a metal object.

Follow the instructions below to remove the protective insulation strip and enable the RTC feature
on the H100 series inverters.
1

Turn off the inverter and make sure that DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level.

Loosen the screw on the power cover then remove the power cover.

0.75–30 kW Models
110~185kW Models

37–90 kW Models
220~500kW Models

Installing the Inverter

Remove the keypad from the inverter body.

0.75–30 kW Models

37–90 kW Models

Installing the Inverter

Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The main
PCB is exposed.

0.75–30 kW Models

37–90 kW Models

Locate the RTC battery holder on the I/O PCB, and remove the protective insulation strip by
gently pulling it.

Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body

For detailed information on the RTC battery, refer to the battery specifications on page 580.

Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before opening
the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.

Installing the Inverter

2.3 Cable Wiring
Open the terminal cover, remove the cable guides, and then install the ground connection as
specified. Complete the cable connections by connecting an appropriately rated cable to the
terminals on the power and control terminal blocks.
Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring connections to the inverter. All
warning instructions must be followed.

•

Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

•

Ensure that no small metal debris, such as wire clippings, remain inside the inverter. Metal debris
in the inverter may cause inverter failure.

•

Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal block screws may allow the
cables to disconnect and cause a short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to page 604.

•

Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable and
result in electric shock.

•

Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring, to ensure
that voltage drops do not exceed 2%.

•

Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 75 ℃ for power terminal wiring.

•

Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75 ℃ for control terminal wiring.

•

If you need to re-wire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter keypad
display is turned off and the charge lamp under the terminal cover is off before working on wiring
connections. The inverter may hold a high voltage electric charge long after the power supply has
been turned off.

• The accessible connections and parts listed below are of protective class 0. It means that the
protection of these circuits relies only upon basic insulation and becomes hazardous in the event
of a failure of the basic insulation. Therefore, devices connected to these circuits must provide
electrical-shock protection as if the device was connected to supply mains voltage. In addition,
during installation these parts must be considered, in relation with electrical-shock, as supply
mains voltage circuits.
[ Class 0 circuits]
MULTI FUNCTION INPUT : P1-P7, CM
ANALOG INPUT : VR, V1, I2, TI
ANALOG OUTPUT : AO1, AO2, TO
•

CONTACT : Q1, EG, 24,A1, C1, B1, A2~5, C2~5, S+, S-, SG

Installing the Inverter

Step 1 Terminal Cover and Cable Guide
The terminal cover and cable guide must be removed to install cables. Refer to the following
procedures to remove the covers and cable guide. The steps to remove these parts may vary
depending on the inverter model.
1

Loosen the bolt that secures the terminal cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from the
bottom and away from the front.

0.75–90 kW Models
2

110–185 kW Models

220–500 kW Models

Push and hold the levers on both sides of the cable guide (❶) and then remove the cable
guide by pulling it directly away from the front of the inverter (❷). In some models (37~90kW)
where the cable guide is secured by a bolt, remove the bolt first.

0.75~30 / 110~185 kW Models
3

Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable specifications,
refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 14.

Step 2 Ground Connection
27

Installing the Inverter

Remove the terminal cover(s) and cable guide. Then follow the instructions below to install the
ground connection for the inverter.
1

Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the
terminals. Refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 14 to find the appropriate cable specification
for your installation.

Ground terminals

0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)

37–90 kW (3-Phase)

110~185kW (3-Phase)

220-250kW (3-Phase)

Installing the Inverter

315~500kW (3-Phase)
2

Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal

Note
•

200 V products require Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 100 Ω.

•

400 V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be ≤ 10 Ω.

Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications to
ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified grounding
connections may result in electric shock.
This product can cause a D.C current in the protective earthing conductor. If a RCD or monitoring
(RCM) device is used for protection, only RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on supply side of this
product.

Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring
The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to the
detailed descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before making
wiring connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in 1.5 Cable
Selection on page 14 before installing them.

Installing the Inverter

•

Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short circuits
and malfunctions.

•

Use copper wires only with 600 V, 75 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300 V, 75 ℃
rating for the control terminal wiring.

•

Power supply wirings must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting them to the U,
V, W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter. Motor should be connected to the U, V,
and W Terminals. Arrangement of the phase sequence is not necessary.

•

Equipment must only be fitted to the closed electric operating areas.

Attention
• Appliquer des couples de marche aux vis des bornes. Des vis desserrées peuvent provoquer
des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements. Ne pas trop serrer la vis, car cela risque
d’endommager les bornes et de provoquer des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements.
•

Utiliser uniquement des fils de cuivre avec une valeur nominale de 600 V, 90 ℃ pour le
câblage de la borne d’alimentation, et une valeur nominale de 300 V, 75 ℃ pour le câblage
de la borne de commande.

•

Les câblages de l’alimentation électrique doivent être connectés aux bornes R, S et T. Leur
connexion aux bornes U, V et W provoque des dommages internes à l’onduleur. Le moteur
doit être raccordé aux bornes U, V et W. L’arrangement de l’ordre de phase n’est pas
nécessaire.

Installing the Inverter

0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels

Name

Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3)

AC power input terminal

Mains supply AC power connections.

P1(+)

+ DC link terminal

+ DC voltage terminal.
Used for connecting an external reactor.

P2(+)

+ DC link terminal

Used for DC power inverter DC (+) connection.

N-

- DC link terminal

- DC voltage terminal.
Used for a DC power inverter DC (-) connection.

P2(+)/B

Brake resistor terminals

Brake resistor wiring connection.

U/V/W

Motor output terminals

3-phase induction motor wiring connections.

Note
Apply a DC input to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to operate the inverter on DC current input.

Installing the Inverter

37–90 kW (3-Phase)

IM
3-phase AC input

Motor

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels

Name

Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3)

AC power input terminal

Mains supply AC power connections.

P2(+)

+ DC link terminal

+ DC voltage terminal.
Used for connecting an external reactor.

P3(+)

+ DC link terminal

Used for a DC power inverter DC (+)
connection.

N-

- DC link terminal

- DC voltage terminal.
Used for a DC power inverter DC (-) connection.

U/V/W

Motor output terminals

3-phase induction motor wiring connections.

Installing the Inverter

110–250kW (3-Phase)

P(+)

N(-)

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Terminal Labels

Name

Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3)

AC power input terminal

Mains supply AC power connections.

Brake resistor terminals

It can not be used because it does not
provide a braking unit

P(+)

+ DC link terminal

+ DC voltage terminal.

N-

- DC link terminal

- DC voltage terminal.
Used for a DC power inverter DC (-)
connection.

U/V/W

Motor output terminals

3-phase induction motor wiring
connections.

Installing the Inverter

315–500kW (3-Phase)

P(+)

N(-)

Terminal Labels

Name

Description

R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3)

AC power input terminal

Mains supply AC power connections.

P(+)

+ DC link terminal

+ DC voltage terminal.

N-

- DC link terminal

- DC voltage terminal.
Used for a DC power inverter DC (-)
connection.

U/V/W

Motor output terminals

3-phase induction motor wiring
connections.

Installing the Inverter

Note
•

Apply a DC input to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to operate the inverter on DC current input.

•

Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables to connect a remotely located motor with the inverter. Do
not use 3 core cables.

•

Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 492 ft (150 m). For inverters < = 3.7 kW
capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).

•

Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage
drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and may trigger
over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of equipment connected to the inverter.

•

Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula:

•

Voltage Drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] / 1000

•

Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is minimized
over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro surge filter may also
help to reduce voltage drop.
Distance

< 165 ft (50 m)

< 330 ft (100 m)

> 330 ft (100 m)

Allowed Carrier Frequency

<15 kHz

<5 kHz

<2.5 kHz

Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter is
ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.

•

Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables to
other terminals will damage the inverter.

•

Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.

•

The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with other
communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the installation of
noise filters or line filters may be required.

•

To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-advanced
condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the inverter.

•

To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic
contactors on the output side of the inverter.

Installing the Inverter

Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring
The illustrations below show the detailed layout of control wiring terminals and control board
switches. Refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.5 Cable Selection on page 14
before installing control terminal wiring and ensure that the cables used meet the required
specifications.

Switch Symbols and Description
Switch Description

Factory Default

SW1

Terminating Resistor selection switch (Left: On, Right: Off)

Right: OFF

SW2

NPN/PNP mode selection switch (Left: PNP, Right: NPN)

Right: NPN

SW3

V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (Left: V1, Right: T1)

Left: V1

SW4

analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch (Left: I2, Right: V2)

Left: I2

SW5

analog voltage/current output terminal selection switch
(Left: VO, Right: IO)

Left: VO

Installing the Inverter

Input and Output Control Terminal Block Wiring Diagram

5.5~90kW

Installing the Inverter

110~500kW

Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Function

Multi-function
terminal
configuration

Label

P1–P5

Name

Description

Multi-function Input 1-7

Configurable for multi-function input
terminals. Factory default terminals and
setup are as follows :
P1: Fx
P2: Rx
P3: BX
P4: RST
P5: Speed-L
P6: Speed-M
P7: Speed-H

Common
Sequence

Common terminal for analog terminal inputs
and outputs.

Potentiometer power
supply

Used to setup or modify a frequency
reference via analog voltage or current input.
Maximum Voltage Output: 12 V
Maximum Current Output: 12 mA
Potentiometer : 1–10k Ω

Voltage input for
frequency reference

Used to setup or modify a frequency
reference via analog voltage input terminal.
Unipolar: 0–10 V(12 V Max)
Bipolar: -10–10 V(±12 V Max)

Analog input
configuration
V1

Installing the Inverter

Function

Label

Name

Description

V2/I2

Voltage/current input for
frequency reference input

Used to setup or modify a frequency
reference via analog voltage or current input
terminals.
Switch between voltage (V2) and current (I2)
modes using a control board switch (SW4).
Input current: 0–20 mA
Maximum Input current: 24 mA
Input resistance 249 Ω

Pulse input for frequency
reference input (pulse
train)

Setup or modify frequency references using
pulse inputs from 0 to 32 kHz.
Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V

Output/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions
Function

Analog
output

Terminal
Contacts

Label

Name

Description

Voltage/Current
Output

Used to send inverter output information to external
devices: output frequency, output current, output
voltage, or a DC voltage.
Operate switch (SW5) to select the signal output type
(voltage or current) at the AO terminal.
Output Signal Specifications:
Output voltage: 0–10 V
Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V/10 mA
Output current: 0–20 mA
Maximum output current: 24 mA
Factory default output: Frequency

Multi-function
(Open Collector)
Pulse Output

Selects a multi-function output signal or pulse
output, output frequency, output current, output
voltage, DC voltage by selecting one of the outputs.
DC 26 V, 50 mA or less
Pulse output terminal
Output frequency: 0–32 kHz
Output voltage: 0–12 V

Common

Common ground contact for an open collector (with
external power source)

Installing the Inverter

Function

Label

Name

Description

24 V power supply

-Maximum output current: 100 mA
-Do not use this terminal for any purpose other than
supplying power to a PNP mode circuit configuration
(e.g. supplying power to other external devices).

A1/C1/B1

Fault relay output
A,B contact

Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s safety
features are activated.
( N.O.: AC250 V ≤2 A , DC 30 V ≤3 A
N.C.: AC250 V ≤1 A , DC 30 V ≤ 1 A)
Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are connected
(B1 and C1 open connection)
Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts are connected
(A1 and C1 open connection)
Factory default: Frequency

A2/C2
A3/C3
A4/C4
A5/C5

Defined in the inverter signal features such as output
Multi-function relay
via the multi-function output terminal.
output A contact
(AC 250 V≤ 5 A, DC 30 V≤ 5 A).

S+/S-/SG

RS-485 signal line

Used to send or receive RS-485 signals. Refer to 7RS485 Communication Features on page 354 for more
details.

Note
•

While making wiring connections at the control terminals ensure that the total cable length does
not exceed 165 ft (50 m).

•

Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100 ft (30 m).

•

Ensure that the cable length between the keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10 ft (3.04 m).
Cable connections longer than 10 ft (3.04 m) may cause signal errors.

•

Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.

•

Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer than 6 inches
from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the terminal cover.

Installing the Inverter

Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection
The H100 inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for sequence inputs at the
terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit requirements using the PNP/NPN selection switch
(SW2) on the control board. Refer to the following information for detailed applications.
PNP Mode (Source)
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default setting is NPN
mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24 V
internal source. If you are using an external 24 V source, build a circuit that connects the external
source (-) and the CM terminal.

Installing the Inverter

NPN Mode (Sink)
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default setting is NPN
mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24 V
internal source.

Installing the Inverter

Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical Grounding
H100, 400 V 0.75–55 kW, 110~500kW(3 phase) inverters have EMC filters built-in and activated as a
factory default design. An EMC filter prevents electromagnetic interference by reducing radio
emissions from the inverter. EMC filter use is not always recommended, as it increases leakage
current. If an inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical grounding connection, the EMC
filter must be turned off.
Asymmetrical Grounding Connection

One phase of
a delta
connection is
grounded
(TN Systems)

Intermediate
grounding
point on one
phase of a
delta
connection
(TN Systems)

The end of a
single phase is
grounded
(TN Systems)

A 3-phase
connection
without
grounding
(TN Systems)

•

Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical grounding
structure (corner-earthed systems), for example a grounded delta connection. Personal injury or
death by electric shock may result.

•

Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections.
Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been fully
discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.

Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the EMC filter if
the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection.
43

Installing the Inverter

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter for 0.75–30 kW (3–Phase) Inverters
Refer to the figures below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt with
the plastic bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic
bolt with the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic bolt with the
metal bolt to enable the EMC filter.
Steel bolt

Plastic bolt

Installing the Inverter

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter for 37–55 kW (3–Phase) Inverters
Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters for the H100 inverters rated for 37–
55 kW.
1

Remove the EMC ground cover located at the bottom of the inverter.

Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default), and
connect it to the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with asymmetrical
grounding).

If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and connect the EMC ground cable to
the right terminal to enable the EMC filter.

Installing the Inverter

Note
The terminal on the right is used to ENABLE the EMC filter (factory default). The terminal on the left is
used to DISABLE the EMC filter (for power sources with asymmetrical grounding).

EMC Filter OFF
(W/ asymetrically grounded PWR)

EMC Filter ON
(Factory default)

Disabling the Built-in EMC Filter for 110–500 kW (3–Phase) Inverters
Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters for the H100 inverters rated for 110–
500 kW.
1

Remove the front cover located at the top of the inverter.

Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default), and
connect it to the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with asymmetrical
grounding).

110–132 kW (3-Phase)

160–185 kW (3-Phase)

Installing the Inverter

220–250 kW (3-Phase)

315~500 kW(3-Phase)

Step 7 Re-assembling the Covers and Routing Bracket
Re-assemble the cable routing bracket and the covers after completing the wiring and basic
configurations. Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group or
frame size of the product.

Installing the Inverter

2.4 Post-Installation Checklist
After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that the
inverter has been safely and correctly installed.
Items

Installation
Location/Power
I/O Verification

Power Terminal
Wiring

Check Point

Ref.

Is the installation location appropriate?

p.10

Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating
conditions?

p.11

Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input?

p.585

Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the
equipment?
(Degraded performance will result in certain circumstances.
Refer to 11.8 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating on
page 618 for details.

p.585

Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the inverter?

p.18

Is the circuit breaker correctly rated?

p.600

Are the power source cables correctly connected to the
R/S/T terminals of the inverter?
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W
terminals may damage the inverter.)

p.29

Are the motor output cables connected in the correct phase
rotation (U/V/W)?
p.29
(Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if three phase
cables are not wired in the correct rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal connections
correctly rated?

p.14

Is the inverter grounded correctly?

p.27

Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal
screws tightened to their specified torques?

p.29

Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly on the
motors (if multiple motors are run using one inverter)?
Is the inverter separated from the power source by a
magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)?

p.18

Result

Installing the Inverter

Items

Check Point

Ref.

Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection and
electromagnetic interference filters installed correctly?
(These devices MUST not be installed on the output side of
the inverter.)

p.29

Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control
terminal wiring?

Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded?

If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function input
terminals defined prior to the installation of the control
wiring connections?

p.36

Control Terminal
Are the control cables properly wired?
Wiring

Miscellaneous

Result

p.36

Are the control terminal screws tightened to their specified
torques?

p.21

Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 165 ft (100 m)?

p.40

Is the total length of safety wiring < 100 ft (30 m)?

p.40

Are optional cards connected correctly?

Is there any debris left inside the inverter?

p.21

Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating a
potential short circuit risk?

Are the control terminal connections separated from the
power terminal connections?

Have the capacitors been replaced if they have been in use
for > 2 years?

Has a fuse been installed for the power source?

p.603

Are the connections to the motor separated from other
connections?

Note
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted cable pairs.
STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.

Installing the Inverter

2.5 Test Run
After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below to test the
inverter.
1

Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.

Select the command source.

Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
•

If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change according to
the input voltage at VR?

•

If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch
(SW4) set to ‘voltage’, and does the reference change according to the input voltage?

•

If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch
(SW4) set to ‘current’, and does the reference change according to the input current?

Set the acceleration and deceleration time.

Start the motor and check the following:
•

Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).

•

Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and that the
motor speed reaches the frequency reference.

Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the
load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U and V
terminals.

Installing the Inverter

Remarque
Si la commande avant (Fx) est activée, le moteur doit tourner dans le sens anti-horaire si on le
regarde côté charge du moteur. Si le moteur tourne dans le sens inverse, inverser les câbles aux
bornes U et V.
Verifying the Motor Rotation

On the keypad, set DRV-07 to ‘1 (Keypad)’.

Set a frequency reference.

If the inverter is in OFF mode, press the [AUTO] key twice on the keypad to operate the
inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.

If the inver ter is operating in AUTO mode, press the [AUTO] key once on the keypad to
operate the inverter in the forward (Fx) direction.

Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
counterclockwise (forward).

Forward operation

•

Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have to be
adjusted depending on the load.

•

To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that exceeds the
rated voltage for the equipment.

•

Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As inverters can
be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor speeds do not
accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.

Perform Basic Operations

3 Perform Basic Operations
This chapter describes the keypad layout and functions. It also introduces parameter groups and
codes required to perform basic operations. The chapter also outlines the correct operation of the
inverter before advancing to more complex applications. Examples are provided to demonstrate
how the inverter actually operates.

3.1 About the Keypad
The keypad is composed of two main components – the display and the operation (input) keys.
Refer to the following illustration to identify part names and functions.

3.1.1 Operation Keys
The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.

Perform Basic Operations

Key

Name

Description

MODE

[MODE] Key

Used to switch between modes.

PROG
/ENT

[PROG / Ent] Key

Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.

[Up] key
[Down] key
[Left] key
[Right] key

Switch between codes or increase or decrease parameter values.
Switch between groups or move the cursor during parameter
setup or modification.

[MULTI] Key

Used to perform special functions, such as user code registration.

ESC

[ESC] Key

Used to cancel an input during parameter setup.
Pressing the [ESC] key before pressing the [PROG / ENT] key reverts
the parameter value to the previously set value.
Pressing the [ESC] key while editing the codes in any function
group makes the keypad display the first code of the function
group.
Pressing the [ESC] key while moving through the modes makes
the keypad display Monitor mode.

HAND

[HAND] Key

Used to switch to HAND (local/manual) operation mode.

OFF

[OFF] Key

Used to switch to OFF (standby) mode or to reset the inverter
faults.

[AUTO] Key

Used to switch to AUTO (remote) operation mode.

MULTI

AUTO

Perform Basic Operations

3.1.2 About the Display
Monitor mode display

Status bar

The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.
No. Name

Description
Displays one of the following inverter modes:
Mon: Monitor mode
PAR: Parameter mode
U&M: User defined and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Config mode

Operation mode

Rotational direction

Displays the motor’s rotational direction: - Fx or Rx.

Command Source /
Frequency reference

Displays a combination of a command source and a
frequency reference.
Command source
K: Keypad
O: Optional Fieldbus module
A: Application option
E: Time event
R: Built-in RS-485 communication
T: Terminal block
Frequency reference source
K: Keypad
V: V1 terminal
I: I2 terminal
P: Pulse terminal
U: Up operation frequency (Up-down operation)
D: Down operation frequency (Up-down operation)
S: Stop operation frequency (Up-down operation)
O: Optional Fieldbus module

Perform Basic Operations

No. Name

Description
J: Jog frequency
R: Built-in RS-485 frequency
1–7: Multi-step frequency

Multi-function key (UserGrp
SelKey) configuration

The multi function key (the [MULTI] key) on the keypad is
used to register or delete User group parameters in
Parameter mode.

Operating status

Displays one of the following operation states:
STP: Stop
FWD: Forward operation
REV: Reverse operation
: Forward command given
: Reverse command given
DC: DC output
WAN: Warning
STL: Stall
SPS: Speed search
OSS: S/W over current protection is on
OSH: H/W overcurrent protection
TUN: Auto tuning
PHT: Pre-heat
FIR: Fire mode operation
SLP: Sleep mode operation
LTS: Load tuning
CAP: Capacity diagnostics
PCL: Pump clean

Status display item

Status bar display item

Monitor mode item 1

Monitor mode display item 1

Monitor mode item 2

Monitor mode display item 2

Monitor mode item 3

Monitor mode display item 3

Monitor mode cursor

Used to highlight currently selected items.

Perform Basic Operations

Parameter edit mode display

The following table lists display icons and their names/functions.
No.

Name

Operation mode

Description
Displays one of the following inverter modes:
Mon: Monitor mode
PAR: Parameter mode
U&M: User defined and Macro mode
TRP: Trip mode
CNF: Config mode

Rotational direction

Displays the motor’s rotational direction: - Fx or Rx.

Parameter group

Displays one of the following parameter group names:
DRV: Drive group
BAS: Basic group
ADV: Advanced group
CON: Control group
IN: Input terminal group
OUT: Output terminal group
COM: Communication group
PID: PID group
EPI: External PID group
AP1: Application 1 group
AP2: Application 2 group
AP3: Application 3 group
PRT: Protection function group
M2: 2nd motor group

Perform Basic Operations

No.

Name

Description

Multi-function key (UserGrp Used to register or delete User group parameters in Parameter
SelKey)configuration
mode.

Operating status

Display item

Displays the value of a monitor display item selected at CNF-20
(Anytime Para).

Parameter value

Displays the parameter value of currently selected code.

Setting range

Displays the value range for the selected parameter.

Set value

Displays the currently set value for the code.

Default

Displays the factory default value for the code.

Code no. and name

Displays the number and name of the currently selected code.

Perform Basic Operations

3.1.3 Display Modes
The H100 inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure different functions. The parameters in
Parameter mode and User & Macro mode are divided into smaller groups of relevant functions.
Press the [MODE] key to navigate between groups

Monitor

Parameter

User &Macro

Config

Trip

MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE

Drive

User

Basic

Macro

Advanced
Control
Input Terminal

In the Parameter group,
press the [LEFT] or [RIGHT]
cursor key to navigate
between different groups.

Output Terminal
Communication
PID
External PID
M O N T/ K N S T P
0. 0Hz
Frequency
0
. 00 Hz

Appilcation 1

MODE

0. 0 A
0 V

[MODE] key

Appilcation 2

ESC

PROG
/ENT

MODE

MULTI

Appilcation 3
HAND

Protection

OFF

AUTO

Cursor keys

Perform Basic Operations

Table of Display Modes
The following table lists the 5 display modes used to control the inverter functions.
Mode Name

Keypad Display

Description

Monitor mode

MON

Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In this
mode, information including the inverter’s frequency
reference, operation frequency, output current, and voltage
may be monitored.

Parameter mode

PAR

Used to configure the functions required to operate the
inverter. These functions are divided into 14 groups based
on purpose and complexity.

U&M

Used to define User groups and Macro groups. These userdefinable groups allow specific functions of the inverter to
be grouped and managed in separate groups.
This mode is not displayed when you navigate through the
modes if no user groups or Macro groups have been
defined.

TRP

Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information,
including the previous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
operation frequency, output current, and output voltage of
the inverter at the time of the fault may be monitored.
This mode is not displayed if the inverter is not at fault and
fault trip history does not exist.

CNF

Used to configure the inverter features that are not directly
related to the operation of the inverter. The settings you
can configure in the Config mode include keypad display
language options, monitor mode environment settings,
communication module display settings, and parameter
duplication and initialization.

User & Macro
mode

Trip mode

Config mode

Perform Basic Operations

Parameter Setting Mode
The following table lists the functions groups under Parameter mode.

Function Group Name

Keypad Display

Description

Drive

DRV

Configures basic operation parameters. These
include jog operation, motor capacity evaluation, and
torque boost.

Basic

BAS

Configures basic operation parameters. These
parameters include motor parameters and multi-step
frequency parameters.

Advanced

ADV

Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns,
frequency limits, energy saving features, and,
regeneration prevention features.

Control

CON

Configures the features related to speed search and KEB
(kinetic energy buffering).

Input Terminal

Configures input terminal–related features, including
digital multi–functional inputs and analog inputs.

Output Terminal

OUT

Configures output terminal–related features, including
digital multi–functional outputs and analog outputs.

Communication

COM

Configures the USB-related features and communication
features for the RS-485, Modbus-RTU, LS Bus, Metasys
N2, and BACnet. Optional communication module
related features may be configured as well, if one is
installed.

PID process

PID

Configures the PID control-related features.

EPID process

EPI

Configures the external PID control-related features.

Application 1

AP1

Configures the Sleep Boost, SoftFill, and Multiple motor
control (MMC) features related to the PID control.

Perform Basic Operations

Function Group Name

Keypad Display

Description

Application 2

AP2

Configures the HVAC features by setting the features
such as load tuning, pump cleaning, and pay back
counter.

Application 3

AP3

Configures the time event-related features.

Protection

PRT

Configures motor and inverter protection features.

Motor 2 (Secondary
motor)

Configures the secondary motor-related features.

Perform Basic Operations

User & Macro Mode
Function Group Name

User

Macro

Keypad Display

Description

USR

Used to put the frequently accessed function
parameters together into a group. User parameter
groups can be configured using the multi-function key
on the keypad.

MCx

Provides different factory-preset groups of functions
based on the type of load.
Groups MC1, MC2, or MC3 is displayed when the user
selects the type of desired load. Macro groups can be
selected in CNF mode.

3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad
The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to select and
configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values to turn specific functions on or off
or decide how the functions will be used. For detailed information on the codes in each function
group, refer to 8 Table of Functions on page 415. Confirm the correct values (or the correct range of
the values), then follow the examples below to configure the inverter with the keypad.

3.2.1 Display Mode Selection
The following figure illustrates how the display modes change when you press the [Mode] button
on the keypad. You can continue to press the [Mode] key until you get to the desired mode.

Perform Basic Operations

User & Macro mode and Trip mode are not displayed when all the inverter settings are set to the
factory default (User & Macro mode must be configured before it is displayed on the keypad, and
Trip mode is displayed only when the inverter is at fault, or has previous trip fault history).
Monitor

Config

Parameter
MODE

[MODE] key

M O N T/ K N S T P
0. 0Hz
Frequency
0
. 00 Hz

0. 0 A
0 V

ESC

PROG
/ENT

MODE

MULTI

HAND

Trip

OFF

AUTO

User &Macro

3.2.2 Operation Modes
The inverter is operable only when it is in HAND or AUTO mode. HAND mode is for local control
using the keypad, while AUTO mode is for remote control via communication. On the other hand,
the inverter stops operating when it is in OFF mode. Select one of the modes (HAND / AUTO / OFF)
to operate the inverter or stop the operation.
Follow the examples below to learn how to switch between operation modes.
Operating the Inverter in HAND mode
1

Turn on the inverter. The inverter enters OFF mode and the OFF LED turns on.

Move to Parameter mode and set DRV-07 (frequency reference) to ‘0 (keypad)’.

Press the [HAND] key to enter HAND mode (local control mode). HAND mode LED turns on
(the OFF LED turns off) and the inverter begins to operate.

Press the [OFF] key to stop the inverter operation. The inverter stops operating and the OFF
LED turns on.

Perform Basic Operations

Operating the inverter in AUTO Mode
1

In OFF mode (when the OFF LED is on), move to Parameter mode and configure the
command source at DRV-07 (frequency reference source).

Press the [AUTO] key to enter AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, the inverter operates based on the
input from the command source set at DRV-07. For example, if DRV-07 (frequency reference
source) is set to ‘0 (Keypad)’, the frequency reference is set, and the run command is set to ‘ON’,
the inverter starts operating as soon as the [AUTO] key on the keypad is pressed.

Press the [Auto] key again to stop the inverter operation using the keypad. In AUTO mode,
the inverter begins or stops operating when the [AUTO] key is pressed.

Note
•

You can stop the inverter operation by pressing the [OFF] key when the command source is set to
‘Keypad.’ In this case, however, the inverter enters OFF mode from AUTO mode.

•

If the network communication is set as the command source, the inverter is operable only in
AUTO mode. For example, if the run command is set to ‘ON’ via the network communication and
the inverter is in OFF mode, the [AUTO] key must be pressed to start the inverter operation.

•

The inverter is operable only in HAND and AUTO modes, but the Fire mode functions operate
even when the inverter is in OFF mode.

Perform Basic Operations

3.2.3 Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode
After entering Parameter mode from Monitor mode, press the [Right] key to move to the next
code. Press the [Left] key to go back to the previous code.
The keypad OFF LED is turned OFF, and the keypad displays
Monitor mode.
•

Press the [Mode] key to change the mode.

Parameter mode is displayed.

•

The Drive group is currently selected.

•

Press the [Right] key.

•

The Basic group is selected.

•

Press the [Right] key.

•

The Advanced group is selected.

•

Press the [Right] key 9 times.

•

The Protection group is selected.

•

Press the [Right] key.

Perform Basic Operations

•

The Drive group is selected again.

3.2.4 Switching between Groups in User & Macro Mode
User & Macro mode is accessible only when the user codes are registered or when the macro
features are selected. Refer to 8.16 Macro Groups on page 516 for details about user code
registration or macro group selection. After registering the user codes, or selecting a macro group,
follow the examples below to access the User & Macro group.
•

Monitor mode is displayed on the keypad.

•

Press the [MODE] key twice.

•

User (USR) group in User & Macro mode is displayed.

•

Press the [Right] key.

•

The Macro (MC2) group in User & Macro mode is
displayed.

•

Press the [Right] key.

Perform Basic Operations

•

User (USR) group in User & Macro mode is displayed
again.

3.2.5 Navigating through the Codes (Functions)
Code Navigation in Monitor mode
The display items in Monitor mode are available only when the inverter is in AUTO mode. In
Monitor mode, press the [Up] or [Down] key to move the cursor up or down. Different values, such
as the operating frequency, the output current, or voltage are displayed according to the cursor
position. The cursor does not move up or down in HAND mode or in OFF mode.

•

In AUTO mode, the cursor appears to the left of the
frequency information.

•

Press the [Down] key.

•

Information about the second item in Monitor mode
(Output Current) is displayed.

•

Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.

•

Information about the second item in Monitor mode
(Output Current) disappears and the cursor reappears
to the left of the second item.

•

Press the [Down] key.

Perform Basic Operations

•

Information about the third item in Monitor mode
(Output Voltage) is displayed.

•

Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.

•

Information about the third item in Monitor mode
(Output Voltage) disappears and the cursor appears to
the left of the third item.

•

Press the [Up] key twice.

•

Information about the first item in Monitor mode
(Frequency) is displayed.

•

Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.

•

Information about the first item in Monitor mode
(Frequency) disappears and the cursor appears to the
left of the first item.

•

Press the [Up] or [Down] key to move to a desired item
and view the information.

Perform Basic Operations

Code Navigation in Parameter mode
The following examples show you how to move through codes in different function groups (Drive
group and Basic group) in Parameter mode. In Parameter mode, press the [Up] or [Down] key to
move to the desired functions.
•

Display turns on when the inverter is powered on.
Monitoring mode is displayed.

•

Press the [MODE] key.

•

Drive group (DRV) in Parameter mode is displayed. The
first code in the Drive group (DRV 00 Jump Code) is
currently selected.

•

If any other group is displayed, press the [MODE] key until
the Drive group is displayed, or press the [ESC] key.

•

Press the [Down] key to move to the second code (DRV
01) of the Drive group.

•

Press the [Right] key to move to the next function group.

•

The Basic group (BAS) is displayed.

•

Press the [Up] or [Down] key to move to the desired
codes and configure the inverter functions.

3.2.6 Navigating Directly to Different Codes
Parameter mode, User & Macro mode, and Config mode allow direct jumps to specific codes. The
code used for this feature is called the Jump Code. The Jump Code is the first code of each mode.
The Jump Code feature is convenient when navigating for a code in a function group that has
many codes.

Perform Basic Operations

The following example shows how to navigate directly to code DRV- 09 from the initial code (DRV00 Jump Code) in the Drive group.
•

The Drive group (DRV) is displayed in Parameter mode.
Make sure that the fist code in the Drive group (DRV 00
Jump Code) is currently selected.

•

Press the [PROG/ENT] key.

•

The Code input screen is displayed and the cursor
flashes. A flashing cursor indicates that it is waiting for
user input.

•

Press the [Up] key to increase the number to 16, and
then press the [PROG/ENT] key to jump to code DRV-16.

•

DRV-16 (Fwd boost) is displayed.

•

Press the [MODE] key to view the options available and
use the [Up] or [Down] key to move to a desired option.

•

Press the [PROG/ENT] key to save the selection.

•

The setting is saved and the code is displayed again.

•

Press the ESC key to go back to the initial code of the
Drive group (DRV-00).

Perform Basic Operations

3.2.7 Parameter Settings available in Monitor Mode
The H100 inverter allows basic parameters, such as the frequency reference, to be modified in
Monitor mode. When the inverter is in Hand or OFF mode, the frequency reference can be entered
directly from the monitor screen. When the inverter is in AUTO mode, press the [PROG/ENT] key to
access the input screen for a frequency reference.

Parameter setting in HAND/OFF mode

•

Ensure that the cursor is at the frequency reference item.
If not, move the cursor to the frequency reference item.

•

When the cursor is at the frequency reference item,
detailed information is displayed and the cursor flashes
at the input line. A flashing cursor indicates that it is
waiting for user input.

•

Press the [Left] or [Right] key to change places.

•

Press the [Up] or [Down] keys to increase or decrease
the numbers, and then press the [Prog/ENT] key to save
the change.

Perform Basic Operations

Parameter setting in AUTO mode
•

Ensure that the cursor is at the frequency reference item.
If not, move the cursor to the frequency reference item.

•

While the cursor is at the frequency reference monitor
item, press the [PROG/ENT] key to edit the frequency
reference.

•

Detailed information is displayed and the cursor flashes at
the input line. A flashing cursor indicates that it is waiting
for user input.

•

Press the [Left] or [Right] key to move the cursor.

•

Press the [Up] or [Down] key to increase or decrease the
numbers.

•

When you are done changing the frequency reference,
press [PROG/ENT] key to finish setting the parameters.

•

The newly entered frequency reference is displayed.

3.2.8 Setting the Monitor Display Items
In Monitor mode, 3 different items may be monitored at once. Certain monitor items, such as the
frequency reference, are selectable. The display items to be displayed on the screen can be
selected by the user in the Config (CNF) mode. However, in HAND mode or in OFF mode, the first
display item is permanently fixed as the frequency reference. On the topright
73

Perform Basic Operations

corner of the keypad display’s status bar, another frequency item is displayed. This item refers to
the frequency reference when the inverter is not operating and the output frequency when the
inverter is operating.
The following example shows how to configure the display items in HAND mode.

•

Monitor mode is displayed on the keypad. The output
frequency, output current, and output voltage are
displayed (factory default).

•

Go to the Config (CNF) mode. In the Config mode, codes
CNF-21–23 are used to select the three monitoring
display items. The currently selected display item and its
setting are highlighted.

•

To view the available display items and change the
setting for the third monitoring display item, press the
[Down] key to move to CNF-23 and press the [PROG/ENT]
key.

•

The currently selected display item for CNF-23 (Monitor
Line–3) is ‘Output Voltage.’

•

Press the [Up] or [Down] key to view the available display
items.

•

Move to ‘4 Output Power’ and press the [PROG/ENT] key
to change the setting.

•

Press the [MODE] key to go back to Monitor mode. The
third display item has been changed to the inverter
output power (kW).

Perform Basic Operations

3.2.9 Selecting the Status Bar Display Items
On the top-right corner of the display, there is a monitoring display item. This monitoring item is
displayed as long as the inverter is turned on, regardless of the mode the inverter is operating in.
Configure this monitoring item to display the type of information that suits your needs.
This item can be configured only when the inverter is operating in AUTO mode. In HAND or OFF
mode, this monitoring item displays frequency reference only.
The following example shows how to configure this monitoring item in AUTO mode.
•

Monitor mode is displayed.

•

On the top-right edge of the display, the frequency
reference is displayed (factory default).

•

Enter Config mode and go to CNF-20 to select the items
to display.

•

Press the [PROG/ENT] key. The currently selected item is
highlighted.

Perform Basic Operations

•

Press the [Down] key twice to move to ‘2 (Output
Current)’, and then press the [PROG/ENT] key to select it.

•

The currently selected item is highlighted at CNF- 20 (the
display item is changed from ‘Frequency’ to ‘Output
Current’).

•

Press the [MODE] key to return to Monitor mode.

Perform Basic Operations

3.3 Fault Monitoring
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation
The following example shows how to monitor faults that occurred during inverter operation.
•

If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the inverter
enters Trip mode automatically and displays the type of
fault trip that occurred.

•

Press the [Down] key to view the information on the
inverter at the time of fault, including the output
frequency, output current, and operation type.

•

If there were any fault trips that occurred previously, press
the [Right] key to display the fault trip information at the
times of previous fault trips.

•

When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is released,
the keypad display returns to the screen it was at when
the fault trip occurred.

Perform Basic Operations

3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips
The following example shows how to monitor multiple faults that occur at the same time.

•

If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, the number
of fault trips occurred is displayed on the right side of
the fault trip type.

•

Press the [PROG/ENT] key to view the list of all the fault
trips.

•

The list of all the fault trips is displayed.

•

Press the [Down] key to view the types of fault trips that
occurred.

•

Press the [Right] key to display the fault trip information.

•

When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is released,
the keypad display returns to the screen it was at when
the fault trip occurred.

Perform Basic Operations

3.4 Parameter Initialization
The following example demonstrates how to revert all the parameter settings back to the factory
default (Parameter Initialization). Parameter initialization may be performed for separate groups in
Parameter mode as well.
•

Monitor mode is displayed.

•

Press the [MODE] key to move to the Config (CNF)
mode.

•

Press the [Down] key to go to CNF-40 (Parameter Init).

•

Press the [PROG/ENT] key to configure the parameter
initialization options.

•

In the list of options, select ‘1(All Grp),’ and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key to perform parameter initialization.

•

The parameter initialization option is displayed again
when the initialization is complete.

Learning Basic Features

4 Learning Basic Features
This chapter describes the basic features of the H100 inverter. Check the reference page in the
table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Basic Tasks

Description

Ref.

Operation mode selection
(HAND / AUTO / OFF)

Used to select the operation mode.

p.83

Frequency reference source
configuration for the keypad

Configures the inverter to allow you to setup or modify a
frequency reference using the Keypad.

p.88

Frequency reference source
configuration for the
terminal block (input
voltage)

Configures the inverter to allow input voltages at the
terminal block (V1, V2) and to setup or modify a frequency
reference.

p.89
p.99

Frequency reference source
configuration for the
terminal block (input
current)

Configures the inverter to allow input currents at the
terminal block (I2) and to setup or modify a frequency
reference.

p.96

Frequency reference source
configuration for the
terminal block (input pulse)

Configures the inverter to allow input pulse at the terminal
p.100
block (TI) and to setup or modify a frequency reference.

Frequency reference source
configuration for RS-485
communication

Configures the inverter to allow communication signals
from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs, and to
setup or modify a frequency reference.

p.102

Frequency control using
analog inputs

Enables the user to hold a frequency using analog inputs
at terminals.

p.102

Motor operation display
options

Configures the display of motor operation values. Motor
operation is displayed either in frequency (Hz) or speed
(rpm).

p.102

Multi-step speed (frequency) Configures multi-step frequency operations by receiving
configuration
an input at the terminals defined for each step frequency.

p.104

Command source
configuration for keypad
buttons

Command source configuration for keypad buttons.

p.106

Command source
configuration for terminal

Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the FX/RX
terminals.

p.107

Learning Basic Features

Basic Tasks

Description

Ref.

Command source
configuration for RS-485
communication

Configures the inverter to accept communication signals
from upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs.

p.109

Motor rotation control

Configures the inverter to limit a motor’s rotation direction. p.109

block inputs

Configures the inverter to start operating at power-on.
With this configuration, the inverter begins to run and the
Automatic start-up at power- motor accelerates as soon as power is supplied to the
on
inverter. To use automatic start-up configuration, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block must
be turned on.

p.111

Automatic restart after reset
of a fault trip condition

Configures the inverter to start operating when the
inverter is reset following a fault trip. In this configuration,
the inverter starts to run and the motor accelerates as soon
as the inverter is reset following a fault trip condition.
p.113
For automatic start-up configuration to work, the
operation command terminals at the terminal block must
be turned on.

Acc/Dec time configuration
based on the Max.
Frequency

Configures the acceleration and deceleration times for a
motor based on a defined maximum frequency.

Acc/Dec time configuration
based on the frequency
reference

Configures acceleration and deceleration times for a motor
p.117
based on a defined frequency reference.

Multi-stage Acc/Dec time
configuration using the
multi-function terminal

Configures multi-stage acceleration and deceleration
times for a motor based on defined parameters for the
multi-function terminals.

p.118

Acc/Dec time transition
speed (frequency)
configuration

Enables modification of acceleration and deceleration
gradients without configuring the multi-functional
terminals.

p.120

Acc/Dec pattern
configuration

Enables modification of the acceleration and deceleration
gradient patterns. Basic patterns to choose from include
linear and S-curve patterns.

p.121

Acc/Dec stop command

Stops the current acceleration or deceleration and controls
motor operation at a constant speed. Multi-function
p.123
terminals must be configured for this command.

p.114

Learning Basic Features

Basic Tasks

Description

Ref.

Linear V/F pattern operation

Configures the inverter to run a motor at a constant
torque. To maintain the required torque, the operating
frequency may vary during operation.

p.125

Configures the inverter to run the motor at a square
Square reduction V/F pattern
reduction V/F pattern. Fans and pumps are appropriate
operation
loads for square reduction V/F operation.

p.126

User V/F pattern
configuration

Enables the user to configure a V/F pattern to match the
characteristics of a motor. This configuration is for specialpurpose motor applications to achieve optimal
performance.

p.127

Manual torque boost

Manual configuration of the inverter to produce a
momentary torque boost. This configuration is for loads
that require a large amount of starting torque, such as
elevators or lifts.

p.129

Automatic torque boost

Automatic configuration of the inverter that
provides ”auto tuning” that produces a momentary torque
boost. This configuration is for loads that require a large
amount of starting torque, such as elevators or lifts.

p.130

Output voltage adjustment

Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the power
supply to the inverter differs from the motor’s rated input
voltage.

p.131

Accelerating start

Accelerating start is the general way to start motor
operation. The typical application configures the motor to
accelerate to a target frequency in response to a run
command, however there may be other start or
acceleration conditions defined.

p.132

Start after DC braking

Configures the inverter to perform DC braking before the
motor starts rotating again. This configuration is used
when the motor will be rotating before the voltage is
supplied from the inverter.

p.132

Deceleration stop

Deceleration stop is the typical method used to stop a
motor. The motor decelerates to 0 Hz and stops on a stop
command, however there may be other stop or
deceleration conditions defined.

p.133

Stopping by DC braking

Configures the inverter to apply DC braking during motor
deceleration. The frequency at which DC braking occurs
p.134
must be defined and during deceleration, when the motor

Learning Basic Features

Basic Tasks

Description

Ref.

reaches the defined frequency, DC braking is applied.
Free-run stop

Configures the inverter to stop output to the motor using
a stop command. The motor will free-run until it slows
down and stops.

p.135

Power braking

Configures the inverter to provide optimal, motor
deceleration, without tripping over-voltage protection.

p.136

Start/maximum frequency
configuration

Configures the frequency reference limits by defining a
start frequency and a maximum frequency.

p.137

Upper/lower frequency limit
configuration

Configures the frequency reference limits by defining an
upper limit and a lower limit.

p.137

Frequency jump

Configures the inverter to avoid running a motor in
mechanically resonating frequencies.

p.140

2nd Operation Configuration

Used to configure the 2nd operation mode and switch
between operation modes according to your
requirements.

p.141

Multi-function input
terminal control
configuration

Enables the user to improve the responsiveness of the
multi-function input terminals.

p.142

4.1 Switching between the Operation Modes (HAND /
AUTO / OFF)
The H100 series inverters have two operation modes–the HAND and AUTO modes. HAND mode is
used for local control using the keypad. AUTO mode is used for remote control using the terminal
inputs or networks commands (the keypad may still be used in AUTO mode if the command
source is set as ‘keypad’).

HAND Mode Operation
Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in HAND mode.
1

On the keypad, use the [Up], [Down], [Left], or [Right] keys to set the frequency reference.

Press the [HAND] key. The HAND LED turns on and the inverter starts operating in HAND
mode.
83

Learning Basic Features

Press the [OFF] key. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.

AUTO Mode Operation
Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in AUTO mode.
1

Press the [AUTO] key to switch to AUTO mode.

Operate the inverter using the terminal block input, commands via communication, or
keypad input.

Press the [OFF] key. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.

Mode Keys and LED Status
Keys / LED

Description

HAND

Used to enter the HAND operation mode.

OFF

Used to enter the OFF mode (standby mode) or to reset fault trips.

AUTO

HAND LED
OFF LED
AUTO LED

Used to enter the AUTO operation mode or to start or stop inverter operation in
AUTO mode.
Turns on green (steady) during HAND mode operation.
Turns on red (steady) while the inverter is in OFF mode (standby), and flashes then
a fault trip occurs. The LED turns on red (steady) again when the fault trip condition
is released.
Turns on green (steady) when the inverter operates in Auto mode, and flashes
green when the inverter is in AUTO mode, but is not operating.

Learning Basic Features

Basic HAND/AUTO/OFF Mode Operations
Mode

Description
In HAND mode, operation is available only by the keypad input. In Monitor
mode, the currently set frequency reference is displayed at all times.
Also, in HAND mode:

HAND Mode
(Locally
controlled
operation mode)

OFF Mode
(Standby)

AUTO Mode
(Remotely
controlled
operation mode)

•

The first monitoring item is used to adjust the frequency with the up/down
and left/right keys. The set frequency is reflected in DRV-02 (HAND Cmd
Freq).

•

The motor’s rotation direction can be set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).

•

Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX, External
Trip, and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal functions).

•

Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).

•

The following advanced features are not available:
PID / EPID control
Flow compensation
Pump clean
Load tuning
Motor preheating
Time scheduling
PowerOn resume
Multiple motor control

•

Inverter monitoring and protection features are available in HAND mode.

In OFF mode, the inverter operation stops. Pressing the OFF key during
HAND/AUTO mode operations will cause the OFF LED to turn on. Then, the
inverter stops operating or decelerates and stops, according to the deceleration
options set by the user.
Also, in AUTO mode:
•

Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX, External
Trip and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal functions).

•

Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).

In AUTO mode, the inverter operates based on the command from the
command source set at DRV-06 (Cmd Source), with the frequency reference from
the source set at DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src).

Learning Basic Features

Function Codes related to HAND/AUTO/OFF Operation Modes
Codes / Functions

Description

DRV-01
Cmd Frequency

Frequency reference in AUTO mode when DRV-07 is set to’ KeyPad’.

DRV-02
KeyPad Run Dir

Rotation direction of the keypad command in the HAND or AUTO mode.
Settings
Description
0
Forward
Fx operation
1
Reverse
Rx operation

DRV-05
KPD H.O.A Lock

To make HAND-OFF-AUTO enabled/disabled
Settings
Description
0 Locked
To make HAND-OFF-AUTO disabled and turn Auto mode
1 During
If [DRV-06 Cmd Source] is Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2, Int485 or fieldbus,
Run
HAND-OFF-AUTO is enabled only during working
3 Unlocked To make HAND-OFF-AUTO enabled

DRV-25
HAND Cmd Freq

Frequency displayed at the monitor display item (Monitor Line-1) when the
HAND key is pressed in other modes (default frequency reference for HAND
mode).

OUT-31–36
Relay 1–5

Set AUTO State (36) to ensure that the inverter is in AUTO mode.

OUT-31–36
Relay 1–5

Set HAND State (37) to ensure that the inverter is in HAND mode.

Switching between the HAND/AUTO/OFF Modes
1
AUTO

HAND

2
6

5
OFF

Mode

Description

AUTOHAND

Press the HAND key in AUTO mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
operates as follows based on the setting at DRV-26 (Hand Ref Mode).
Settings
Description
0 Hand
The inverter operates based on the operation direction set
Parameter
at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir) and the frequency reference

Learning Basic Features

Mode

Description
1

Follow Auto

set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
The inverter takes over the operation direction and the
frequency reference from the settings for AUTO mode and
keeps performing the same operation. If the inverter was
stopped in AUTO mode, the operation direction is set as Fx
and the frequency reference is set as 0 (no inverter output).

2HANDAUTO

Press the AUTO key in HAND mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings set at
DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’ press the AUTO key
once again to start inverter operation.

3AUTOOFF

Press the OFF key in AUTO mode to stop the inverter operation (the inverter
enters OFF mode).

4OFFAUTO

Press the AUTO key in OFF mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter operates
based on the command source and frequency reference settings set at DRV-06
and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’ press the AUTO key once
again to start inverter operation.

5HANDOFF

Press the OFF key in HAND mode to stop the inverter operation (the inverter
enters OFF mode).

6OFFHAND

Press the HAND key in OFF mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter operates
based on the operation direction set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir) and the
frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).

Operation Mode at Power Recovery
If a power interruption occurs during inverter operation in the OFF or HAND mode, the inverter
halts the operation with low voltage fault trip. Then, when the power is recovered, the inverter
turns on in OFF mode.
If the inverter was operating in AUTO mode at the time of the low voltage trip following the power
interruption, the inverter turns on in AUTO mode, and the operation may vary depending on the
inverter’s ‘PowerOn Resume’ and ‘Power-on run’ settings.
Note
•

To operate the inverter using the keypad in AUTO mode, set DRV-06 (CMD Source) to
‘KeyPad’ and press the AUTO key to enter AUTO mode. Then, press the AUTO key on the
keypad once again to start the inverter operation.

•

If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can be
reset by pressing the OFF key. After the reset, the fault trip is released and the inverter enters
87

Learning Basic Features

OFF mode.
•

If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can be
reset using the reset signal from the multi-function input terminal as well. In this case, the
inverter turns back on in AUTO mode after the fault trip is released.

Use caution when the inverter is set to operate in AUTO mode by commands over
communication, and if COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘yes’, as the motor will begin rotating
when the inverter starts up, without additional run commands.

4.2 Setting Frequency Reference
The H100 inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency reference for an
operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1, V2) and current (I2) signals], or RS485 (digital signals from higher-level controllers, such as PC or PLC) can be used.
Group

DRV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Frequency
Freq Ref Src
reference source

Parameter Setting

KeyPad-1

KeyPad-2

Int 485

Field Bus

Pulse

10*

Setting Range

0–11

* ‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.

Unit

Learning Basic Features

4.2.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)
You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by pressing the
[ENT/PROG] key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’. Input the
frequency reference for an operation at DRV-01 (Frequency reference).
Group Code Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Cmd Frequency

0.00

0.00, Low
Freq– High
Freq*

Frequency
reference

Frequency
Freq Ref Src
reference source

DRV

KeyPad-1 0–11

* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV20.

4.2.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)
You can use the [UP] and [DOWN] cursor keys to modify a frequency reference. To use this as a
second option, set the keypad as the source of the frequency reference, by going to DRV-07
(Frequency reference source) and change the parameter value to ‘1 (Keypad-2)’. This allows
frequency reference values to be increased or decreased by pressing the [UP] and [DOWN] cursor
keys.
Group Code

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

Frequency
Freq Ref
reference source Src

Frequency
reference

0.00

DRV

Setting Range

KeyPad-2 0–11
0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq*

Unit
Hz

*You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV20.

4.2.3 V1 Terminal as the Source
You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1
89

Learning Basic Features

terminal. Use voltage inputs ranging from 0–10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Use
voltage inputs ranging from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative voltage
inputs are used in reverse operations.

4.2.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input
Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (unipolar)’. Use a voltage output from an external source or use the
voltage output from the VR terminal to provide inputs to V1. Refer to the diagrams below for the
wiring required for each application.
VR
V1
CM

V1
CM

[External source application]

[Internal source (VR) application]

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency reference
source

Freq Ref Src

0–11

Frequency at
maximum analog
input

Freq at
100%

Maximum
frequency

0.00–
Max.
Frequency

V1 input monitor

V1
Monitor[V]

0.00

0.00–12.00

V1 polarity options

V1 Polarity

0–1

V1 input filter time
constant

V1 Filter

0–10000

msec

V1 minimum input
voltage

V1 volt x1

0.00

0.00–10.00

V1 output at
minimum voltage
(%)

V1 Perc y1

0.00

0.00–100.00

V1 maximum input
voltage

V1 Volt x2

10.00

0 .00– 12.00

V1 output at
maximum voltage

V1 Perc y2

100.00

0–100

Unipolar

Learning Basic Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting Range

Unit

0–1

0.00*, 0.04–
10.00

(%)
16

Rotation direction
options

V1 Inverting

V1 Quantizing level

V1
Quantizing

0.04

* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

Code

Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set with
code IN-01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in code IN-11
(or IN-15) is 100 (%).

IN-01 Freq at 100%

•

Set code IN-01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes IN-02–IN-16. Motor
will run at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.

•

Set code IN-11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes IN-01–IN-16. Motor
will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum frequency–60 Hz) when
a 10 V input is provided at V1.

IN-05 V1 Monitor[V] Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations between reference
frequencies. Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant, but
this requires an increased response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach 63% of
the reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple steps.
V1 input from
external source
IN-07
V1 Filter

Frequency
100%
63%

V1 Filter(t)
[V1 Filter ]

Learning Basic Features

These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset values of
the Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.

IN-08 V1 volt x1–
IN-11 V1 Perc y2

IN-16 V1 Inverting

Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to ‘1 (Yes)’ if you need the motor to
run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input (V1
terminal) signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system, because it
suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish system
sensitivity (resultant power of the output frequency will decrease based on the
analog input).
You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code IN-07 to reduce the noise, but
increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause pulsations
(ripples) in the output frequency.

Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the maximum
input. Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the analog maximum input (60 Hz),
IN-17 V1 Quantizing
the output frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6 Hz per 0.1 V difference.
When the analog input is increased, an increase to the input equal to 75% of the
set value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency will increase
according to the set value. Likewise, when the analog input decreases, a
decrease in the input equal to 75% of the set value will make an initial change to
the output frequency.
As a result, the output frequency will be different at acceleration and
deceleration, mitigating the effect of analog input changes over the output
frequency.
(ripple)

Learning Basic Features

[V1 Quantizing]

0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details

Learning Basic Features

4.2.3.3 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–+10 V Input
Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘2 (V1)’, and then set IN- 06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘1 (bipolar)’.
Use the output voltage from an external source to provide input to V1.
V1
CM
[V1 terminal wiring]

[Bipolar input voltage and output frequency]
Group Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency reference
source

Freq Ref Src

0–11

Frequency at
maximum analog
input

Freq at 100%

60.00

0– Max
Frequency

V1 input monitor

V1 Monitor

0.00

-12.00–12.00 V

V1 polarity options

V1 Polarity

0–1

V1 minimum input
voltage

V1- volt x1

0.00

-10.00–0.00 V

V1 output at
V1- Perc y1
minimum voltage (%)

0.00

-100.00–
0.00%

V1 maximum input
voltage

-10.00

-12.00 –0.00 V

V1- Volt x2

Bipolar

Learning Basic Features

Group Code
15

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

V1 output at
maximum voltage
(%)

V1- Perc y2

-100.00

-100.00–
0.00%

Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs
Input voltage

Command /
Voltage Input

0–10 V

-10–0 V

FWD

Forward

Reverse

REV

Reverse

Forward

-10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details
Code

Description
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in relation to
the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when IN-06 is set to ‘1
(bipolar)’.
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with 10%
output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80% output ratio
respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6–48 Hz.
For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions IN-08

IN-12 V1- volt x1–
IN-15 V1- Perc y2

V1 volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2 on page 92.

Learning Basic Features

4.2.3.4 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2)
You can set and modify a frequency reference using input current at the I2 terminal after selecting
current input at SW4. Set DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to ‘5 (I2)’ and apply 0–20 mA input
current to I2.
Group Code Name
DRV

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0–11

Frequency reference
source

Freq Ref Src

Frequency at
maximum analog
input

Freq at 100% 60.00

0–Maximum
Frequency

I2 input monitor

I2 Monitor

0.00

0.00–24.00

I2 input filter time
constant

I2 Filter

0–10000

I2 minimum input
current

I2 Curr x1

4.00

0.00–20.00

I2 output at minimum
I2 Perc y1
current (%)

0.00

0–100

I2 maximum input
current

20.00

0.00–24.00

I2 output at
I2 Perc y2
maximum current (%)

100.00

0.00–100.00

I2 rotation direction
options

I2 Inverting

0–1

I2 Quantizing level

I2 Quantizing 0.04

0.00*, 0.04–
10.00

I2 Curr x2

* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

Learning Basic Features

Input Current (I2) Setting Details
Code

Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current
(when IN-55 is set to 100%).

IN-01 Freq at
100%

•

If IN-01 is set to 40.00, and default settings are used for IN-53–56, 20 mA
input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.

•

If IN-56 is set to 50.00, and default settings are used for IN-01 (60 Hz) and
IN-53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency
reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).

IN-50 I2 Monitor

Used to monitor input current at I2.

IN-52 I2 Filter

Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.

IN-53 I2 Curr x1–
IN-56 I2 Perc y2

[Gradient and off-set configuration based on output frequency]

Learning Basic Features

4.2.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2)
Set and modify a frequency reference using input voltage at I2 (V2) terminal by setting SW2 to V2.
Set the DRV-07 (Frequency reference source) to 4 (V2) and apply 0–12 V input voltage to I2 (=V2,
Analog current/voltage input terminal). Codes IN-35–47 will not be displayed when I2 is set to
receive current input (DRV-07 is set to ‘5’).
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency
reference source

Freq Ref Src

0–11

V2 input display

V2 Monitor

0.00

0.00–12.00

V2 input filter time
constant

V2 Filter

0–10000

msec

Minimum V2 input
voltage

V2 Volt x1

0.00

0.00–10.00

Output% at
minimum V2
voltage

V2 Perc y1

0.00

0.00–100.00

Maximum V2 input
voltage

V2 Volt x2

10.00

0.00–10.00

Output% at
maximum V2
voltage

V2 Perc y2

100.00

0.00–100.00

Invert V2 rotational
direction

V2 Inverting

0–1

V2 quantizing level

V2
Quantizing

0.04

0.00*, 0.04–10.00

* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

Learning Basic Features

4.2.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input
Set a frequency reference by setting the Frq (Frequency reference source) code (code 07) in DRV
group to 9 (Pulse) and provide 0–32.00 kHz pulse frequency to TI terminal.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency
reference source

Freq Ref Src

0–11

Frequency at
maximum analog
input

Freq at
100%

60.00

0.00–
Maximum
frequency

Pulse input display

TI Monitor

0.00

0.00–50.00

kHz

TI input filter time
constant

TI Filter

0–9999

mse
c

TI input minimum
pulse

TI Pls x1

0.00

0.00–32.00

kHz

Output% at TI
minimum pulse

TI Perc y1

0.00

0.00–100.00

TI Input maximum
pulse

TI Pls x2

32.00

0.00–32.00

kHz

Output% at TI
maximum pulse

TI Perc y2

100.00

0.00–100.00

Invert TI direction of
TI Inverting
rotation

0–1

TI quantizing level

0.00*, 0.04–
10.00

*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

100

TI
Quantizing

0
0.04

Pulse

Learning Basic Features

TI Pulse Input Setting Details
Code

Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The
frequency reference is based on 100% of the value set with IN-96.

IN-01 Freq at 100%

•

If IN-01 is set to 40.00 and codes IN-93–96 are set at default, 32 kHz
input to TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.

•

If IN-96 is set to 50.00 and codes IN-01, IN-93–95 are set at default, 32
kHz input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference of 30.00 Hz.

IN-91 TI Monitor

Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.

IN-92 TI Filter

Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal frequency
(when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.

IN-93 TI Pls x1–
IN-96 TI Perc y2

IN-97 TI Inverting–
IN-98 TI Quantizing

Identical to IN-16–17 (refer to IN-16 V1 Inverting/IN-17 V1 Quantizing on
page 92)

101

Learning Basic Features

4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication
Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485 communication.
Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code (code 07) in the DRV group to 6 (Int 485) and use
the RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-/SG) for communication. Refer to 7 RS-485
Communication features on page 354.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency reference
source

Freq Ref Src

Int 485

0–11

Integrated RS-485
communication
inverter ID

Int485 St ID

1–MaxComID* -

ModBus RTU

LS Inv 485

BACnet

Metasys-N2

6**

Modbus
Master

9600 bps

D8/PN/S1

D8/PN/S2

D8/PE/S1

D8/PO/S1

Integrated
communication
protocol

Int485 Proto

COM

Integrated
communication speed

Integrated
communication frame
configuration

Int485
BaudR

Int485 Mode

0–6

0–8

0–3

*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet), MaxComID is
‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
** COM-02 is automatically set to ‘6(Modbus Master)’ when AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’. Otherwise a
user can set the parameter value at user’s choice.
102

Learning Basic Features

4.3 Frequency Hold by Analog Input
If you set a frequency reference via analog input at the control terminal block, you can hold the
operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the analog frequency
hold terminal. The operation frequency will be fixed upon an analog input signal.
Group Code Name

DRV

Frequency reference
source

LCD Display

Freq Ref Src

Parameter Setting
0

Keypad-1

Keypad-2

Int 485

Fied Bus

Pulse

Setting
Range

Unit

0–11

0–55

10* V3

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define(Px:
P1–P7)

Analog
Hold

*‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.

Frequency reference
Operating frequency
Px
Run command

103

Learning Basic Features

4.4 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔
↔Rpm)
You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting DRV- 21
(Speed unit selection) to 0 (Hz Display) or 1 (Rpm Display).
Group Code

Name

LCD Display

DRV

Speed unit
selection

Hz/Rpm Sel

Parameter Setting
0

Hz Display

Rpm Display

Setting Range

Unit

0–1

4.5 Setting Multi-step Frequency
Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies) to the Px
terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set at DRV-07. Px terminal parameter values
7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9 (Speed-H) are recognized as binary commands and work in
combination with Fx or Rx run commands. The inverter operates according to the frequencies set
with BAS-50–56 (multi-step frequency 1–7) and the binary command combinations.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting Range

BAS

50–56

Multi-step
frequency 1–7

Step Freq - 1–7

Px terminal
65–71
configuration

Px Define(Px: P1–
P7)

IN
89

104

Multi-step
command delay
time

InCheck Time

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq*

Speed-L

Speed-M

Speed-H

Unit
Hz
-

0–55

1–5000

Learning Basic Features

Multi-step Frequency Setting Details
Code

Description

BAS Group 50–56 Configure multi-step frequency 1–7.
Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set the relevant
codes (IN-65–71) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), or 9 (Speed-H).
Provided that terminals P5, P6, and P7 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-M and
Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be available.

IN-65–71 Px
Define

[An example of a multi-step operation]
Speed
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

IN-89 InCheck
Time

Fx/Rx

Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block inputs
after receiving an input signal.
After adjusting IN-89 to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P6, the inverter
will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before proceeding to
accelerate or decelerate based on the configuration at P6.

105

Learning Basic Features

4.6 Command Source Configuration
Various devices can be selected as command input devices for the H100 inverter. Input devices
available to select include keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485 communication and field
bus adapter.
Group

DRV

Code

Name

Command
Source

LCD Display

Cmd Source

Parameter Setting
0

Keypad

Fx/Rx-1

Fx/Rx-2

Int 485

Field Bus

Time Event

Setting Range

Unit

0–5

4.6.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device
To use the keypad as the command source, press the [AUTO] key to enter AUTO mode. Set DRV-06
to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to select the keypad as the command source and set the operation direction at
DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).
Since the keypad is now the command source, operation starts when the AUTO key is pressed,
and it stops when the AUTO key is pressed again.
The OFF key may be used to stop the operation as well, but the inverter operation mode will be
changed to OFF mode.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Command source

Cmd Source

0–5

106

KeyPad

Learning Basic Features

4.6.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev run
commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by setting
DRV-06 (command source) in the Drive group to ‘1 (Fx/Rx)’. Select 2 terminals for the forward and
reverse operations, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 7 multi-function terminal codes, IN65–71 for P1–P7) to ‘1 (Fx)’ and ‘2 (Rx)’ respectively. This application enables both terminals to be
turned on or off at the same time, constituting a stop command that will cause the inverter to stop
operation.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Operation direction
for Keypad

Keypad Run
Dir

Reverse

Forward

DRV

Command source

Cmd Source

Fx/Rx-1

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define(Px:
P1– P7)

Setting
Range

Unit

0–1

0–5

0–55

Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-06Cmd Source Set to 1 (Fx/Rx-1).
IN-65–71 Px Define

Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.

Frequency reference

FX
RX

107

Learning Basic Features

4.6.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
Direction Commands)
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by setting
DRV-06 (command source) in the Drive group to 2(Fx/Rx-2). Select 2 terminals for run and rotation
direction commands, and then select the relevant codes (2 of the 5 multi-function terminal codes,
IN-65–71 for P1–P7) to 1 (Fx) and 2 (Rx) respectively. This application uses an Fx input as a run
command, and an Rx input to change a motor’s rotation direction (On: Rx, Off: Fx).
Group

Code

Name

DRV

65–71

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Command source Cmd Source

Fx/Rx-2

0–5

Px terminal
configuration

0–55

Px Define
(Px: P1 – P7)

Run Command and Fwd/Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal – Setting
Details
Code

Description

DRV-06 Cmd Source

Set to ‘2 (Fx/Rx-2)'.

IN-65–71 Px Define

Assign a terminal for run command (Fx).
Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx).

Frequency
FX
RX

108

Learning Basic Features

4.6.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device
Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by setting DRV-06
(command source) in the Drive group to ‘3 (Int 485)’. This configuration uses upper level controllers
such as PCs or PLCs to control the inverter by transmitting and receiving signals via the S+, S-, and
RS-485 signal input terminals at the terminal block. For more details, refer to 7 RS-485
Communication Features on page 354.
Group Code Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

0–5

1–
MaxComID*

Command source

Cmd Source

Integrated
communication
inverter ID

Int485 St ID

Integrated
communication
protocol

Int485 Proto

ModBus
RTU

0–6

Integrated
communication
speed

Int485 BaudR

9600
bps

0–8

Integrated
communication
frame setup

Int485 Mode

D8 / PN /
0–3
S1

COM

Int 485

*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet), MaxComID is
‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’

109

Learning Basic Features

4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention
The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors to only run in one direction.
Pressing the [REV] key on the keypad when direction prevention is configured, will cause the
motor to decelerate to 0 Hz and stop. The inverter will remain on.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0 None
ADV

Run prevention
options

Run Prevent

1 Forward Prev

0–2

2 Reverse Prev

Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details
Code

Description

ADV-09 Run
Prevent

Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting
0
None
1
Forward Prev
2
Reverse Prev

110

Description
Do not set run prevention.
Set forward run prevention.
Set reverse run prevention.

Learning Basic Features

4.8 Power-on Run
A power-on run feature can be setup to start an inverter operation after powering up based on
the run commands by terminal inputs or communication (if they are configured). In AUTO mode,
the inverter starts operating at power-on when the following conditions are met.

Terminal block input as the command source
(If they have been configured). To enable power-on run, set DRV-06 (command source) to ‘1
(Fx/Rx-1)’ or ‘2 (Fx/Rx-2)’ in the Drive group and ADV-10 to ‘1’ in the Advanced group.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Command source

Cmd Source

1, 2

Fx/Rx-1 or
Fx/Rx-2

0–5

ADV

Power-on run

Power-on
Run

Yes

0–1

111

Learning Basic Features

Communication as the command source
To enable power-on resume, set COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) to ‘YES’, and set DRV-06 to ‘3 (Int 485)’
or ‘4 (Field Bus).’ If the power input to the inverter is cut off due to a power interruption, the inverter
memorizes the run command, frequency reference, and the acc/dec time settings at the time of
power interruption. If COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, the inverter starts operating based
on these settings as soon as the power supply resumes.
Group Code

Name

LCD Display

DRV

Command source

Cmd Source

COM

Power-on resume

PowerOn
Resume

Settings
3

Int 485

Field Bus

Yes

Setting Range

Unit

0-5

0-1

Note
•

To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 4 the same as
bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.

•

If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F pattern and
accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and restart’ enabled, the
terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on again to begin the
inverter’s operation.

Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin rotating
when the inverter starts up.

112

Learning Basic Features

4.9 Reset and Restart
Reset and restart operations can be setup for inverter operation following a fault trip, based on the
terminal block operation command (if it is configured). When a fault trip occurs, the inverter cuts
off the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault trip may be triggered if the inverter
begins its operation while motor load is in a free-run state. In PRT-08, bit 1 sets the option for all
the fault trips, other than low voltage trips, and bit 2 sets the option for low voltage trips. PRT-10
sets the delay time for restart (the time for the inverter to wait before it restarts).
The number of auto-restarts (PRT-09) refers to the number of times the inverter will try restarting
its operation. If fault trips occur again after restart, the retry number counts down each time the
inverter restarts until the number becomes ‘0.’ Once the inverter restarts successfully after the
initial fault trip, the inverter does not restart until the next fault trip occurs. The number of autorestarts set at PRT-09 that decreased after a restart reverts to the original setting value if successful
operation continues for certain period of time.
Group Code Name
DRV

PRT

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
0–5

Unit

Command source

Cmd
Source

Reset restart setup

RST Restart

00–11

Bit

No. of auto restart

Retry
Number

0–10

Auto restart delay
time

Retry Delay

5.0

0.1–600.0

Fx/Rx-1

sec

113

Learning Basic Features

Note
•

To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 2 the same as
bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.

•

Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.

4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency
Acc/Dec time values can be set based on maximum frequency, not on inverter operation
frequency. To set Acc/Dec time values based on maximum frequency, set BAS- 08 (Acc/Dec
reference) in the Basic group to ‘0 (Max Freq)’.
Acceleration time set at DRV-03 (Acceleration time) refers to the time required for the inverter to
reach the maximum frequency from a stopped (0 Hz) state. Likewise, the value set at the DRV-04
(Deceleration time) refers to the time required to return to a stopped state (0 Hz) from the
maximum frequency.
Group

Code

Name

Acceleration
time

LCD Display

Acc Time

DRV
04

114

Deceleration
time

Dec Time

Parameter Setting
20.0

0.75~90KW

60.0

110~250KW

100.0

315~500KW

30.0

0.75~90KW

90.0

110~250KW

150.0

315~500KW

Setting Range

Unit

0.0–600.0

sec

0.0–600.0

Sec

Learning Basic Features

Group

BAS

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Maximum
frequency

Max Freq

60.00

40.00–400.00

Acc/Dec
reference
frequency

Ramp T
Mode

Max Freq

0–1

Time scale

0.1 sec

0–2

Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details
Code

Description

BAS-08 Ramp T
Mode

Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
Configuration
Description
0 Max Freq
Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq
Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating frequency.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times are set to 5
seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz (half of 60
Hz), the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds (half of 5 seconds).
Max. Freq.

Frequency
Run cmd
Acc. time

BAS-09 Time scale

Dec. time

Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when a
more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load characteristics, or
when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
Configuration
Description
0
0.01 sec
Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1
0.1 sec
Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2
1 sec
Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.

Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change from 1
115

Learning Basic Features

second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.

116

Learning Basic Features

4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency
Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency from the
existing operation frequency. To set the Acc/Dec time values based on the existing operation
frequency, set BAS-08 (acc/dec reference) in the Basic group to ‘1 (Delta Freq)’.
Group

Code

Name

Acceleration
time

LCD Display

Acc Time

Settings
20.0

0.75~90KW

60.0

110~250KW

Setting Range

Unit

0.0 - 600.0

sec

0.0 - 600.0

sec

0-1

100.0 315~500KW

DRV
04

Deceleration
time

Dec Time

30.0

0.75~90KW

90.0

110~250KW

150.0 315~500KW
BAS

Acc/Dec
reference

Ramp T Mode

Delta Freq

Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details
Code

Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on
Maximum frequency.

BAS-08 Ramp T
Mode

Configuration
Description
0 Max Freq
Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq
Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation frequency.
If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references are used
in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration stage will take 5
seconds (refer to the graph below).

117

Learning Basic Features

4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration
Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC (acceleration
time) and DEC (deceleration time) codes in the DRV group.
Group

Code

Name

Acceleration
time

LCD Display

Acc Time

DRV
04

70–
83

BAS

65–
71

Deceleration
time

Dec Time

Multi-step
Acc Time 1–7
acceleration/De
celeration
Dec Time 1–7
time1–7

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

IN
89

118

Multi-step
command
delay time

In Check Time

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0.0–600.0

sec

0.0–600.0

sec

x.xx

0.0–600.0

sec

x.xx

0.0–600.0

sec

0–55

1–5000

20.0

0.75~90KW

60.0

110~250KW

100.0

315~500KW

30.0

0.75 ~90KW

90.0

110~250KW

150.0

315~500KW

XCEL-L

XCEL-M

XCEL-H

Learning Basic Features

Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
Code

Description

BAS-70–82
Acc Time 1–7

Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.

BAS-71–83
Dec Time 1–7

Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time
inputs
Configuration
Description
11
XCEL-L
Acc/Dec command-L
12
XCEL-M
Acc/Dec command-M
13
XCEL-H
Acc/Dec command-H
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will control the
acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values set with BAS-70–82
and BAS-71–83.
If, for example, the P6 and P7 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL-M
respectively, the following operation will be available.

IN-65–71
Px Define (P1–P7)

P7
Acc/Dec time
0
1

3
[Multi-function terminal P6, P7 configuration]

IN-89 In Check Time

Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If IN89 is set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the inverter
searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the time expires,
the Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input received at P6

119

Learning Basic Features

4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency
You can switch between two different sets of Acc/Dec times (Acc/Dec gradients) by configuring
the switch frequency without configuring the multi-function terminals.
Group

Code
03

Name

Acceleration time

LCD Display

Acc Time

DRV
04

Dec Time

20.0

0.75~90KW

60.0

110~250KW

100.0

315~500KW

30.0

0.75~90KW

90.0

110~250KW

150.0

315~500KW

Setting Range

Unit

0.0–600.0

sec

0.0–600.0

sec

Multi-step
Acc Time-1
acceleration time1

20.0

0.0–600.0

sec

Multi-step
deceleration
time1

Dec Time-1

20.0

0.0–600.0

sec

Acc/Dec time
switch frequency

Xcel Change
Fr

30.00

0–Maximum
frequency

BAS

ADV

Deceleration time

Parameter Setting

Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details
Code

Description

ADV-60
Xcel Change Fr

After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients configured
at BAS-70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation frequency is at or
below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency exceeds the switch
frequency, the gradient level configured for the acceleration and deceleration
times (set at DRV-03 and DRV-04) will be used.
If you configure the P1–P7 multi-function input terminals for multi-step Acc/Dec
gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will operate based on the
Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals instead of the Acc/Dec switch frequency
configurations.
The ‘Xcel Change Fr’ parameter is applied only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit Mode)
is set to ‘NO’.

120

Learning Basic Features

Code

Description

4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration
Acc/Dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the inverter’s
acceleration and deceleration curves. Linear pattern features a linear increase or decrease to the
output frequency, at a fixed rate. For an S-curve pattern a smoother and more gradual increase or
decrease of output frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator doors, etc. S-curve gradient level
can be adjusted using codes ADV-03–06 in the advanced group.
Group Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

BAS

Acc/Dec reference

Ramp T
mode

Max Freq

0–1

Acceleration pattern

Acc Pattern

Linear

Deceleration pattern

Dec Pattern

S-curve

S-curve Acc start
gradient

Acc S Start

1–100

S-curve Acc end
gradient

Acc S End

1–100

S-curve Dec start
gradient

Dec S Start

1–100

S-curve Dec end
gradient

Dec S End

1–100

ADV

0–1

Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details
121

Learning Basic Features

Code

Description

ADV-03 Acc S Start

Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve, Acc/Dec
pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, up to half of
total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and ADV03 is set to 50%, ADV-03 configures acceleration up to 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz). The
inverter will operate S-curve acceleration in the 0-15 Hz frequency range (50%
of 30 Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the remaining acceleration
within the 15–30 Hz frequency range.

ADV-04 Acc S End

Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve Acc/Dec
pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, above half of
total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
ADV-04 is set to 50%, setting ADV-04 configures acceleration to increase from
30 Hz (half of 60 Hz) to 60 Hz (end of acceleration). Linear acceleration will be
applied within the 30-45 Hz frequency range. The inverter will perform an Scurve acceleration for the remaining acceleration in the 45–60 Hz frequency
range.

Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes ADV-05 and
ADV-05 Dec S Start –
ADV-06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes ADV-03 and
ADV-06 Dec S End
ADV-04.

Linear

S -curve

Frequency
Run cmd
Acc. time

Dec. time

[Acceleration / deceleration pattern configuration]

122

Learning Basic Features

[Acceleration / deceleration S-curve pattern configuration]

Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration time x
starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration time x
starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.

Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are in use.

123

Learning Basic Features

4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation
Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate the
inverter at a fixed frequency.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1– P7)

0–55

Frequency

Px
Run cmd

124

XCEL Stop

Learning Basic Features

4.13 V/F (Voltage/Frequency) Control
Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels, and output patterns to achieve a target
output frequency with V/F control. The amount of torque boost used during low frequency
operations can also be adjusted.

4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation
A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a fixed
rate for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. A linear V/F pattern is
particularly useful when a constant torque load is applied.
Group

IN
BAS

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Control mode

Control Mode

0–1

Base frequency

Base Freq

60.00

30.00–400.00

Start frequency

Start Freq

0.50

0.01–10.00

V/F pattern

V/F Pattern

0–3

V/F

Linear

Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-18 Base Freq

Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency
when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this
parameter value.
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the inverter
starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage while the
frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a deceleration
stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output voltage will
continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).
Base Freq.

DRV-19 Start Freq

Frequency Start Freq.
Inverter’s
rated voltage
Voltage
Run cmd

125

Learning Basic Features

4.13.2 Square Reduction V/FPattern Operation
Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides non-linear
acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the whole frequency range.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

BAS

V/F pattern

V/F Pattern

Parameter Setting
1

Square

Square2

Setting Range

Unit

0–3

Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation - Setting Details
Code

Description

BAS-07 V/F
Pattern

Sets the parameter value to ‘1 (Square)’ or ‘2 (Square2)’ according to the load’s
start characteristics.
Setting
Function
1 Square
The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 1.5
square of the operation frequency.
3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 2
square of the operation frequency. This setup is ideal for
variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.

Voltage
100%
Linear
Square
reduction
Base frequency

126

Frequency

Learning Basic Features

4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation
The H100 inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of special motors.
Group

BAS

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

V/F pattern

V/F Pattern

0–3

User Frequency 1

User Freq 1

15.00

0–Maximum
frequency

User Voltage 1

User Volt 1

0–100%

User Frequency 2

User Freq 2

30.00

0–Maximum
frequency

User Voltage 2

User Volt 2

0–100%

User Frequency 3

User Freq 3

45.00

0–Maximum
frequency

User Voltage 3

User Volt 3

0–100%

User Frequency 4

User Freq 4

Maximum
frequency

0–Maximum
frequency

User Voltage 4

User Volt 4

100

0–100%

User V/F

User V/F pattern Setting Details
Code

Description

Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq x) for start
BAS-41 User Freq 1
and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond with each
–BAS-48 User Volt 4
frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt x).

The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15 (motor
rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to ‘0’ it will be based on the input voltage.

127

Learning Basic Features

•

When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output pattern
away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient motor torque or
motor overheating due to over-excitation.

•

When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque boost (DRV17) do not operate.

128

Learning Basic Features

4.14 Torque Boost
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost
Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during low speed operation or motor
start. Increase low speed torque or improve motor starting properties by manually increasing
output voltage. Configure manual torque boost while running loads that require high starting
torque, such as lift-type loads.
Group

DRV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Torque boost
options

Torque Boost

Manual

0–2

Forward
torque boost

Fwd Boost

2.0

0.75~90kW

1.0

110~500kW

0.0–15.0

Reverse torque
Rev Boost
boost

2.0

0.75~90kW

1.0

110~500kW

0.0–15.0

Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-16 Fwd Boost

Set torque boost for forward operation.

DRV-17 Rev Boost

Set torque boost for reverse operation.

Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating

129

Learning Basic Features

4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost
Set DRV-15 to ‘Auto 1’ or ‘Auto 2’ to select the type of torque boost. While manual torque boost
adjusts the inverter output based on the setting values regardless of the type of load used in the
operation, auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of output
voltage required for torque boost based on the entered motor parameters. Because auto torque
boost requires motor-related parameters such as stator resistance, inductance, and no-load
current, auto tuning (BAS-20) has to be performed before auto torque boost can be configured.
Similarly to manual torque boost, configure auto torque boost while running a load that requires
high starting torque, such as lift-type loads. Refer to 5.21 Auto Tuning on page 219.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

DRV

torque boost mode

Torque Boost 1

BAS

auto tuning

Auto Tuning

Setting Range

Unit

Auto 1

0–2

Rs+Lsigma

0–3

4.14.3 Auto Torque Boost 2 (No Motor Parameter Tuning Required)
By adjusting the auto torque boost voltage gain set at DRV-15 (ATB Volt Gain), automatic torque
boost may be operated without tuning the motor-related parameter values. The DRV-15 (ATB Volt
Gain) value is used to adjust the amount of compensation required for each load. It prevents stalls
or overcurrent fault trips at start up.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

DRV

Torque boost
mode

Torque Boost 2

CON

Auto torque boost
filter gain

ATB Filt Gain

CON

Auto torque boost
voltage gain

ATB Volt Gain 100.0

130

Settings
Auto 2

Setting Range

Unit

0–2

1 - 9999

msec

0 - 300.0

Learning Basic Features

4.15 Output Voltage Setting
Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input voltage
to the inverter. Set BAS-15 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set voltage
becomes the output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter operates above
the base frequency, and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the input voltage at the
inverter, the inverter adjusts the voltage and supplies the motor with the voltage set at BAS-15
(motor rated voltage). If the motor’s rated voltage is higher than the input voltage at the inverter,
the inverter will supply the inverter input voltage to the motor.
If BAS-15 (motor rated voltage) is set to ‘0’, the inverter corrects the output voltage based on the
input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base frequency, when
the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will be the inverter output
voltage.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

BAS

Motor rated voltage Rated Volt

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0, 170–500

Output voltage

480V

170V
Base freq.

Output freq.

131

Learning Basic Features

4.16 Start Mode Setting
Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in the stopped
condition.

4.16.1 Acceleration Start
Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Start mode

0–1

Acc

4.16.2 Start After DC Braking
This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking before an
inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to its inertia, DC braking
will stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a stopped condition. DC braking can
also be used with a mechanical brake connected to a motor shaft when a constant torque load is
applied, if a constant torque is required after the the mechanical brake is released.
Group

ADV

132

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Start mode

Start Mode

0–1

Start DC braking time

DC-Start
Time

0.00

0.00–60.00

sec

DC Injection Level

DC Inj Level

0–200

DC-Start

Learning Basic Features

The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC braking
resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the inverter. If the DC
braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be damaged

4.17 Stop Mode Setting
Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation.

4.17.1 Deceleration Stop
Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
decelerates down to 0 Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Stop mode

Stop Mode

0–4

Dec

Frequency
Run cmd
Deceleration time

133

Learning Basic Features

4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking
When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking frequency)
the inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a stop command input,
the inverter begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency reaches the DC braking
frequency set at ADV-17, the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor and stops it.
Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Stop mode

Stop Mode

DC Brake

0–4

Output block time
before braking

DC-Block
Time

0.00

0.75~90kW

2.00

110~500kW

0.00–60.00

sec

DC braking time

DC-Brake
Time

1.00

0–60

sec

DC braking amount

DC-Brake
Level

0–200

DC braking
frequency

DC-Brake
Freq

5.00

0.00–60.00

DC Braking After Stop Setting Details
Code

Description

Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia of the
load is great, or if DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is set too high, a fault trip may
ADV-14 DC-Block
occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter supplies DC voltage to the
Time
motor. Prevent overcurrent fault trips by adjusting the output block time before
DC braking.
ADV-15 DC-Brake
Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Time
ADV-16 DC-Brake Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based on the
Level
rated current of the motor.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached, the inverter
ADV-17 DC-Brake
starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than the DC braking
Freq
frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC braking will start instead.

134

Learning Basic Features

ADV-14 ADV-15
ADV-17
Frequency
Voltage
Current

ADV-16

Run cmd

•

Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is applied
to the motor or DC braking time is set too long.

•

DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.

4.17.3 Free Run Stop
When the Operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops due to
residual inertia.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Stop Method

Stop mode

0–4

Free-Run

Frequency,
voltage
Run cmd

Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high speed, the
load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output is blocked

135

Learning Basic Features

4.17.4 Power Braking
When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor regenerated energy a
control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level or reaccelerate the motor in order
to reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short deceleration times are
needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is needed without causing an
over voltage fault trip.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Stop mode

Stop Mode

0–4

Power Braking

•

To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads that
require frequent deceleration.

•

Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking takes
priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit 3 of PRT-50 (stall prevention and flux
braking) and ADV-08 (braking options) are set, power braking will take precedence and operate.

•

Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage fault
trip may occur.

•

Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre-set
deceleration time.

136

Learning Basic Features

4.18 Frequency Limit
Operation frequency can be limited by setting maximum frequency, start frequency, upper limit
frequency, and lower limit frequency.

4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start
Frequency
Group
DRV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Start frequency

Start Freq

0.50

0.01–10.00

Maximum
frequency

Max Freq

60.00

40.00–400.00

Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-19 Start Freq

Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in Hz or
rpm. If an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the parameter
value will be 0.00.

DRV-20 Max Freq

Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are restricted to
frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using the
keypad.
If you use a high speed motor over 60Hz, there will be individual response
due to the difference in characteristics. Please contact LSIS.

4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values
Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Frequency limit

Freq Limit

0–1

Frequency lower
limit value

Freq Limit Lo

0.50

0.0–maximum
frequency

Frequency upper
limit value

Freq Limit Hi

Maximum
frequency

minimum–
maximum

137

Learning Basic Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
frequency

138

Unit

Learning Basic Features

Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
Code

Description

ADV-24 Freq Limit

The initial setting is ‘0 (No)’. Changing the setting to ‘1 (Yes)’ allows the setting
of frequencies between the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and the upper
limit frequency (ADV-26).

ADV-25 Freq Limit Lo
ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi

Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are expressed
in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (DRV-18). Frequency cannot be
set higher.

•

When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) is the
minimum frequency (Low Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at DRV-19
(Start Freq) becomes the minimum frequency.

•

When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi) is the
maximum frequency (High Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at DRV-20
(Max Freq) becomes the maximum frequency.

139

Learning Basic Features

4.18.3 Frequency Jump
Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. The inverter will avoid identified
ranges during acceleration and deceleration. Operation frequencies cannot be set within the preset frequency jump band.
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value (voltage,
current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency band the
frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band. Then, the frequency
will increase when the frequency parameter setting exceeds the range of frequencies used by the
frequency jump band.
Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Frequency jump

Jump Freq

00–1

0–1

Jump frequency
lower limit1

Jump Lo 1

10.00

0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 1

Jump frequency
upper limit1

Jump Hi 1

15.00

Jump frequency lower
limit 1–Maximum
frequency

Jump frequency
lower limit 2

Jump Lo 2

20.00

0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 2

Jump frequency
upper limit 2

Jump Hi 2

25.00

Jump frequency lower
limit 2–Maximum
frequency

Jump frequency
lower limit 3

Jump Lo 3

30.00

0.00–Jump frequency
upper limit 3

Jump frequency
upper limit 3

Jump Hi 3

35.00

Jump frequency lower
limit 3–Maximum

Frequency
ADV-33
ADV-32
ADV-31
ADV-30
ADV-29
ADV-28
0

10V V1(voltage input)
20mA I (current input)

Run cmd
when the frequency reference decreases
when the frequency reference increases

140

Learning Basic Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

frequency

4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting
Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both the first and
second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation commands to the multifunction input terminal. Mode switching can be used to stop remote control during an operation
using the communication option and to switch operation mode to operate via the local panel, or
to operate the inverter from another remote control location.
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes IN-65–71 and set the parameter value to 15
(2nd Source).
Group
DRV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Command source

Cmd Source

Fx/Rx-1

0–5

Frequency reference
Freq Ref Src
source

0–11

2nd Command
source

Cmd 2nd Src

Keypad

0–5

2nd Frequency
reference source

Freq 2nd Src

KeyPad-1

0–11

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

2nd Source

0–55

BAS

2nd Operation Mode Setting Details
Code

Description

BAS-04 Cmd 2nd Src
BAS-05 Freq 2nd Src

If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using the
set values from BAS-04-05 instead of the set values from the DRV-7 and
DRV-01.
The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating
with the 1st command source (Main Source).

141

Learning Basic Features

•

When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and input
(On) the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the Operation
command will be changed to the 2nd command. Before shifting input to the multi-function
terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. Note that if the deceleration time is too
short or inertia of the load is too high, an overvoltage fault trip may occur.

•

Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch the
command modes.

4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control
Filter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured to improve
the response of input terminals.
Group

Code

Name

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Multi-function input
DI On Delay
terminal On filter

0–10000

mse
c

Multi-function input
DI Off Delay
terminal Off filter

0–10000

mse
c

Multi-function input
DI NC/NO Sel
terminal selection

000 0000*

Multi-function input
DI Status
terminal status

000 0000*

LCD Display

* From the last bit to the first, the bits are for multi-purpose input 1–7 (the last bit is for input 1, and
the first bit for input 7).

142

Learning Basic Features

Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details
Code

Description

IN-85 DI On Delay, If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the terminal
IN-86 DI Off Delay receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off.

IN-87 DI NC/NO
Sel

IN-90 DI Status

Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table
below. With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is configured
as a A terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment on, it indicates
that the terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally Closed) contact.
Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.
Type
B terminal status (Normally
A terminal status (Normally
Closed)
Open)
Keypad

Display the configuration of each contact. When a segment is configured as A
terminal, using DRV-87, the On condition is indicated by the top segment turning
on. The Off condition is indicated when the bottom segment is turned on. When
contacts are configured as B terminals, the segment lights behave conversely.
Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.
Type
A terminal setting (On)
A terminal setting (Off)
Keypad

143

Learning Basic Features

4.21 Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay Control
Availability of using On/Off Delay about Multi-function Input Terminal can be set
Group

Parameter
Setting

Code

Name

LCD Display

Availability of applying
DI On Delay.

DI On
DelayEn

111 1111

Availability of applying
DI Off Delay.

DI Off
DelayEn

111 1111

Setting Range

Unit

000 0000 ~
111 1111
000 0000 ~
111 1111

Multi-function Input Terminal On/Off Delay Control Setting Details
Code

IN-83 DI On Delay En
IN-84 DI Off Delay En

Description
Every Input Terminal, it is possible to set availability of using On/Off Delay
of Input Terminal.
From right, Availability of using On/Off Delay about Multi-function Input
Terminal can be set with a sequence such as P1~P7.
1: Activate D1 On/Off Delay
0: Inactivate D1 On/Off Delay

144

Learning Advanced Features

5 Learning Advanced Features
This chapter describes the advanced features of the H100 inverter. Check the reference page in the
table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
Advanced Tasks
Auxiliary frequency
operation

Jog operation
Up-down operation
3-wire operation
Safety operation
mode

Dwell operation
Slip compensation
PID control
Sleep-wakeup
operation
Auto-tuning
Energy buffering
operation
Energy saving
operation
Speed search
operation

Description
Use the main and auxiliary frequencies in the predefined formulas
to create various operating conditions. Auxiliary frequency
operation is ideal for Draw Operation* as this feature enables finetuning of operation speeds.
Jog operation is a kind of a manual operation. The inverter operates
to a set of parameter settings predefined for Jog operation while
the Jog command button is pressed.
Uses the upper and lower limit value switch output signals (i.e.
signals from a flow meter) as Acc/Dec commands to motors.
3-wire operation is used to latch an input signal. This configuration
is used to operate the inverter by a push button.
This safety feature allows the inverter’s operation only after a signal
is input to the multi-function terminal designated for the safety
operation mode. This feature is useful when extra care is needed in
operating the inverter using the multi-purpose terminals.
Use this feature for the lift-type loads such as elevators, when the
torque needs to be maintained while the brakes are applied or
released.
This feature ensures that the motor rotates at a constant speed, by
compensating for the motor slip as a load increases.
PID control provides constant automated control of flow, pressure,
and temperature by adjusting the output frequency of the inverter.
When the inverter operation continues below the PID conditions
for a set time period, the PID reference is automatically raised to
extend the operation standby time. This keeps the inverter in a
standby (sleep) mode when the demand is very low.
Used to automatically measure the motor control parameters to
optimize the inverter’s control mode performance.
Used to maintain the DC link voltage for as long as possible by
controlling the inverter output frequency during power
interruptions, thus to delay a low voltage fault trip.
Used to save energy by reducing the voltage supplied to motors
during low-load and no-load conditions.
Used to prevent fault trips when the inverter voltage is output while
the motor is idling or free-running.

Ref.
p.147

p.153
p.155
p.157

p.158

p.160
p.162
p.163

p.180

p.219
p.197
p.239
p.243

145

Learning Advanced Features

Advanced Tasks
Auto restart
operation
Second motor
operation
Commercial power
source switch
operation
Cooling fan control
Multi-function
output On/Off
control
Regeneration
prevention for press
operation.
Damper operation
Lubrication
operation
Flow compensation
Energy savings
display
Pump clean
operation
Inclination setting
for operation and
stop
Valve deceleration
time setting
Load tuning
Level detection
Pipe breakage
detection
Motor preheating
Scheduled
operation

146

Description
Auto restart configuration is used to automatically restart the
inverter when a trip condition is released, after the inverter stops
operating due to activation of protective devices (fault trips).
Used to switch equipment operation by connecting two motors to
one inverter. Configure and operate the second motor using the
terminal input defined for the second motor operation.

Ref.
p.248

p.251

Used to switch the power source to the motor from the inverter
output to a commercial power source, or vice versa.

p.253

Used to control the cooling fan of the inverter.

p.254

Set standard values and turn On/Off the output relays or multifunction output terminals according to the analog input value.

p.294

Used during a press operation to avoid motor regeneration, by
increasing the motor operation speed.

p.253

Controls the fan motor optimally when a damper is used in the
system.
Supplies lubricant to the machinery before starting the inverter and
the mechanical system connected to it.
Compensates for pressure loss in a system with long pipelines.
Displays the amount of energy saved by the use of the inverter,
compared to when a commercial power source is used without an
inverter.
Cleans the pumps by removing the scales or deposits that are
attached to the impeller.
Sets the initial operating conditions for a pump by adjusting the
acceleration and deceleration times.

p.194
p.196
p.194
p.198
p.200
p.204

Prevents possible pump damage that may be caused by abrupt
deceleration.
Creates load-specific curves for light load operations and the pump
clean operation.
Detects and displays the level set by the user.

p.209

Detects breakages in the pipeline during a PID operation.

p.213

Prevents motors and pumps from freezing when they are not
operated.
Uses the built-in real-time clock (RTC) to operate the inverter
according to the desired time schedule.

p.206
p.207

p.216
p.222

Learning Advanced Features

Advanced Tasks
Fire mode operation

Description
Operates the inverter in a way to cope with emergency situations,
such as fire, by controlling the operation of ventilation (intake and
exhaust) fans.

Ref.
p.240

5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References
Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the main and
auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency reference is used as the
operating frequency, while auxiliary references are used to modify and fine-tune the main
reference.
Group Code

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Frequency reference
source

Freq Ref Src

Keypad-1

0–11

Auxiliary frequency
reference source

Aux Ref Src

0–13

Auxiliary frequency
reference calculation
type

Aux Calc
Type

M+(G*A)

0–7

Auxiliary frequency
reference gain

Aux Ref Gain

100.0

-200.0–200.0

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define

dis Aux Ref 0–55

BAS

The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary frequency
references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example where the DRV-06
Frq Src code has been set to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’, and the inverter is operating at a main reference
frequency of 30.00 Hz. Signals at -10 to +10 V are received at terminal V1, with the reference gain
set at 5%. In this example, the resulting frequency reference is fine-tuned within the range of
27.00–33.00 Hz [Codes IN-01–16 must be set to the default values, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity), set to ‘1
(Bipolar)’].

147

Learning Advanced Features

Auxiliary Reference Setting Details

Code

Description

BAS-01 Aux Ref
Src

Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
Configuration Description
0
None
Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled
1
V1
Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block as
the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
3
V2
Sets the I2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block as
the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4 must be set
to ‘voltage’).
4
I2
Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal block as
the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4 must be set
to ‘current’).
5
Pulse
Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal block as the
source of auxiliary frequency reference.

BAS-02
Aux Calc Type

Set the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure the
auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when calculating the
main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in either plus (+) or minus
(-) references (forward or reverse operation) even when unipolar analog inputs
are used.
Configuration
Formula for frequency reference
0
M+(G*A)
Main reference +(BAS-03x BAS-01xIN-01)
1
M*(G*A)
Main reference x(BAS-03x BAS-01)
2
M/(G*A)
Main reference /( BAS-03x BAS-01)
3
M+{M*(G*A)}
Main reference +{ Main reference x(BAS-03x BAS01)}
4
M+G*2*(A-50)
Main reference + BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)xIN-01
5
6

148

M*{G*2*(A-50)}
M/{G*2*(A-50)}

Main reference x{ BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)}
Main reference /{ BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)}

Learning Advanced Features

M+M*G*2*(AMain reference + Main reference x BAS-03x2x(BAS50)
01–50)
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)
G: Auxiliary reference gain (%)
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%)
BAS-03 Aux Ref
Gain

Adjust the size of the input (BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) configured for auxiliary
frequency.

IN-65–71 Px
Define

Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 36 (dis Aux Ref) and turn it on to
disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate using the
main frequency reference only.

149

Learning Advanced Features

Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #1
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
•

Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)

•

Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz

•

Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]

•

Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%

•

IN-01–32: Factory default

Example: an input voltage of 6 V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10 V is 60
Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36 Hz[=60 Hz X (6 V/10 V)] or 60%[= 100% X
(6 V/10 V)].
Setting *
0
M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz])
1
M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])
2
M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%])
3
M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])}
4
M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz]
5
M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
6
M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
7
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])

Calculating final command frequency**
30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36 Hz(A))=48 Hz
30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9 Hz
30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100 Hz
30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39 Hz
30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=36 Hz
30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3 Hz
30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300 Hz
30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)=33
Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

150

Learning Advanced Features

Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #2
Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
•

Main frequency: Keypad (Operation frequency 30 Hz)

•

Maximum frequency setting (BAS-20): 400 Hz

•

Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): I2 [Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]

•

Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%

•

IN-01–32: Factory default

Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency as 24 Hz(=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-4[mA])/(20[mA]
- 4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting*
0
M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz])
1
M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])
2
M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%])
3
M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])}
4
M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz]
5
M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])
6

M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}

M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])

* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

151

Learning Advanced Features

Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #3
V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency
•

Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5 V and is set to 30 Hz)

•

Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz

•

Auxiliary frequency (BAS-01): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]

•

Auxiliary reference gain (BAS-03): 50%

•

IN-01–32: Factory default

Example: An input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency Aas 24 Hz (=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40% (=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting*
0
M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz])
1
M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])
2
M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%])
3
M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])}
4
M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz]
5
M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}

Calculating final command frequency**
30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24 Hz
30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3
Hz( Reverse )
6
M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])}
30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300
Hz( Reverse )
7
M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)=27
Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to analog
input variation and deviations in the calculations.

152

Learning Advanced Features

5.2 Jog Operation
The jog operation allows for a temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog operation
command using the multi-function terminals or by using the [ESC] key on the keypad.
The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog
operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation modes, the
jog operation overrides all other operation modes.

5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal
The jog operation is available in either forward or reverse direction, using the keypad or multifunction terminal inputs. The table below lists parameter setting for a forward jog operation using
the multi-function terminal inputs.
Group

DRV

Code

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Jog frequency

JOG Frequency

10.00

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

Jog operation
acceleration time

JOG Acc Time

20.00

0.00–600.00

sec

Jog operation
deceleration time

JOG Dec Time

30.00

0.00–600.00

sec

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

0-55

JOG

Forward Jog Description Details
Code

Description
Select the jog frequency from P1- P7 and then select 6. Jog from IN65-71.
P1

IN-65–71 Px Define

1(FX)

P5 6(JOG)
CM

[Terminal settings for jog operation]

153

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

DRV-11 JOG Frequency

Set the operation frequency.

DRV-12 JOG Acc Time

Set the acceleration speed.

DRV-13 JOG Dec Time

Set the deceleration speed.

If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the operation
frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.

5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Forward/Reverse Jog by Multi-function Terminal
For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start operation, but while using
jog operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also starts an operation. The
priorities for frequency, Acc/Dec time and terminal block input during operation in relation to
other operating modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical to jog operation 1. If a different
operation command is entered during a jog operation, it is ignored and the operation maintains
the jog frequency.
Group

DRV

154

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter setting

Setting Range

Unit

Jog frequency

JOG
Frequency

10.00

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

Jog operation
acceleration time

JOG Acc
Time

20.00

0.00–600.00

sec

Operation
deceleration time

JOG Dec
Time

30.00

0.00–600.00

sec

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter setting

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

FWD JOG

REV JOG

DRV-12

DRV-13

Setting Range

Unit

0-55

DRV-12

DRV-11

Frequency

DRV-11
DRV-12

DRV-13

REV Jog

FWD Jog

5.3 Up-down Operation
The Acc/Dec time can be controlled through input at the multi-function terminal block. Similar to
a flowmeter, the up-down operation can be applied easily to a system that uses the upper-lower
limit switch signals for Acc/Dec commands.
Group Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Up-down operation
frequency save

U/D Save Mode

Yes

0–1

Down

0–55

U/D
Clear

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define(Px:
P1–P7)

155

Learning Advanced Features

Up-down Operation Setting Details
Code

Description
Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to ‘19 (Up)’ and ‘20
(Down)’, respectively. With the operation command input, acceleration
begins when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration stops and constant
speed operation begins when the signal is off.
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is on.
Deceleration stops and constant speed operation begins when both Up and
Down signals are entered at the same time.

IN-65–71 Px Define

During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved
automatically in the following conditions: the operation command (Fx or Rx)
is off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.

ADV-65 U/D Save
Mode

156

When the operation command is turned on again, or when the inverter
regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation from a fault trip,
it resumes operation at the saved frequency. To delete the saved frequency,
use the multi-function terminal block. Set one of the multi-function
terminals to 22 (U/D Clear) and apply signals to it during constant speed
operation. The saved frequency and the up-down operation configuration
will be deleted.

Learning Advanced Features

5.4 3- Wire Operation
The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is released), and
is used when operating the inverter with a push button.
Group

Code Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Command source

Cmd Source*

Fx/Rx - 1

0-11

65–
71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define(Px:
P1–P7)

3-Wire

0-55

To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum input
time (t) for 3-wire operation is 2 ms, and the operation stops when both forward and reverse
operation commands are entered at the same time.
P1

(1):FX

(6):JOG

P7 (16):3-Wire
CM

[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]

Freq .

FX
RX
3-Wire
[3- wire operation]

157

Learning Advanced Features

5.5 Safe Operation Mode
When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in safe mode, operation commands
can be entered in the Safe operation mode only. Safe operation mode is used to safely and
carefully control the inverter through the multi-function terminals.
Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting
Range

Unit

Safe operation
selection

Run En Mode

DI Dependent

0-1

Safe operation
stop mode

Run Dis Stop

Free-Run

0–2

Safe operation
deceleration
time

Q-Stop Time

5.0

0.0–600.0

sec

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define(Px: P1–
P7)

0-55

RUN Enable

Safe Operation Mode Setting Details
Code

Description

IN-65–71 Px Define

From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
operation mode and set it to ‘15 (RUN Enable)’.

ADV-70 Run En
Mode

ADV-71 Run Dis
Stop

158

Setting
0
Always Enable
1
DI Dependent

Function
Enables safe operation mode
Recognizes the operation command from a multifunction input terminal.

Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal in safe
operation mode is off.
When the safety operation mode terminal signal is given, the inverter
decelerates based on the settings at the Q-Stop time. The inverter decelerates
and stops based on the deceleration time (Dec Time) settings if the run
command is off.
Setting
Function
1
Free-Run
Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function
terminal is off.
2
Q-Stop
The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in safe

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

ADV-72 Q-Stop
Time

Q-Stop
Resume

operation mode. It stops after deceleration and
then the operation can resume only when the
operation command is entered again. The
operation will not begin if only the multi-function
terminal is on.
The inverter decelerates to the deceleration time
(Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It stops after
deceleration. Then if the multi-function terminal is
on, the operation resumes as soon as the operation
command is entered again.

Sets the deceleration time when ADV-71 Run Dis Stop is set to ‘1 (Q-Stop)’ or ‘2
(Q-Stop Resume)’.

159

Learning Advanced Features

5.6 Dwell Operation
The dwell operation is used to maintain torque during the application and release of the
mechanical brakes on lift-type loads. Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec dwell
frequency and the dwell time set by the user. The following points also affect dwell operation.
•

Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command runs, acceleration continues
until the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within the acceleration
dwell operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has passed, acceleration is
carried out based on the acceleration time and the operation speed that was originally set.

•

Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is run, deceleration continues until
the deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed are reached within the deceleration
dwell operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time has passed, deceleration is carried
out based on the deceleration time that was originally set, then the operation stops.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Dwell frequency
during acceleration

Acc Dwell
Freq

5.00

Start frequency
– Maximum
frequency

Operation time
during acceleration

Acc Dwell
Time

0.0

0.0–10.0

sec

Dwell frequency
during deceleration

Dec Dwell
Freq

5.00

Start frequency
– Maximum
frequency

Operation time
during deceleration

Dec Dwell
Time

0.0

0 .0– 60.0

sec

ADV

Note
Dwell operation does not work when:
•

Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.

160

Learning Advanced Features

•

Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first acceleration dwell
operation command is valid.

[Acceleration dwell operation]

•

Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are entered
and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work during a
deceleration by simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a stop
operation), or during external brake control applications.

[Deceleration dwell operation]

161

Learning Advanced Features

5.7 Slip Compensation Operation
Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and motor rotation
speed. As the load increases there can be variations between the setting frequency and motor
rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation of these speed
variations.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Control Mode

Control
Mode

Slip
Compen

Motor Capacity

Motor
Capacity

5.5 kW

0–20

Number of
motor poles

Pole Number 4

2–48

Rated slip speed

Rated Slip

40 (5.5 kW based)

0–3000

Rp
m

Rated motor
current

Rated Curr

3.6 (5.5 kW based)

1.0–1000.0

Motor no-load
current

Noload Curr

1.6 (5.5 kW based)

0.5–1000.0

Motor efficiency

Efficiency

72 (5.5 kW based)

70–100

DRV

BAS

Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-09 Control Mode

Set DRV-09 to ‘2 (Slip Compen)’ to carry out the slip compensation
operation.

DRV-14 Motor Capacity

Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.

BAS-11 Pole Number

Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate.

BAS-12 Rated Slip

Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.

120
= Rated slip frequency
= Rated frequency
= Number of the rated motor rotations

162

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

= Number of motor poles
BAS-13 Rated Curr

Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.

BAS-14 Noload Curr

Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is removed
and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If no-load
current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30-50% of the
rated motor current.

BAS-16 Efficiency

Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place.

5.8 PID Control
PID control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of
proportional, integral, and differential (PID) controls that provide more effective control for
automated systems. The functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter operation are
as follows:
Purpose

Function

Speed Control

Controls speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the
equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent speed or operates at the target speed.

Pressure Control

Controls pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of the
equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.

Flow Control

Controls flow by monitoring the current amount of flow in the
equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent flow or operates at a target flow.

163

Learning Advanced Features

Purpose

Function

Temperature Control

Controls temperature by monitoring the current temperature levels
of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains a
consistent temperature or operates at a target temperature.

5.8.1 PID Basic Operation
PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated system
process control to maintain speed, pressure, flow, temperature or tension.
Group Code

PID

164

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

PID Options

PID Sel

0–1

PID output
monitor

PID Output

PID reference
monitor

PID Ref Value

PID feedback
monitor

PID Fdb Value

PID Error Monitor

PID Err Value

PID reference
source

PID Ref1
Source

0–11

PID reference
setting

PID Ref Set

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID reference 1
auxiliary source
selection

PID
Ref1AuxSrc

None

0–13

PID reference 1
auxiliary mode
selection

PID
Ref1AuxMod

M+(G*A)

0–13

PID reference
auxiliary gain

-200.0–200.0

Unit

PID reference 2
auxiliary source

0–11

PID Ref 1 Aux
G

0.0

PID Ref 2 Src

Keypad

Learning Advanced Features

Group Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

selection
16

PID reference 2
keypad setting

PID Ref 2 Set

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID reference 2
auxiliary source
selection

PID
Ref2AuxSrc

None

0–13

PID reference 2
auxiliary mode
selection

PID
Ref2AuxMod

M+(G*A)

0–12

PID reference 2
auxiliary gain

PID Ref2 Aux G 0.0

-200.0–200.0

Unit

PID feedback
source selection

PID Fdb Src

0–9

PID feedback
auxiliary source
selection

PID Fdb
AuxSrc

None

0–11

PID feedback
auxiliary mode
selection

PID Fdb
AuxMod

M+(G+A)

0–13

PID feedback
auxiliary gain

PID Fdb Aux G

0.0

-200.0–200.0

Unit

PID feedback
band

PID Fdb Band

0–Unit Band

Unit

PID proportional
gain 1

PID P-Gain 1

50.0

0.0–300.00

Unit

PID integral time 1 PID I-Time 1

10.0

0.0–200.0

sec

PID differential
time 1

PID D-Time 1

0.00

0–1.00

sec

PID feed forward
gain

PID FF-Gain

0.0

0.0–1000.0

Unit

PID output filter

PID Out LPF

0.00

0–10.00

sec

PID output upper
limit

PID Limit Hi

100.00

PID Limit Lo–
100.00

Unit

165

Learning Advanced Features

Group Code

166

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

PID output lower
limit

PID Limit Lo

0.00

-100.00–PID
Limit Hi

Unit

PID proportional
gain 2

PID P-Gain 2

5.0

0.0–300.00

Unit

PID integral time 2 PID I-Time 2

10.0

0.0–200.0

sec

PID differential
time 2

PID D-Time 2

0.00

0–1.00

sec

PID output mode
setting

PID Out Mode

PID or Main

0–4

PID output reverse PID Out Inv

0–1

PID output scale

100.0

0.1–1000.0

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 1
reference setting 1

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 2
reference setting 2

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 3
reference setting 3

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 4
reference setting 4

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 5
reference setting 5

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 6
reference setting 6

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID multi-step
PID Step Ref 7
reference setting 7

Unit Default

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

PID controller unit
selection

0–40

PID control setting
PID Unit Scale
scale

0–4

PID control 0%
setting figure

0.00

PID Out Scale

PID Unit Sel

PID Unit 0%

Differ
depending on
PID-50 setting

Learning Advanced Features

Group Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

PID control 100%
setting figure

PID Unit 100%

100.00

Differ
depending on
PID-50 setting

65–
71

Px circuit function
setting

Px Define(Px:
P1–P7)

0–55

none

Unit

Note
•

Normal PID output (PID OUT) is bipolar and is limited by PID-46 (PID Limit Hi) and PID-47 (PID
Limit Lo) settings. DRV-20 (MaxFreq) value equals a 100% of PID OUT.

•

The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
Unit MAX = PID Unit 100% (PID-68)
Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0% (PID-67)–PID Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%

•

PID control may be utilized for the following operations:
Soft fill, auxiliary PID reference compensation, MMC, flow compensation, pipe breakage
detection

•

During a PID operation, the PID output becomes the frequency reference. The inverter
accelerates or decelerates to the frequency reference based on the Acc/Dec times.

PID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

PID-01 PID Sel

Sets the code to ‘1 (Yes)’ to select functions for the process PID.

PID-03 PID Output

Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.

PID-04 PID Ref Value

Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit, gain,
and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.

PID-05 PID Fdb Value

Displays the latest feedback value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.

PID-06 PID Err Value

Displays the differences between the existing reference and the feedback
(error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the PID group are
applied on the display.

PID-10 PID Ref 1 Src

Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set to a PID
feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set to the PID
reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a reference source, change the

167

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
feedback source.
Setting
0
Keypad
1
V1
3
V2
4
I2

5
7

Int. 485
FieldBus

8
9
10

Pulse
E-PID
Output
V3

Function
Keypad
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
I2 analog input terminal
When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I
(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V.
RS-485 input terminal
Communication command via a communication
option card
TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
External PID output
V3 analoge input terminal of Extension IO option
When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to
I3(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V3
(voltage), input 0–10 V.

PID-11 PID Ref Set

A reference value can be entered if the PID reference type (PID-10) is set to ‘0
(Keypad)’.

PID-12 PID
Ref1AuxSrc

Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a PID control.
If an external input source is selected, the reference is determined using the
input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the value set at PID-13 PID
Ref1AuxMod.
Setting
Function
0
None
Not used
1
V1
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
3
V2
I2 analog input terminal
[If the analog voltage/current input terminal selection
4
I2
switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input
0–10 V]
6
Pulse
TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
7
Int. 485
RS-485 input terminal
8
FieldBus
Communication command via a communication
option card
10
EPID1
External PID 1 Output

168

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

Output
EPID1 Fdb
Val
V3

External PID 1 feedback value
V3 analog input terminal of Extension IO option
When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to
I3 (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V3
(voltage), input 0–10 V.

PID-13 PID Ref1
AuxMod

PID-13 (PID Ref1) provides formulas to calculate the reference 1 value. If PID12 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other value than ‘None,’ the final reference 1
value is calculated using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the
input value set at PID-12).
Setting
0
M+(G*A)
1
M*(G*A)
2
M/(G*A)
3
M+(M*(G*A))
4
M+G*2*(A-50)
5
M*(G*2*(A-50))
6
M/(G*2*(A-50))
7
M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8
(M-A)^2
9
M^2+A^2
10
MAX(M,A)
11
MIN(M,A)
12
(M+A)/2
13
Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-10
G= Gain value set at PID-14
A= Value input by the source set at PID-12

PID-14 PID Ref1 Aux
G

Gain value for the formulas provided by PID-13.

PID-20 PID Fdb Src

Selects feedback input for PID control. If the V1 terminal is set as the PID
feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set as the PID
reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a feedback source, change the
reference source.
Setting
Function
0
V1
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
2
V2
I2 analog input terminal

169

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
3

4
5

Int. 485
FieldBus

7
8

Pulse
EPID1
Output
EPID1 Fdb
Val

PID-21 PID Fdb
AuxSrc

PID-22 PID FDB
AuxMod

External PID 1 feedback

Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a PID control.
When the external input source is selected, the reference is determined
using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the value set at PID-13
PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting
Function
0
None
Not used
1
V1
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
3
V2
I2 analog input terminal
[When the analog voltage/current input terminal
4
I2
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I
(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V]
6
Pulse
TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
7
Int. 485
RS-485 input terminal
8
FieldBus
Communication command via a communication
option card
10
EPID1
External PID 1 output
Output
11
EPID1 Fdb External PID 1 feedback
Val
The PID-30 (PID FDB AuxMod) provides formulas to calculate the final
feedback value. If PID-31 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other value than ‘None,’
the final feedback is calculated using the input values at the sources (set at
PID-31 and PID-32).
Setting
0
1

170

[If the analog voltage/current input terminal selection
switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–
10 V]
RS-485 input terminal
Communication command via a communication
option card
TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
External PID 1 output

M+(G*A)
M*(G*A)

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
2
M/(G*A)
3
M+(M*(G*A))
4
M+G*2*(A-50)
5
M*(G*2*(A-50))
6
M/(G*2*(A-50))
7
M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8
(M-A)^2
9
M^2+A^2
10
MAX(M,A)
11
MIN(M,A)
12
(M+A)/2
13
Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-30
G= Gain value set at PID-33
A= Value by the source set at PID-31

PID-23 PID Fdb Aux G Gain value used a formula set at PID-22.
PID-24
PID Fdb Band

Sets the maximum and minimum value by adding or subtracting the PID
Fdb Band value (set at PID-24) from the reference value. When the feedback
value is between the maximum and minimum value, this code maintains the
PID output.

PID-25
PID P-Gain1
PID-32
PID P-Gain2

Set the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference and
feedback. If the P Gain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output.

PID-26
PID I- Time 1
PID-33
PID I- Time 2

PID-27
PID D-Time 1
PID-34
PID D-Time 2

Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the time
taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-Time) is set to 1
second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error remaining at 100%.
Differences in a normal state can be reduced by PID I Time. When the multifunction terminal block is set to ‘24 (I-Term Clear)’ and is turned on, all of the
accumulated errors are deleted.
PID output (final frequency reference) is affected by the gains set at PID-26,
PID-33, and the Acc/Dec times to achieve the PID output change based on
the DRV-03 and DRV-04 settings. Therefore, consider the relationship
between these values when configuring the gains and the Acc/Dec times.
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential time
(PID D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change in errors per sec is 100%,
output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.

171

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

PID-28 PID FF-Gain

Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value
leads to a faster response.

PID-29
PID Out LPF

Used when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value (default
value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a higher value
increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the PID controller
output is, but the slower the response time.

PID-30 PID Limit Hi,
PID-31 PID Limit Lo

Limit the output of the controller.
Selects one of the PID output modes to modify the PID output. Modifications
can be made by adding input values and the main operation frequency of
the PID output to the final PID output value.
The following table lists the 5 modes that are available.

PID-35
PID Out Mode

Setting
0
1
2
3
4

PID-36
PID Out Inv

When PID-36 (PID Out Inv) is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error) between the
reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–reference value.

PID-37 PID Out Scale

Adjusts the volume of the controller output.

PID-40–46 Step Ref
1–7

Sets the PID reference by multi-function input settings at IN 65–71.

PID Output
PID+Main Freq
PID+EPID1 Out
PID+EPID1+Main
PID or Main

Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.

D-50
PID Unit Sel

172

Setting
0
CUST
1
%
2
PSI
3
˚F
4
˚C
5
inWC
6
inM
7
Bar

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

m 3/m(m 3/min)
m 3/h(m 3/h)
l/s
l/m
l/h
kg/s
kg/m
kg/h

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

mBar
Pa
kPa
Hz
Rpm
V
I
kW
HP
mpm
ft
m/s
m3/s(m 3/S)

29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

gl/s
gl/m
gl/h
ft/s
f3/s(ft3/min)
f3/h (ft3/h)
lb/s
lb/m
lb/m
lb/h
ppm
pps

PID-51
PID Unit Scale

Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at PID-50 PID Unit Sel.

PID-52
PID Unit 0 %
PID-53
PID Unit 100%

Sets the Unit 0% and Unit 100% values as the minimum and maximum
values set at PID-50.

173

Learning Advanced Features

PID Command Block

174

Learning Advanced Features

175

Learning Advanced Features

PID Feedback Block

176

Learning Advanced Features

PID Output Block

177

Learning Advanced Features

PID Output Mode Block

178

Learning Advanced Features

5.8.2 Soft Fill Operation
A soft fill operation is used to prevent excessive pressure from building in the pipe system at the
initial stage of a pump operation. When the operation command is given, a general acceleration
(without PID control) begins and continues until the output reaches the frequency set at AP1-21,
for the time set at AP1-22. Then, the soft fill PID operation is performed unless the feedback value
has reached the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set value). The soft fill PID operation continues until
the feedback or the soft fill PID reference value reaches the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set value).
When the soft fill operation ends, a normal PID operation starts.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Soft Fill options

Soft Fill Sel

0–1

Pr- PID operation
frequency

Pre-PID Freq

30.00

Low Freq–
High Freq

Pre-PID duration

Pre-PID Delay

60.0

600.0

sec

Soft fill escape value

Soft Fill Set

20.00

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Soft fill reference
increment

Fill Step Set

2.00

0–Unit Band

Soft fill reference
increment cycle

Fill Step Time

0–9999

sec

Soft fill feedback
difference

Fill Fdb Diff

0.00

0–Unit Band

AP1

Soft Fill Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

AP1-20
Soft Fill Sel

Enables or disables the soft fill PID.

AP1-21
Pre-PID Freq

Sets the frequency range for a general acceleration without PID control. If AP121 (Pre-PID Freq) is set to 30 Hz, general operation is performed until the PID
feedback reaches the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set). However, if the PID
reference or feedback exceeds the value set at AP1-23 during the pre-PID
operation, a normal PID operation starts immediately.

AP1-22 Pre-PID

In general, a PID operation starts when the feedback volume (controlled

179

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

Delay
AP1-23
Soft Fill Set

variables) of PID controller exceeds the value set at AP1-23. However, if AP1-22
(Pre-PID Delay) is set, the feedback after the set time becomes the default value
for the soft fill PID reference, and the inverter starts the soft fill operation.
When the feedback or the Soft Fill PID Reference exceeds the Soft Fill Set value,
the soft fill operation ends and a normal process PID operation begins.

AP1-24
Fill Step Set
AP1-25
Fill Step Time
AP1-26
Fill Fdb Diff

The Soft Fill PID Reference increases each time the set time [at AP1-25 (Fill Step
Time)] is elapsed, by the amount set at AP1-24 (Fill Step Set).
However, note that if the difference between the Soft Fill PID Reference value
and the feedback value is greater than the value set at AP1-26 (Fill Fdb Diff
value), the Soft Fill PID Reference value does not increase.

When a PID process is performed after the soft fill PID operation, the PID Reference value becomes
the PID-11 PID Ref1 Set value.

180

Learning Advanced Features

5.8.3 PID Sleep Mode
If an operation continues at a frequency lower than the PID operation conditions, a boost
operation is performed to extend sleep mode by raising the PID Reference, and then the inverter
enters PID sleep mode. In PID sleep mode, the inverter resumes PID operation when the PID
feedback falls below the PID Wakeup level and maintains the condition for the time set at AP1-09
(PID WakeUp1 DT) or AP1-13 (PID WakeUp2DT).
Note
PID Wakeup level may be calculated using the following formula:
PID Wakeup Level = PID-04 (PID Ref Value)–AP1-10 (PID WakeUp1Dev) or, PID-04 (PID Ref Value) - AP114 PID (WakeUp2Dev).

Two sets of configurations are available in PID sleep mode for sleep mode frequency, sleep mode
delay time, wakeup variation, and wakeup delay time. One of the two configurations may be
selected depending on the multi-function input terminal configuration and input conditions.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Displays

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Sleep boost settings

Sleep Bst Set

0.00

0–Unit Max

Unit

Sleep boost speed

Sleep Bst Freq

60.00

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

PID sleep mode 1
delay time

PID Sleep 1 DT

20.0

0–6000.0

sec

PID sleep mode 1
frequency

PID Sleep1Freq 0.00

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

PID wakeup 1 delay
time

PID WakeUp1
DT

20.0

0–6000.0

sec

PID wakeup 1 value

PID
WakeUp1Dev

20.00

0–Unit Band

Unit

PID sleep mode 2
delay time

PID Sleep 2 DT

20.0

0–6000.0

sec

PID sleep mode 2
frequency

PID Sleep2Freq 0.00

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

AP1

181

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Displays

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

PID wakeup 2 delay
time

PID WakeUp2
DT

20.0

0–6000.0

sec

PID wakeup 2 value

PID
WakeUp2Dev

20.00

0–Unit Band

Unit

Soft Fill options

Soft Fill Sel

0–1

PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details
Code

Description

AP1-05 Sleep Bst Set

Sets the sleep boost volume. Feedback must reach the boost level
(PID Reference+Sleep Bst Set) for the inverter to enter the Sleep
Mode.

AP1-06 Sleep Bst Freq

Sets the inverter operation frequency to reach sleep boost level.

AP1-07 PID Sleep1 DT
AP1-11 PID Sleep2 DT
AP1-08 PID Sleep1Freq
AP1-12 PID Sleep2Freq

If the operating frequency stays below the frequencies set at AP1-08
and AP1-12 for the set times at AP1-07 and AP1-11, the inverter
accelerates to the PID sleep boost frequency (PID Sleep Bst Freq).
Then, when the feedback reaches the value set at the boost level, the
inverter enters standby mode.

AP1-09 PID WakeUp1 DT
AP1-13 PID WakeUp2 DT
AP1-10 PID WakeUp1Dev
AP1-14 PID WakeUp2Dev

Sets the reference for PID operation in PID sleep mode. PID operation
resumes when PID feedback variation (from the PID reference)
exceeds the values set at AP1-10 and AP1-14, and maintains the
condition for times set at AP1-09 or AP1-13.

IN-65–71
P1–7 Define

When the PID Sleep Wake 2 terminal is set and input, PID operation
sleep mode is operated based on the parameter settings at AP1-11–
14.

182

Learning Advanced Features

5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)
When one of the multi-function terminals (IN-65–71) is set to ‘25 (PID Openloop)’ and is turned on,
the PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal turns off, the PID
operation starts again.

183

Learning Advanced Features

5.9 External PID
External PID refers to the PID features other than the basic PID features required to control the inverter.
The following table shows the areas where external PID controls can be applied.
Purpose

Function

Speed Control

Controls speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the equipment or
machinery being controlled. Control maintains consistent speed or operates
at the target speed.

Pressure Control

Controls pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of the
equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains consistent
pressure or operates at the target pressure.

Flow Control

Controls flow by monitoring the amount of flow in the equipment or
machinery to be controlled. Control maintains consistent flow or operates at
a target flow.

Temperature Control

Controls temperature by monitoring the current temperature levels of the
equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains a consistent
temperature or operates at a target temperature.

Depending on the PID output mode, the EPID output value can be overlapped to the PID output.
External output is also available through the analog output settings at OUT-01 and OUT-07.
Group

EPI

184

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Jump Code

1–99

EPID 1 Mode
Selection

EPID1 Mode

EPID1output
monitor value

EPID1
Output

0.00

-100.00–100.00%

Unit

EPID1 reference
monitor value

EPID1 Ref Val

EPID1 feedback
monitor value

EPID1 Fdb Val -

EPID1error monitor
value

EPID1 Err Val

EPID1 command
source selection

EPID1 Ref Src

0–10

EPID1 keypad
command value

EPID1 Ref Set Unit Min

Unit Min–Unit
Max

None

Keypad

Unit

0–3

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

EPID1 feedback
source selection

EPID1 Fdb
Src

0–9

EPID1 proportional
gain

EPID1 P-Gain

50.0

0.0–300.0%

Unit

EPID1 integral time

EPID1 I-Time

10.0

0.0–200.0

Sec

EPID1 differentiation
EPID1 D-Time 0.00
time

0–0.00

Sec

EPID1 feed-forward
gain

EPID1 FFGain

0.0

0.0–1000.0

Unit

EPID1 output filter

EPID1 Out
LPF

0–10.00

Sec

EPID1 output upper
limit

EPID1 Limit
Hi

100.00

EPID1 Limit Lo–
100.00

EPID1 lower limit

EPID1 Limit
Lo

0.00

-100.00–EPID1
Limit Hi

EPID1 output
inverse

EPID1 Out
Inv

0–1

EPID1 unit

EPID1 Unit
Sel

1: %

Refer to EPID unit
details table

2: X1

0: X100
1: X10
2: X1
3: X0.1
4: X0.01

Differs depending
on the unit setting

X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -3200.0–
Unit 100%
X1:
-320.00–
Unit 100%
X0.1: -32.000–
Unit 100%
X0.01: -3.2000–
Unit 100%

EEPID1 unit scale

EPID1 unit 0% value

EPID1 Unit
Scl

EPID1
Unit0%

185

Learning Advanced Features

Group

186

Code

Name

LCD Display

EPID1
Unit100%

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Differs depending
on the unit setting

X100: Unit 0%–
32000
X10: Unit
0%–3200.0
X1: Unit
0%–320.00
X0.1: Unit
0%–32.000
X0.01: Unit 0%–
3.2000

0–3

EPID1 unit 100%
value

EPID2 Mode
selection

EPID2 Mode

EPID2 output
monitor value

EPID2
Output

0.00

-100.00–100.00%

Unit

EPID2 reference
monitor value

EPID2 Ref Val

EPID2 feedback
monitor value

EPID2 Fdb Val -

EPID2 error monitor
value

EPID2 Err Val

EPID2 command
source selection

EPID2 Ref Src

0–10

EPID2 keypad
command value

EPID2 Ref Set Unit Min

Unit Min–Unit
Max

Unit

EPID2 feedback
source selection

EPID2 Fdb
Src

0–9

EPID2 proportional
gain

EPID2 P-Gain

50.0

0.0–300.0

Unit

EPID2 integral time

EPID2 I-Time

10.0

0.0–200.0

Sec

EPID2 differentiation
EPID2 D-Time 0.00
time

0–1.00

Sec

EPID2 feed-forward
gain

EPID2 FFGain

0.0

0.0–1000.0

Unit

EPID2 output filter

EPID2 Out
LPF

0–10.00

Sec

None

Keypad

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

EPID2 output upper
limit

EPID2 Limit
Hi

100.00

EPID2 Limit Lo–
100.00

EPID2 output lower
limit

EPID2 Limit
Lo

0.00

-100.00–EPID2
Limit Hi

EPID2 output
inverse

EPID2 Out
Inv

0: No

EPID2 unit

EPID2 Unit
Sel

0: CUST

Refer to EPID unit
details table

2: X1

0: X100
1: X10
2: X1
3: X0.1
4: X0.01

Differs depending
on the unit setting

X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -3200.0–Unit
100%
X1: -320.00–Unit
100%
X0.1: -32.000–
Unit -100%
X0.01: -3.2000–
Unit 100%

Differs depending
on the unit setting

X100: Unit 0%–
32000
X10: Unit 0%–
3200.0
X1: Unit 0%–
320.00
X0.1: Unit 0%–
32.000
X0.01: Unit 0%–
3.2000

EPID2 unit scale

EPID2 unit 0% value

EPID2 unit 100%
value

EPID2 Unit
Scl

EPID2
Unit0%

EPID2
Unit100%

Yes

Note
•

The EPID1–2 output (EPID OUT) is bipolar, and is limited by the EPI-14 (EPID 1 Limit Hi) and EPI-15
(EPID 1 Limit Lo) settings.

•

The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:

187

Learning Advanced Features

188

Unit MAX = EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100% (PID-68 )
Unit Min = (2xEPID1 (EPID2) Unit0%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 0%)/2

Learning Advanced Features

EPID Basic Operation Setting Details
Code

Description
Sets the EPID1 modes.

EPI-01 EPID1 Mode

Setting
0
None
1
Always On
2
During Run
3
DI Dependent

Function
EPID1 is not used.
EPID1 operates at all times.
Operates only when the inverter is running.
Operates when terminal input (EPID1 Run) is
on.

EPI-02 PID Output

Displays the existing output value for the EPID controller. The unit, gain,
and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on the display.

EPI-03 EPID Ref Value

Displays the existing reference value set for the EPID controller. The unit,
gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on the
display.

EPI-04 EPID1 Fdb Value

Displays the existing feedback value set for the EPID controller. The unit,
gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on the
display.

EPI-05 EPID1 Err Value

Displays the difference between the existing reference and the feedback
(error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the PID group are
applied on the display.
Selects the reference input for the EPID control. If the V1 terminal is set
to an EPID1 feedback source (EPID1 F/B Source), V1 cannot be set as the
EPID1 reference source (EPID1 Ref Source). To set V1 as a reference
source, change the feedback source.

EPI1-06 EPID1 Ref Src

Setting
0
Keypad
1
V1
3
V2
4
I2

5
7

Int. 485
FieldBus

Pulse

Function
Keypad
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
I2 analog input terminal [When analog
voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW2) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage),
input 0–10 V]
RS-485 input terminal
Communication command via a communication
option card
TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)

189

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

EPI-07 EPID1 Ref Set

Set the EPI control reference type (EPI-06) to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to enter the
reference value.

EPI-09 EPID1 P-Gain

Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference and
feedback. If the P-Gain x 2 is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output.
The setting range for P-Gain is 0.0-1,000%.
Selects the feedback input for the EPID control. When the V1 terminal is
set to an EPID feedback source (PID F/B Source), V1 cannot be set as the
PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a reference source,
change the feedback source.

EPI-08 EDPID1 Fdb Src

Setting
0
Keypad
1
V1
3
V2
4
I2

5
7

Int. 485
FieldBus

Function
Keypad
-10-10 V input voltage terminal
I2 analog input terminal [When analog
voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW4) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage),
input 0–10 V voltage]
RS-485 input terminal
Communication command via a communication
option card

EPI-10 EPID1 I- Time

Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the
time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (EPID I-Time) is
set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error
remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be reduced by
EPID I Time.
All the accumulated errors can be deleted by setting the multi-function
terminal block to ‘42 (EPID1 ITerm Clr)’ or ‘48 (EPID2 ITerm Clr)’.

EPI-11
EPI1 D-Time

Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential
time (EPID1 D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change in errors per
sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.

EPI-12 EPID1 FF-Gain

Sets the ratio that adds the target to the EPID output. Adjusting this
value leads to a faster response.

EPI-13EPID1 Out LPF

Used when the output of the EPID controller changes too fast or the
entire system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower
value (default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some
cases a higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more

190

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
stable the EPID controller output is, but the slower the response time.

EPI-14 EPID1 Limit Hi,
EPI-15 EPID1 Limit Lo

Limits the output of the controller.

EPI-16
EPID1 Out Inv

If EPID Out Inv is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error) value between the
reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–reference value.
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.

EPI-17 EPID1 Unit Sel

Setting
0
CUST
1
%
2
PSI
3
˚F
4
˚C
5
inWC
6
inM
7
Bar
8
mBar
9
Pa
10
kPa
11
Hz
12
Rpm
13
V
14
I
15
kW
16
HP
17
mpm
18
ft
19
m/s
20
m3/s(m 3/S)

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

m 3/m(m 3/min)
m 3/h(m 3/h)
l/s
l/m
l/h
kg/s
kg/m
kg/h
gl/s
gl/m
gl/h
ft/s
f3/s(ft3/min)
f3/h (ft3/h)
lb/s
lb/m
lb/m
lb/h
ppm
pps

EPI-18 EPID1 Unit Scl

Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at EPI-17 EPI1 Unit Sel.

EPI-19 EPID1 Unit 0 %
EPI-20 EPID1 Unit 100%

Sets the EPID1 Unit 0% value and the EPID1 Unit 100% value as the
minimum and maximum values set at EPI1-17.

191

Learning Advanced Features

EPID1 Control block

192

Learning Advanced Features

EPID2 Control block

193

Learning Advanced Features

5.10 Damper Operation
A damper is a device that controls the flow in a ventilation system. If a fan and a damper are used
together in a system, the inverter may be configured to operate according to the damper’s
operation status. During a damper operation, one of the relay outputs OUT-31–35 (Relay 1–5) may
be set to ‘33 (Damper Control)’ to output a signal based on the damper’s operation status. One of the
multi-function terminal inputs (IN-65–71) may also be set to ‘45 (Damper Open)’ to receive the
damper status input. The inverter starts operating when both the run command and the damper
open signal are turned on (relay output setting at OUT-31–35 is not necessary).
When the time difference between the inverter run command and the damper open signal
exceeds the delay time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT), damper error (Damper Err) occurs. If the
damper open relay output and damper control input are set at the same time, and if the damper
open signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT) is elapsed (when the inverter
is not operating), damper error (Damper Err) occurs.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

AP2

Damper check
time

Damper DT

65-71

OUT

31-35

Setting Range

Unit

0.1–600.0

sec

P1–7 Px terminal
45
P1–P7 Define
configuration
(Damper open)

Multi-function
relay 1–5

Relay 1–5

Parameter Setting
-

33
(Damper Control)

Damper Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-45 Damper DT

Sets the damper open delay time.
Detects the inverter run command or the damper open signal (whichever is
received first) and outputs a damper error (Damper Err) if the other signal is
not received until the time set at AP2-45 elapses.

IN-65–71 P1–7 define

Sets one of the multi-functional terminals to ’45 (Damper Open)’ to enable
damper operation.

OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5

Sets one of the relay outputs to ’33 (Damper Control)’ to provide a relay
output when the inverter run command is turned on.

194

Learning Advanced Features

Note
Damper operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both HAND and AUTO
modes.

195

Learning Advanced Features

5.11 Lubrication Operation
During a lubrication operation, the inverter outputs the lubrication signal through one of the
output relays when the inverter receives a run command. The inverter does not start operating
until the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time) has elapsed and the Lubrication signal is turned off.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

AP2

Lubrication
operation time

Lub Op Time

OUT

31-35

Multi-function
relay 1–5

Relay 1–5

Parameter Setting

33 (Damper
Control)

Setting Range

Unit

0.1–600.0

(sec)

Lubrication Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-46 Lub Op
Time

Outputs the lubrication signal for a set time when the inverter run command is
turned on. The inverter starts operating when the set time has elapsed.

OUT-31–35 Relay
1–5

Sets one of the output relays (OUT-31–35) to ‘30 (Lubrication)’ to enable the
Lubrication function.

Note
•

The lubrication function can be used to delay inverter operations, depending on the working
environment, since the inverter waits for the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time) each time a run
command is received.

•

Lubrication operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both HAND and
AUTO modes.

196

Learning Advanced Features

5.12 Flow Compensation
In a system with a pipeline, longer pipes and higher flow rate cause greater pressure loss. A flow
compensation operation can compensate for pressure loss by increasing the volume of the PID
reference.
Group

Code

Name

Flow Comp
Flow Comp Sel
function options

Max Comp
amount

AP1

LCD Display

Max Comp
Value

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
0

Yes

0–Unit Band

Unit
-

Flow Compensation Setting Details
Code

Description

AP1-30 Flow
Comp Sel

Sets the Flow Compensation function options.

AP1-31 Max
Comp Value

Sets the maximum compensation volume. This function is based on a PID
operation. The volume is given the same unit used for the PID reference.

Longer pipes cause the actual pressure to decrease, which in turn increases the difference
between the pressure reference and the actual pressure. When the pipe lengths are equal in two
different systems, more pressure loss is caused in the system with greater flow. This explains the
pressure difference between (A) and (B) in the figure (when the flows are different). To compensate
for the pressure loss above, the value of AP1-31 is set to the maximum volume of compensation
when the inverter has the maximum frequency, and adds to the PID reference after calculating
compensation volume based on the output frequency.
The final PID reference=PID-11+Compensation amount, and compensation amount is shown
197

Learning Advanced Features

below.
Compensation amount

Out Freq Start Freq
"AP1 31)
∗ "PID– 53) ∗
MaxFreq Start Freq
100%

PID-53: PID Output Maximum value

5.13 Payback Counter
The payback counter displays energy savings information by comparing the average energy
efficiency for operations with and without the inverter. The energy savings information is
displayed as kWh, saved energy cost, and CO2 emission level.
Group

AP2

198

Code

Name
st

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

1 MOTOR average
POWER

M1 AVG PWR

Inverter capacity

0.1–500.0

2nd MOTOR average
M2 AVG PWR
POWER

Inverter capacity

0.1–500.0

Cost per kWh

0.0–1000.0

Saved kWh

-999.9–999.9

kWh

Saved MWh

-32000–32000

MWh

Saved Cost below
1000 unit

Saved Cost1

-999.9–999.9

Saved Cost over
1000 unit

Saved Cost2

-32000–32000

Reduced CO2

CO2 Factor

0.5

0.1–5.0

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

conversion Factor
95

Reduced CO2 (Ton) Saved CO2 - 1

-9999–9999

Ton

Reduced CO2
(1000 Ton)

-160–160

Ton

Reset Energy
Reset Energy
payback parameter

Saved CO2 - 2

0 No
1 Yes

Energy Payback Value Function Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-87 M1 AVG PWR

Sets the average power value of the #1 motor and calculates the energy
savings based on the set value.

AP2-88 M2 AVG PWR

Sets the average power of the #2 motor and calculates energy savings
based on the set value.

AP2-89 Cost per kWh

Sets the cost per 1 kWh. Multiply the energy payback counter value with
the value set at AP2-89 to calculate the total saved cost. This value is
displayed in AP2-92–93.

AP2-90 Saved kWh
AP2-91 Saved MWh

Displays the saved energy in kWh (AP2-90) and MWh (AP2-91).
When the value reaches 999.9 (kWh) and continues to increase, AP2-91
becomes 1 (MWH), AP2-90 resets to 0.0, and it continues to increase.

AP2-92 Saved Cost1
AP2-93 Saved Cost2

Displays the saved cost to the one-tenth place at AP2-92. When the value
reaches 999.9 and continues to increase, AP2-93 becomes 1, AP2-92
resets to 0.0, and it continues to increase.

AP2-94 CO2 Factor

Sets the CO2 reduction rate per 1 MW (default value=0.5). The value is
multiplied with AP2-90 and AP2-91, and the resulting values are
displayed at AP2-95 and AP2-96.

AP2-95 Saved CO2-1
AP2-96 Saved CO2-2

Displays the CO2 reduction rate in tons (AP2-95) and kilo-tons (AP2-96).

AP2-97 Reset Energy

Resets all the saved energy parameters.

Note
Note that the actual saved energy may differ from the displayed values, since the resulting values are
affected by user-defined codes such as AP2-87 and AP2-88.

199

Learning Advanced Features

5.14 Pump Clean Operation
The pump clean operation is used to remove the scales and deposits attached on the impeller
inside a pump. This operation keeps the pump clean by performing a repetitive run-and-stop
operation of a pump. This prevents loss in pump performance and premature pump failures.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0 None
15

Pump clean
mode 1

Pump Clean
Mode1

0: None

1 DI Dependent
2 Output Power

3 Output Current
0 None
16

Pump clean
mode 2

Pump Clean
Mode2

0: None

1 Start
2 Stop

3 Start & Stop
17

Pump clean load PC Curve
setting
Rate

100.0

100.0–200.0

Pump clean
reference band

PC Curve
Band

5.0

0.0–100.0

Pump clean
operation delay
time

PC Curve DT

60.0

0–6000.0

sec

Pump clean start
PC Start DT
delay time

10.0

0–6000.0

Sec

0 speed
operating time
at Fx/Rx
switching

PC Step DT

5.0

1.0–6000.0

Sec

Pump clean Acc
time

PC Acc Time

10.0

0–600.0

Sec

Pump clean Dec
time

PC Dec Time

10.0

0–600.0

Sec

Forward step
run time

Fwd Steady T 10.0

1.0–6000.0

Sec

AP2

200

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Forward step
run frequency

Fwd
SteadyFreq

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

Reverse step run
Rev Steady T
time

10.0

1.0–6000.0

Sec

Reverse step run Rev
frequency
SteadyFreq

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

Number of
Fx/Rx steps for
pump clean

PC Num of
Steps

0–10

Pump clean
cycle
monitoring

Repeat Num
Mon

Pump clean
repeat number

Repeat Num
Set

0–10

Operation after
pump clean

PC End
Mode

Pump clean
continuous time
limit

PC Limit
Time

6–60

min

Pump clean
continuous
number limit

PC Limit
Num

0–10

0 Stop
1 Run

When a pump clean start command is given, the inverter waits until the delay time set at AP2-19
201

Learning Advanced Features

elapses, accelerates by the acceleration time set at AP2-22, and operates at the frequency set at
AP2-25. The pump runs for the time set at AP2-24, decelerates by the time set at AP2-23, and then
stops. This operation repeats in the forward and reverse directions (one after another) for the
number of times set at AP2-28 (PC Num of Step). Each time the steps (Fx/Rx) switch, the inverter
waits at a stop state for the time set at AP2-21 before going on with the next step. One step in the
forward direction and another step in the reverse direction makes one cycle. The number of pump
clean cycles is set at AP2-30. In the figure above, AP2-28 is set to ‘1’, and AP2-30 is set to ‘1’.
Pump Clean Function Setting Details
Code

Description
Sets the pump mode.
Setting
0 None
1 DI
defendant

AP2-15 PumpClean Mode
2

Power

Current

Function
Pump Clean function is not used.
Set one of the terminal inputs to ‘46 (Pump
Clean Sel)’ and performs the pump clean
operation by turning on the terminal.
Performs a pump clean operation when a
pump consumes more power than it is
supposed to consume in a normal operation.
Performs a pump clean operation when a
pump consumes more current than it is
supposed to consume in a normal operation.

Sets the pump clean start mode.
Setting
0 None
AP2-16 PumpClean Sel

AP2-17 PC Curve Rate
AP2-18 PC Curve Band
AP2-19 PC Curve DT

202

Start

Stop

Start & Stop

Function
Pump clean is performed only by the
function set at AP2-20.
Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter starts operating.
Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter stops operating.
Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter starts or stops operating.

If AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current,’ multiply the load
characteristic curve set at AP2-2–AP2-10 by the value set at AP217 (100[%]+AP2-17[%]), and reset the load characteristic curve for
the pump clean operation (refer to the load tune features for AP22–AP2-10 setting values).
Apply (rated inverter current x AP2-18 setting value) and (rated

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
motor x AP2-18 setting value) to the pump clean load curve
calculated by AP2-17 to calculate the final pump clean load curve.
The inverter performs pump clean operation when the inverter
continues operating for the time set at AP2-19.

AP2-20 Clean Start DT

When AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current’, a pump clean is
performed if the inverter operation power or current stays above
the pump clean load characteristic curve (defined by AP2-17 and
AP2-18) for the time set at AP2-19.

AP2-21 Clean Step DT

Sets the time for the inverter to maintain 0 speed (stop) before the
inverter switches from forward to reverse operation during a
pump clean.

AP2-22 PumpClean AccT
AP2-23 PumpClean DecT

Sets the Acc/Dec times for pump clean operations.

AP2-24 Fwd Steady Time
AP2-26 Rev Steady Time

Sets the time to maintain forward and reverse operations.

AP2-25 Fwd SteadyFreq
AP2-27 Rev SteadyFreq

Sets the forward and reverse operation frequencies.

AP2-28 PC Num of Steps

Determines the number of steps (acceleration/deceleration/stop)
in one cycle. Each operation, either in the forward or reverse
direction, constitutes one step.
If set to ‘2,’ one forward step and one reverse step constitute one
cycle.
Determines the inverter operation after pump clean operation.

AP2-31 PC End Mode

Setting
0 Stop
1 Start

Function
This stops the inverter after pump cleaning.
The inverter operates based on the inverter’s
command status after the pump cleaning. (If a
terminal command is received, the inverter
performs the operation it was performing before
the pump clean operation.)

AP2-29 Repeat Num Mon

Displays the number of the current pump cleaning cycle.

AP2-30 Repeat Num Set

Sets the number of cycles for one pump clean operation set at
AP2-21–AP2-28.

AP2-32 PC Limit Time
AP2-33 PC Limit Num

Frequent pump clean operations may indicate a serious system
problem. To warn the users of potential system problems, an error
(CleanRPTErr) occurs if the number of pump clean operation

203

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
exceeds the number set at AP2-33 within the time period set at
AP2-32.

Note
•

When the run prevent feature is active and an operation in the prevented direction is required to
perform a pump clean operation, the inverter operates at the 0 speed for the time set at AP2-24
and AP2-26 (Steady Time).

•

To stop the pump clean operation, press the OFF key on the keypad or turn it off at the terminal
input.

•

If the pump clean operation is configured for terminal input and it is turned on, and if ADV-10
(PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, a pump clean operation is performed when the inverter is turned
on.

•

When performing a pump clean operation via terminal input,
if the terminal input is turned off instantly after it is turned on (the operation is triggered),
1 pump clean cycle is operated.
if ADV-10 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, and the terminal input is turned off instantly
after it is turned on (the operation is triggered), and if the inverter is turned off during a
pump clean then is turned back on again, the pump clean operation is not resumed
(because the input terminal is not on when the inverter is turned on).
if the terminal input is kept on after it is initially turned on, 1 pump clean cycle is
operated.

5.15 Start & End Ramp Operation
This function is used to rapidly accelerate the pump to the normal operating level, or to rapidly
decelerate the pump and stop it. Start & End ramp operation is performed when ADV-24 (Freq
Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes).’
Group

AP2

204

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Start & End Ramp
Gradient

Start&End Ramp 0: No

StartRampAcc

10.0

0–600.0

Sec

EndRampDec

10.0

0–600.0

Sec

Yes

Unit
-

Learning Advanced Features

Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Frequency limit
options

Freq Limit

0: No

Low Freq
minimum value

Freq Limit Lo

30.00

Start Freq–
Max Freq

Low Freq
maximum value

Freq Limit Hi

60.00

Freq Limit Lo–
Max Freq

Yes

Unit
-

Start & End Ramp Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-40 Start&End
Ramp

Sets the pump Start & End Ramp options.
Setting
Function
0 No
The Start & End Ramp operation is not used.
1 Yes
Use the Start & End Ramp operation.

AP2-41 Start Ramp
Acc

Refers to the time it takes to reach the minimum pump operation frequency
for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at ADV-25 when the
inverter starts (it is different from DRV-03 acceleration gradient).

AP2-42 End Ramp
Dec

Refers to the time it takes to reach the 0 step (stop) from the minimum pump
operation frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at
ADV-25 (it is different from DRV-03 deceleration gradient).

< Start&End Ramp Adjustment>
In the figure above, AP2-41 defines the acceleration time to the minimum operation frequency
ADV-25 (Freq Limt Lo). AP2-42 defines the deceleration time from the minimum operation
frequency to a stopped state. Time A (normal acceleration time set at DRV-03) and Time B (normal
deceleration time set at DRV-04) in the figure will change according to the Acc/Dec gradients
defined by AP2-41 and AP2-42.
205

Learning Advanced Features

5.16 Decelerating Valve Ramping
This function is used to prevent pump damage due to abrupt deceleration. When the pump
operation frequency reaches the valve ramp frequency (AP2-38 Dec Valve Freq) while decelerating
rapidly based on the deceleration ramp time (set at AP2-42), it begins to slow down the
deceleration based on the deceleration valve ramp time (set at AP2-39 DecValve Time).
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Dec valve ramping
start frequency

Dec Valve
Freq

40.00

Low Freq–High
Freq

Dec valve ramping
time

DecValve
Time

0.0

0–6000.0

Sec

Frequency limit
options

Limit Mode

0: No

Low Freq minimum
value

Freq Limit Lo

30.00

Start Freq–Max
Freq

Low Freq maximum
value

Freq Limit Hi

60.00

Freq Limit Lo–
Max Freq

AP2

ADV

Yes

Decelerating valve ramp operates when ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

Deceleration Valve Ramping Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-38 Dec Valve
Freq

Sets the start frequency where the slow deceleration begins in order to prevent
pump damage when the inverter stops. Decelerating valve ramping is
performed from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV25 (low frequency limit for pump operation).

AP2-39 DecValve
Time

Sets the time it takes to decelerate from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the
frequency limit set at ADV-25 (low frequency limit for pump operation).

206

Learning Advanced Features

The time set at AP2-39 refers to the absolute time that it takes for the pump to decelerate from the
frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV-25.

5.17 Load Tuning
Load tuning refers to an operation that detects the load applied to a specific section of the inverter
operation (current and voltage) and creates an ideal load curve for the under load and pump
clean operations. The two set points to define the section are user-definable, and are set at 50%
and 85% of the base frequency (DRV-18 Base Freq) by default. The load tuning result values are
saved at codes AP2-2–AP2-10. These values are user definable as well.
The minimum set point for the load tuning begins at 15% of the base frequency (DRV-18 Base
Freq), and the maximum set point can be set up to the base frequency. If the frequency limit is set
to ‘1 (Yes)’ at ADV-24 (Freq Limit), the range is limited within the frequencies set at ADV-25 (Freq
Limit Lo) and ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi).
Group

AP2

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Load curve
Tuning

Load Tune

Load curve Low
Freq

Load Fit
LFreq

30.00

Base Freq*15%–
Load Fit HFreq

Current for Low
Freq

Load Fit
LCurr

40.0

0.0–200.0

Power for Low
Freq

Load Fit LPwr 30.0

0.0–200.0

Load curve High
Freq

Load Fit
HFreq

51.00

Load Fit LFreq–
High Freq

Current for High
Freq

Load Fit
HCurr

80.0

0.0–200.0

Power for High
Freq

Load Fit
HPwr

80.0

0.0–200.0

Load current for
frequency

Load Curve
Cur

Load power for
frequency

Load Curve
Pwr

Yes

Unit
-

207

Learning Advanced Features

Load Tuning Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-01 Load Tune

The inverter performs an automatic tuning to generate an ideal system
load curve.
Setting
Function
0
None
Load tuning is not used.
1
Load Tune
Start load tuning.

AP2-02 Load Fit LFreq

Defines the first frequency set point for load tuning (user definable).

AP2-03 Load Fit LCurr
AP2-04 Load Fit LPwr

Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at AP2-02
as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current and rated
power. Values for AP2-03 and AP2-04 are user definable.

AP2-08 Load fit HFreq

Defines the second frequency set point for load tuning(user definable).

AP2-09 Load Fit HCurr
AP2-10 Load Fit HPwr

Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at AP2-08
as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current and rated
power. Values for AP2-09 and AP2-10 are user definable.

AP2-11 Load Curve Cur
AP2-12 Load Curve PWR

Monitors the load curve value set at AP2-1 (Load Tune) based on the
current output frequency.

When a load tuning is performed, the inverter measures for 10 seconds the motor current and
power, at the frequencies set at AP2-02 and AP2-09. The motor current and power values
measured here are used to generate an ideal load curve.

Note
Load tuning is not available while the inverter is operating.

208

Learning Advanced Features

•

If the frequencies for AP2-02 (Low Freq) and AP2-08 (High Freq) are set too close to each other,
the resulting load curve may not reflect the actual (ideal) load curve. Therefore, it is recommended
that you keep the AP2-02 and AP2-08 frequencies as close to the factory defaults as possible.

•

If a secondary motor is in use, note that the existing load curve for the main motor will be applied
to the secondary motor unless a load tuning has been performed for the secondary motor.

5.18 Level Detection
When the inverter is operating at or above the frequency set at PRT-74 (LDT Level), this function is
used to triggers a fault trip or sets a relay output if the source value is out of the range of the userdefined values. If the reset restart feature is turned on, the inverter continues to operate based on
the run command after the LDT fault trip is released.
Group

PRT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Level detection
mode

LDT Sel

Warning

None/Warning/Trip

Level detection
range

LDT Area Sel

1 . Above Level

0–1

Level detection
source

LDT Source

0: Output Current

0–12

Level detection
delay time

LDT Dly Time 2.0

0–9999

Sec

Level detection
reference value

LDT Level

Source setting is
used

Level detection
bandwidth

LDT Band
width

Source setting is
used

Level detection
frequency

LDT Freq

20.00

0.00–Max Freq (Hz)

Level detection
trip restart time

LDT Restart
DT

60.0

0.0–3000.0

Min

LDT Auto restart
count

LDT Rst Cnt

0~6000

LDT Auto restart

LDT Rst Cnt

0~6000

209

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

cycle count

LDT Auto restart
cycle
LDT Cnt Clr T
Initialization time

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0~6000

Sec

Level Detection Setting Details
Code

Description
Determines the inverter operation when a level detection trip occurs.

PRT-70 LDT Sel

Setting
0 None
1 Warning
2 Free-Run
3 Dec

Functions
No operation
The inverter displays a warning message.
The inverter free-runs, then stops.
The inverter decelerates, then stops.

Sets the level detection range.
PRT-71 Level
Detect

Setting
1
Below
2

210

Above

Operation
Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter operates
below the frequency set by the user.
Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter operates
above the frequency set by the user.

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
Selects a source for level detection.

PRT-72 LDT
Source

Setting
0
Output Current
1
DC Link Voltage
2
Output Voltage
3
kW
4
hp
5
V1
6
V2
7
I2
8
PID Ref Value
9
PID Fdb Val
10
PID Output
11
EPID1 Fdb Val

Function
Sets the output current as the source.
Sets the DC link voltage as the source.
Sets the output voltage as the source.
Sets the output power as the source.
Sets the output power as the source.
Sets the V1 terminal input as the source.
Sets the V2 terminal input as the source.
Sets the I2 terminal input as the source.
Sets the PID reference as the source.
Sets the PID feedback as the source.
Sets the PID output as the source.
Sets the external PID feedback 1 as the source.

Sets the external PID feedback 2 as the source.

EPID2 Fdb Val

PRT-73 LDT Dly
Time

Sets the delay time for the operation set at PRT-70.

PRT-74 LDT Level

Sets the level for the level detection.
The following are the setting ranges and default values by the source.
Source
Default Value
Setting Range
Output
Rated current
0–150% of the rated current
Current
DC Link
350
0–450 V (2 Type)
Voltage
700
0–900 V (4 Type)
Output
230
0–250 (2 Type)
Voltage
460
0–500 (4 Type)
kW
90% of the Inverter
0–150% of the Inverter rated
rated power
power
V1
9.00 V
0.00–12.00
V2
9.00
-12.00–12.00
I2
18.00
0.00–25.00
PID Ref
50
PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
Value
PID Fdb Val
50
PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
PID Output
50
-100.00%–100.00%
EPID1 Fdb
50
EPID1 Unit Min–EPID1 Unit Max
Val

211

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
EPID2 Fdb
Val

EPID2 Unit Min–EPID2 Unit Max

PRT-75 LDT Band
Width

If the source is detected below the set level, it must be adjusted to be above
the ‘LDT Level + LDT Band Width’ value to release the level detection fault trip.
If the source is detected above the set level, it must be adjusted to be below
the ‘LDT Level - LDT Band Width’ value to release the level detection fault trip.
The level detection trip bandwidth is 10% of the maximum source value.

PRT-76 LDT Freq

Sets the start frequency for the level detection. When setting the level
detection frequency, take into consideration the source type and the LDT level.

PRT-77 LDT
Restart DT

If PRT-08 (RST restart) is set to ‘YES,’ the inverter restarts after the time set at PRT76 elapses when an LDT trip is released. The LDT Restart operates each time an
LDT trip is released.
If PRT-77 is set to any other value than ‘0’ and the inverter is operating in HAND
mode, the inverter resets and the LDT trip is released. However, the inverter
stays in OFF mode and does not restart the operation instantly.

PRT-96 LDT Rst
Cnt
PRT-97 LDT Rst
Cnt M
PRT-98 LDT Cnt
Clr T

When the LDT trip occurs, the number of automatic restart is set by PRT96.
If an LDT trip occurs, the inverter automatically restarts after the time set
in PRT-77 (LDT Restart DT) has elapsed. The PRT-97 is incremented by
1 each time it is automatically restarted.
When the value of PRT-97 becomes equal to PRT-96, it does not try to
restart automatically.
The LDT trip will be restarted within the time set in PRT-98 after auto
restart
If not, PRT-97 is initialized to 0.

OUT-31–35 Relay
1–5

Sets one of the output relays to ‘32 (LDT)’ to monitor the level detection status.

212

Learning Advanced Features

As shown in the figure above, level detection can be carried out (relay output is ‘on’) as the output
frequency is above PRT-76 and the detection value is greater than the value of PRT-74. The LDT
operation is released if the value is less than the value subtracted from the value of band of, when the
value of the feedback is set from PRT-74 to PRT-75.

•

The LDT operation is carried out if the inverter operation is above PRT-74.

•

Modify PRT-74 and PRT-75 appropriately when modifying LDT Source of PRT-71.

•

PRT-74 and PRT-75 become default value if the LDT Source is modified.

•

PRT-77 (Restart DT) and PRT-08 (RST restart) features operate separately.

•

The inverter waits until the delay time set at PRT-73 (LDT Dly Time) before it operates based on the
setting in LDT-70 when the level detection time condition is met.

5.19 Pipe Break Detection
This function detects Pipe Breaks while the PID operation is on. The fault trip or a warning signal
will occur if the feedback does not reach the level set by users during the operation with the
maximum output (PID maximum output or the maximum speed set).
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Pipe Break
Detection setting

PipeBroken
Sel

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0 None
PRT

1 Warning
2 Free-Run

213

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

3 Dec

OUT

Pipe Break
Detection variation

PipeBroken
Dev

97.5

0–100

Pipe Break
Detection time

PipeBroken
DT

10.0

0–6000.0

Sec

31–36

Relay output 1–5

Relay1–5

Pipe Broken

Pipe Break Detection Details
Code

Description

PRT-60
PipeBroken Sel

Select the operation while detecting Pipe Breaks
Setting
Function
0 None
No operation
1 Warning
The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run
The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec
The inverter decelerates, then stops.

PRT-61
PipeBroken Dev

Sets the Pipe Break Detection level. Set the detect level by multiplying the set
value for PRT-61 by PID Reference.

PRT-62
PipeBroken DT

Sets the detect delay time. Pipe Break operates if the Pipe Break situation is
maintained for a set amount of time.

OUT31–36 Define

If Pipe Break (28) is set, when a Pipe Break occurs, the inverter sends out output
with Relay.

214

Learning Advanced Features

215

Learning Advanced Features

In the graph above, Pipe Break occurs if the feedback is smaller than the value calculated by
multiplying the two values set at PID-04 and PRT-61(PID-04 x PRT-61) at the inverter’s maximum
output (when PID output is the maximum set value, or the inverter is running at the frequency set
at DRV-20).

5.20 Pre-heating Function
This function uses current to heat up the motor or pump to avoid the motor or the pump freezing
when they are not in operation.
Group

AP2

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Initial heating
output current

Pre Heat Level

1–100

Initial heating
output duty

Pre Heat Duty

1–100

DC input delay
time

DC Inj Delay T

60.0

0.0–600.0

sec

65–71

Terminal block
input 1–7

P1–7 Define

Pre Heat

Initial Heating Setting Details
Code

Description

AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr

Sets the current to be used for initial heating. Sets the current to motor noload current % value.

AP2-49 Pre Heat Duty

Sets the duty (time) for the current to be used for initial heating, from 10
seconds to % value.

AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T

Sets a certain delay time to prevent from an over current trip that may
occur when a DC input is performed after the inverter Free-Run stop.

IN-65–71 P1–7 Define

Performs the Pre Heat function if the Pre Heat (44) terminal is set.

The initial heating function continually operates when the set multi-function input terminal is on
and until the inverter command is on. If an inverter command is input while the initial heating
function is operating, the inverter starts operation immediately.
216

Learning Advanced Features

The initial heating operation starts to run after an inverter operation stops, when the initial heating
function’s terminal input is on after the inverter operation command is off.

217

Learning Advanced Features

•

If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is above the rated motor current value, it is limited by the
rated motor current value.

•

If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is too high or the DC current output time is too long, the
motor may overheat or be damaged and the Inver IOLT may also malfunction. Reduce the DC
output current amount and DC output time to prevent from such damages.

The diagram above shows the operation waveform related to AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T. The Pre Heat
function performs when the inverter stop mode is set to Free Run and the Pre Heat signal is
supplied. Then, if the inverter operation command is on, the inverter maintains acceleration and a
fixed frequency. If the inverter operation command is off, the motor is in Free Run and the Pre Heat
operations starts after the time amount set in AP2-50.

218

Learning Advanced Features

5.21 Auto Tuning
The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for an auto torque boost.
Example - Auto Tuning Based on 5.5 kW, 200 V Motor
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

DRV

Motor capacity

Motor
Capacity

7–20

Motor pole
number

Pole Number

2–48

Rated slip speed

Rated Slip

0–3000

Rpm

Rated motor
current

Rated Curr

21.0

1.0–1000.0

Motor no-load
current

Noload curr

7.1

0.5–1000.0

Motor rated
voltage

Rated Volt

220

170–500

Motor efficiency

Efficiency

70–100

Auto tuning

Auto Tuning

Stator resistance

0.314

Depends on the
Ω
motor setting

Leakage
inductance

Lsigma

3.19

Depends on the
mH
motor setting

BAS

5.5 kW

None

219

Learning Advanced Features

Auto Tuning Default Parameter Setting
Rated
Current
(A)

No-load
Current
(A)

Rated Slip
Frequency
(Hz)

Stator
Resistance
(Ω
Ω)

Leakage
Inductance
(mH)

0.75

3.4

1.7

3.00

2.60

17.94

1.5

6.4

2.6

2.67

1.17

2.29

2.2

8.6

3.3

2.3

0.84

6.63

3.7

13.8

5.0

2.3

0.50

4.48

5.5

21.0

7.1

1.50

0.314

3.19

7.5

28.2

9.3

1.33

0.169

2.844

40.0

12.4

1.00

0.120

1.488

53.6

15.5

1.00

0.084

1.118

18.5

65.6

19.0

1.00

0.0676

0.819

0.75

2.0

1.0

3.00

7.81

53.9

1.5

3.7

1.5

2.67

3.52

27.9

2.2

5.0

1.9

2.3

2.52

19.95

3.7

8.0

2.9

2.3

1.50

13.45

5.5

12.1

4.1

1.50

0.940

9.62

7.5

16.3

5.4

1.33

0.520

8.53

23.2

7.2

1.00

0.360

4.48

31.0

9.0

1.00

0.250

3.38

18.5

38.0

11.0

1.00

0.168

2.457

44.5

12.5

1.00

0.168

2.844

60.5

16.9

1.00

0.1266

2.133

74.4

20.1

1.00

0.1014

1.704

90.3

24.4

1.00

0.0843

1.422

106.6

28.8

1.00

0.0693

1.167

141.6

35.4

1.00

0.0507

0.852

167.6

41.9

1.00

0.0399

0.715

Motor Capacity
(kW)

200 V

400 V

220

Learning Advanced Features

Rated
Current
(A)

No-load
Current
(A)

Rated Slip
Frequency
(Hz)

Stator
Resistance
(Ω
Ω)

Leakage
Inductance
(mH)

110

203.5

48.8

1.00

0.0326

0.585

132

242.3

58.1

1.00

0.0272

0.488

160

290.5

69.7

1.00

0.0224

0.403

185

335.0

77.0

1.00

0.0210

0.380

220

405.0

93.1

1.00

0.1630

2.930

250

467.8

104.9

1.00

0.1455

2.615

315

604.0

132.8

1.00

0.1140

2.040

355

687.8

146.4

1.00

0.1020

1.820

400

782.0

161.2

1.00

0.0906

1.616

500

985.3

206.2

1.00

0.0700

1.330

Motor Capacity
(kW)

400 V

Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details
Code

Description

DRV-14 Motor Capacity

Sets the motor capacity to be used. The maximum motor capacity is
limited by the inverter capacity and the keypad only displays the
inverter capacity.

BAS-20 Auto Tuning

Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and
then press the [ENT] key to run the auto tuning.
Setting
Function
0
None
Auto tuning function is disabled. Also, if you
select one of the auto tuning options and run it,
the parameter value will revert back to ‘0’ when
the auto tuning is complete.
1
All
Measures all motor parameters while the motor
(rotating
is rotating, including stator resistance (Rs), notype)
load current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant
(Tr), etc. Since the motor is rotating while the
parameters are being measured, if the load is
connected to the motor spindle, the parameters
may not be measured accurately. For accurate
measurements, remove the load attached to the
motor spindle.

221

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

BAS-14 Noload Curr,
BAS-21 Rs–BAS-24 Tr

All (static
type)

Note that the rotor time constant (Tr) must be
measured in a stopped position.
Measures all parameters while the motor is in
the stopped position, including stator resistance
(Rs), no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor time
constant (Tr), etc. Since the motor is not rotating
while the parameters are measured, the
measurements are not affected when the load is
connected to the motor spindle. However, when
measuring parameters, do not rotate the motor
spindle on the load side.

Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters
that are not included in the auto tuning measurement list, the default
setting will be displayed.

•

Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.

•

Auto tuning operates when the inverter’s auto mode is off.

•

Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated voltage,
and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default parameter setting is
used for values that are not entered.

•

When measuring all parameters after selecting 2 ( All-static type) at BAS-20: compared with
rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating, parameter
values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate. Inaccuracy of the measured
parameters may degrade the performance of operations. Therefore, run static-type auto tuning
by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when gearing and belts cannot be
separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated mechanically from the load).

•

If auto tuning operates without wiring the motor, ‘Rs Tune Err’ or ‘Lsig Tune Err’ warning messages
are displayed. It can be reset if you press ‘STOP/RESET’ button of the keypad.

5.22 Time Event Scheduling
222

Learning Advanced Features

Time Event function enables the user to operate the inverter using the RTC (Real-Time Clock)
feature at certain times that the user would like to set. An RTC battery is installed on the I/O board
of the H100 inverter, and it lasts approximately 25,800 hours with the inverter turned off, and
53,300 hours with the inverter turned on.
To use the Time Event, set the current date and time. Three parameters need to be set to configure
the Time event feature: Time Period Module, Time Event, and Exception Date.
Time Period

Description

Time Period

Used to set the time of operation.

Time Event

Used to set the time of operation.

Exception Date

Used to specify the exception date. Exception date has the highest priority.

4 Time period Module types, 8 Time Event Module types, and 8 Exception day types can be used
to configure time events. The Time Event function works based on a series of configuration using
the modules listed in the table above.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Current date

Now Date

01/01/2000

01/01/2000 ~
12/31/2099 (Date)

Current time

Now Time

0: 00

0: 00–23: 59

Sec

Current day of
the week

Now
Weekday

0000001

0000000–1111111

Summer Time
Start date

Summer T
Start

04/01

01/01 ~ Summer T
Stop

Day

Summer Time
Finish date

Summer T
Stop

11/31

Summer T Start ~
12/31(Date)

Day

Period
connection
status

Period Status -

Time Period 1
Start time

Period1
StartT

24: 00

00:00 ~ 24:00

Min

Time Period 1
End time

Period1 Stop
T

24: 00

Period1 StartT ~
24:00(Min)

Min

Time Period 1
Day of the week

Period1 Day

0000000

0000000~1111111

Time Period 2

Period2

24: 00

00:00 ~ 24:00

Min

AP3

223

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Start time

StartT

Time Period 2
End time

16
17

224

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Period2 Stop
T

24: 00

Period2 StartT ~
24:00(Min)

Min

Time Period 2
Day of the week

Period2 Day

00000000

0000000~1111111

Time Period 3
Start time
configuration

Period3
StartT

24: 00

00:00 ~ 24:00

Min

Period3 Stop
T

24: 00

Period3 StartT ~
24:00(Min)

Min

Time Period 3
End time

Time Period 3
Day of the week

Period3 Day

0000000

0000000~1111111

Time Period 4
Start time

Period4
StartT

24: 00

00:00 ~ 24:00

Min

Time Period 4
End time

Period4 Stop
T

24: 00

Period4 StartT ~
24:00(Min)

Min

Time Period 4
Day of the week

Period4 Day

0000000

0000000~1111111

Except1 Date
Start time

Except1
StartT

24: 00

00:00 ~ 24:00

Min

Except1 Date
End time

Except1 Stop
24: 00
T

Except1 StartT ~
24:00(Min)

Min

Except1 Date

Except1 Date 01/01

01/01–12/31

Day

33-53

Exception Date 2–Exception Date 8 Parameter (The same condition and setting as
Exception Date 1)

Time Event
functions

Time Event
En

0: No

Time Event
configuration
status

T-Event
Status

Time Event 1
Connection

T000000000000
Event1Period

Yes

000000000000
~111111111111

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

Time Event 1
functions

LCD Display

TEvent1Defin
e

Parameter Setting

0: None

Setting Range
0

None

Speed-L

Speed-M

Speed-H

Xcel-L

Xcel-M

Xcel-H

Xcel Stop

Run Enable

2nd Source

Exchange

Analog Hold

I-Term Clear

PID
Openloop

PID Gain 2

PID Ref
Change

2nd Motor

Timer In

Dias Aux Ref

EPID1 Run

EPID1 ITerm
Clr

Pre Heat

EPID2 Run

EPID2 iTerm
Clr

Unit

225

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

74–87

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
27

Sleep Wake
Chg

PID Step Ref L

PID Step Ref
M

PID Step Ref
H

Unit

Time Event 2–Time Event 8 Parameter
(The same setting range and initial value as Time Event 1)

Time Event Function Setting Details
Code

Description

AP3-01 Now Date
AP3-02 Now Time
AP3-03 Now Weekday

Sets the current date, time, and day of the week. The Time Event
function is based on the setting. When the user sets the summer time
start date, the current time is subtracted by one hour. ex) [AP3-04
Summer T Start] is set to April 1, and if it is 1:59 on April 1, it will not
be 2:00 a minute later and it will be 1:00 on April 1. If [AP3-05
Summer T Stop] is set to December 25th, then it will be 1:59 on
December 25th, and it will be 3:00 on December 25 instead of 2:00
a minute later. Summer time is different for each country. The
parameter is based on 2 o'clock. If there is no charge on the RTC
battery, it is initialized to 00:00 on January 1, 2000 when the
inverter power is off / on.

AP3-04 Summer T Start
AP3-05 Summer T Stop

Set the Summer time start and finish date.

AP3-06 Date format

Select the desired date format.
Configuration
Function
0 YYYY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day is displayed.
1 MM/DD/YYYY
Month/Day/Year is displayed (USA).
2 DD/MM/YYYY
The format of Day/Month/Year is displayed
(Europe).

AP3-10 Period Status

Bits 0–3 are used to indicate the time module that is currently in use
among the 4 different time modules set at AP3-11–AP3-22.
Bits 4–11 are used to indicate the exception day that is set at AP3-30–
AP3-53.

226

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

AP3-11–AP3-20 Period 1–4
Start T

The start time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.

AP3-12–AP3-21 Period 1–4
Stop T

The end time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.

AP3-13–AP3-22
Period 1~4 Day

The Time period date for the operation can be set up to 4. It can be set
on a weekly basis. If the bit is ‘1 (on)’, it indicates the relevant day is
selected. If the Bit is ‘0 (off)’, it indicates the relevant day is not selected.
Bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sunday
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
Saturday

AP3-30–AP3-51
Exception1–8 Start T

The operation start time for the 8 Exception days can be set.

AP3-31–AP3-52
Exception1–8 Stop T

The operation end time for the 8 Exception days can be set.

AP3-32–AP3-53
Exception1–8 Date

The date for the 8 Exception days can be set.

AP3-70 Time Event En

Enables or disables the Time Event
Setting
Function
0
No
Time Event is not used.
1
Yes
Time Event is used.

AP3-71 T-Event Status

It shows which T-Event from 1–8 is being performed.
7
6
5
4
3
2
TTTTTTEvent Event Event Event Event Event
8
7
6
5
4
3

1
TEvent
2

0
TEvent
1

Select the desired module of the Time Module and Exception Day set in
AP3-11–AP3-53 for the relevant events.
If the bit is 1, it indicates the relevant Time Module or Exception Day is
selected. If the Bit is 0, it indicates the Time Module or Exception Day is
not selected.
AP3-72–86 T-Event1–8
Period

bit
11

0
Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Exception
Date 1
Exception
Date 2
Exception
Date 3
Exception
Date 4
Exception
Date 5
Exception
Date 6
Exception
Date 7
Exception
Date 8

227

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
Select the desired Event.
Setting

AP3-73–87 T-Event1–8
Define

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

None
Fx
Rx
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
Xcel-L
Xcel-M
Xcel-H
Xcel Stop
Run Enable
2nd Source
Exchange
Analog Hold
I-Term Clear
None

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

PID Openloop
PID Gain 2
PID Ref Change
2nd Motor
Timer In
Dias Aux Ref
EPID1 Run
EPID1 Openloop
Pre Heat
EPID2 Run
EPID2 Openloop
Sleep Wake Chg
PID Step Ref L
PID Step Ref M
PID Step Ref H

Time Period Parameter Setting
There are 4 Time Period Sets in the Time Event. Each Time Period Set has: period 1–4 Start (Start
time), Period 1–4 Stop T (End time), and Period 1–4 Day (Operation day) for which they can be set.

Time Period

Schedule

Time Period 1

Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On) and 18: 00
(Off)
Time Schedule
Code
Function
Setting
AP3-11
Period1 StartT
06: 00
AP3-12
Period1 StopT
18: 00

228

Learning Advanced Features

AP3-13

Period1 Day

1101110

Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)

Time Period 2

Time Schedule
Code
Function
AP3-14
Period2 StartT
AP3-15
Period2 StopT
AP3-16
Period2 Day

Setting
00: 00
24: 00
1000001

Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)

Time Period 3

Time Schedule
Code
Function
AP3-17
Period3 StartT
AP3-18
Period3 StopT
AP3-19
Period3 Day

Setting
10: 00
14: 00
1000111

The tables below show the parameter values for Time Period 1, Time Period 2, and Time Period 3.
When the parameters are set for the Time Periods 1-3 as shown in the tables below, this indicates
the Time Event function turns on and off on the following days and time.

Parameters Setting for Exception Date
There are 8 Exception date modules in the Time Event function. They are used to specify the
operation on particular days (public holidays, etc.). The settings for the start time and the end time
are the same as the settings for the modules and can be set for particular days. The Exception
229

Learning Advanced Features

dates can be set redundantly with the Time periods. If the Time Periods and the Exception Dates
are set redundantly, the inverter operates on the Exception Dates set.
Title

Setting Range

Description

Except1–8 Start T

00: 00–24: 00

Hour: Minutes (by the minute)

Except1–8 Stop T

00: 00–24: 00

Hour: Minutes

Except1–8 Date

1/1–12/31

Select the particular date (between 1/1 and 12/31)

Time Period

Schedule
Every Sunday, Monday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday at 06: 00 (On) and 18: 00
(Off)

Exception
Date 1

Time Schedule
Code
Function
AP3-30
Except1 StartT
AP3-31
Except1 StopT
AP3-32
Except1 Day

Setting
06: 00
18: 00
12/25

Every Sunday and Saturday for 24 hours (On)
Exception
Date 2

Time Schedule
Code
Function
AP3-33
Except2 StartT
AP3-34
Except2 StopT
AP3-35
Except2 Day

Setting
00: 00
24: 00
01/01

Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)
Exception
Date 3

Time Schedule
Code
Function
AP3-36
Except3 StartT
AP3-37
Except3 StopT
AP3-38
Except3 Day

Setting
10: 00
14: 00
01/01

Title

Setting Range

Remarks

Except1–8 StartT

00: 00–24: 00

Hour: Minutes (by the minute)

Except1–8 Stop T

00: 00–24: 00

Hour: Minutes

Except1–8 Date

1/1–12/31

Select the particular date (between 1/1 and 12/31)

230

Learning Advanced Features

231

Learning Advanced Features

The connection settings for Time Period and Time Event
There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event function. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are
used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception Date. The
parameters for T-Event 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days. Each Time event
module can be set for the connections to 4 Time period modules and 8 Exception days. Time
event modules are set as a bit unit in the parameters for Events 1–8. The diagram below shows
the connections between the Time event modules and the time period modules. The Time Event 1
is connected to Time Period 4. The Time Event 8 is connected to Time Periods 1–4 and the
Exception Dates 2.

Time Event Module Function Settings
The functions to be performed in the Time Event for T-Events 1–8 can be set. 30 functions can be
set (refer to page 228). There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event. The parameters for TEvents 1–8 are used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception
Date. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days.
232

Learning Advanced Features

Example of the Time Event operations
If the Time events are set as the parameters below, the inverter operates as illustrated.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Command
Source

Cmd Ref Src

5: Time Event

0–9

Frequency
command
source

Freq Ref Src

0: KeyPad

0–11

Time Period 1
Start time

Period1 StartT

10: 00

00: 00–24: 00

Min

Time Period 1
End time

Period1 Stop T

20: 00

00: 00–24: 00

Min

Time Period 1
Day of the
week

Period1 Day

0110000

0000000–
1111111

Time Period 2
Start time

Period2 StartT

12: 00

00: 00–24: 00

Min

Time Period 2
End time

Period2 Stop T

17: 00

00: 00–24: 00

Min

Time Period 2
Day of the
week

Period2 Day

00100000

0000000–
1111111

Time Event
configuration

Time Event En

1: YES

Time Event 1
connection
configuration

T-Event1Period

00000000001

DRV

AP3

Time Event 1
functions

T-Event1Define

1: Fx

Yes

000000000001–
111111111111
0

None

Speed-L

Speed-M

Speed-H

233

Learning Advanced Features

234

Xcel-L

Xcel-M

Xcel-H

Xcel Stop

Run Enable

2nd Source

Exchange

Analog Hold

I-Term Clear

PID
Openloop

PID Gain 2

PID Ref
Change

2nd Motor

Timer In

Dias Aux Ref

EPID1 Run

EPID1 ITerm
Clr

Pre Heat

EPID2 Run

EPID2 ITerm
Clr

Sleep Wake
Chg

PID Step Ref
L

PID Step Ref
M

PID Step Ref
H

Learning Advanced Features

Time Event 2
connection

T-Event1Period

00000000010

000000000001–
111111111111

Time Event 2
functions

T-Event2Define

3: Speed-L

Refer to AP3-73

The parameters in the table above shows the frequency command sources for the keypad and the
operation command sources for the Time Event.
The following is an example of an inverter operation utilizing the Time Period modules 1 and 2
with Time Events 1 and 2:
Time Period 1 is used to operate the inverter on Mondays and Tuesdays from 10AM to 8PM. Time
Period 2 is used to operate the inverter on Tuesday from 12PM to 5PM.
Time Event 1 triggers forward operations based on the frequency input on the keypad and
continues the operation for the time set at Time Period module 1. Time Event 2 operates the
inverter at Speed-L for the time set at Time Period module 2.
On Mondays, the inverter operates in the forward direction based on the frequency input on the
keypad from 10AM to 8PM (Time Event 1). On Tuesdays, it operates again in the forward direction
based on the keypad frequency input from 10AM to 12PM (Time Event 1), and then operates at
Speed-L from 12PM to 5PM (Time Event 2). When the operation assigned by Time Event 2 is
complete, the inverter resumes its Time Event 1 operation (the inverter operates based on the
keypad frequency input from 5PM to 8PM).

235

Learning Advanced Features

Note
When repetitive frequency commands related to the frequency input command occur while the Time
Event function is performing, Time Event performs its function in the order of the frequency command
sources set in Freq Ref Src for DRV-07 (followed by Jog operation and multi-step acc/dec).

If a fault trip occurs during a time event operation, the inverter stops the operation and stays in a
trip state. When this happens, there are two options to resume the stopped operation:
•

Set PRT-08 (RST Restart) to ‘YES’ to allow the inverter to automatically restart after the trip
condition is released.

•

Refresh the setting at AP3-70 (Time Event En). Set AP3-70 to ‘Yes’ from ‘No’. If one of the input
terminals (IN-65–71 Px Define) is assigned to it, turn the switch off then turn it back on to
resume the time event operation.

236

Learning Advanced Features

5.23 Kinetic Energy Buffering
When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage decreases, and a low
voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic energy buffering operation uses regenerative
energy generated by the motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link voltage. This extends
the time for a low voltage trip to occur, after an instantaneous power interruption.
Group

CON

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

Kinetic energy
buffering selection

KEB Select

0–1

Kinetic energy
buffering start level

KEB Start Lev 130

110–140

Kinetic energy
buffering stop level

KEB Stop Lev

135

115–145

Kinetic energy
buffering slip gain

KEB Slip Gain 300

0–20000

Kinetic energy
buffering P-Gain

KEB P Gain

1000

0–20000

Kinetic energy
buffering I gain

KEB I Gain

500

1–20000

Kinetic energy
buffering
acceleration time

KEB Acc Time

0.0–600.0

Sec

Yes

10.0

0.75~90kW

30.0

110~500kW

Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

CON-77
KEB Select

Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected.
Setting
Function
0
No
General deceleration is carried out until a low
voltage trip occurs.
1
Yes
The inverter power frequency is controlled and
the regeneration energy from the motor is
charged by the inverter.

237

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

CON-78
KEB Start Lev,
CON-79
KEB Stop Lev

Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation. The set
values must be based on the low voltage trip level at 100%, and the stop level
(CON-79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-78).

CON-80
KEB Slip Gain

Used to prevent malfunctions caused by low voltage from initial kinetic energy
buffering occurring due to power interruptions.

CON-81
KEB P Gain

Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation. It
operates the inverter by modifying the set value to prevent malfunctions
caused by low voltage after power interruptions.

CON-82
KEB I Gain

Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Sets the gain value to maintain the operation until the frequency stops during
the kinetic energy buffering operation.

CON-83
KEB Acc Time

Sets the acceleration time for the frequency reference when the inverter’s
operation becomes normal after the kinetic energy buffering operation.

Note
•

The KEB functions may perform differently depending on the size of the loads. The KEB Gains can
be set for a better performance.

•

If a low voltage trip occurs after a power interruption, it indicates the load inertia and level are
high. In such cases, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB I Gain and
the KEB Slip Gain.

•

If motor vibration or torque variation occurs during the KEB function operation after power
interruptions, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB P Gain or
decreasing the KEB I Gain.

Depending on the duration of instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load inertia, a low
voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation. Motors may vibrate during
kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads, except for variable torque loads (for example, fan or
pump loads).

238

Learning Advanced Features

5.24 Anti-hunting Regulation (Resonance Prevention)
This function is used to prevent the hunting of a V/F controlled fan or motor caused by current
distortion or oscillation, due to mechanical resonance or other reasons.
Group

Code

Name

Enable or
disable antihunting
regulation
(resonance
prevention)

AHR Sel

Anti-hunting
regulation PGain

AHR P-Gain

1000

0–32767

Anti-hunting
regulation start
frequency

AHR Low Freq

0–AHR High
Freq

Anti-hunting
regulation end
frequency

AHR High Freq 400.00

AHR Low Freq–
Hz
400.00

Anti-hunting
regulation
compensation
voltage limit

AHR Limit

0–20

CON

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0 No
1

Yes

1 Yes

Anti-hunting Regulation Setting Details
Code

Description

CON-13 AHR Sel

Selects the Anti-hunting regulator operation.
Setting
Function
0
No
Disable anti-hunting regulation.
1
Yes
Enable anti-hunting regulation.

CON-14 AHR P-Gain

Increasing AHR proportional gain improves responsiveness of the
anti-hunting regulation. However, current oscillation may result if
AHR proportional gain is set too high.

CON-15 AHR Low Freq
CON-16 AHR High Freq

Sets the lower limit frequency (CON-15) and the maxim limit
frequency (CON-16) for anti-hunting regulation.

239

Learning Advanced Features

5.25 Fire Mode Operation
This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency situations, such
as fire, and provides continuous operation to protect other systems, such as ventilating fans. In Fire
mode, the inverter continues to operate based on the Fire mode run direction and frequency set
at PRT-46 and PRT-47.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Fire mode
password

Fire Mode PW

3473

0 None

Fire mode
setting

Fire Mode Sel

0: None

1 Fire Mode
2 Test Mode

PRT

0 Forward

Fire mode run
direction

Fire Mode Dir

0: Forward

Fire mode run
frequency

Fire Mode
Freq

60.00

0–max Freq

Fire mode
operation count

Fire Mode Cnt

65–75

Digital input
configuration

Px Define

40: Fire Mode

0-55

31–35

Digital output
configuration

Relay1-5

27: Fire Mode

0-41

TR output
configuration

Q1 define

27: Fire Mode

0-41

OUT

1 Reverse

When the multi-function terminal configured for Fire mode is turned on, the inverter ignores all
other commands and operates in the direction set at PRT-46 (Fire mode run direction) at the
speed set at PRT-47 (Fire mode run frequency). In Fire mode, the inverter ignores any faults, other
than ‘ASHT,’‘Over Current 1,’‘Over Voltage,’‘Ground F,’ and continues to operate. If any of the faults
that can stop inverter operation occur, the inverter automatically performs a reset restart to
continue the operation.

240

Learning Advanced Features

Fire Mode Function Setting Details
Code

Description

PRT-44 Fire Mode PW

Fire mode password is 3473.
A password must be created to enable Fire mode. PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel)
can be modified only after the password is entered.

PRT-45 Fire Mode Sel

Sets the Fire Mode.
Setting
Function
0 None
Fire mode is not used.
1 Fire Mode Normal Fire mode
2 Test Mode Fire mode test mode
In Fire test mode, faults are normally processed.
Using Fire test mode does not increase the count
value at PRT-48 (Fire Mode Cnt).

PRT-46 Fire Mode Dir

Sets the run direction for Fire mode operation.

PRT-47 Fire Mode Freq

Sets the operation frequency for Fire mode.

PRT-48 Fire Mode Cnt

Counts the number of the Fire mode operations. The number increases
only when PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘Fire Mode’. The count increases
up to 99, then it does not increase any more.

•

If damper or lubrication operations are set for the inverter, Fire mode operation is performed after
the delay times set in the relevant operations.

•

Note that Fire mode operation voids the product warranty.

•

In Fire mode test mode, the inverter does not ignore the fault trips or perform a reset restart. All
the fault trips will be processed normally. Fire mode test mode does not increase the Fire mode
count (PRT-48).

•

When the Fire mode operation is complete, the inverter stops operating and is turned off.

241

Learning Advanced Features

5.26 Energy Saving Operation
5.26.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation
If the inverter output current is lower than the current set at BAS-14 (Noload Curr), the output
voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at ADV-51 (Energy Save). The voltage before the
energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the percentage. Manual energy
saving operation will not be carried out during acceleration and deceleration.
Group

Code

Name

Energy saving
operation

ADV
51

Energy saving
amount

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

E-Save Mode 1

Energy Save

Manual

Setting Range
0

None

Manual

Auto

0–30

Unit

Voltage output

5.26.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation
The inverter finds the optimal energy saving point for the time set at ADV-52 based on the rated
motor current and the voltage output. The Energy saving operation is effective for the normal
duty operations. It does operate when the load level is more than 80% of the rated motor current.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Energy saving
operation

E-Save Mode

0–2

242

Auto

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Energy saving
point search time

E-Save Det T

20.0

0.0–100.0

Sec

If the operation frequency is changed, or acceleration or deceleration is carried out during an energy
saving operation, the actual Acc/Dec time may take longer than the set time due to the time required
to return to general operations from the energy saving operation.

5.27 Speed Search Operation
Speed search operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur when the inverter voltage
output is disconnected and the motor is idling. Since this feature estimates the motor rotation
speed based on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact speed.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Speed search mode
selection

SS Mode

Speed search
operation selection

Speed
Search

0000

bit

Speed search
reference current

SS SupCurrent

90 0.75~90kW

50–120

Speed search
proportional gain

SS P-Gain

100

0–9999

Speed search
integral gain

SS I-Gain

200

0–9999

Output block time
before speed search

SS Block
Time

1.0

0–60

sec

Multi-function relay
1 item

Relay 1
19 Speed Search

Multi-function
output 1 item

Q1 Define

CON

OUT

Flying Start-1

80 110~500kW

243

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

CON-70 SS Mode

Select a speed search type.
Setting
Function
0 Flying Start-1 The speed search is carried out as it controls the
inverter output current during idling below the CON72 (SS Sup-Current) parameter setting. If the
direction of the idling motor and the direction of
operation command at restart are the same, a stable
speed search function can be performed at about 10
Hz or lower. However, if the direction of the idling
motor and the direction of operation command at
restart are different, the speed search does not
produce a satisfactory result because the direction of
idling cannot be established.
1 Flying Start-2 The speed search is carried out as it PI controls the
ripple current which is generated by the counter
electromotive force during no-load rotation. Because
this mode establishes the direction of the idling
motor (forward/reverse), the speed search function is
stable regardless of the direction of the idling motor
and direction of operation command. However
because the ripple current is used which is generated
by the counter electromotive force at idle (the
counter electromotive force is proportional to the
idle speed), the idle frequency is not determined
accurately and re-acceleration may start from zero
speed when the speed search is performed for the
idling motor at low speed (about 10 - 15 Hz, though it
depends on motor characteristics).

CON-71 Speed
Search

Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top
display segment is on, it is enabled (On). If the bottom segment is on, it is
disabled (Off).
Item
Bit Setting On Status
Bit setting Off Status
Keypad
Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Setting
Function
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1

244

Learning Advanced Features

Speed search for general
acceleration
Initialization after a fault trip
Restart after instantaneous power
interruption
Starting with power-on

Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to ‘1’ and the inverter
operation command runs, acceleration starts with the speed search
operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a fault trip may occur if
the operation command is run for the inverter to provide voltage output.
The speed search function prevents such fault trips from occurring.
Initialization after a fault trip other than an LV trip: If bit 2 is set to ‘1’ and
PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’, the speed search operation
automatically accelerates the motor to the operation frequency used before
the fault trip when the [Reset] key is pressed (or the terminal block is
initialized) after a fault trip.
Automatic restart after a power interruption: If bit 3 is set to ‘1,’ and if a
low voltage trip occurs due to a power interruption but the power is
restored before the internal power shuts down, the speed search operation
accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference before the low
voltage trip.
If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power is
disconnected, the inverter generates a low voltage trip and blocks the
output. When the input power returns, the operation frequency before the
low voltage trip and the voltage is increased by the inverter’s inner PI
control.
If the current increases above the value set at CON-72, the voltage stops
increasing and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current decreases
below the value set at CON-27, the voltage increases again and the
frequency stops decelerating (t2 zone). When the normal frequency and
voltage are resumed, the speed search operation accelerates the motor
back to its frequency reference before the fault trip.

245

Learning Advanced Features

Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to ‘1’ and ADV-10 (Power-on Run) to ‘1
(Yes)’. If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter operation
command is on, the speed search operation will accelerate the motor up to
the frequency reference.
CON-72 SS SupCurrent

The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation
based on the motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is set to ‘1 (Flying
Start-2)’, this code is not visible.

CON-73 SS P-Gain,
CON-74 SS I-Gain

The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70 (SS
Mode) is set to ‘1(Flying Start-2)’, different factory defaults, based on motor
capacity, are used and defined in DRV-14 (Motor Capacity).

CON-75 SS Block
Time

The block time parameter prevents overvoltage trips due to counter
electromotive force.

Note
If operated within the rated output, the H100 series inverter is designed to withstand instantaneous
power interruptions within 8 ms and maintain normal operation. The DC voltage inside the inverter
may vary depending on the output load. If the power interruption time is longer than 8 ms, a low
voltage trip may occur.

Select the Speed search function (normal acceleration) for a proper re-operation during a free-run.
If the speed search function (normal acceleration) is not selected during the acceleration, an over
current trip or an overload trip may occur.

246

Learning Advanced Features

Speed Search Operation Setting Details

247

Learning Advanced Features

5.28 Auto Restart Settings
When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter
automatically restarts based on the parameter settings.
Group

PRT

CON

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Select start at trip reset

RST Restart

Auto restart count

Retry Number

0–10

Auto restart delay time

Retry Delay

1.0

0.1–60.0

sec

Select speed search
operation

Speed Search

0000–1111

bit

Speed search startup
current

SS Sup-Current

70–120

Speed search
proportional gain

SS P-Gain

100

0–9999

Speed search integral
gain

SS I-Gain

200

0–9999

Output block time before
speed search

SS Block Time

1.0

0.0–60.0

Auto Restart Setting Details
Code

Description

PRT-08
RST Restart

The Reset restart function can be performed by one of the two different
types. If the top segment is turned on, it indicates the function is on. If the

248

sec

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
bottom segment is turned on, it indicates the function is off.
Type
Bit On
Bit Off
LCD Display
Reset Restart function
Setting
Function
Bit1
Bit 0

For fault trips other than LV

For LV fault trips
For fault trips other than LV: If the Bit 0 is turned on, the inverter restarts
after a trip occurs and triggers a reset.
For LV fault trips: If the Bit 1 is turned on, the inverter restarts after a trip
occurs and triggers a reset.

PRT-09
Retry Number,
PRT-10
Retry Delay

The number of available auto restarts can be set at PRT-09. If a fault trip
occurs during an operation, the inverter restarts after the time set at PRT-10
(Retry Delay). At each restart, the inverter counts the number of tries and
subtracts it from the number set at PRT-09 until the retry number count
reaches 0. After an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 sec, it
will increase the restart count number. The maximum count number is
limited by the number set at PRT-09.
If the inverter stops due to over current or hardware diagnosis, an auto
restart is not activated. At auto restart, the acceleration options are identical
to those of speed search operation. Codes CON-72–75 can be set based on
the load. Information about the speed search function can be found at 5.27
Speed Search Operation on page 243.

[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]

249

Learning Advanced Features

•

If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The motor
may automatically start to rotate.

•

In HAND mode, auto restart resets the trip condition but it does not restart the inverter operation.

•

In AUTO mode,
if the auto restart is configured, the inverter restarts after a trip condition is released
(command via digital input is used to restart the operation).
if the auto restart is not configured and the trip condition is released using the OFF key,
or the switches at the terminal input, the inverter stays in the OFF state. Because the
command information is reset along with the trip condition, a new command is required
to operate the inverter.

5.29 Operational Noise Settings (Carrier Frequency
Settings)
Group

CON

Code

04
05

Name

Carrier Frequency
Switching Mode

LCD Display

Carrier Freq
PWM* Mode

Parameter Setting

Setting
Range

3.0 0.75~90kW

1.0–15.0

2.0 110~355kW

1.0~5.0

1.5 400/500kW

1.0~4.0

0–1

Normal PWM

Unit

kHz
-

* PWM: Pulse width modulation
Operational Noise Setting Details
Code

Description

CON-04
Carrier Freq

Adjusts motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings. Power
transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high frequency switching
voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this process refers to the carrier
frequency. If the carrier frequency is set high, it reduces operational noise from
the motor. If the carrier frequency is set low, it increases operational noise from
the motor.

CON-05 PWM
Mode

The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by changing
the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting ‘1 (LowLeakage PWM)’
reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to when ‘0 (Normal PWM)’ is
selected. However, it increases the motor noise. Low leakage PWM uses a 2

250

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
phase PWM modulation mode, which helps minimize degradation and reduces
switching loss by approximately 30%.
Item

Carrier Frequency
1.0 kHz

15 kHz

LowLeakage PWM

Normal PWM

Motor noise

↑

↓

Heat generation

↓

↑

Leakage current

↓

↑

Leakage current

↓

↑

Note
•

Carrier Frequency at Factory Default Settings:
- 0.75~90kW : 3 kHz, 110~355kW : 2kHz, 400/500kW : 1.5kHz

•

H100 Series Inverter Derating Standard (Derating): The over load rate represents an
acceptable load amount that exceeds rated load, and is expressed as a ratio based on the rated
load and the duration. The overload capacity on the H100 series inverter is 120%/1 min for
normal loads. The current rating differs from the load rating, as it also has an ambient
temperature limit. For derating specifications refer to 11.8 Inverter Continuous Rated Current
Derating on page 618.

•

Current rating for ambient temperature at normal load operation.

5.30 2nd Motor Operation
The 2nd motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors. Using the 2nd
motor operation, a parameter for the 2nd motor is set. The 2nd motor is operated when a multifunction terminal input, defined as a 2nd motor function, is turned on.
251

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

0-55

2nd Motor

2nd Motor Operation Setting Details
Code

Description

IN-65–71 Px
Define

Set one of the multi-function input terminals (P1–P5) to 26 (2nd Motor) to
display the M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function
terminal set to 2nd motor will operate the motor according to the code settings
listed below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input signals to the multifunction terminals will not read as a 2nd motor parameter.
PRT-50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2-28 (M2-Stall Lev) settings can
be used. Also, PRT-40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before M2-29 (M2-ETH 1
min) and M2-30 (M2-ETH Cont) settings.

Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2nd Motor
Code

Description

Code

Description

M2-04 Acc Time

Acceleration time

M2-15 M2-Efficiency

Motor efficiency

M2-05 M2-Dec Time

Deceleration time

M2-17 M2-Rs

Stator resistance

M2-06 M2-Capacity

Motor capacity

M2-18 M2-Lsigma

Leakage inductance

M2-07 M2-Base Freq

Motor base frequency M2-25 M2-V/F Patt

V/F pattern

M2-08 M2-Ctrl Mode

Control mode

M2-26 M2-Fwd Boost

Forward torque boost

M2-10 M2-Pole Num

Pole number

M2-27 M2-Rev Boost

Reverse torque boost

M2-11 M2-Rate Slip

Rated slip

M2-28 M2-Stall Lev

Stall prevention level

M2-12 M2-Rated Curr

Rated current

M2-29 M2-ETH 1 min

Motor heat protection
1 min rating

M2-13 M2-Noload Curr

No-load current

M2-30 M2-ETH Cont

Motor heat protection
continuous rating

M2-14 M2-Rated Volt

Motor rated voltage

252

Learning Advanced Features

Example - 2nd Motor Operation
Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operation between a 7.5 kW motor and a secondary 3.7
kW motor connected to terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting
Unit
Range

Terminal P3 configuration

P3 Define

2nd Motor

Motor capacity

M2-Capacity

3.7 kW

Control mode

M2-Ctrl Mode

V/F

5.31 Supply Power Transition
A supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to the
inverter from the inverter output power to the main supply power source (commercial power
source), or vice versa.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

Exchange

0-55

Multi-function
relay 1 items

Relay1

Inverter Line

0-41

Multi-function
output 1 items

Q1 Define

Comm Line

0-41

OUT

253

Learning Advanced Features

Supply Power Transition Setting Details
Code

Description

IN-65–71
Px Define

When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main supply
power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to ‘18 (Exchange)’. Power
will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To reverse the transition,
switch off the terminal.
Set multi-function relay or multi-function output to ‘17 (Inverter Line)’ or ‘18
(Comm Line)’. The relay operation sequence is as follows.

OUT-31 Relay 1–
OUT-36 Q1 Define

5.32 Cooling Fan Control
This function turns the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan on and off. It is used in situations where the
load stops and starts frequently or a noise-free environment is required. The correct use of cooling
fan controls can extend the cooling fan’s life.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

ADV

Cooling fan control

Fan Control

0–2

Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings

254

During Run

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
Settings
0 During Run

ADV-64 Fan Control
1

Always On

Temp
Control

Description
The cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is on. The cooling
fan stops when the power is supplied to the inverter and
the operation command is off. When the inverter heat
sink temperature is higher than its set value, the cooling
fan operates automatically regardless of its operation
status.
Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to
the inverter.
With power connected and the run operation command
on: if the setting is in Temp Control, the cooling fan will
not operate unless the temperature in the heat sink
reaches the set temperature.

Note
Despite setting ADV-64 to ‘0 (During Run)’, if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by current
input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protective function.
A capacity of 110 kW or more has a small built-in fan installed to cool the internal temperature. The
internal fan controls on / off in conjunction with the operation command of the inverter main control
fan

5.33 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings
Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 60 Hz to 50 Hz, all
other frequency (or RPM) settings, including the maximum frequency, base frequency, etc., will
change to 50 Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting from 50 Hz to 60 Hz will
change all related function item settings from 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

BAS

Input power frequency

60/50 Hz Sel

0–1

60 Hz

Set Inverter input power voltage. Low voltage fault trip level changes automatically to the set
255

Learning Advanced Features

voltage standard.
Group

BAS

Code

Name
Input
power
voltage

LCD Display

AC Input Volt

Parameter Setting
200 Type

220

400 Type

380

Setting Range

Unit

170–240
320–480

0.75~90kW

320-550

110~500kW

5.34 Read, Write, and Save Parameters
Use read, write, and save function parameters on the inverter to copy parameters from the
inverter to the keypad or from the keypad to the inverter.
Group

CNF

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Parameter read

Parameter Read

Yes

Parameter write

Parameter Write

Yes

Parameter save

Parameter Save

Yes

Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-46 Parameter
Read

Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved parameters
on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with the copied parameters.

CNF-47 Parameter
Write

Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved parameters
on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with the copied parameters. If
an error occurs during parameter writing, the previously saved data will be
used. If there is no saved data on the Keypad, ‘EEP Rom Empty’ will be
displayed.

CNF-48 Parameter
Save

256

As parameters set during communication transmission are saved to RAM,
the setting values will be lost if the power goes off and on. When setting
parameters during communication transmission, select ‘1 (Yes)’ at CNF-48 to
save the set parameter.

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

5.35 Parameter Initialization
User changes to parameters can be initialized (reset) to factory default settings on all or selected
groups. However, during a fault trip situation or operation, parameters cannot be reset.
Group

Code

CNF

Name
Parameter initialization

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Parameter Init

0–15

Unit

Parameter Initialization Setting Details
Code

CNF-40
Parameter Init

Description
Setting
0
No

LCD Display
No

Initialize all groups

All Grp

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Initialize DRV group
Initialize BAS group
Initialize ADV group
Initialize CON group
Initialize IN group
Initialize OUT group
Initialize COM group
Initialize PID group
Initialize EPI group
Initialize AP1 group
Initialize AP2 group
Initialize AP3 group
Initialize PRT group
Initialize M2 group

DRV Grp
BAS Grp
ADV Grp
CON Grp
IN Grp
OUT Grp
COM Grp
PID Grp
EPI Grp
AP1 Grp
AP2 Grp
AP3 Grp
PRT Grp
M2 Grp

Function
Initialize all data. Select ‘1 (All
Grp)’ and press the [PROG/ENT]
key to start initialization. On
completion, ‘0 (No)’ will be
displayed.
Initialize data by groups. Select
initialize group and press the
[PROG/ENT] key to start
initialization. On completion, ‘0
(No)’ will be displayed.

257

Learning Advanced Features

5.36 Parameter View Lock
Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user password.
Group
CNF

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Parameter view lock

View Lock Set

Un-locked

0–9999

Parameter view lock
password

View Lock Pw

Password

0–9999

Unit

Parameter View Lock Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-51 View Lock Pw

Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow the
steps below to register a password.
No
Procedure
1
[PROG/ENT] key on CNF-51 code will show the previous
password input window. If registration is made for the first time,
enter ‘0.’ It is the factory default.
2
If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3
If the entered password matches the saved password, a new
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until
the user enters a valid password).
4
Register a new password.
5
After registration, code CNF-51 will be displayed.

CNF-50 View Lock Set

To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. The [Locked]
sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter view lock
is enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the password. The
[locked] sign will disappear.

5.37 Parameter Lock
Use parameter lock to prevent unauthorized modification of parameter settings. To enable
parameter lock, register and enter a user password first.

258

Learning Advanced Features

Group
CNF

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Parameter lock

Key Lock Set

Un-locked

0–9999

Parameter lock
password

Key Lock Pw

Password

0–9999

Parameter Lock Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-53 Key Lock
PW

Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No
Procedures
1
Press the [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-53 code and the saved password
input window will be displayed. If password registration is being made
for the first time, enter ‘0’. It is the factory default.
2
If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
3
If the entered password matches the saved password, then a new
window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The process will
not move to next stage until the user enters a valid password).
4
Register a new password.
5
After registration, Code CNF-53 will be displayed.

CNF-52 Key Lock
Set

To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. The [Locked] sign will
be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled. Once
enabled, pressing the [PROG/ENT] key at once function code will not allow the
display edit mode to run. To disable parameter modification prohibition, reenter the password. The [Locked] sign will disappear.

If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.

5.38 Changed Parameter Display
This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this feature
to track changed parameters.
259

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

CNF

Changed parameter
display

Changed Para

View All

Changed Parameter Display Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-41
Changed Para

Setting
0
View All
1
View Changed

Function
Display all parameters
Display changed parameters only

5.39 User Group
Create a user defined group and register user-selected parameters from the existing function
groups. The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64 parameter registrations.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Multi-function key
settings

Multi Key Sel

UserGrp SelKey

Delete all user
registered codes

UserGrp
AllDel

CNF

User Group Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-42 Multi Key Sel

Select 3 (UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key setting options. If
user group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function key to
the user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display user group (USR
Grp) items on the Keypad.
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
No Procedure
1
Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A
icon will be displayed at
the top of the LCD display.
2
In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter you

260

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example, if the
[MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in DRV-01 (Cmd
Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.
1

40 CODE
5

3
4

❶ Group name and code number of the parameter
❷ Name of the parameter
❸ Code number to be used in the user group. Pressing the
[PROG/ENT] key on the code number (40 Code) will register DRV01 as code 40 in the user group.
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40
❺ Setting range of the user group code. Entering ‘0’ cancels the
settings.
3
❸ Set a code number to use to register the parameter in the user
group. Select the code number and press the [PROG/ENT] key.
4
Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If no
code is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed. Entering ‘0’
cancels the settings.
5
The registered parameters are listed in the user group in U&M
mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if necessary.
For example, a parameter can be registered as code 2, code 11, and
more in the user group.
Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group.
No. Settings
1
Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A
icon will be displayed at
the top of the LCD display.
2
In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the code that
is to be deleted.
3
Press the [MULTI] key.
4
Move to ‘YES’ on the deletion confirmation screen, and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
5
Deletion completed.
CNF-25 UserGrp AllDel

Set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to delete all registered parameters in the user group.

5.40 Easy Start On
261

Learning Advanced Features

Run Easy Start On to easily setup the basic motor parameters required to operate a motor in a
batch. Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to ‘1 (Yes)’ to activate the feature, initialize all parameters by
setting CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to ‘1 (All Grp)’, and restart the inverter to activate Easy Start On.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

CNF

Parameter easy start
settings

Easy Start On 1

Code

Parameter Setting
Yes

Setting Range

Unit

Description

Follow the procedures listed below to set the easy start on parameters.
No
Procedures
1
Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to ‘1(Yes)’.
2
Select ‘1 (All Grp)’ in CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to initialize all parameters
3
Restarting the inverter will activate Easy Start On. Set the values in the following
screens on the Keypad. To escape from Easy Start On, press the [ESC] key.

CNF-61
Easy Start
On

•

Start Easy Set: Select ‘Yes’.

•

CNF-43: Select a macro.

•

BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel: Set motor rated frequency.

•

DRV-14 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.

•

BAS-13 Rated Curr: Set motor rated current.

•

BAS-15 Rated Volt: Set motor rated voltage.

•

BAS-11 Pole Number: Set motor pole number.

•

BAS-19 AC Input Volt: Set input voltage.

•

PRT-08 Select start at trip reset

•

PRT-09 Retry Number: Sets the number of restart trial when
performing a trip reset.

•

COM-96 PowerOn Resume: Sets the serial communication restart
function.

•

CON-71 SpeedSearch: Set SpeedSearch.

•

DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set command source.

•

DRV-07 Freq Ref Src: Set Frequency Reference source.

•

AP3-01 Now Date : Set the current date.

•
AP3-02 Now Time : Set the current time.
When the settings are complete, the minimum parameter settings on the motor
have been made. The Keypad will return to a monitoring display. Now the motor

262

Learning Advanced Features

can be operated with the command source set at DRV-06.

Easy Start On Setting Details

Use caution when turning on the inverter after Easy Start On configuration. If codes such as PRT-08 (Reset
Restart), COM-96 (PowerOn Resume), or CON-71 (SpeedSearch) are configured in Easy Start On, the inverter
may start operating as soon as it is powered on.

5.41 Config (CNF) Mode
The config mode parameters are used to configure keypad related features.
Group

CNF*

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

LCD
brightness/contrast
adjustment

LCD Contrast -

Inverter S/W version

Inv S/W Ver

x.xx

Keypad S/W version

Keypad S/W
Ver

x.xx

Keypad title version

KPD Title Ver

x.xx

30–32

Power slot type

Option-x
Type

None

Erase trip history

Erase All Trip

Add title update

Add Title Up

Initialize
accumulated electric
energy

WH Count
Reset

263

Learning Advanced Features

Config Mode Parameter Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-2 LCD Contrast

Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the keypad.

CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver,
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver

Checks the OS version in the inverter and on the keypad.

CNF-12 KPD Title Ver

Checks the title version on the keypad.

CNF-30–32 Option-x Type

Checks the type of option board installed in the option slot.
The H100 inverters use type-1 option boards only (CNF-30 Option-1
Type). CNF-31 and CNF-32 are not used.

CNF-44 Erase All Trip

Deletes the stored trip history.

CNF-60 Add Title Up

When inverter SW version is updated and more code is added, CNF60 settings will add, display, and operate the added codes. Set CNF60 to ‘1 (Yes)’ and disconnect the keypad from the inverter.
Reconnecting the keypad to the inverter updates titles.

CNF-62 WH Count Reset

Initialize the accumulated electric energy consumption count.

5.42 Macro Selection

Group

CNF

264

Code

Name

Macro selection

LCD Display

Macro Select

Parameter Setting
0

Basic

Compressor

Supply Fan

Exhaust Fan

Cooling Tower

Circul. Pump

Vacuum Pump

Setting Range

Unit

0–7

Learning Advanced Features

Constant Torq

The Macro selection function is used to put various application functions together in a group. For
applications with the H100 series inverters, 7 basic Macro configurations are currently available.
Macro functions cannot be added by the user, but the data can be modified.
Macro Selection Details
Code

Description

CNF-43 Macro
Select

A list of Macro settings is displayed for user selection. When a Macro function is
selected, all the related parameters are automatically changed based on the
inverter’s Macro settings.
If ‘0 (Basic)’ is selected, all the inverter parameters, including the parameters
controlled by the Macro function, are initialized.
For other macro application settings (settings 1–7), refer to 5.42 Macro Selection
on page 264.

5.43 Timer Settings
Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer. Sets the On/Off controls to the multi-function
outputs and relays according to the timer settings.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

65–71

Px terminal
configuration

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

Timer In

0-55

Multi-function
relay 1

Relay 1
22

Timer Out

0-41

Multi-function
output 1

Q1 Define

Timer on delay

TimerOn Delay

3.00

0.00–100.00

sec

Timer off delay

TimerOff Delay

1.00

0.00–100.00

sec

OUT

Timer Setting Details
Code

Description

IN-65–71 Px Define

Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a timer
terminal by setting it to ‘35(Timer In)’.

265

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

OUT-31 Relay 1,
OUT-36 Q1 Define

Set the multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer to ’22
(Timer out)’.

OUT-55
TimerOn Delay,
OUT-56
TimerOff Delay

Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output (Timer
out) after the time set at OUT-55 has passed. When the multi-function
input terminal is off, the multi-function output or relay turns off after the
time set at OUT-56.

5.44 Multiple Motor Control (MMC)
The MMC (Multiple Motor Control) function is used to control multiple motors for a pump system.
The main motor connected with the inverter output is controlled by the PID controller. The
auxiliary motors are connected with the supply power and turned on and off by the relay within
the inverter.
Group

AP1

Code

Name

MMC function
selection

Bypass selection

LCD Display

MMC Sel

Parameter Setting

0: None

Regul Bypass 0: No

Setting Range
0

None

Single Ctrl

Multi
Follower

Multi Master

Serve Drv

AP1-47~87 and AP1-91~98 are not displayed when AP1-40 is set to ’4(Serve Drv)’.
266

Unit

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
1

Unit

Yes

1–

Number of
auxiliary motors

Num of Aux

433

Auxiliary starting
motor selection

Starting Aux

1–5

Number of
operating
auxiliary motors

Aux Motor
Run

Auxiliary motor
(#1– 4) priority

Aux Priority 1 -

Auxiliary motor
(#5– 8) priority

Aux Priority 2 -

Auxiliary motor
Aux All Stop
operation at stop

Stop order for
auxiliary motors

Auxiliary motor
pressure
difference

FIFO/FILO

Actual Start
Diff

0: No

0: FILO

Yes

FILO

FIFO

Op Time
Order

0–100

Unit

Main motor
acceleration time
when auxiliary
Aux Acc Time 2
motor # is
reduced

0–600.0

Sec

Main motor

0–600.0

Sec

Aux Dec

AuxMaxMotor2

If Extension IO option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’, AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘8’. Otherwise
AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘5’.
3

If AP1-49 is set to ‘2(Op Time Order)’, the parameter cannot be set by a user and it is
automatically changed as the operation time of aux motors.
267

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

LCD Display

deceleration
time when
auxiliary motor is
added

Time

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Auxiliary motor
start delay time

Aux Start DT

0.0–999.9

Sec

Auxiliary motor
stop delay time

Aux Stop DT

0.0–999.9

Sec

268

Name

Auto change
mode selection

Auto Ch
Mode

0: None

None

AUX
Exchange

MAIN
Exchange

Auto change
time

Auto Ch
Time

72: 00

00: 00–99: 00

Min

Auto change
frequency

Auto Ch
Level

20.00

Low Freq–High
Freq

Auto change
operation time

Auto Op
Time

Auxiliary motor
pressure
difference

Aux Stop Diff 2

0~100

Unit

Target frequency
of Aux Motor
Follower
while Multi
Freq
Master is
operating

60.00

Low Freq~ High
Freq

#1 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 1

Low Freq–High
Freq

#2 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 2

Low Freq–High
Freq

#3 auxiliary
motor start

Start Freq 3

Low Freq–High
Freq

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

frequency
64

#4 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 4

Low Freq–High
Freq

#5 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 5

Low Freq–High
Freq

664

#6 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 6

Low Freq–High
Freq

#7 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 7

Low Freq–High
Freq

#8 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq 8

Low Freq–High
Freq

#1 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 1

Low Freq–High
Freq

#2 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 2

Low Freq–High
Freq

#3 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 3

Low Freq–High
Freq

#4 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 4

Low Freq–High
Freq

#5 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 5

Low Freq–High
Freq

AP1-66~68 , AP1-75~77 and AP1-85~87 are displayed when Extension IO option is equipped or
AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
269

Learning Advanced Features

Group

270

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

#6 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 6

Low Freq–High
Freq

#7 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 7

Low Freq–High
Freq

#8 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq 8

Low Freq–High
Freq

#1 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux1 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#2 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux2 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#3 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux3 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#4 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux4 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#5 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux5 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#6 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux6 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#7 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux7 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

#8 auxiliary
motor reference
compensation

Aux8 Ref
Comp

0–Unit Band

Unit

Interlock
selection

Interlock

0: No

Yes

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

Delay time
before an
operation for the
next motor when
Interlock DT
an interlock or an
auto change on
the main motor
occur.

955

Selecting
auxiliary motor
to indicate in
[AP1-96] [AP197].

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

5.0

0–360.0

Sec

AuxRunTime
Sel

Aux 1

Aux 2

Aux 3

Aux 4

Aux 5

Aux 6

Aux 7

Aux 8

Operating
time(Day) of
auxiliary motor
chosen in [AP195].

AuxRunTime
Day

0~65535

Operating time
of auxiliary
motor chosen in
[AP1-95].

AuxRunTime
Min

00:00

00:00 ~ 23:59

Deleting
AuxRunTime
operating time of
Clr
auxiliary motor.

None

All

AP1-95~98 are available when MMC and Master Follower functions are performed.

‘5(Aux6)~7(Aux8)’ of AP1-95 and ‘7(Aux6)~9(Aux8)’ of AP1-98 and displayed when Extension IO
option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
271

Learning Advanced Features

Group

272

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range
2

Aux 1

Aux 2

Aux 3

Aux 4

Aux 5

Aux 6

Aux 7

Aux 8

Unit

Learning Advanced Features

MMC Setting Details
Code

Description

AP1-40 MMC Sel

Selects the MMC operation settings.
-None : Deactivates MMC function
-Single Ctrl : Activates general MMC function
-Multi Follower : Activates Master Follower as Multi Follower mode
-Multi Master: Activates Master Follower as Multi Master mode
-Serve Drv: Sets Serve Drv used at Master Follower.

AP1-42 Num of Aux

Decides the number of auxiliary motors to use.

AP1-43 Starting Aux

Sets the start auxiliary motor.

AP1-44 Aux Motor Run

Indicates the number of the operating auxiliary motors.

AP1-45–46 Aux Priority1–2

Indicates the operating priority of auxiliary motors.
According to setting by users, it can be influenced by Interlock,
AutoChange and operating time
Each four-digit numbers for the parameter mean the auxiliary motor
numbers and indicate the priority of auxiliary motors. In other words,
the most right number of [AP1-45 Aux Priority1] indicates the priority
of Auxiliary motor 1 and the second number from the right of [AP145 Aux Priority1] indicates the priority of Auxiliary motor 2.
[AP1-45 Aux Priority1]

The Priority of
the Aux motor4

[AP1-46 Aux Priority2]

The Priority of
the Aux motor1

The Priority of
the Aux motor8

The Priority of
the Aux motor5

AP1-48 Aux All Stop

When [AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “No” during input to stop
operating, auxiliary motors are turned off at the same time. When
[AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “YES”, auxiliary motors are turned off
gradually based on time of [AP1-54 Aux Stop DT].

AP1-49 FIFO/FILO

Sets the operating priority of MMC.
FIFO : Same as On/Off order of auxiliary motors.
FILO: Opposite to On/Off order auxiliary motors.
Op Time Order : setting automatically according to operating time of
auxiliary motors.

AP1-50 Aux Start Diff
AP1-59 Aux Stop Diff

One of the conditions to turn on and off the next auxiliary motors.
Parameters to set the difference when the difference between the
reference and feedback is more than regular value

273

Learning Advanced Features

AP1-51 Acc Time
AP1-52 Dec Time

Parameters used when AP1-40 is set to ‘Single Ctrl’
When an auxiliary motor starts or stops, the main motor stops the
PID control, and performs general acceleration and deceleration.
When an auxiliary motor starts, the main motor decelerates to the
auxiliary motor deceleration frequency set at AP1-70–74 (Stop Freq
1–5) based on the deceleration time set at AP1-52 (Dec Time).
When the auxiliary motor stops, the main motor accelerates up to
the auxiliary motor restart frequency set at AP1-61–65 (Start Freq 1–
5) based on the acceleration time set at AP1-51 (Acc Time).

AP1-53 Aux Start DT
AP1-54 Aux Stop DT

The auxiliary motors turns on or off after the auxiliary motor stop
delay time or the auxiliary motor restart delay time elapses, or if the
difference between the current reference and the feedback is greater
than the value set at AP1-50 (Actual Pr Diff).

AP1-61–65 Start Freq1–5

Sets the auxiliary motor start frequency.

AP1-70–74 Stop Freq 1–5

Sets the auxiliary motor stop frequency.

AP1-95 AuxRunTime Sel

Selects auxiliary motor to be used in AP1-96 and AP1-97.

AP1-96 AuxRunTime Day

Indicates operating time(day) selected in AP1-95.

AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min

Indicates operating time of auxiliary motors selected in AP1-95.

AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr

Deletes operating time of auxiliary motors.

OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5
OUT-36 Q1 Define

Configure the output terminals to ’21 (MMC)’ to use the terminals to
control the auxiliary motors. The number of the configured output
terminals determines the total number of auxiliary motors to be
used.

5.44.1 Multiple Motor Control (MMC) Basic Sequence
Multiple motor control (MMC) is an operation based on PID control. During an MMC operation,
the main and auxiliary motors organically operate together.
During a PID operation, the auxiliary motors are turned on when the inverter frequency reaches
the start frequencies set at AP1-61–65 (Start freq), and the difference between the PID reference
and feedback is bigger than the value set at AP1-50. Then, the auxiliary motors stop operating
when the operation frequency reach the stop frequency set at AP1-70–74 (Stop Freq 1–5) and the
difference between the PID feedback and reference becomes greater than the value set at AP1-50.

274

Learning Advanced Features

Group Code

Name

#1–5 auxiliary
61–65 motor start
frequency
AP1

Auxiliary motors
pressure
difference

#1–5 auxiliary
70–74 motor stop
frequency

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Start Freq 1–5

Frequency value
within the range

Low Freq–
High Freq

Actual Pr Diff

Percentage value
within the range

0–100 (%)

Stop Freq 1–5

Frequency value
within the range

Low Freq–
High Freq

275

Learning Advanced Features

The following diagram describes the MMC basic sequence based on FILO and FIFO settings.
Frequency
Max Freq

Output
frequency

AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-74
AP1-73

AP1-62

AP1-74
AP1-73

AP1-72

AP1-61

AP1-72

AP1-71

AP1-70

AP1-70
Time

On
Aux Motor 1

Off

Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5

AP1-59

PID Reference
AP1-50
PID Feedback
MMC Basic operation(FILO)

276

Learning Advanced Features

Frequency

Output
frequency

AP1-65

AP1-65
AP1-64

AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-63

AP1-74

AP1-62

AP1-73

AP1-62

AP1-61

AP1-72

AP1-61

AP1-74
AP1-73

AP1-72

AP1-71

AP1-70

On
Aux Motor 1

Off

Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
AP1-59

PID Reference
AP1-50
PID Feedback

MMC Basic operation(FIFO)

277

Learning Advanced Features

Priority at the moment
M3  M2  M1 /
M4  M5

Frequency
Max Freq

Priority at the moment
M3  M2  M1 /
M4  M5

Priority at the moment
M2  M1  M3 /
M4  M5
Priority at the moment
M1  M2  M3 /
M4  M5

Output
frequency

AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63
AP1-62
AP1-62
AP1-61

AP1-61 AP1-72

AP1-72

AP1-71

AP1-71
AP1-71
AP1-70
5min
10min
30min

Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)

Supposing its operating in
less than 1 minute

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%

MMC Basic operation(OP Time Order)

The following diagram is an operation graph based on the start and stop delay times set at AP1-53 (Aux
start DT) and AP1-54 (Aux stop DT). When the start or stop frequencies are reached, the auxiliary motor
waits
for the time set at AP1-53 (Aux start DT) or AP1-54 (Aux stop DT) before it
278

Learning Advanced Features

starts or stops.

5.44.2 Standby Motor
In case that the number set to MMC in [Relay 1~5] of OUT group is lower than the number of [Num of
Aux], auxiliary motor becomes Standby motor state as much as the difference.
.
Ex) In case that Replay1, 2, 3 and 4, and 5 are set to MMC and the number of [Num of Aux] is 3.
Relay1

Relay2

Relay3

Relay4

Relay5

Operable

Standby

In this case, though only Relay1, 2, 3 operate MMC function and the output of Relay is set to MMC, it
doesn’t work as long as the order is not changed by Interlock and Auto Change.
Standby auxiliary motor becomes operable when there is Interlock or Auto change in Operable
auxiliary motor.

279

Learning Advanced Features

5.44.3 Auto Change
The auto change function enables the inverter to automatically switch operations between main
and auxiliary motors. Prolonged continuous operation of a motor deteriorates motor capabilities.
The auto change function switches the motors automatically when certain conditions are met to
avoid biased use of certain motors and protect them from deterioration.
Group

Code

AP1

Name

LCD Display

Auto change mode
Auto Ch Mode
selection

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

0 None

None

1 Aux motor

AUX
Exchange

2 Main motor

Main
Exchange

Unit

Auto change time

Auto Ch Mode

Time value within
the range

00: 00–99: 00

Sec.

Auto change
frequency

Auto Ch Level

Frequency value
within the range

Low Freq–
High Freq

Auto change
operation time

Auto Op Time

Time value within
the range

Sec.

Auto Change Setting Details
Code

Description
Select the motors to apply the auto change function.

AP1-55 Auto Ch Mode

Setting
0
1
2

Description
None
Aux Exchange
Main Exchange

Refer to Examples of Auto Change Sequences below for details.
AP1-56 Auto Ch Time

Sets the auto change intervals.

AP1-57 Auto Ch Level

The parameter is for Main Exchange. In case that [AP1-55 Auto Ch Mode]
is set to Main Exchange, all the conditions for Auto Change are met
under the frequency in which output frequency of Main motors are set
in AP1-57. AP1-57 is the frequency to activate Auto Change.

280

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description

AP1-58 Auto Op Time

Indicates time to activate Auto Change. In case that other conditions for
Auto Change are not met in spite of meeting the condition of AP1-56,
the value of time in AP1-58 might be bigger than the value set at Auto
Ch Time of AP1-56 because of the failure of Auto Change.

When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘0 (None),’ the auxiliary motors operates based on the order
(sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change functionality is disabled.
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘1 (Aux Exchange)’, the auxiliary motors operate based on the
order (sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change is activated when auxiliary motors
are in the operating state over time of AP1-56 and then every auxiliary motor is stopped.
Once the auto change is operated, the auxiliary motor that started first is given the lowest priority
and all the other auxiliary motors’ priority level increases by 1. Then, general MMC operation

Start order and stop order of the auxiliary motors are based on the order set at AP1-49 (FIFO/FILO).
The following diagrams depict the auxiliary motor start and stop sequence, based on a FIFO
configuration, when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58. If all
the auxiliary motors are turned off and the inverter operation frequency is below the frequency set at
AP1-58 (Auto Op Time), auto change is operated. Then, when the inverter frequency increases due to
decrease in the feedback, auxiliary motor #2 starts instead of auxiliary motor #1 due to this auto
change (auxiliary motor #1 starts last, for it has the lowest priority).
Later on during the operation, when the feedback increases and the auxiliary motors begin to stop,
the FILO setting is applied to control the order for the auxiliary motors to stop.

continues.
281

Learning Advanced Features

Output
frequency

Option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]
[Aux Start DT]

[Aux Stop DT]

Max Freq
AP1-65

AP1-65

Perform Aux_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time]

AP1-64

AP1-65

AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-63

AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-74

AP1-62

AP1-73
AP1-61

AP1-61

AP1-70

AP1-57

AP1-70

Off

Option 2: All auxiliary motors are off.

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%

Feedback

0%
Aux Auto Change operation(FILO)

Output
frequency

option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]

Perform Aux_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time]

Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-74

AP1-62
AP1-61

AP1-57

On
Off

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Feedback

100%
0%
Aux Auto Change operation(FIFO)

282

AP1-70

AP1-62
AP1-72

Learning Advanced Features

Priority of the moment
M3  M2  M1 /
M4  M5

Inverter
Out Freq
Max Freq

Priority of the moment
M4  M5  M3 /
M2  M1

Pr iority of the moment
M2  M1  M3 /
M4  M5
Priority of the moment
M1  M2  M3 /
M4  M5

Option 1: [AP1-58 Auto Op Time] >= [AP1-56: Auto Ch Time]
AP1-65

AP1-65

Perform Aux_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time] AP1-64

AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-62

Priority of the moment
M4  M5  M3 /
M2  M1

AP1-62
AP1-61
AP1-61

AP1-72

AP1-74

AP1-63

AP1-72

AP1-73
AP1-72

AP1-71

AP1-71
AP1-70
AP1-70
5min
10min
30min
On
Fx

Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)

Supposing its operation in
less than 1 minute

Off

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3
Standby motor : M4, M5

Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M1, M2

Aux Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when operable motor and standby motor are set to 3 and 2 each

When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘2 (Main Exchange),’ the system uses all the motors (main and
auxiliary motors) regardless of the types. The auxiliary motor with the highest priority is operated
first and used as the main motor. Then, when the auto change conditions are met, this motor is
stopped and the motor priorities are re-arranged. This way, the system always operates the motor
with the highest priority and uses it as the main motor of the MMC operation. In this case, before
auto change is operated for the main motor, the interlock delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT) is
applied.

283

Learning Advanced Features

NOTE
Auto change does not work while the auxiliary motors are operating. Auto change is operated only
when all the auxiliary motors are stopped and if all the conditions set for the auto change are met. When
the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the highest priority becomes
the starting auxiliary motor. If the inverter power is turned off then turned back on, the auxiliary motor
set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux) becomes the starting auxiliary motor.
The following diagrams depict the auto change operation when AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘2
(Main),’ when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58. If the inverter
operation frequency is below the frequency set at AP1-57, all the auxiliary motors including the start
auxiliary motor are turned off. After the delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT) elapses, the ‘Main’ auto
change is operated. After the ‘Main’ auto change, the auxiliary motor that was turned on after the
starting auxiliary motor becomes the main motor.
In the following diagrams, because auxiliary motor #1 is the starting auxiliary motor. Auxiliary motor #2
becomes the main motor after the auto change. The auxiliary motor on/off operation is identical to that
of Aux Exchange, and the ‘off’ conditions differ based on the FIFO/FILO configuration.

284

Learning Advanced Features

Freqency
Max Freq

Output
frequency

Main_
Main_Exch occurs

AP1-70
Fx
Inv State

AP1-70

On
Off
Run

Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]

Stop

Main Motor

Main Auto Change operation(FILO)
Frequency
Max Freq

Output
frequency

Main_
Main_Exch occurs

AP1-70
Fx
Inv State

AP1-70

On
Off
Run

Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]

Stop

Main Motor

Main Auto Change operation(FIFO)

285

Learning Advanced Features

Priori ty at the moment
M1  M3  M2 /
M4  M5

Pr iority at the moment
M4  M5  M3 /
M2  M1

Pr iori ty at the moment
M1  M2  M3 /
M4  M5

Frequency
Max Freq

AP1-65

Per form Main_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time]

AP1-65
AP1-64

AP1-63

AP174

AP1-63
AP1-62
AP1-62

AP1-72

AP1-61

AP1-72
AP1-71

AP1-71

5min

Supposing its operation in
less than 1minute

10min
30min

Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)

Off
Run

Inv State

Stop

Main Motor

Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3

Main Motor

Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3
Standby motor : M4, M5

Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M1, M2

Main Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each

5.44.4 Interlock
When there is motor trouble, the interlock feature is used to stop the affected motor and replace it
with another that is not currently operating (off state). To activate the interlock feature, connect
the cables for abnormal motor signal to the inverter input terminal and configure the terminals as
interlock 1–5 inputs. Then, the inverter decides the motor’s availability based on the signal inputs.
The order in which the alternative motor is selected is decided based on the auto change mode
selection options set at AP1-55.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

AP1

Interlock selection

Interlock

Setting Range
0

YES

Unit
-

After configuring the IN-65–71 multi-purpose input terminals as Interlock input 1–5, if an interlock
signal is received from an auxiliary motor, the output contacts are turned off for the motor and the
286

Learning Advanced Features

motor is excluded from the MMC operation. This causes the priority level of the auxiliary motors
with lower priority level than the interlocked motor to be increased by 1.
The interlock is released when the input terminals (IN-65–71) are turned off, and the relevant
auxiliary motor is included in the MMC operation again, with lowest priority.
When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the highest
priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor.
When the multi-purpose input terminals (IN-65–71, P1–7 Define) are set for the interlock feature,
an interlock is ‘Off’ when the contacts are valid, and ‘On’ when they are invalid.
InterLock Setting Details
Code

Description

AP1-90 InterLock

Enables or disables the Interlock.

AP1-91 Interlock DT

Sets the delay time before the Interlock occurs.

Note
IN-65–71 PxDefine: Select the terminal from the input terminal function group (IN-65–71) and set
Interlock 1-5 respectively with the correct motor order. When auto change mode selection (AP1–55) is
set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5 motors are operated, including the main motor, the interlock
numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer to the motors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are
connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
However, if auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and auxiliary motors
are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock 1,2,3,4 are the monitors
connected to Relay 1,2,3,4.

287

Learning Advanced Features

The figure below shows the motor operating as a sequence by FILO. The motor turns on from the
starting auxiliary motor (Starting Aux) by order, and turns off depending on the rise of PID
feedback. At this point, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #2 by multi-function input, the
auxiliary motor turns off. The output frequency falls to the frequency set at AP1-71, and rises again.
Then, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #1. The auxiliary motor stops and falls to the
frequency set at AP1-71, and then rises again. Interlock #2 should be released first, then release
interlock #1 to let the auxiliary motor operate (When interlocks are released, they will have the
lowest priority of the operating motors). If the auxiliary motor turns off by a rise of Feedback, the
auxiliary motors turns off in order from 1 to 5, because auxiliary motor #1 turned on last. The
interlocked auxiliary motor will have the lowest priority.

288

Learning Advanced Features

Frequency
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-64
AP1-63

AP1-74

AP1-62
AP1-73

AP1-62
AP1-61

AP1-72
AP1-71

AP1-71
AP1-70
On
Fx

Off

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Interlock 1
Interlock 3
100%
Feedback
0%
Interlock operation(Op time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each

When interlock is released, the auxiliary motor’s priority becomes different. When Interlock occurs
at auxiliary motor #3, the priority is number 1>3>4>5>2. When it occurs at auxiliary motor #1, the
priority is number 3>4>5>2>1. The figure below shows the order of the auxiliary motors
activating depending on the priority (of Interlock occurring and releasing). In the figure, the order
is the same for FILO/FIFO, because the auxiliary motor turns on.
Max
F req

AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-61

AP1-73
AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-70

On
Off

Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
F eedba ck
Interlock 1
In terlock 2
Inter loc k o per ation

In case that Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each, it operates in the order of
“Aux Motor 2  Aux Motor 4  Aux Motor 5”.
289

Learning Advanced Features

5.44.5 Aux Motor Time Change
It is used to set a motor to the smallest number among Drives not inter-locked by [AP1-43 Starting
Aux] and place others in order based on it when operating time of every motor is deleted through
<1:All> of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr].
In case that operating time of each motor is deleted through <2: Aux1> ~ <6: Aux5> of [AP1-98
AuxRunTime Clr] or changed by combining [AP1-96 AuxRunTime Day] and [AP1-97 AuxRunTime
Min], motor stopped changes the priority with motor stopped as operating motor does with
operating motor.
The table below shows the case to change the operating time of Aux Motor2 running on the same
condition of Sequence1.
Sequences

Aux Priority 1
(Operating
time: min)
Aux Motor3
(00:30)

Aux Priority 2
Aux Priority 3
Aux Priority 4
(Operating
(Operating
(Operating
time: min)
time: min)
time: min)
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor4
(00:40)
(00:50)
(01:30)

Set <3 Aux2of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr]
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor3
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor4
(00:00)
(00:30)
(00:50)
(01:30)

Set time of Aux2to 2:00 through [AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min]
Aux Motor3
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor4
(00:30)
(00:50)
(02:00)
(01:30)

Aux Priority 5
(Operating
time: min)
Aux Motor 5
(01:50)

Aux Motor 5
(01:50)

Aux Motor 5
(01:50)
< Stopping >

The table below shows the case to change the operating time of Aux Motor5 stopped on the
same condition of Sequence1
Sequences

290

Aux Priority 1
(Operating
time: min)
Aux Motor3
(00:30)

Aux Priority 2
Aux Priority 3
Aux Priority 4
(Operating
(Operating
(Operating
time: min)
time: min)
time: min)
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor4
(00:40)
(00:50)
(01:30)

Set <6: Aux5> of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr]
Aux Motor3
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor 5
(00:30)
(00:40)
(00:50)
(0)

Set time of Aux5 to 2:00 through [AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min]
Aux Motor3
Aux Motor2
Aux Motor1
Aux Motor4
(00:30)
(00:40)
(00:50)
(01:30)

Aux Priority 5
(Operating
time: min)
Aux Motor 5
(01:50)

Aux Motor 4
(01:30)

Aux Motor 5
(02:00)

Learning Advanced Features

5.44.6 Regular Bypass
This function controls the motor speed based on the feedback amount instead of using the PID.
Auxiliary motors may be controlled with this feature based on the feedback amount.
Group

AP1

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Bypass selection

Regul Bypass

61–
65

#1–5 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq
1–5

Frequency value
within the range

Freq Low
Limit–Freq
High limit

70–
74

#1–5 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq
1–5

Frequency value
within the range

Low Freq–
High Freq

31–
35

Multi-function
relay1–5

Relay 1–5

Multiple motor
control(MMC)

Multi-function 1
item

Q1 Define

KEB Operation

0 No
1 Yes

Unit
-

Regular Bypass Detail Settings
Code

Description

AP1-41 Regular Bypass

Sets the regular bypass mode.
Mode Setting
0
No
1
Yes

AP1-61–65 Start Freq 1–5

Sets the auxiliary motor start frequency.

AP1-70–74 Stop Freq 1–5

Sets the auxiliary motor stop frequency.

OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5
OUT-36 Q1 Define

Set OUT31–35 to ’21 (MMC)’ to use the out terminal for auxiliary
motor operation. The number of configured output terminals
determines the total number of auxiliary motors to be used.

When an input set by the PID feedback of the analog input terminal (I or V1 or Pulse) is 100%,
divide the area by the number of motors being used (including the main motor). Each auxiliary
motor turns on when feedback reaches the relevant level and turns off when feedback goes
below the relevant level. The primary motor increases its speed based on the feedback and when
it reaches the start frequency of the relevant auxiliary motor and decelerates to the stop
frequency.
291

Learning Advanced Features

The primary motor reaccelerates when the frequency increases, depending on the feedback
increase. If the relevant auxiliary motor is turned off because of the feedback decrease, the primary
motor accelerates from the stop frequency to the start frequency.
To use the regular bypass function, ‘1 (Yes)’ has to be selected in the MMC and PID functions. Only
FILO operates between the AP1-49 (FIFO/FILO) in a regular bypass function.
Out Freq
area(1) area(2) area(3) area(4) area(5) area(6)
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-62
AP1-61

AP1-74
AP1-73
AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-70
16.6%

33.3%

49.9% 66.6%

83.3%

0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Aux Motor 1

On
Off

Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Regular ByPass

5.44.7 Aux Motor PID Compensation
292

Learning Advanced Features

When the number of operating auxiliary motors increases, the flow rate of the pipe also increases
and the pressure of the pipe line decreases. Aux motor PID compensation compensates for this
pressure when the number of the auxiliary motor increases. By adding the additional PID
reference value (relevant to the auxiliary motor) to the current reference, the loss of pressure can
be compensated for.
Auxiliary PID Compensation Detailed Settings

Code

Description

AP1-80–84
Aux 1–5 Ref
Comp

Set the relevant PID reference compensation rate whenever the auxiliary motor is
turned on. The PID reference can be set over 100%, but when it exceeds 100%, the
maximum value of the PID reference is limited to 100%.
Unit band value is the value between unit 100%–0%.
< Auxiliary motor PID compensation>

NOTE
293

Learning Advanced Features

When the aux reference value is set to 100%, the final PID reference becomes 100%. In this case,
output frequency of the inverter does not decelerate because the PID output does not decelerate
even if the input feedback value is 100%.

5.44.8 Master Follower
It is used to control multiple inverters with an inverter. When [AP1-40 MMC Sel] is set to <2 : Multi
Follower> or <3 : Multi Master>, it is called as {Leader Drive}. The rest inverters set to <4 : Serve
Drv> are called as {Serve Drive}.

Leader Drive
It is an inverter to execute PID control with PID Feedback from sensor, control Multi Motor and
function as Master of communication.
In addition, if it is set to Leader Drive, Drive turned on at first performs functions of Soft Fill(PrePID), Sleep/WakeUp and Aux Motor PID Compensation).
Serve Drive
It is an inverter to operate motors with Leader Drive.
Each inverter and motor has the same number(ID), [COM-01 Int485 St ID].
Among the operating motors, the motor with the lowest priority is called Main Motor and the rest
of motors are called as Aux Motor.
※In case that every motor is stopped, the motor with the highest priority is called as Main Motor.
This is, Main Motor and Aux Motor are changed according to the situation and Leader Drive and
Serve Drive are fixed.
The picture below represents foundational composition.

294

Learning Advanced Features

Leader Drive
ID 1

Serve Drive
ID 2

Serve Drive
ID 3

Serve Drive
ID 4

Serve Drive
ID 8

Inverter
Setting

Communication
Line
Sensor

Main
Motor

Aux
Motor

5.44.8.1 Multi Mater Mode
Only Main Motor can be controlled by PID and Aux Motor performs the operating mode with
Follower Freq.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1)Motor2 (M2)Motor3 (M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time)
Out Freq

Follower Freq

M1, M2, M3

M1, M2

PI D Limit High

M1, M2
M3

St art Freq 3
St op Freq 3
St art Freq 2
PI D Output

Stop Freq 2

St art Freq 1

M1 OutFreq

M2 OutFreq

M3 OutFreq
t

Run Cmd

FeedBack

PI D Reference

M1 Cmd Freq

Main Motor

Follower Freq
Aux Motor

Main Motor

PID Ctrl

Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

Main Motor

Aux Motor

Main Motor

PID Ctrl

M3 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

Main Motor

Aux Motor
PID Ctrl

.
295

Learning Advanced Features

A condition that extra Aux Motor is turned on .
After a real operating frequency reaches the frequency set in Start Freq belonging to the next
priority number and the time set in AP1-53(Aux Start DT) passes, AP1-44(Aux Motor Run) increases
(+1) and it becomes Aux Motor, accelerating based on time of [DRV-03 Acc Time]/[DRV-04 Dec
Time] until [AP1-60 Follower Freq].
At the same time, as an inverter corresponding to the next priority is turned on, the motor
becomes Main Motor(available PID control). It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux
Priority].
A condition that Aux Motor is turned off.
If the real operating frequency of Main Motor is lower than the frequency set in Stop Freq, AP144(Aux Motor Run) decreases(-1) after the time set in AP1-54(Aux Stop DT) and the present Main
Motor becomes Aux Motor, decelerating based on time of [DRV-04 Dec Time] until 0Hz.
At the same time, the motor corresponding to the previous priority becomes Main
Motor(available PID control). It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].

5.44.8.2 Multi Follower Mode
It is a mode to control motors turned on with the same PID output frequency.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1)Motor2 (M2)Motor3 (M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time).

296

Learning Advanced Features

Out Freq

High Freq

PID Limit High

Start Freq 3

Stop Freq 3

M1, M2

M1, M2
Start Freq 2
Stop Freq 2

PID Output
Start Freq 1

M2
M1 OutFreq

M2 OutFreq

M3 OutFreq
t

Run Cmd

PID Reference

FeedBack

M1 Cmd Freq

Main Motor

Aux Motor

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

M2 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

Main Motor

Main
Motor

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

M3 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

A condition that extra Aux Motor is turned on .
After a real operating frequency reaches the frequency set in Start Freq belonging to the next
priority number and the time set in AP1-53(Aux Start DT) passes, AP1-44(Aux Motor Run) increases
(+1). In addition, Aux Motor with the next priority of Main Motor is turned on and the new
operating Aux Motor becomes Main Motor. Operating motors can be controlled together by PID.
It is possible to check the priority in [AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].

A condition that Aux Motor is turned off.
If the real operating frequency of Main Motor is lower than the frequency set in Stop Freq, AP144(Aux Motor Run) decreases(-1) after the time set in AP1-54(Aux Stop DT) and the present Main
Motor becomes Aux Motor, decelerating based on time of [DRV-04 Dec Time] until 0Hz.
At the same time, the rest of operating motors last PID control. It is possible to check the priority in
[AP1-45/46 Aux Priority].

5.44.8.3 Re-arrangement of priority based on operating time.
The priority of each Motor is arranged automatically based on operating time.
297

Learning Advanced Features

Among operating Motors, Motor with the longest operating time is placed at the last.
The moment for the priority arrangement is the time when the number of motor is changed.
Pr iority at the moment

M2  M3  M1
Out Freq
Pr iority at the moment

M2  M1  M3
M2, M3, M1

PI D Limit High

Follower Freq

M2, M3

Start Freq 3
Stop Freq 3
Start Freq 2

PID Output

Start Freq 1

St op Freq 1
M2 OutFreq

M1 OutFreq

Init ial Priority
M1  M2  M3

More than 1min

M3 OutFreq

Less than 1min

Run Cmd

FeedBack

M1 Cmd Freq

PID Reference

Aux Motor

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq

Main Motor

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

Follower Freq
Aux Motor

Main Motor

M3 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

The picture below shows the operating time of M1 is the longest during Multi Follower Mode.
Priority at the moment

M2  M3  M1
Out Freq
Priority at the moment

M2  M1  M3

High Freq

PID Limit High
M2, M3, M1

M2, M3, M1

PI D Output
St art Freq 3

Stop Freq 3
M2, M1

St art Freq 2
M2, M3, M1
St art Freq 1
M2, M3

Stop Freq 1
Init ial Priority
M1  M2  M3

M1 Ou tFreq
More t han 1min

M2 Ou tFreq

M3 OutFreq

Less than 1min

[Aux Stop DT]

Run Cmd

FeedBack

M1 Cmd Freq

PI D Reference

Main Motor

Au x Motor
PID Ctrl

M2 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

M3 Cmd Freq

Main Motor

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

The conditions that Aux Motor is turned on and off are same as the description of Multi Master
Mode and Multi Follower Mode.

298

Learning Advanced Features

5.44.8.4 Master Follower Interlock
As Interlock signals are sent from Serve Drive, Leader Drive puts together through Communication
Line. Every Trip such as HAND State or OFF State of Serve Drive is processed by Interlock in Leader
Drive .
This is, other Server Drives keep performing Master Follower function except the cases that it is in
HAND/OFF State or there are trips
If Leader Drive is HAND State or OFF state, Master Follower system is not activated.
In case that Pipe Broken and Interlock Trip are caused in Leader Drive, every drive operating is
stopped and Master Follower keeps performing the function except Leader Drive if there is
another Trip.
(Leader Drive executes PID control and overall system control consistently.)
In this operating priority (M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔ M8), if interlock3 or any
trip and HAND/OFF State are caused, the motor is activated in this order(M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M4 ↔ M5
↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔ M8).
Leader Drive
ID 1

Interlock1

Serve Drive
ID 2

Interlock2

Serve Drive
ID 3

Serve Drive
ID 4

Serve Drive
ID 8

Interlock3

Interlock4

Interlock8

Inverter
Setting

Communication
Line

Sensor

Main
Motor

Aux
Motor

The picture below shows the function in case that M3 becomes HAND/OFF State or interlock and
Trip are caused.(supposing that the priority is not changed),(interlock is the function
corresponding to B terminal(Normal close)).

299

Learning Advanced Features

Time to sort the priority
according to the operation
time.

Out Freq

Follower Freq

M1, M2, M3

M1, M2

PID Limit High

M1, M2, M3

M1, M2

M1, M2
M3

Start Freq 3
Stop Freq 3

M3
Start Freq 2
PID Output

Stop Freq 2

Start Freq 1

M1 OutFreq

M2 OutFreq

FreeRun

M3 OutFreq

t
Run Cmd

FeedBack

PID Reference

M1 Cmd Freq

Main Motor

Follower Freq
Main Motor
PID Ctrl

Aux Motor

PID Ctrl

Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

M3 Cmd Freq

Aux Motor

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

Aux Motor

Main Motor

Main Motor
PI D Ctrl

Aux Motor

Main Motor

PI D Ctrl

Main Motor
PID Ctrl

Aux Motor

Aux Motor
PID Ctrl

M3
State
ChangeInterlock
or Trip

5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control
Set reference values (on/off level) for analog input and control output relay or multi-function
output terminal on/off status accordingly.
Group Code Name

ADV

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

0–8

Output terminal on/off
control mode

On/Off Ctrl
Src

Output terminal on
level

On-C Level

90.00

Output terminal off
level–100.00%

Output terminal off
level

Off-C Level

10.00

0.00–Output terminal
on level

Multi-function relay 1
item

Relay 1

Multi-function output 1
item

Q1 Define

OUT

300

LCD Display

26 On/Off -

Learning Advanced Features

Multi-function Output On/Off Control Setting Details

Code

Description

ADV-66 OnOff Ctrl Src

Select analog input On/Off control.

ADV-67 On Ctrl Level ,
ADV-68 Off Ctrl Level

Set On/Off level at the output terminal.

5.46 Press Regeneration Prevention
Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, motor operation speed
automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration zone.
Group

ADV

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Select press
regeneration
prevention for press

RegenAvd
Sel

0–1

Press regeneration
prevention operation
voltage level

RegenAvd
Level

Press regeneration
prevention
compensation

CompFreq
Limit

350 V

200 V class:
300–400 V

700 V

400 V class:
600–800 V

1.00 (Hz)

0.00–10.00 Hz

301

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

frequency limit
77

Press regeneration
prevention P-Gain

RegenAvd
Pgain

50.0 (%)

0 .0–100.0%

Press regeneration
prevention I gain

RegenAvd
Igain

500 (ms)

20–30000 ms

Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details
Code

Description

ADV-74
RegenAvd Sel

Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during a constant speed
motor operation may force excessive stress on the brake unit, which may
damage or shorten brake life. To prevent this, select ADV-74 (RegenAvd Sel) to
control DC link voltage and disable the brake unit operation.

ADV-75
RegenAvd Level

Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage goes up
due to regeneration.

ADV-76
CompFreq Limit

Set an alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation frequency
during regeneration prevention.

ADV-77
RegenAvd Pgain
ADV-78
RegenAvd Igain

To prevent regeneration zone, set P-Gain/I gain in the DC link voltage suppress
PI controller.

Note
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations; it only operates
during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is activated, output frequency
302

Learning Advanced Features

may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).

5.47 Analog Output
An analog output terminal provides an output of 0–10 V voltage, 4–20 mA current, or 0–32 kHz
pulse.

5.47.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output
An output size can be adjusted by selecting an output option at the AO (Analog Output) terminal.
Set the analog voltage/current output terminal setting switch (SW5) to change the output type
(voltage/current).
Group

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Analog output1

AO1 Mode

0–15

Analog output1 gain

AO1 Gain

100.0

-1000.0–1000.0

Analog output1 bias

AO1 Bias

0.0

-100.0–100.0

Analog output1 filter

AO1 Filter

0–10000

Analog constant
output1

AO1 Const % 0.0

0.0–100.0

Analog output1
monitor

AO1 Monitor

0.0–1000.0

0.0

Frequency

303

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
Select a constant value for output. The following example for output voltage
setting.
Setting
0
Frequency
1
2

OUT-01 AO1
Mode

DC Link
Volt

Output
Power
Target
Freq
Ramp
Freq
PID Ref
Value
PID Fdk
Value
PID
Output
Constant
EPID1
Output

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

304

Output
Current
Output
Voltage

Function
Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10 V output is
made from the frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq).
10 V output is made from 150% of inverter rated current.
Sets the outputs based on the inverter output voltage. 10 V
output is made from a set voltage in BAS-15 (Rated V).
If 0 V is set in BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models output
10 V based on the actual input voltages (240 V and 480 V
respectively).
Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a standard.
Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 V DC for 200 V
models, and 820 V DC for 400 V models.
Monitors output wattage. 150% of rated output is the
maximum display voltage (10 V).
Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10 V at the
maximum frequency (DRV-20).
Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function as a
standard. May vary with actual output frequency. Outputs 10 V.
Outputs command value of a PID controller as a standard.
Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as a standard.
Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
Outputs output value of a PID controller as a standard. Outputs
approximately 10 V at 100%.
Outputs OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a standard.
Output is based on the output value of the external PID1
controller. Outputs 10 V in 100%.

Learning Advanced Features

14
15

EPID Ref
Val
EPID Fdb
Val

Output is based on the reference value of the external PID1
controller. Outputs 6.6 V in 100%.
Output is based on the feedback amount of the external PID1
controller. Outputs 6.6 V in 100%.

Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it will
operate as shown below.
121

34567589:
;<=3456

121 >
(Detected frequency–Detected frequency
width/2)
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the detected
frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-4 output is as shown in
the graph below.

5
6

Over Load
IOL

7
8
9

Under Load
Fan Warning
Stall

Over Voltage

Low Voltage

12
13

Over Heat
Lost Command

Outputs a signal at motor overload.
Outputs a signal when the inverter input current
exceeds the rated current and a protective function is
activated to prevent damage to the inverter, based on
inverse proportional characteristics.
Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded and
stalled.
Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
rises above the protective operation voltage.
Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
drops below the low voltage protective level.
Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog input
terminal and RS-485 communication command at the
terminal block.

311

Learning Advanced Features

312

RUN

Stop

16
17

Steady
Inverter Line

Comm Line

Speed Search

Ready

MMC

Timer Out

Trip

DB Warn %ED

Outputs a signal when communication power is
present and an I/O expansion card is installed. It also
outputs a signal when losing analog input and
communication power commands.
Outputs a signal when an operation command is
entered and the inverter outputs voltage.
No signal output during DC braking.

Outputs a signal at operation command off, and when
there is no inverter output voltage.
Outputs a signal in steady operation.
Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the
inverter line.
Outputs a signal when multi-function input terminal
(switching) is entered. For details, refer to 5.31Supply
Power Transition page on 253.
Outputs a signal during inverter speed search
operation.
For details, refer to 5.27Speed Search Operation on page
243.
Outputs a signal when the inverter is in stand by mode
and ready to receive external operation commands.
Used as a multi-motor control function. By configuring
the relay output and the multi-function output to
MMC and configuring the AP1-40–AP1-92, it can
conduct the necessary operations for multi-motor
control function.
A timer function to operate terminal output after a
certain time by using multi-function terminal block
input. For details, refer to 5.43Timer Settings on page
265.
Outputs a signal after a fault trip.
Refer to 5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control on
page 259 .
Refer to 0. Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor
Configuration on page 295.

Learning Advanced Features

On/Off Control

27
28
29

Fire Mode
Pipe Break
Damper Err

Lubrication

PumpClean Sel

32
33

LDT Trip
Damper
Control

CAP.Warning

35
36
37
38
39

Fan Exchange
AUTO State
HAND State
TO
Except Date

40
41

KEB Operating
BrokenBelt

Outputs a signal using an analog input value as a
standard.
Refer to 5.45 Multi-function Output On/Off Control on
page 259 .
Outputs a signal when Fire mode is in operation.
Outputs a signal when a pipe is broken.
Outputs a signal when damper open signal is not
entered. For more details, refer to 0
Damper Operation on page 194.
Outputs a signal when a lubrication function is in
operation.
Outputs a signal when a pump cleaning function is in
operation.
Outputs a signal when an LDT trip occurs.
Outputs a signal when a damper open signal is set at
IN-65–71 multi-function terminals and run command
is on.
Outputs a signal when value of the PRT-85 is lower
than the value of the PRT-86 (CAP life cycle
examination do not operate properly).
Outputs a signal when fan needs to be replaced.
Outputs a signal in AUTO mode.
Outputs a signal in HAND mode.
Outputs a signal at pulse output.
Outputs a signal when operating the exception day
schedule.
Outputs a signal at KEB operation.
Outputs a signal when a Broken belt is in operation.

OUT-36 Q1
Define

Select an output item for the multi-function output terminal (Q1) of the terminal
block. Q1 stands for the open collector TR output.

OUT-41 DO
State

Used to check On/Off state of the D0 by each bit.

•

FDT-1 and FDT-2 functions are related to the frequency setting of the inverter. If the inverter
enters standby mode by pressing the off key during auto mode operation, FDT-1 and FDT-2
function operation may be different because the set frequency of the inverter is different
compared to the set frequency of the auto mode.

313

Learning Advanced Features

•

If monitoring signals such as ‘Under load’ or’ LDT’ are configured at multi-function output
terminals, signal outputs are maintained unless certain conditions defined for signal cutoff are
met.

5.48.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay
The inverter can output a fault trip state using the multi-function output terminal (Q1) and relay
(Relay 1).
Group

OUT

314

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Fault trip output mode

Trip Out Mode

010

bit

Multi-function relay 1

Relay 1

Trip

Multi-function relay 2

Relay 2

Run

Multi-function relay 3

Relay 3

none

Multi-function relay 4

Relay 4

none

Multi-function relay 5

Relay 5

none

Multi-function output1

Q1 Define

none

Fault trip output on delay

TripOut OnDly

0.00

0.00–100.00

sec

Fault trip output off delay

TripOut OffDly

0.00

0.00–100.00

sec

Learning Advanced Features

Fault Trip Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details
Code

Description
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Item
bit on
bit off
Keypad
display
Select a fault trip output terminal/relay and select ‘29’ (Trip Mode) at codes OUT- 31–
33. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant terminal and relay will
operate. Depending on the fault trip type, terminal and relay operation can be
configured as shown in the table below.
Setting
Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
Operates when low voltage fault trips occur

Operates when fault trips other than low voltage occur

Operates
when auto restart fails (PRT-08–09)

OUT-30
Trip Out Mode

OUT-31–35 Relay1–
5

Set relay output (Relay 1–5).

OUT-36
Q1 Define

Select output for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open collector TR output.

5.48.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings
Set on-delay and off-delay times separately to control the output terminal and relay operation
times. The delay time set at codes OUT-50–51 applies to multi-function output terminal (Q1) and
relay, except when the multi-function output function is in fault trip mode.
Group

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Unit

Multi-function output
DO On Delay 0.00
On delay

0.00–100.00

sec

Multi-function output
DO Off Delay 0.00
Off delay

0.00–100.00

sec

Select multi-function
output terminal

00–11

bit

DO NC/NO
Sel

Parameter Setting

000000*

*Multi-function output terminals are numbered. Starting from the right (number 1), the number
increases to the left.

315

Learning Advanced Features

Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details
Code

Description

OUT-50
DO On Delay

When a relay operation signal (operation set in OUT 31–35, 36) occurs, the relay
turns on or the multi-function output operates after the time delay set at OUT-50.

OUT-51
DO Off Delay

When relay or multi-function output is initialized (off signal occurs), the relay turns
off or multi-function output turns off after the time delay set at OUT-54.

OUT-52
DO NC/NO Sel

Select the terminal type for the relay and multi-function output terminal. By setting
the relevant bit to ‘0,’ it will operate A terminal (Normally Open). Setting it to ‘1’ will
operate B terminal (Normally Closed). Shown below in the table are Relay 1–5 and
Q1 settings starting from the right bit.
Item
B terminal (Normal close)
A terminal (Normal open)
Keypad
display

5.49 Operation State Monitor
The inverter’s operation condition can be monitored using the keypad. If the monitoring option is
selected in config (CNF) mode, a maximum of four items can be monitored simultaneously.
Monitoring mode displays three different items on the keypad, but only one item can be
displayed in the status window at a time.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Display item condition
display window

AnyTime
Para

Frequency

Monitor mode
display 1

Monitor
Line-1

Frequency

CNF

316

Learning Advanced Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

Monitor mode
display 2

Monitor
Line-2

Output
Current

Monitor mode
display 3

Monitor
Line-3

Output
Voltage

Monitor mode initialize

Mon Mode
Init

Operation State Monitor Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-20
AnyTime Para

Select items to display on the top-right side of the keypad screen. Choose the
parameter settings based on the information to be displayed. Codes CNF-20–23
share the same setting options as listed below.
Setting
Function
0
Frequency
On stop, displays the set frequency. During operation,
displays the actual output frequency (Hz).
1
Speed
On stop, displays the set speed (rpm). During operation,
displays the actual operating speed (rpm).
2
Output
Displays output current.
Current
3
Output
Displays output voltage.
Voltage
4
Output Power Displays output power.
5
WHour
Displays inverter power consumption.
Counter
6
DCLink
Displays DC link voltage within the inverter.
Voltage
7
DI Status
Displays input terminal status of the terminal block.
Starting from the right, displays P1–P8.
8
DO Status
Displays output terminal status of the terminal block.
Starting from the right: Relay1, Relay2, and Q1.
9
V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal V1 (V).
10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as a
percentage. If -10 V, 0 V, +10 V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value (V).
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as a
percentage.
15 I2
Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).

317

Learning Advanced Features

Code

Description
16
17
18

Monitor[mA]
I2 Monitor[%]
PID Output
PID Ref Value

19
20
21

PID Fdb Value
EPID1 Mode
EPID1 Output

Displays input current terminal I2 value as a percentage.
Displays the PID controller output.
Displays the scale of the reference value and sets the
value of PID reference.
Displays the PID controller feedback volume.
Displays the External PID1 mode.
Displays the External PID1output value.

EPID1 Ref Val

Displays the External PID1 reference value.

CNF-21–23
Monitor Line-x

Select the items to be displayed in monitor mode. Monitor mode is the first mode
displayed when the inverter is powered on. A total of three items, from monitor
line-1 to monitor line- 3, can be displayed simultaneously.

CNF-24 Mon
Mode Init

Selecting ‘1 (Yes)’ initializes CNF-20–23.

Note
Inverter power consumption
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and the results
are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to ‘1 (Yes)’ will reset cumulated electric energy
consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below:
•

Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.

•

1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format.

•

100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.

•

More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed up to
65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535 MW will reset the value to 0, and units will return to kW. It will
be displayed in 999.9 kW format).

5.50 Operation Time Monitor
318

Learning Advanced Features

This feature is used to monitor the inverter and fan operation times.
Group

CNF

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting
Range

Unit

Cumulated inverter
power-on time

On-time

00000DAY 00:00

Day
hh:mm

Cumulated inverter
operation time

Run-time

00000DAY 00:00

Day
hh:mm

Inverter operation
accumulated time
initialization

Time Reset

0–1

Cooling fan operation
accumulated time

Fan time

00000DAY 00:00

Day
hh:mm

Cooling fan operation
accumulated time
initialization

Fan Time
Reset

0–1

Operation Time Monitor Setting Details
Code

Description

CNF-70 On-time

Displays accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in [Day Hr:
Min (00000DAY 00:00)] format.

CNF-71 Run-time

Displays accumulated time of voltage output by operation command input.
Information is displayed in [Day Hr: Min (00000DAY 00:00 )] format.

CNF-72 Time Reset

Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the power supply accumulated time (On-time) and
operation accumulated time (Run-time)

CNF-74 Fan time

Displays accumulated time of the inverter cooling fan operation. Information
will be displayed in [Day Hr: Min (00000DAY 00:00 )] format.

CNF-75
Fan Time Reset

Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the cooling fan operation accumulated time (Fantime)

5.51 PowerOn Resume Using the Communication
If there is a run command when recovering the power after instantaneous power interruption
319

Learning Advanced Features

using communication (BAC net, LonWorks, Modbus RTU), the inverter carries out the run
command which was set before the instantaneous power interruption.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

COM

Automatic restart of the
communication restart

PowerOn
Resume

Setting Range
0–1

Unit
-

•

If proper communication is unavailable after the instantaneous power interruption, even if
the COM-96 PowerOn Resume function is set to ‘Yes,’ do not operate the inverter.

•

The Power-on Run function operates separately (Power-on Run function and PowerOn
Resume function is set to ‘Yes’ and power turns off and turns on, inverter maintains for the
time set in Power-on run function and then, by the Power On Resume function, if the
inverter is in operation by the communication command before the power interruptions,
the inverter is in operation after the power recovery.)

320

Learning Protection Features

6 Learning Protection Features
Protection features provided by the H100 series inverter are categorized into two types: protection
from overheating damage to the motor and protection against the inverter malfunction.

6.1 Motor Protection
6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)
ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of the inverter, without a separate
temperature sensor, to predict a rise in motor temperature to protect the motor based on its heat
characteristics.
Group

PRT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting Setting range

Unit

Electronic thermal
prevention fault trip
selection

ETH Trip Sel

None

0–2

Motor cooling fan type

Motor Cooling

Self-cool

Electronic thermal one
minute rating

ETH 1 min

120

100–150

Electronic thermal
prevention continuous
rating

ETH Cont

100

50–150

Code

Description

PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel

ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD screen
displays”E-Thermal.”
Setting
Function
0 None
The ETH function is not activated.
1 Free-Run
The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to a halt
(free-run).
2 Dec
The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.

321

Learning Protection Features

Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
Setting
0 Self-cool

Forcedcool

Function
As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis, the
cooling effect varies based on motor speed. Most
universal induction motors have this design.
Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling fan.
This provides extended operation at low speeds. Motors
designed for inverters typically have this design.

PRT-41 Motor
Cooling

PRT-41=0

PRT-42 ETH 1 min

The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the motor
for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (BAS-13).
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range below
details the set values that can be used during continuous operation without
the protection function.

PRT-43 ETH Cont

Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details
322

Learning Protection Features

6.1.2 Motor Over Heat Sensor
To operate the motor overheat protection, connect the overheat protection temperature sensor
(PT 100, PTC) installed in the motor to the inverter’s analog input terminal.
Group

PRT

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter
Setting

Setting
Range

Unit

Selecting the operation after
the detection of the motor
overheat detection sensor

Thermal-T
Sel

None

0–1

Selecting the input of the
motor overheat detection
sensor

Thermal In
Src

Thermal In

0–1

Fault level of the motor
overheat detection sensor

Thermal-T
Lev

50.0

Fault area of the motor
overheat detection sensor

Thermal-T
Area

Low

0–1

Analog output 2 item

AO2 Mode

Constant

0–18

Analog output 2 gain

AO2 Gain

100

0.0–100.0

0–100

Motor Overheat Protect Sensor Input Detail Settings
Code

Description

PRT-34
Thermal-T Sel

Sets the inverter operation state when motor is overheated.
Setting
Function
0 None
Do not operate when motor overheating is detected.
When the motor is overheated, the inverter output is
1 Free-Run
blocked and the motor will free-run by inertia.
When the motor is over heated, the motor decelerates
3 Dec
and stops.

PRT-35
Thermal In Src

Selects the type of the terminal when the motor overheat protect sensor is
connected to the volt (V1) or current (I2) input terminal of the terminal block
in the inverter.
Setting
Function
Configure the motor overheat protect sensor
0 Thermal In
connection to terminal block V1.
1 V2
Configure the motor overheat protect sensor

323

Learning Protection Features

Code

Description
connection to terminal block I2.

PRT-36
Thermal-T Lev

Configure the fault level of the motor overheat detect sensor.
Setting

PRT-37
Thermal-T Area

OUT-07 AO2 Mode,
OUT-08 AO2 Gain

Low

High

Function
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
smaller than PRT-36.
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
bigger that PRT-36.

Used when supplying the constant current to the temperature sensor and
receives input through the I2 or V1 terminal block by using the analog output
terminal.

Using the temperature sensor (PTC) by connecting it to the analog input terminal
When the AO2(analog current output) terminal is connected to the temperature sensor installed
on a motor, the inverter supplies constant current to the temperature sensor. Then, connecting the
motor signal wire to one of the inverter’s analog input terminals allows the inverter to detect the
changes in the PTC resistance and translates it into voltage. If the I2 terminal is used to receive the
signal, set the selection switch on the I/O board to V2. If the V1 terminal is used, set the switch to
T1. The sensor does not operate if SW3 is set to’ V1’.

324

Learning Protection Features

To receive PTC signal at V1 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘0 (Thermal In)’ and set the
Analog1 input selection switch (SW3) to T1.

To receive PTC signal at I2 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘1 (V2)’ and set SW 4
(Analog2 input selection switch) to V2. The sensor does not operate if SW4 is set to ‘I2’.When the
inverter detects a motor overheat, motor overheat trip occurs with internal delay time. The trip
delay time is not reset instantly when the trip condition is released, but it only decreases as time
passes.

6.1.3 Overload Early Warning and Trip

Group

PRT

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

Overload warning
selection

OL Warn Select

0–1

Overload warning
level

OL Warn Level

110

30–150

Overload warning
time

OL Warn Time

10.0

0–30

sec

Motion at overload
trip

OL Trip Select

Overload trip level

OL Trip Level

120

30–150

Overload trip time

OL Trip Time

60.0

0–60.0

sec

31–
35

Multi-function relay
1–5 item

Relay 1–5

Multi-function

Q1 Define

Yes

Free-Run

Over Load

325

Learning Protection Features

output 1 item

A warning or fault trip (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state, based on the
motor’s rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can be set separately.

Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details
Code

Description

PRT-17
OL Warn Select

If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function
output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If ‘1 (Yes)’ is
selected, it will operate. If ‘0 (No)’ is selected, it will not operate.

PRT-18
OL Warn Level,
PRT-19
OL Warn Time

When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning level
(OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload warning time (OL
Warn Time), the multi-function output (Relay 1, Q1) sends a warning signal. When
Over Load is selected at OUT-31, OUT-33, the multi-function output terminal or
relay outputs a signal. The signal output does not block the inverter output.

PRT-20
OL Trip Select

Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault trip.
Setting
Function
0 None
No protective action is taken.
1 Free-Run
In the event of an overload fault, inverter output is
blocked and the motor will free-run due to inertia.
3 Dec
If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and stops.

PRT-21 OL Trip
Level,
PRT-22 OL Trip
Time

When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset value of the
overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be supplied during the
overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked according
to the preset mode from PRT-17 or slows to a stop after deceleration.

Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload warning
signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warning level (OL Warn Level)
and the overload warning time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip level (OL Trip
Level) and the overload trip time (OL Trip Time).

326

Learning Protection Features

6.1.4 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking
The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motors from stalling due to
overloads. If a motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation frequency is adjusted
automatically. When a stall is caused by overload, high currents induced in the motor may cause
motor overheating or damage the motor and interrupt operation of the motor-driven devices.
In this case, the motor decelerates with optimum deceleration without a braking resistor by using
flux braking. If the deceleration time is too short, an over voltage fault trip may occur because of
regenerative energy from the motor. The flux braking makes the motor use regenerate energy,
therefore optimum deceleration is available without over voltage fault trip.
To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted automatically,
based on the size of load.
Group

PRT

OUT

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

Stall prevention and
Stall Prevent
flux braking

0100

bit

Stall frequency 1

Stall Freq 1

60.00

Start Freq–Stall
Freq 1

Stall level 1

Stall Level 1

130

30–150

Stall frequency 2

Stall Freq 2

60.00

Stall Freq 1–
Stall Freq 3

Stall level 2

Stall Level 2

130

30–150

Stall frequency 3

Stall Freq 3

60.00

Stall Freq 2–
Stall Freq 4

Stall level 3

Stall Level 3

130

30–150

Stall frequency 4

Stall Freq 4

60.00

Stall Freq 3–
Max Freq

Stall level 4

Stall Level 4

130

30–150

Flux Braking Gain

Flux Brake kp

31
–35

Multi-function relay
1–5 item

Relay 1–5

9 Stall

0.7590kW

0–150

1100–10
500kW
-

327

Learning Protection Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Multi-function
output 1 item

Q1 Define

Code

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

Description
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed.When the LCD segment is on, the
corresponding bit is off.
Item
Bit Status (On)
Bit Status (Off)
Keypad display

Function

Setting
Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

PRT-50 Stall
Prevent

Setting
0001 Stall protection
during
acceleration

328

Stall protection during acceleration
Stall protection while operating at a
constant speed
Stall protection during deceleration
Flux braking during deceleration

0010

Bit 1

Stall protection
while operating at
constant speed

Function
If inverter output current exceeds the preset stall
level (PRT- 52, 54, 56, 58) during acceleration, the
motor stops accelerating and starts decelerating. If
current level stays above the stall level, the motor
decelerates to the start frequency (DRV-19). If the
current level causes deceleration below the preset
level while operating the stall protection function,
the motor resumes acceleration.
Similar to stall protection function during
acceleration, the output frequency automatically
decelerates when the current level exceeds the
preset stall level while operating at constant
speed. When the load current decelerates below
the preset level, it resumes acceleration.

Learning Protection Features

0100

Stall protection
during
deceleration

1000

Flux braking
during
deceleration
Stall protection
and flux braking
during
deceleration

1100

PRT-51 Stall Freq
1– PRT-58 Stall
Leve l4

The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link
voltage below a certain level to prevent an over
voltage fault trip during deceleration. As a result,
deceleration times can be longer than the set time
depending on the load.
When using flux braking, deceleration time may
be reduced because regenerative energy is
expended at the motor.
Stall protection and flux braking operate together
during deceleration to achieve the shortest and
most stable deceleration performance.

Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies,
based on the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be set
above the base frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using numbers that
correspond in ascending order. For example, the range for Stall Frequency 2 (Stall
Freq 2) becomes the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the upper
limit for Stall Frequency 3 (Stall Freq 3).

329

Learning Protection Features

PRT-59 Flux Brake
Kp

A gain used to decelerate without over voltage fault trip. It compensates for
the inverter output voltage.

Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details

Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and
fourth bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an over voltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required, as the
motor can overheat and be easily damaged.

•

Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection since the deceleration time can take
longer than the time set, depending on the load. Acceleration stops when stall protection
operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer than the preset
acceleration time.

•

When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.

•

If the input voltage exceeds the nominal voltage, there is a possibility that the deceleration stall
does not work properly.

330

Learning Protection Features

6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection
Open-phase protection is used to prevent over current levels induced by the inverter inputs due
to an open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output protection is also available.
An open-phase at the connection between the motor and the inverter output may cause the
motor to stall, due to a lack of torque.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Input/output openphase protection

Open-phase input
voltage band

PRT

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

Phase Loss Chk 00

bit

IPO V Band

1–100 V

Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details
Code

Description
When open-phase protection is operating, input and output configurations are
displayed differently. When the LCD segment is On, the corresponding bit is set
to ‘Off’.

PRT-05 Phase Loss
Chk
PRT-06 IPO V Band

Item
Keypad
display
Setting
Bit 2

Bit status (On)

Bit status (Off)

Function
Bit 1

Output open-phase protection
Input open-phase protection

331

Learning Protection Features

6.2.2 External Trip Signal
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 4 (External Trip) to allow the inverter to stop
operation when abnormal operating conditions arise.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

65–71

Px terminal setting
options

Px Define
(Px: P1–P7)

0-55

Multi-function
input contact
selection

DI NC/NO Sel

bit

External Trip

External Trip Signal Setting Details
Code

IN-87 DI NC/NO
Sel

Description
Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom (0), it
operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top (1), it
operates as a B contact (Normally Closed).
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Bit
Terminal

332

7
P7

6
P6

5
P5

4
P4

3
P3

2
P2

1
P1

Learning Protection Features

6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection (IOLT)
When the inverter input current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is activated to
prevent damage to the inverter, based on inverse proportional characteristics.
Group Code

OUT

Name

LCD Display

31–
35

Multi-function relay
1–5

Relay 1–5

Multi-function
output 1

Q1 Define

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

IOL

Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal before the
inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time reaches 60% of the
allowed overcurrent (120%, 1 min; 140%, 5 sec), a warning signal output is provided (signal output at
120%, 36 sec).

333

Learning Protection Features

6.2.4 Speed Command Loss
When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication
options, or the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter operation
for situations when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal cables.
Group

Code

334

Keypad command
loss operation
mode

LCD Display

Lost KPD
Mode

Parameter Setting

Speed command
loss operation
mode

Lost Cmd
Mode

Time to determine
speed command
loss

Lost Cmd
Time

Operation
frequency at speed
command loss

Analog input loss
decision level

31
–35

Multi-function Relay
Relay 1–5
1–5

Multi-function
output 1

PRT

OUT

Name

None

Warning

Free-Run

Dec

Unit

1.0

0.1–120.0

sec

Lost Preset F

0.00

Start
frequency–Max. Hz
frequency

AI Lost Level

Half of x1

Lost
Command

Q1 Define

Free-Run

Setting range

Learning Protection Features

Speed Command Loss Setting Details
Code

Description

PRT-11 Lost KPD
Mode

Set the operation command source to keypad. If there is a communication error
with the keypad or connection problem between the keypad and the inverter,
select the inverter’s operation.
Setting
Function
The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None
operation frequency without any protection function.
Select 24: Lost keypad from OUT-31–36, one of the multi
1 Warning
function terminal blocks, outputs a relevant warning
signal when abnormal operating conditions arise.
The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in free2 Free-Run
run condition.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set at
3 Dec
PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).

PRT-12 Lost Cmd
Mode

In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be configured to
operate in a specific mode:
Setting
Function
0 None
The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run
The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in freerun condition.
2 Dec
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set at
PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
The inverter calculates the average input value for 10
3 Hold Input
seconds before the loss of the speed command and
uses it as the speed reference.
The inverter calculates the average output value for 10
Hold
4
seconds before the loss of the speed command and
Output
uses it as the speed reference.
The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT- 14
5 Lost Preset
(Lost Preset F).

PRT-15 AI Lost Level,
PRT-13 Lst Cmd
Time

Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when using
analog input.
Setting
Function
Based on the values set at IN-08 and IN-12, a protective
operation starts when the input signal is reduced to half
0 Half of x1
of the initial value of the analog input set using the
speed command (DRV-01) and it continues for the time
(speed loss decision time) set at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd

335

Learning Protection Features

Code

Description
Time). For example, set the speed command to ‘2 (V1)’
at DRV-07, and set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (Unipolar)’.
When the voltage input drops to less than half of the
value set at IN-08 (V1 Volt x 1), the protective function is
activated.
The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the analog
input set by the speed command and it continues for
1 Below of x1
the speed loss decision time set at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd
Time). Codes IN-08 and IN-12 are used to set the
standard values.
If the set value of the IN-08 and IN-12 is ‘0,’ the LostCmd function does not
operate.

PRT-14 Lost Preset F

In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode (PRT-12
Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘5 (Lost Preset)’. This operates the protection function and
sets the frequency so that the operation can continue.

Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘Unipolar’ and IN-08 to ‘5 (V)’. Set PRT-15 (AI Lost Level) to ‘1 (Below x1)’ and
PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘2 (Dec)’ and then set PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time) to 5 seconds. Then the
inverter operates as follows:

Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485

336

Learning Protection Features

communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at PRT-13
(Lost Cmd Time) is elapsed.

337

Learning Protection Features

6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration
For H100 series, the braking resistor circuit is integrated inside the inverter.
Group

Code

Name

LCD Display

Parameter Setting

Setting range

Unit

PRT

Braking resistor
configuration

DB Warn %ED

0–30

31–
35

Multi-function
relay 1–5 item

Relay 1–5
-

Multi-function
output 1 item

Q1 Define

OUT

DB Warn %ED

Dynamic Breaking Resistor Setting Details
Code

Description
Set the braking resistor configuration (%ED: Enable Duty). The braking resistor
configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for one
operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15 sec and the
braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the 15 sec period
elapses. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
[Example 1]
C_H59
%EF
100%
C_<99 @ C_BI5 USR 1 (Read/Write) access)

0h0201

User Grp. Code 2

Parameter value registered at U&M > USR 2 (Read/Write) access)

.
.
.

0h023E

User Grp. Code 63

0h023F

User Grp. Code 64

.
.
.
Parameter value registered at U&M > USR 63 (Read/Write)
(Read/Write access)
Parameter value registered at U&M > USR 64 (Read/Write)
(Read/Write access)

Currently Registered Macro Group Parameters
Address

Parameter

Assigned Content by Bit

0h0240

Macro Grp. Code 1

Parameter value registered at U&M > MC 1

0h0241

Macro Grp. Code 2

Parameter value registered at U&M > MC 1

.
.
.

0h02A2

Macro Grp. Code 98

Parameter value registered at U&M > MC 98

0h02A3

Macro Grp. Code 99

Parameter value registered at U&M > MC 99

366

RS-485 Communication Features

7.3.6 LS INV 485 Protocol
The slave device (inverter) responds to read and write requests from the master device (PLC or PC).
Request
ENQ

Station ID

CMD

Data

SUM

EOT

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

Normal Response
ACK

Station ID

CMD

Data

SUM

EOT

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

NAK

Station ID

CMD

Error code

SUM

EOT

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Error Response

•

A request starts with ENQ and ends with EOT.

•

A normal response starts with ACK and ends with EOT.

•

An error response starts with NAK and ends with EOT.

•

A station ID indicates the inverter number and is displayed as a two-byte ASCII-HEX string
that uses characters 0-9 and A-F.

•

CMD: Uses uppercase characters (returns an IF error if lowercase characters are
encountered)—please refer to the following table.
Character

ASCII-HEX

Command

‘R’

52h

Read

‘W’

57h

Write

‘X’

58h

Request monitor registration

‘Y’

59h

Perform monitor registration

367

RS-485 Communication Features

•

Data: ASCII-HEX (for example, when the data value is 3000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h → 30h 42h
42h 38h)

•

Error code: ASCII-HEX (refer to 7.3.6.4 Error Code on page 371)

•

Transmission/reception buffer size: Transmission=39 bytes, Reception=44 bytes

•

Monitor registration buffer: 8 Words

•

SUM: Checks communication errors via sum.

•

SUM=a total of the lower 8 bits values for station ID, command and data (Station
ID+CMD+Data) in ASCII-HEX.

•

For example, a command to read 1 address from address 3000:
SUM=‘0’+‘1’+’R’+‘3’+‘0’+‘0’+‘0’+’1’ = 30h+31h+52h+33h+30h+30h+30h+31h = 1A7h (the
control value is not included: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc

ENQ

Station ID

CMD

Address

Number of Addresses

SUM

EOT

05h

‘01’

‘R’

‘3000’

‘1’

‘A7’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

4 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Note
Broadcasting
Broadcasting sends commands to all inverters connected to the network simultaneously. When
commands are sent from station ID 255, each inverter acts on the command regardless of the station
ID. However no response is issued for commands transmitted by broadcasting

7.3.6.1 Detailed Read Protocol
Read Request: Reads successive n words from address XXXX.
ENQ

Station ID

CMD

Address

Number of Addresses

SUM

EOT

05h

‘01’–’FA’

‘R’

‘XXXX‘

‘1’–‘8’ = n

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

4 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes=12. Characters are displayed inside single quotation marks(‘).

368

RS-485 Communication Features

Read Normal Response
ACK

Station ID

CMD

Data

SUM

EOT

06h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘R’

‘XXXX’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes= (7 x n x 4): a maximum of 39
Read Error Response
NAK

Station ID

CMD

Error code

SUM

EOT

15h

‘01’-‘FA’

‘R’

‘**’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes=9

7.3.6.2 Detailed Write Protocol
Write Request
ENQ

Station ID

CMD

Address Number of Addresses

Data

SUM

EOT

05h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘W’

‘XXXX’

‘1’–‘8’ = n

‘XXXX…’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

4 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes= (12 + n x 4): a maximum of 44

ACK

Station ID

CMD

Data

SUM

EOT

06h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘W’

‘XXXX…’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

Write Normal Response
Total bytes= (7 + n x 4): a maximum of 39
Write Error Response
NAK

Station ID

CMD

Error Code

SUM

EOT

15h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘W’

‘**’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

369

RS-485 Communication Features

Total bytes=9

7.3.6.3 Monitor Registration Detailed Protocol
Monitor registration request is made to designate the type of data that requires continuous
monitoring and periodic updating.
Monitor Registration Request: Registration requests for n addresses (where n refers to the
ENQ

Station ID

CMD

Number of Addresses

Address

SUM

EOT

05h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘X’

‘1’–‘8’=n

‘XXXX…’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

number of addresses. The addresses do not have to be contiguous.)
Total bytes= (8 + n x 4): a maximum of 40

ACK

Station ID

CMD

SUM

EOT

06h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘X’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Monitor Registration Normal Response
Total bytes=7

Monitor Registration Error Response
NAK

Station ID

CMD

Error Code

SUM

EOT

15h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘X’

‘**’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes=9

Monitor Registration Perform Request: A data read request for a registered address, received
ENQ

Station ID

CMD

SUM

EOT

05h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘Y’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

370

RS-485 Communication Features

from a monitor registration request
Total bytes=7

Monitor Registration Execution Normal Response
ACK

Station ID

CMD

Data

SUM

EOT

06h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘Y’

‘XXXX…’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

n x 4 bytes

2 bytes

1 byte

Totalbytes= (7 + n x 4): a maximum of 39

Monitor Registration Execution Error Response
NAK

Station ID

CMD

Error Code

SUM

EOT

15h

‘01’–‘FA’

‘Y’

‘**’

‘XX’

04h

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

2 bytes

1 byte

Total bytes=9

7.3.6.4 Error Code
Code

Abbreviation

Description

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

The requested function cannot be performed by a slave
because the corresponding function does not exist.

ILLEGAL DATA
ADDRESS

The received parameter address is invalid at the slave.

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

The received parameter data is invalid at the slave.

WRITE MODE ERROR

Tried writing (W) to a parameter that does not allow writing
(read-only parameters, or when writing is prohibited
during operation)

371

RS-485 Communication Features

Code

Abbreviation

Description

FRAME ERROR

The frame size does not match.

7.3.6.5 ASCII Code
Character
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

372

Hex

Character
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
space
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,

Hex

Character
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C

@
[
\
]

{
|
}
–
BEL
BS
CAN
CR
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DEL
DLE
EM
ACK
ENQ
EOT
ESC
ETB
ETX
FF
FS
GS
HT
LF

Hex
40
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
7B
7C
7D
7E
07
08
18
0D
11
12
13
14
7F
10
19
06
05
04
1B
17
03
0C
1C
1D
09
0A

RS-485 Communication Features

Character
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p

Hex

Character
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70

.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?

Hex

Character
2D
2E
2F
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

NAK
NUL
RS
S1
SO
SOH
STX
SUB
SYN
US
VT

Hex
15
00
1E
0F
0E
01
02
1A
16
1F
0B

7.3.7 Modbus-RTU Protocol

7.3.7.1 Function Code and Protocol
In the following section, station ID is the value set at COM-01 (Int485 St ID), and the starting
address is the communication address (starting address size is in bytes). For more information
about communication addresses, refer to 7.3.8 Compatible Common Area Parameter on page 378.

Reading up to 8 Consecutive Inverter Parameters Based on the Set Number - Read Holding
Register (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Register (Func. Code: 0x04)
Read Holding Registers (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Registers (Func. Code: 0x04) are
processed identically by the inverter.
Codes

Description

Start Addr.

Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be
read from.

No. of Reg.

Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be read.

Byte Count

Byte number of normal response values based on the number of registers (No.
of Reg).

Except. Code

Error codes

373

RS-485 Communication Features

Request
Slave
Station ID

Func.
Code

Start Addr
(Hi)

Start Addr
(Lo)

No of Reg
(Hi)

No of Reg
(Lo)

CRC
(Lo)

CRC
(Hi)

1 byte

Normal Response
Slave
Station ID

Func.
Code

Byte
Count

Value
(Hi)

Value
(Lo)

…

Value
(Hi)

Value
(Lo)

CRC
(Lo)

CRC
(Hi)

1 byte

…

1 byte

* The number of Value(Hi) and Value(Lo) is changed by the [Request No. of Reg].
Error Response
Slave Station ID

Func. Code

Except. Code

CRC(Lo)

CRC(Hi)

1 byte

* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.
Writing One Inverter Parameter Value (Func. Code: 0x06)
Codes

Description

Addr.

Address 1 of the inverter parameter (common area or keypad) to be written to.

Reg. Value

The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) value to write with.

Except. Code

Error codes

Request
Slave
Station ID

Func.Code Addr (Hi)

Addr(Lo)

Value(Hi)

Value(Lo)

CRC(Lo)

CRC(Hi)

1 byte

Normal Response

374

1 byte

RS-485 Communication Features

Slave
Station ID

Func.Code Addr (Hi)

Addr(Lo)

Value(Hi)

Value(Lo)

CRC(Lo)

CRC(Hi)

1 byte

Error Response
Slave Station ID

Func. Code

Except. Code

CRC(Lo)

CRC (Hi)

1 byte

* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.

Writing Multiple Registers (Func. Code: 0x10)
Codes

Description

Start Addr.

Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be
written to.

No. of Reg.

Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be written.

Reg. Value

The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) values to write with.

Except. Code

Error codes

Request
Slave
Station
ID

Func.
Code

Start
Addr.
(Hi)

Start
Addr.
(Lo)

No of
Reg.
(Hi)

No of
Reg.
(Lo)

Byte
Count

Reg.
Value
(Hi)

Reg.
Value
(Lo)

CRC
(Lo)

CRC
(Hi)

1 byte

Normal Response

375

RS-485 Communication Features

Slave
Station ID

Func.
Code

Start Addr Start Addr No of Reg.
(Hi)
(Lo)
(Hi)

No of Reg.
(Lo)

CRC
(Lo)

CRC
(Hi)

1 byte

Error Response
Slave Station ID

Func. Code

Except. Code

CRC(Lo)

CRC(Hi)

1 byte

* Func. Code of the error response is [Request Func. Code] + 0x80.

376

RS-485 Communication Features

Exception Code
Code
01: ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02: ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
14: Write-Protection
Example of Modbus-RTU Communication In Use
When the Acc time (Communication address 0x1103) is changed to 5.0 sec and the Dec time
(Communication address 0x1104) is changed to 10.0 sec.
Frame Transmission from Master to Slave
Item

Station
ID

Function

Starting
Address

# of
Register

Byte
Count

Data 1

Data 2

CRC

Hex

0x01

0x10

0x1102

0x0002

0x04

0x0032

0x0064

0x1202

Preset
Multiple
Register

Start
Address-1
(0x1103-1)

50
(Acc time
5.0 sec)

100
(Dec time
10.0 sec)

COMDes
01
cript
Int485
ion
St ID

Frame Transmission from Slave to Master
Item

Station Id

Function

Starting Address

# of Register

CRC

Hex

0x01

0x10

0x1102

0x0002

0xE534

Description

COM-01 Int485
St ID

Preset Multiple Starting Address-1
Register
(0x1103-1)

377

RS-485 Communication Features

7.3.8 Compatible Common Area Parameter
The following are common area parameters partly compatible with the iS5, iP5A, iV5, iG5A, S100
series inverters. .( Addresses 0h0000-0h0011 are for compatible common area parameters.
Addresses 0h0012-0h001B are for H100 series inverter parameters.)
Comm.
Address

Parameter

Scale

Unit

R/W

Assigned Content by Bit

0h0000

Inverter model

F: H100

0h0001

Inverter capacity

0: 0.75kW, 1: 1.5kW, 2: 2.2kW
3: 3.7kW 4: 5.5kW, 5: 7.5kW
6: 11kW, 7: 15kW, 8: 18.5kW
9: 22kW, 10: 30kW, 11: 37kW
12: 45kW ,13: 55kW, 14: 75kW,
15: 90kW, 16: 110kW, 17: 132kW
18: 160kW, 19: 185kW, 20: 220kW
21: 250kW, 22: 315kW, 23: 355kW
24: 400kW, 25: 500kW

0h0002

Inverter input voltage -

0: 220 V product
1: 440 V product

0h0003

Version

0h0004

Reserved

0h0005

Command frequency 0.01

R/W

(Example) 0h0064: Version 1.00
(Example) 0h0065: Version 1.01

B15

Reserved

B14

0: Keypad Freq,
2-8: Terminal block multi-step
speed
17: Up, 18: Down
19: STEADY
22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2,
26: PULSE
27: Built-in 485
28: Communication option
30: JOG, 31: PID

B13
B12
0h0006

Operation command
(option)

B11
B10
B9
B8
B7

378

0: Keypad
1: Fx/Rx-1

RS-485 Communication Features

R/W

2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
4: Communication option
5: Time Event

Reserved

Emergency stop

W: Trip initialization (01),
R: Trip status

Reverse operation (R)

Forward operation (F)

Stop (S)

0h0007

Acceleration time

0.1

sec

R/W

0h0008

Deceleration time

0.1

sec

R/W

0h0009

Output current

0.1

0h000A

Output frequency

0.01

0h000B

Output voltage

0h000C

DC link voltage

0h000D

Output power

0.1

0h000E

Operation status

B15

0: HAND, 1: AUTO

B14

1: Frequency command source
by communication (built-in,
option)

B13

1: Operation command source
by communication (built-in,
option)

B12

Reverse operation command

B11

Forward operation command

B10

Reserved

Jog mode

Drive stopping

DC Braking

Speed reached

379

RS-485 Communication Features

0h000F

0h0010

380

Fault trip information

Input terminal
information

Decelerating

Accelerating

Fault Trip - operates according
to OUT-30 setting

Operating in reverse direction

Operating in forward direction

Stopped

B15

Reserved

B14

Reserved

B13

Reserved

B12

Reserved

B11

Reserved

B10

H/W-Diag

Reserved

Level Type trip

Reserved

Latch Type trip

B15
–B7

Reserved

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0011

Output terminal
information

B15

Reserved

B14

Reserved

B13

Reserved

B12

Reserved

B11

Reserved

B10

Reserved

Relay 5

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

0h0012

0.1

V1 input voltage

0h0013

Thermal

0.1

Input Thermal

0h0014

0.1

V2 input voltage

0h0015

0.1

I2 input Current

0h0016

Motor rotation speed

Rpm

Displays existing motor rotation speed

0h0017
–0h0019

Reserved

0h001A

Select Hz/rpm

0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit

0h001B

Display the number
of poles for the
selected motor

Display the number of poles for the
selected motor

381

RS-485 Communication Features

7.3.9 H100 Expansion Common Area Parameter

7.3.9.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)
Comm.
Address

Parameter

Scale

Unit

Assigned content by bit

0h0300

Inverter model

H100: 000Fh
0.75 kW: 4008h, 1.5 kW: 4015h
2.2 kW: 4022h, 3.7 kW: 4037h
5.5 kW: 4055h, 7.5 kW: 4075h
11 kW: 40B0h, 15 kW: 40F0h
18.5 kW: 4125h, 22 kW: 4160h
30 kW: 41E0h, 37 kW: 4250h,
45 kW: 42D0h,55 kW: 4370h,
75 kW: 44B0h,90 kW: 45A0h,
110 kW: 46E0h, 132 kW: 4840h
160 kW: 4A00h, 185kW: 4B90h,
220 kW: 4DC0h, 250 kW: 4FA0h,
315 kW: 53B0h, 355 kW: 5630h,
400 kW: 5900h, 500 kW: 5F40h

0h0301

Inverter capacity

0h0302

Inverter input
voltage/power (Single
phase, 3-phase)/cooling
method

Inverter S/W version

200 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
(ex) 0h0064: Version 1.00

0h0303

0h0065: Version 1.01

0h0304

Reserved

0h0305

Inverter operation state

B15

382

B14

0: Normal state
4: Warning occurred
8: Fault occurred

RS-485 Communication Features

B13
B12
B11–
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4

1: Speed searching
2: Accelerating
3: Operating at constant rate
4: Decelerating
5: Decelerating to stop
6: H/W OCS
7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operating

B3
B2
B1

0: Stopped
1: Operating in forward direction
2: Operating in reverse direction
3: DC operating

B0
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
0h0306

Inverter operation
frequency command
source

B10
-

Operation command source
0: Keypad
1: Communication option
3: Built-in RS 485
4: Terminal block

B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3

Frequency command source
0: Keypad speed
1: Keypad torque
2-4: Up/Down operation speed
5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
9: Pulse

383

RS-485 Communication Features

B2
B1
B0

10: Built-in RS 485
11: Communication option
13: Jog
14: PID
25-31: Multi-step speed frequency

0h0307

Keypad S/W version

(Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00

0h0308

Keypad title version

(Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01

0h0309

IO Board Version

(Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
(Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01

0h030A–
0h30F

Reserved

0h0310

Output current

0.1

0h0311

Output frequency

0.01

0h0312

Output rpm

Rpm

0h0313

Reserved

0h0314

Output voltage

0h0315

DC Link voltage

0h0316

Output power

0.1

0h0317

Reserved

0h0318

PID reference

0.1

PID reference value

0h0319

PID feedback

0.1

PID feedback value

0h031A

Display the number of
poles for the 1st motor

Displays the number of poles for the first
motor

0h031B

Display the number of
poles for the 2nd motor

Displays the number of poles for the 2nd
motor

0h031C

Display the number of
poles for the selected
motor

Displays the number of poles for the
selected motor

0h031D

Select Hz/rpm

0: Hz, 1: rpm

0h031E
–0h031F

Reserved

0h0320

Digital input information

384

B15–
B7

Reserved

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0321

0h0322

Digital output
information

Virtual digital input
information

P7 (I/O board)

P6 (I/O board)

P5 (I/O board)

P4 (I/O board)

P3 (I/O board)

P2 (I/O board)

P1 (I/O board)

B15–
B11

Reserved

B10

B9–
B5

Reserved

Relay 5

Relay 4

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

B15–
B8

Reserved

Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)

Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)

Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)

Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)

Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)

Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)

Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)

Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)

0h0323

Display the selected
motor

0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor

0h0324

AI1

0.01

Analog input V1 or Thermal (I/O board)

385

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0325

AI2

0.01

Analog input V2 or I2 (I/O board)

0h0326

Reserved

0h0327

Reserved

0h0328

AO1

0.01

Analog output 1 (I/O board)

0h0329

AO2

0.01

Analog output 2 (I/O board)

0h032A

Reserved

0.01

Reserved

0h032B

Reserved

0.01

Reserved

0h032C

Reserved

0h032D

Reserved

0h032E

Consumption energy
(kWh)

0.1

kWh

Consumption energy (kWh)

0h032F

Consumption energy
(MWh)

MWh Consumption energy (MWh)

0h0330

0h0331

386

Latch type trip
information - 1

Latch type trip

B15

PC Repeat Err

B14

Over Heat Trip

B13

Reserved

B12

External Trip

B11

Damper Err

B10

Pipe Break

NTC Open

Reserved

In Phase Open

Out Phase Open

Low Voltage2

E-Thermal

Inverter OLT

Under Load

Over Load

B15

Reserved

RS-485 Communication Features

information - 2

0h0332

0h0333

0h0334

Level type trip
information

H/W Diagnosis Trip
information

Warning information-1

B14

MMC Interlock

B13

Reserved

B12

Reserved

B11

Reserved

B10

Option Trip-1

No Motor Trip

Reserved

IO Board Trip

Broken Belt

ParaWrite Trip

TB Trip

Fan Trip

Thermal Trip

Level Detect

Reserved

B15–
B4

Reserved

Lost Keypad

Lost Command

Low Voltage

B15–
B3

Reserved

Watchdog-1 error

EEP Err

ADC Offset

B15

Broken Belt

B14

Low Battery

B13

Load Tune

387

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0335

0h0336

388

Latch type trip
information -3

Warning information-2

B12

Fan Exchange

B11

CAP. Warning

B10

Level Detect

Reserved

Lost Keypad

Pipe Break

Fire Mode

DB Warn %ED

Fan Warning

Lost Command

Inv Over Load

Under Load

Over Load

B15

Reserved

–

Reserved

Overcurrent2 Trip

Overvoltage Trip

Overcurrent1 Trip

Ground Fault Trip

B15

Reserved

KPD H.O.A Lock

Lsig Tune Err

Rs Tune Err

ParaWrite Fail

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0337–
0h0339

Reserved

0h033A

Proc PID Output

0.01

Process PID Output (%)

0h033B

Proc PID UnitScale Ref

Proc
Unit

Unit Scaled Process PID reference value

0h033C

Proc PID UnitScale Fdb

Proc
Unit

Unit Scaled Process PID feedback value

0h0340

On Time date

Day

Total number of days the inverter has been
powered on

0h0341

On Time Minute

Min

Total number of minutes excluding the total
number of On Time days

0h0342

Run Time date

Day

Total number of days the inverter has driven
the motor

0h0343

Run Time minute

Min

Total number of minutes excluding the total
number of Run Time days

0h0344

Fan Time date

Day

Total number of days the heat sink fan has
been running

0h0345

Fan Time minute

Min

Total number of minutes excluding the total
number of Fan Time days

0h0346
–0h0348

Reserved

0h0349

Reserved

0h034A

Option 1

0: None, 5: LonWorks

0h034B

Reserved

0h034C

Reserved

0h034D–
0h034F

Reserved

0h0350

E-PID 1 Output

0.01

External PID 1 output

0h0351

E-PID 1 Ref

0.1

External PID 1 Reference

Reserved

389

RS-485 Communication Features

0h0352

E-PID 1 Fdb

0.1

External PID 1 feedback

0h0353

E-PID 1 Unit Scale Ref

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 1 Reference

0h0354

E-PID 1 Unit Scale Fdb

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 1 feedback

0h0355

Reserved

0h0356

Reserved

0h0357

E-PID 2 Output

0.01

External PID 2 output

0h0358

E-PID 2 Ref

0.1

External PID 2 Reference

0h0359

E-PID 2 Fdb

0.1

External PID 2 feedback

0h035A

E-PID 2 Unit Scale Ref

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 2 Reference

0h035B

E-PID 2 Unit Scale Fdb

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 2 feedback

0h035C

Application Status

B15
–B2

Reserved

Fire Mode

Pump Clean

0h035D

Inv Temperature

℃

Heatsink Temperature

0h035E

Power Factor

0.1

Output power factor

0h035F

Inv Fan Time

INV Fan running time(%)

0h0360

390

Multi motor control
terminal output

B15

Reserved

–

Reserved

5th motor running

RS-485 Communication Features

4th motor running

3rd motor running

2nd motor running

1st motor running

391

RS-485 Communication Features

7.3.9.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/Write)

392

RS-485 Communication Features

Comm.
Address

Parameter

Scale

Unit

Assigned Content by Bit

0h0380

Frequency command

0.01

Command frequency setting

0h0381

RPM command

Rpm

Command rpm setting

0h0382

Operation command

B15–B4

Reserved

0 1: Free-run stop

0 1: Trip initialization

0: Reverse command, 1:
Forward command

0: Stop command, 1: Run
command

Example: Forward operation command
0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h
0h0383

Acceleration time

0.1

sec

Acceleration time setting

0h0384

Deceleration time

0.1

sec

Deceleration time setting

0h0385

0h0386

Virtual digital input
control (0: Off, 1: On)

Digital output control
(0: Off, 1: On)

B15–B8

Reserved

Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)

Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)

Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)

Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)

Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)

Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)

Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)

Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)

B15–B11

Reserved

B10

B9–
B5

Reserved

Relay 5

Relay 4

393

RS-485 Communication Features

Relay 3

Relay 2

Relay 1

0h0387

KPD H.O.A Lock

0 : Locked, 1 : During Run, 2 : Unlocked

0h0388

PID reference

0.1

Process PID reference

0h0389

PID feedback value

0.1

Process PID feedback

0h038A

Motor rated current

0.1

0h038B

Motor rated voltage

0h038C–
0h038D

Reserved

0h038E

Proc PID Unit
Reference

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale Process PID reference

0h038F

Proc PID Unit
Feedback

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale Process PID feedback

0h0390–
0h0399

Reserved

0h039A

Anytime Para

Set the CNF-20 value (refer to 5.49Operation
State Monitor on page 316)

0h039B

Monitor Line-1

Set the CNF-21 value (refer to 5.49Operation
State Monitor on page 316)

0h039C

Monitor Line-2

Set the CNF-22 value (refer to 5.49Operation
State Monitor on page 316)

0h039D

Monitor Line-3

Set the CNF-23 value (refer to 5.49Operation
State Monitor on page 316)

0h039E–
0h039F

Reserved

0h03A0

PID Ref 1 Aux Value

0.1

PID Aux 1 reference

0h03A1

PID Ref 2 Aux Value

0.1

PID Aux 2 reference

0h03A2

PID Feedback Aux
Value

0.1

PID Aux feedback

0h03A3

Proc PID Aux 1 Unit
Scale

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale PID Aux 1 reference

0h03A4

Proc PID Aux 2 Unit

Proc

Unit Scale PID Aux 2 reference

394

Reserved

RS-485 Communication Features

Scale

Unit

0h03A5

Proc PID Fdb Aux Unit
Scale

Proc
Unit

0h03A6–
0h03AF

Reserved

0h03B0

E-PID 1 Ref

0.1

External PID 1 reference

0h03B1

E-PID 1 Fdb

0.1

External PID 1 reference

0h03B2

E-PID 1 Unit Scale Ref

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 1 reference

0h03B3

E-PID 1 Unit Scale Fdb

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 1 feedback

0h03B4

Reserved

0h03B5

E-PID 2 Ref

0.1

External PID 2 reference

0h03B6

E-PID 2 Fdb

0.1

External PID 2 feedback

0h03B7

E-PID 2 Unit Scale Ref

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 2 reference

0h03B8

E-PID 2 Unit Scale Fdb

Proc
Unit

Unit Scale External PID 2 feedback

Unit Scale PID Aux feedback
Reserved

Reserved

Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380, 0h0005) is
not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed frequency to use
after a power cycle, follow these steps:

Set DRV-07 to ‘Keypad-1’ and select a target frequency.

Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address (0h1101).

Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the power
cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.

395

RS-485 Communication Features

7.3.9.3

Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)

Comm.
Address

Parameter

0h03E0

Save parameters

0h03E1

Monitor mode initialization

Unit

Changeable
During
Running

Function

0: No, 1: Yes

Scale

0h03E2

Parameter initialization

0: No,
1: All Grp
2: DRV Grp
3: BAS Grp
4: ADV Grp
5: CON Grp
6: IN Grp
7: OUT Grp
8: COM Grp
9: PID Grp

0h03E3

Display changed

0: No, 1: Yes

10: EPID Grp
11: AP1 Grp
12: AP2 Grp
13: AP3 Grp
14: PRT Grp
15: M2 Grp
Setting is
prohibited
during fault trip
interruptions.

0h03E4

Macro Function Setting

0: Basic
1: Compressor
2: Supply Fan
3: Exhaust Fan
4: Cooling Tower
5: Circul. Pump
6: Vacuum Pump
7: Constant Torq

0h03E5

Delete all fault history

0: No, 1: Yes

0h03E6

Delete user-registrated
codes

0: No, 1: Yes

0h03E7

Hide parameter mode

Hex

0h03E8

Lock parameter mode

Hex

0h03E9

Easy start on (easy
parameter setup mode)

0: No, 1: Yes

0h03EA

Initializing power
consumption

0: No, 1: Yes

396

Write: 0–9999
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Write: 0–9999
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock

RS-485 Communication Features

0h03EB

Initialize inverter operation
accumulative time

0: No, 1: Yes

0h03EC

Initialize cooling fan
accumulated operation time

0: No, 1: Yes

Note
•

When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to the
inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are reflected to
the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared following an inverter power
cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting parameters via communication,
ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to shutting the inverter down.

•

Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to ‘0’ via communication, set it to
another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than ‘0’ and a non-zero value is
entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be identified by
reading the parameter when operating the inverter via communication.

•

The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa. When the
same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed just once. Therefore, if
the same value is entered again, change it to another value first and then re-enter the previous
value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the following order: 244 0
244.

•

If the communication parameter settings are initialized by setting the address 0h03E2 to [1: All
Grp] or [8: COM Grp], or if any Macro function item is modified by setting the address 0h03E4, all
the communication parameter settings are reverted to the factory default. If this happens, the
inverter may not be able to properly receive responses from the upper-level devices due to the
changes in the settings.

•

If there is an undefined address in the addresses for reading multiple consecutive data defined
in the common area, the undefined address returns0xFFFF while all the others return normal
response. If all the consecutive addresses are undefined, one return code is received from the
first undefined address only.

•

If there is an undefined address in the addresses for writing into multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, or if the value that is being written is not a valid one, no error
response about the wring operation is returned. If all the consecutive addresses are undefined,
or if all the date is invalid, one return code is received from the first undefined address only.

It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all data is
saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if parameter
setup is continues for an extended period of time.

397

RS-485 Communication Features

7.4 BACnet Communication
7.4.1 What is BACnet Communication?
BACnet (Building Automation and Control network) is a communication network frequently used
in building automation. BACnet introduces the concept of object-oriented systems, and defines
standardized objects. By exchanging data, this function makes communication possible between
products from different companies. It also standardizes some of the general services carried out by
using these standard objects.

7.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards
Application

Items
Interface

Specification
5 Pin Pluggable connector

Connection

Data transmission

RS-485 MS/TP, Half-duplex

Cable

Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)

BACnet MS/TP

Stated in ANSI/ASHRAE Standards 135-2004

Baud Rate

Supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 bps

MAC Address

1–127

Start/Stop bit

Start 1 bit, Stop ½ bit

Parity check

None/Even/Odd

Communication

7.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start
Follow the instructions below to configure the BACnet network for a quick start.
1

Set five multi-function input terminals (IN-65–71 PxDefine) to ‘Interlock 1’ – ‘Interlock 5’
respectively, in the correct motor order.
Note
•

398

When auto change mode selection (AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5 motors
are operated, including the main motor, the interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer to the

RS-485 Communication Features

monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are connected to Relay
1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
•

If auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and auxiliary
motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock 1,2,3,4 are the
monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4. Set COM-04 Int485 Mode.

Set the Device Object Instances for COM-21 and 22 and dfine the values. The device object
instances must have unique values.

Set COM-01 (Int485 St ID) by entering a value (for BACnet, the Int485 station ID must be set
within a range of 0–127). The station ID value set at COM-01 must be within the value range
defined by the Max Master Property of different Master for MS/TP token passing.

Test the network and make sure the BACnet communication is working properly.

Group

Code

Name

Communication
Speed

LCD display

Baudrate

Parameter Setting

9600 bps

COM
04

Communication
Mode

Int485 Mode

D8/PN/S1

Setting Range
0

12001)

24001)

48001)

9600

19200

38400

576001)

76800

1152001)

D8/PN/S1

D8/PN/S2

D8/PE/S1

D8/PO/S1

Unit

Maximum
number of
BACnet Masters

BAC Max
Master

0–127

BACnet device
number 1

BAC Dev Inst1

237

0–4149

BACnet device
number 2

BAC Dev Inst1

0–999

399

RS-485 Communication Features

Group

Code

Name

LCD display

Parameter Setting

Setting Range

Unit

BACnet device
password

BAC PassWord

0–32767

1) 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps cannot be set in communication speed
setting in case of BACnet communication.
BACnet Parameter Setting Details
Code

Description

COM-01
Int485 ST ID
(MAC ID)

Refers to MACID setting parameter used in BACnet. All MACIDs of the inverter
using BACnet must be set before connecting to BUS. MACID must have the
unique value from the Network to be connected to MACID. If BACnet is used,
the value must be within 0–127. Communication is not available if the value is
not included in the range.

COM-03
Baud Rate

Sets the communication speed to use in the network.

COM-20
BAC Mas Master

Range for Max Master that is the number of devices currently connected to
the communication Line is 1–127, and the default value is 127.

COM-21–22 BAC
Dev
Inst 1–2

BACnet Device Instance is used to identify BACnet Device, and must be set as
the unique value in the BACnet network. It is used efficiently when finding
BACnet Device of other Devices while installing.
The following formula is used to calculate the Device Instance value:
(COM-21 X 1000) + COM-22
Therefore, in the Device Instance value, COM-21 takes the thousands and
higher places (fourth digit and over) and COM-22 takes the hundreds and
lower places (third digit and below). COM-21 and COM-22 have the ranges of
0–4194 and 0–999 respectively, because Device Instance can have the value
within 0–4,194,302.

COM-23
BAC Password

Refers to the password used for Warm/Cold Start. COM-23 Password
parameter can be set within 0–32767, and the default value is 0. If the
parameter setting range is set to 1–32768, the Password value set at BACnet
Master and the value set at COM-23 must be the same to operate Warm/Cold
Start.
If COM-23 Password is set to ‘0’, the password of BACnet Master is ignored and
Warm/Cold Start is operated.

Note
MaxMaster and MACID affect performing Network communication. It is recommended to set as small

400

RS-485 Communication Features

value as possible, and to set the continuous value for MACID. If the values are set as explained above,
efficient Token Passing Configuration is possible because each Master tries to give Token to Device set
as its own (MACD+1).

7.4.4 Protocol Implementation
The following table sums the information required to implement a BACnet system. Refer to each
section of the table to implement a BACnet system properly.
Category

Items

Remarks

I-Am (Answer to Who-Is, when
broadcast or reset after power-up)
I-Have (Answer to Who-Has)
Read Property
BACnet Services

Write Property
Device Communication Control

Ignores Password in Device
Communication Control

Reinitialize Device

Warm/Cold Starts (Supports Password)
Start Backup, End Backup, Start Restore,
End Restore, or Abort Restore services
are NOT available.

Data Link Layer

BACnet communication card
supports an MS/TP Master Data Link
Layer

Supported Standards: MS/TP Available
speed: 9600, 19200, 38400, and 76800
bps

MAC ID/Device
Object Instance
configuration

Set at COM-01 Int485 ST ID (MAC ID).
The Device Object Instances are set
at COM-21 and COM-22.

MAX Master
Property

Set at COM-20
(MAX Master Value).

7.4.5 Object Map

401

RS-485 Communication Features

Property

Object Type
Device

MSI

MVI

Object Identifier

Object Name

Object Type

System Status

Vendor Name

Vendor Identifier

Model Name

Firmware Revision

Appl Software Revision

Location

Protocol Version

Protocol Revision

Services Supported

Object Types Supported

Object List

Max APDU Length

APDU Timeout

Number APDU Retries

Max Master

Max Info Frames

Device Address Binding

Database Revision

O
O

Status Flags

Event State

Reliability

Preset Value
Description

402

RS-485 Communication Features

Object Type

Property

Device

MSI

MVI

Number of states

State text

Out-of-Service

Units

Polarity

Active Text

Inactive Text

* BI–Binary Input / BV–Binary Value / AI–Analog Input / AV–Analog Value / MSI–Multistate Input /
MSV–Multistate Value
You can read/write in Location and Description only if it is the device object. You can write a
maximum of 29 words.

7.4.5.1 Analog Value Object Instance
Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Setting Range

Units

R/W

AV1

CommTimeoutSet

Command timeout
setting

0.1–120.0

Secs

R/W

AV2

AccelTimeSet

Accelerate time setting

0.0–600.0

Secs

R/W

AV3

DecelTimeSet

Decelerate time setting

0.0–600.0

Secs

R/W

AV4

CommandFreqSet

Command frequency
setting**

0.00–DRV-20

R/W

AV5

PIDReferenceSet

PID reference setting

0–100.0

R/W

AV6

PIDFeedbackSet

PID feedback setting

0–100.0

R/W

403

RS-485 Communication Features

•

When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the inverter is
disconnected. When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not saved if the power of
the inverter is disconnected.

•

A value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20) cannot be used. The maximum frequency
can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src (DRV-07) is set to ‘Int
485’.

•

AV2, AV3 and AV4 are used to provide acceleration/deceleration rate and frequency reference
commands. These can be written in AUTO mode only.

7.4.5.2 Multi-state Value Object Instance
Instance ID

MSV1

Object Name

LostCommand

Description

Setting Range

Units

R/W

Command lost
operation setting

0: None
1: FreeRun
2: Dec
3: HoldInput
4: HoldOutput
5: LostPreset

MSG

R/W

7.4.5.3 Binary Value Object Instance
Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Active /Inactive Text

R/W

BV1

StopCmd

Stop command

False/True

R/W

BV2

RunForwardCmd

Run forward command

False/True

R/W

BV3

RunReverseCmd

Run reverse command

False/True

R/W

BV4

ResetFaultCmd

Fault reset command

False/True

R/W

BV5

FreeRunStopCmd

Free run stop command

False/True

R/W

BV6

Relay1Cmd

Relay 1 On/Off command False/True

R/W

BV7

Relay2Cmd

Relay 2 On/Off command False/True

R/W

BV8

Relay3Cmd

Relay 3 On/Off command False/True

R/W

404

RS-485 Communication Features

Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Active /Inactive Text

BV9

Relay4Cmd

Relay 4 On/Off command False/True

R/W

BV10

Relay5Cmd

Relay 5 On/Off command False/True

R/W

BV11

Q1Cmd

Q 1 On/Off command

R/W

False/True

R/W

7.4.5.4 Analog Input Object Instance
Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Units

R/W

AI1

InvCap (kW)

Inverter capacity

AI2

InvCap (HP)

Inverter capacity

AI3

InvVoltageClass

Inverter voltage type

Volts

AI4

OutputCurrent

Output current

Amps

AI5

OutputFreq

Output frequency

AI6

OutputVolgate

Output voltage

Volts

AI7

DCLinkVoltage

DC Link voltage

Volts

AI8

OutputPower

Output power

AI9

AI1

Value of Analog 1

AI10

AI2

Values of Analog 2

AI11

OutputRPM

Output speed

RPM

AI12

Pole

Pole number of the motor

AI13

InvStatus

Information of the inverter state
(Refer to address 0h0305 in the common
area)(Note1)

AI14

LatchTripInfo1

Latch type trip information1
(Refer to address 0h0330 in the common
area)(Note1)

AI15

LatchTripInfo2

Latch type trip information2

405

RS-485 Communication Features

Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Units

R/W

LatchTripInfo3

Latch type trip information3
(Refer to address 0h0335 in the common
area)(Note1)

LevelTripInfo

Level type trip information
(Refer to address 0h0332 in the common
area)(Note1)

HWDIagInfo

H/W Diagnosis trip information
(Refer to address 0h0333 in the common
area)*

AI19

WarningInfo

Warning information
(Refer to address 0h0334 in the common
area)*

AI20

KiloWattHour

Output power by kW/h

kW/h

AI21

MegaWattHour

Output power by MW/h

MW/h

AI22

PowerFactor

Power factor

AI23

RunTimeDay

Run time by day

Day

AI24

RunTimeMin

Run time by minute

Day

AI25

PidOutValue

PID Output Value

AI26

PidReferenceValue

PID Reference Value

AI27

PidFeedbackValue

PID Feedback Value

(Refer to address 0h0331 in the common
area)(Note1)
AI16

AI17

AI18

*Refer to the relevant addresses in 7.3.8 communication compatible common area parameters.

Instance ID

Object Name

Description

R/W

BI1

Stopped

Stop state

BI2

RunningForward

Running forward

BI3

RunningReverse

Running reverse

406

RS-485 Communication Features

BI4

Tripped

Trip occurred

BI5

Accelerating

BI6

Decelerating

BI7

SteadySpeed

Operating at steady speed

BI8

RunningDC

Operating at a 0 step speed

BI9

Stopping

BI10

FwdRunCommandState

Forward run command state

BI11

RevRunCommandState

Reverse run command state

BI12

P1 state

BI13

P2 state

BI14

P3 state

BI15

P4 state

BI16

P5 state

BI17

P6 state

BI18

P7 state

BI19

Relay1

Relay1 state*

BI20

Relay2

Relay2 state*

BI21

Relay3

Relay3 state*

BI22

Relay4

Relay4 state*

BI23

Relay5

Relay5 state*

BI24

Q1 state

BI25

SpeedSearch

Speed search operating

BI26

HWOCS

H/W OCS occurred

BI27

SWOCS

S/W OCS occurred

BI28

RunningDwell

Dwell operating state

BI29

SteadyState

Steady state

407

RS-485 Communication Features

BI30

Warning

Warning state

7.4.5.5 Binary Input Object Instance

OUT-31–35 (Relay1–5) must be set to ‘0 (none)’ to control outputs via communication.

7.4.5.6 MultiState Input Object Instance
Instance ID

Object Name

Description

Units

R/W

MSI1

UnitsDisplay

Displays Unit setting

1 Hz
2 RPM

7.4.5.7 Error Message
Display

Description

serviceserror+7

Inconsistent parameters

propertyerror+9

Invalid data type

serviceserror+10

Invalid access method

serviceserror+11

Invalid file start

serviceserror+29

Service request denied

objecterror+31

Unknown object

propertyerror+0

Property other

propertyerror+27

Read access denied

propertyerror+32

Unknown property

propertyerror+37

Value out of range

propertyerror+40

Write access denied

propertyerror+42

Invalid array index

408

RS-485 Communication Features

Display

Description

clienterror+31

Unknown device

resourceserror+0

Resources other

clienterror+30

Time out

abortreason+4

Segmentation not supported

rejectreason+4

Invalid tag

clienterror+0xFF

No invoke id

securityerror+26

Password failure

409

RS-485 Communication Features

7.5 Metasys-N2 Communication
7.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start
Follow the instructions below to configure the Metasys-N2 network for a quick start.
1

Set COM-02 (Int485 Proto) to ‘5 (Metasys-N2)’.

Set the network communication speed to ‘9600 bps.’

Configure the communication modes and make sure that they are fixed to Data Bit 8 / No
Parity Bit/ Start Bit 1 / Stop Bit 1.

Test the network and make sure Metasys-N2 communication is working properly.

7.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard
Item

Standards

Communication speed

9600 bps

Control procedure

Asynchronous communications system

Communication system

Half duplex system

Cable

Twisted pair (1 pair and shield)

Character system

LS485: ASCII (8bit)
Modbus-RTU: Binary (7/8 bit)
Metasys-N2: ASCII (8bit)

Start/Stop bit

Start 1bit, Stop 1bit
RS485: Checksum (2byte)

Error check

Modbus-RTU: CRC16 (2byte)
Metastys-N2: CRC16 (2byte)

Parity check

None

410

RS-485 Communication Features

7.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map

7.5.3.1 Analog Output
The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.
No.

Name

Range

Unit

Description

AO1

Command
Frequency

0.0–Max Freq

Command frequency setting**

AO2

Accel Time

0.0–600.0

Sec

ACC time setting*

AO3

Decel Time

0.0–600.0

Sec

DEC time setting*

Drive mode setting

Frequency mode setting

AO4

AO5

Drive mode

Freq mode

KeyPad

Fx/Rx-1

Fx/Rx-2

Int. 485

FieldBus

Time Event

–KeyPad-1

–KeyPad-2

–Reversed

Int485

FieldBus

Reversed

Pulse

411

RS-485 Communication Features

•

When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the inverter is
disconnected. If PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not saved when the power of
the inverter is disconnected.

•

Cannot set the value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20). The maximum frequency
can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src (DRV-07) is set to ‘Int
485’.

7.5.3.2 Binary Output
The output point map controlling the inverter from the Metasys-N2 master.
No.

Name

Range

Description

BO1

Stop Command

1: Stop

Stop command

BO2

Run Forward Command

1: Forward Run

Forward run command

BO3

Run Reverse
Command

1: Reverse Run

Reverse run command

BO4

Reset Fault

1: Reset

Fault reset command

BO5

Free-Run Stop

1: Bx

Free-run stop command

7.5.3.3 Analog Input
Metasys-N2 master monitors inverter state.
No.

Name

Unit

Description

AI1

Output Current

Amps

Output current

AI2

Output Frequency

Output frequency

AI3

Output Speed

RPM

Output speed

AI4

Trip Code

Trip code information
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h000F)*

412

RS-485 Communication Features

No.

Name

Unit

Description

AI5

Latch Trip Info1

‘Latch’ type fault trip information 1
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0330)*

AI6

Latch Trip Info2

‘Latch’ type fault trip information 2
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0331)*

AI7

Latch Trip Info3

‘Latch’ type fault trip information 3
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0335)*

AI8

Level Trip Info

‘Level’ type fault trip information
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0332)(1)

AI9

H/W Diagnosis Trip
Info

H/W Diagnosis fault trip information
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0333)(1)

AI10

Warning Info

Warning information
(Refer to Common Area parameter address 0h0334)(1)

* Refer to 7.3.8Compatible Common Area Parameteron page 378.

7.5.3.4 Binary Input
Metasys-N2 master unit monitors the inverter input and output status in binary codes. The
following table lists the binary codes used and their meanings.
No.

Name

Description

BI1

Stopped

1 – Stopped

BI2

Running Forward

1 – Forward operation is running.

BI3

Running Reverse

1 – Reverse operation is running.

BI4

Tripped

1 – Fault trip occurred.

BI5

Accelerating

1 –Accelerating

BI6

Decelerating

1 –Decelerating

BI7

Reached Full Speed

1 –Running at a steady speed (frequency reference)

BI8

DC Braking

1 – Running on DC power source

BI9

Stopping

1–Stopping is in progress.

BI10

P1 Input

1–True / 0 - False

BI11

P2 Input

1–True / 0–False

413

RS-485 Communication Features

No.

Name

Description

BI12

P3 Input

1–True / 0–False

BI13

P4 Input

1–True / 0–False

BI14

P5 Input

1–True / 0–False

BI15

P6 Input

1–True / 0–False

BI16

P7 Input

1–True / 0–False

BI17

Relay1 State

1–On / 0 - Off

BI18

Relay2 State

1–On / 0 - Off

BI19

Relay3 State

1–On / 0 - Off

BI20

Relay4 State

1–On / 0 - Off

BI21

Relay5 State

1–On / 0 - Off

BI22

Q1 (OC1) State

1–On / 0 - Off

7.5.3.5 Error Code
Defined Codes

Description

The device has been reset. Currently waiting for the ‘Identity Yourself’
command.

Undefined command

Checksum error has occurred.

Data size exceeded the input buffer (message is bigger than the device buffer
size).

Data field error (input message size does not fit the command type)

Invalid data (message value is out of the range)

Invalid command for data type (command does not fit the message frame)

Command is not accepted (device has ignored a command due to a fault. The
master device sends a ‘Status Update Request’).

414

Table of Functions

8 Table of Functions
This chapter lists all the function settings for the H100 series inverter. Use the references listed in
this document to set the parameters. If an entered set value is out of range, the messages that will
be displayed on the keypad are also provided in this chapter. In these situations, the [ENT] key will
not operate to program the inverter.

8.1 Drive Group (DRV)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Writedisabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump
Code

Jump Code

1–99

p.70

0h1101

Target
frequency

Cmd
Frequency

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

0.00

p.88

0h1102

Keypad
run
direction

Keypad Run
Dir

p.86

p.114

0h1103

0h1104

Accelerati
on time

Decelerati
on time

Acc Time

Dec Time

Reverse

Forward

0.0–600.0 (sec)

20.0

0.75~
90kW

60.0

110~
250kW

100.0

315~
500kW

30.0

0.75~
90kW

90.0

110~
250kW

150.0

315~
500kW

415

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1105

HANDKPD H.O.A
OFF-AUTO
Lock
Key Lock

0h1106

0h1107

0h1109

Comman
d source

LCD Display

Cmd Source

Frequency
reference Freq Ref Src
source

Control
mode

Control
Mode

Setting Range

Locked

During
Run

Unlocked

Keypad

Fx/Rx-1

Fx/Rx-2

Int 485

Field Bus

Time Event

Keypad-1

Keypad-2

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

108

V/F

Slip
Compen

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

p.75

1:
Fx/Rx-1

p.106

0: Keypad-1

p.88

0: V/F

p.125,
p.162,

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
416

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h110B

Jog
frequency

Jog
Frequency

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

10.00

p.153

0h110C

Jog run
accelerati
on time

Jog Acc
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

20.0

p.153

0h110D

Jog run
decelerati
on time

Jog Dec
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

30.0

p.153

Dependent on
motor setting

p.219

0h110E

Motor
capacity

Motor
Capacity

0.2 Kw
(0.3HP)

0.4 kW
(0.5HP)

0.75 kW
(1.0HP)

1.1 kW
(1.5HP)

1.5 kW
(2.0HP)

2.2 kW
(3.0HP)

3.0 kW
(4.0HP)

3.7 kW
(5.0HP)

4.0 kW
(5.5HP)

5.5 kW
(7.5HP)

7.5 kW
(10.0HP)

417

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

418

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

11.0 kW
(15.0HP)

15.0 kW
(20.0HP)

18.5 kW
(25.0HP)

22.0 kW
(30.0HP)

30.0 kW
(40.0HP)

37.0 kW
(50.0HP)

45.0 kW
(60.0HP)

55.0 kW
(75.0HP)

75.0kW
(100.0HP)

90.0kW
(125.0HP)

110.0kW
(150.0HP)

132.0kW
(220.0HP)

160.0kW
(250.0HP)

185.0kW
(300.0HP)

220.0kW

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: Manual

p.129

(350.0HP)

169

0h110F

0h1110

0h1111

Torque
boost
options

Forward
Torque
boost

Torque
Boost

Fwd Boost

Reverse
Torque
boost

Rev Boost

250.0kW
(400.0HP)

315.0kW
(500.0HP)

355.0kW
(550.0HP)

400.0kW
(650.0HP)

500.0kW
(800.0HP)

Manual

Auto 1

Auto 2
2.0

0.75~
90kW

1.0

110~
500kW

2.0

0.75~
90kW

1.0

110~
500kW

0.0–15.0 (%)

0h1112

Base
frequency

Base Freq

30.00–400.00
(Hz)

60.00

p.125

0h1113

Start
frequency

Start Freq

0.01–10.00 (Hz)

0.50

p.125

0h1114

Maximum
Max Freq
frequency

40.00-400.00
(Hz)

60.00

p.137

DRV-16–17 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘0 (Manual)’.
419

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1115

Select
Hz/Rpm Sel
speed unit

0h1119

Hand
mode
operation
frequency

0h111A

Hand
mode
operation HAND Ref
Frequency Mode
reference
source

0h111E

0h115B

0h1162

kW/HP
unit
selection

Smart
Copy

Display
I/O,S/W
Version

LCD Display

HAND Cmd
Freq

kW/HP Unit
Sel

SmartCopy

I/O S/W Ver

Setting Range

Hz Display

RPM
Display

0.00, Low FreqHigh Freq
0

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: Hz Display

p.104

0.00

p.83

0: HAND
Parameter

p.83

1:HP

0:None

HAND
Parameter

Follow
AUTO

None

SmartDow
nload

SmartUplo
ad

8.2 Basic Function Group (BAS)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled

420

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1-99

p.70

0: None

p.147

0: M+(G*A)

p.147

0211

0h1201

0h1202

Auxiliary
reference
source

Auxiliary
command
calculation
type

Aux Ref
Src

Aux Calc
Type

None

Pulse

Int 485

FieldBus

EPID1
Output

EPID1 Fdb
Val

1210

M+(G*A)

Mx (G*A)

M/(G*A)

M+[M*(G*A)]

M+G*2 (A50%)

M*[G*2 (A50%)

M/[G*2 (A-

‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of BAS-01 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
11

BAS-02–03 are displayed when BAS-01 is not ‘0 (None)’.
421

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

100.0

p.147

1: Fx/Rx-1

p.141

0: Keypad1

p.141

0: Linear

p.125

50%)]
7
03

0h1203

0h1204

0h1205

0h1207

Auxiliary
command
gain

Second
command
source

Second
frequency
source

Aux Ref
Gain

Cmd 2nd
Src

Freq 2nd
Src

V/F pattern V/F
options
Pattern

M+M*G*2
(A-50%)

-200.0-200.0 (%)
0

Keypad

Fx/Rx-1

Fx/Rx-2

Int 485

FieldBus

Time Event

Keypad-1

Keypad-2

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

1012

Linear

Square

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of BAS-05 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
422

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1208

Acc/Dec
standard
frequency

0h1209

Time scale
settings

LCD
Display

Ramp T
Mode

Setting Range
2

User V/F

Square 2

Max Freq

Delta Freq

0.01 sec

Time Scale 1

0.1 sec

1 sec

60 Hz

50 Hz

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: Max Freq Δ

p.114

1: 0.1 sec

p.114

0: 60 Hz

p.255

p.162

Δ
Dependent
on motor
setting
Δ

p.162

0h120A

Input
power
frequency

60/50 Hz
Sel

0h120B

Number of
motor
poles

Pole
Number

2-48

0h120C

Rated slip
speed

Rated Slip

0-3000 (RPM)

0h120D

Motor
rated
current

Rated Curr 1.0-1000.0 (A)

0h120E

Motor noload
current

NoloadCur
0.0-1000.0 (A)
r

0h120F

Motor
rated
voltage

Rated Volt

0, 170-480 (V)

p.131

0h1210

Motor
efficiency

Efficiency

70-100 (%)

Dependent
on motor
Δ
setting

p.219

0h1212

Trim power Trim
display
Power %

70-130 (%)

100

0h1213

Input
power
voltage

p.255

AC Input
Volt

170~
264V

0.75~
18.5kW

220 V

320~

0.75~

380 V

423

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

Auto
Tuning

LCD
Display

Auto
Tuning

Setting Range
528V

90kW

320~
550V

110~
500kW

None

All (Rotation
type)

All (Static type)

Rs+ Lsigma
(Rotation type)

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.219

Δ
Dependent
on motor
setting
Δ

p.219

Stator
resistor

Leakage
Lsigma
inductance

0.00-99.99 (mH)

4113

0h1229

User
User Freq
frequency1 1

0.00 - Maximum
frequency (Hz)

15.00

p.127

0h122A

User
voltage1

0–100 (%)

p.127

0h122B

User
User Freq
frequency2 2

0.00-Maximum
frequency (Hz)

30.00

p.127

0h122C

User
voltage2

0-100 (%)

p.127

0h122D

User
User Freq
frequency3 3

0.00 - Maximum
frequency (Hz)

45.00

p.127

0h122E

User
voltage3

0-100 (%)

p.127

0h122F

User
User Freq
frequency4 4

0.00 - Maximum
frequency (Hz)

60.00

p.127

0h1230

User
voltage4

0-100 (%)

100

p.127

User Volt 1

User Volt 2

User Volt 3

User Volt 4

0.000-9.999 (Ω)

13BAS-41–48 are displayed when BAS-07 or M2-25 is set to ‘2 (User V/F)’.

424

p.219

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

5014

0h1232

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
1
frequency1

Low Freq- High Freq

10.00

p.104

0h1233

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
2
frequency2

Low Freq- High Freq

20.00

p.104

0h1234

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
3
frequency3

Low Freq- High
Freq

30.00

p.104

0h1235

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
4
frequency4

Low Freq- High Freq

40.00

p.104

0h1236

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
5
frequency5

Low Freq- High Freq

50.00

p.104

0h1237

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
6
frequency6

Low Freq- High Freq

60.00

p.104

0h1238

Multi-step
Step Freqspeed
7
frequency7

Low Freq-High Freq

60.00

p.104

0h1246

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time1

Acc Time-1 0.0-600.0 (sec)

20.0

p.118

0h1247

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time1

Dec Time1

0.0-600.0 (sec)

20.0

p.118

0h1248

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time2

Acc Time-2 0.0-600.0 (sec)

30.0

p.118

7215

LCD
Display

14BAS-50–56 are displayed whenIN-65-71 is set to ‘Speed–L/M/H’.

BAS-72–83 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Xcel-L/M/H’
425

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1249

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time2

Dec Time2

0.0-600.0 (sec)

30.0

p.118

0h124A

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time3

Acc Time-3 0.0-600.0 (sec)

40.0

p.118

0h124B

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time3

Dec Time3

0.0-600.0 (sec)

40.0

p.118

0h124C

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time4

Acc Time-4 0.0-600.0 (sec)

50.0

p.118

0h124D

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time4

Dec Time4

0.0-600.0 (sec)

50.0

p.118

0h124E

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time5

Acc Time-5 0.0-600.0 (sec)

40.0

p.118

0h124F

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time5

Dec Time5

0.0-600.0 (sec)

40.0

p.118

0h1250

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time6

Acc Time-6 0.0-600.0 (sec)

30.0

p.118

0h1251

Multi-step
deceleratio
n time6

Dec Time6

0.0-600.0 (sec)

30.0

p.118

0h1252

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time7

Acc Time-7 0.0-600.0 (sec)

20.0

p.118

0h1253

Multi-step
acceleratio
n time7

Dec Time7

20.0

p.118

426

0.0-600.0 (sec)

Table of Functions

8.3 Expanded Function Group (ADV)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1-99

p.70

0h1301

Acceleration
pattern

Acc
Pattern

p.121

0h1302

Deceleration
pattern

Dec
Pattern

p.121

0h1303

S-curve
acceleration
start point
gradient

Acc S
Start

1–100 (%)

p.121

0h1304

S-curve
acceleration
end point
gradient

Acc S
End

1–100 (%)

p.121

0h1305

S-curve
deceleration
start point
gradient

Dec S
Start

1–100 (%)

p.121

0h1306

S-curve
deceleration
end point
gradient

Dec S
End

1–100 (%)

p.121

0h1307

Start Mode

Start
Mode

Acc

DC-Start

0: Acc

p.132

0h1308

Stop Mode

Stop
Mode

Dec

DC-Brake

0: Dec

p.133

0316

0517

Linear
0: Linear
S-curve

16ADV-03–04 are displayed when ADV-01 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.
17ADV-05–06 are displayed when ADV-02 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.

427

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1309

Name

LCD
Display

Selection of
prohibited
rotation
direction

Run
Prevent

Setting Range

Prope
rty*

Ref.

p.110

0: No

p.111

Initial Value

Free-Run

Power
Braking

None

Forward Prev 0: None

Reverse Prev

Yes

0h130A

Starting with
power on

Poweron Run

1118

0h130B

Power-on
run delay
time

Power0.0 -6000.0 (sec)
On Delay

0.0

p.111

1219

0h130C

DC braking
time at
startup

DC-Start
Time

0.00-60.00 (sec)

0.00

p.132

0h130D

Amount of
applied DC

DC Inj
Level

0–200 (%)

p.132

0h130E

Output
blocking
time before
DC braking

DC-Block
0.00- 60.00 (sec)
Time

p.133

1420

0.00

0.75~
90kW

2.00

110~
500kW

0h130F

DC braking
time

DCBrake
Time

0.00- 60.00 (sec)

1.00

p.133

0h1310

DC braking
rate

DCBrake
Level

0–200 (%)

p.133

0h1311

DC braking

DC-

Startfrequency-

5.00

p.133

18ADV-11 is displayed when ADV-10 is set to ‘1 (YES)’.
19ADV-12 is displayed when ADV-07 is set to ‘1 (DC-Start)’.
20ADV-14 is displayed when ADV-08 is set to ‘1 (DC-Brake)’.

428

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name
frequency

LCD
Display
Brake
Freq

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

60 Hz

0h1314

Dwell
Acc
frequency on Dwell
acceleration Freq

Start frequencyMaximum
frequency (Hz)

5.00

p.160

0h1315

Dwell
operation
time on
acceleration

0.0-60.0 (sec)

0.0

p.160

0h1316

Dwell
Dec
frequency on Dwell
deceleration Freq

Start frequencyMaximum
frequency (Hz)

5.00

p.160

0h1317

Dwell
operation
time on
deceleration

Dec
Dwell
Time

0.0-60.0 (sec)

0.0

p.160

0h1318

Frequency
limit

Freq
Limit

Yes

0: No

p.137

0h1319

Frequency
lower limit
value

Freq
Limit Lo

0.00-Upper limit
frequency (Hz)

0.50

p.137

0h131A

Frequency
upper limit
value

Freq
Limit Hi

Lower limit
frequencyMaximum
frequency (Hz)

Max freq

p.137

0h131B

Frequency
jump

Jump
Freq

0: No

p.140

2821

0h131C

Jump
frequency
lower limit1

Jump Lo
1

0.00-Jump
frequency upper
limit1 (Hz)

10.00

p.140

0h131D

Jump
frequency

Jump Hi
1

Jump frequency
lower limit1-

15.00

p.140

Acc
Dwell
Time

Yes

21ADV-28–33 are displayed when ADV-27 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

429

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

upper limit1

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Maximum
frequency (Hz)

0h131E

Jump
frequency
lower limit2

Jump Lo
2

0.00-Jump
frequency upper
limit2 (Hz)

20.00

p.140

0h131F

Jump
frequency
upper limit2

Jump Hi
2

Jump frequency
lower limit2Maximum
frequency (Hz)

25.00

p.140

0h1320

Jump
frequency
lower limit3

Jump Lo
3

0.00-Jump
frequency upper
limit3 (Hz)

30.00

p.140

0h1321

Jump
frequency
upper limit3

Jump Hi
3

Jump frequency
lower limit3Maximum
frequency (Hz)

35.00

p.140

0h1332

Energy
saving
operation

E-Save
Mode

0: None

p.242

0h1333

Energy
saving level

Energy
Save

0–30 (%)

p.242

0h1334

Energy
saving point
search time

E-Save
Det T

0.0-100.0 (sec)

20.0

p.242

0h133C

Acc/Dec
time
transition
frequency

Xcel
Change
Fr

0.00-Maximum
frequency (Hz)

0.00

p.120

0h1340

Cooling fan

Fan

0: During Run

5122
52

None

Manual

Auto

During Run

22ADV-51 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘1 (Manual)’.

ADV-52 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘2 (Auto)’.
430

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1341

0h1342

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

control

Control

Always ON

Temp
Control

Yes

None

Pulse

Up/Down
operation
frequency
save

Output
contact
On/Off
control
options

U/D Save
Mode

On/Off
Ctrl Src

7
23

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

p.254

0: No

p.155

0: None

p.294

V3
I3

0h1343

Output
contact On
level

On-Ctrl
Level

Output contact
off level100.00%

90.00

p.294

0h1344

Output
contact Off
level

Off-Ctrl
Level

-100.00outputcontact
on level (%)

10.00

p.294

0h1346

Safe
operation
selection

Run En
Mode

0: Always
Enable

p.158

Safe
operation

Run Dis
Stop

0: Free-Run

p.158

7124

0h1347

Always
Enable

DI
Dependent

Free-Run

Q-Stop

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.

24ADV-71–72 are displayed when ADV-70 is set to ‘1 (DI Dependent)’.

431

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

stop options

0h1348

Safe
operation
deceleration
time

0h134A

Selection of
0
regeneration
RegenAv
evasion
dSel
function for
1
press

0h134B

7625

Setting Range

Q-Stop
Time

Prope
rty*

Ref.

5.0

p.158

0: No

p.301

Q-Stop
Resume

0.0-600.0 (sec)

No
Yes

Voltage level
200 V: 300-400 V
of
regeneration RegenAv
evasion
d Level
400 V: 600-800 V
motion for
press

350

700

0h134C

Compensati
on frequency
limit of
CompFre
0.00-10.00 Hz
regeneration q Limit
evasion for
press

1.00

p.301

0h134D

Regeneratio
n evasion for
press P-Gain

RegenAv
0.0-100.0%
dPgain

50.0

p.301

0h134E

Regeneratio
n evasion for
press I gain

RegenAv
20–30000 (msec)
dIgain

500

p.301

25ADV-76–78 are displayed when ADV-74 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

432

Initial Value

Table of Functions

8.4 Control Function Group (CON)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Writedisabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1-99

p.70

1.0~15.0
(kHz)

0.75~90
kW

3.0

1.0~5.0
(kHz)

110~355
kW

2.0

p.250

1.0~4.0
(kHz)

400~500
kW

1.5

0: Normal PWM

p.250

1 : Yes

p.239

0h1404

Carrier
frequency

Carrier
Freq

Normal
PWM

Low
leakage
PWM

Yes

Switching
mode

PWM
Mode

Anti-hunting
regulator
mode

AHR Sel

0h140E

Anti-hunting
regulator PGain

AHR PGain

0-32767

1000

p.239

0h140F

Anti-hunting
regulator
start
frequency

AHR Low
Freq

0.00-AHR High
Freq

0.50

p.239

0h1410

Anti-hunting
regulator
end
frequency

AHR High
Freq

AHR Low Freq400.00
400.00

p.239

0h1411

Anti-hunting

AHR limit

0-20

p.239

0h1405

0h140D

433

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

regulator
compensatio
n voltage
limit rate
2126

0h1415

Auto torque
boost filter
gain

ATB Filt
Gain

1 – 9999
(msec)

p.130

0h1416

Auto torque
boost
voltage

ATB Volt
Gain

0.0-300.0%

100.0

p.130

0h1446

Speed search
mode
SS Mode
selection

0:
Flying Start-1

p.243

0000

p.243

Flying
Start-1

Flying
Start-2

Bit

00001111

Speed
search
Bit
on
0
accelerati
on

0h1447

Speed search
Speed
operation
Search
selection

Restart
after
Bit trips
1 (other
than LV
trip)
Restart
after
Bit instantan
2 eous
interrupti
on

26CON-21–22 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘Auto 2’.

434

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

p.243

Bit Power-on
3 run

7227

7328

0h1448

0h1449

Speed search
SS Supreference
Current
current

Speed search
proportional SS P-Gain
gain

90
50–120 (%)

0.75~
250kW

315~
500kW

Flying Start-1
: 100
0-9999

Flying Start-2
: Dependent on
motor setting
Flying Start-1
: 200

0h144A

Speed search
SS I-Gain
integral gain

0-9999

Flying Start-2
: Dependent on
motor setting

p.243

0h144B

Output block
SS Block
time before
Time
speed search

0.0-60.0 (sec)

1.0

p.243

0h144D

Energy
buffering
selection

0: No

p.197

0h144E

Energy
buffering
start level

KEB Start
Lev

110.0-140.0
(%)

p.197

Energy
buffering
stop level

KEB Stop
Lev

KEB Start Lev *
125.0-145.0
(%)

p.197

7829

0h144F

KEB Select

Yes

125.0

0.75~
90kW

115.0

110~
500kW

130.0

0.75~
90kW

125.0

110~

27CON-72 is displayed after Flying Start-1 and when any CON-71 bit is set to ‘1’.
28CON-73–75 are displayed when any CON-71bit is set to ‘1’.
29CON-78–83 are displayed when CON-77 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.

435

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

500kW

0h1450

KEB Slip
Energy
Gain
buffering slip
buffering
gain
slip gain

0h1451

Energy
buffering PGain

KEB P Gain

0-20000

1000

p.197

0h1452

Energy
buffering I
gain

KEB I Gain

1-20000

500

p.197

0h1453

Energy
buffering
acceleration
time

p.197

KEB Acc
Time

0-20000

300

p.197

10.0

0.75~
90kW

30.0

110~
500kW

0.0-600.0

8.5 Input Terminal Group (IN)
Data In the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

1-99

p.70

0h1501

Frequency at
maximum
analog input

Freq at
100%

Start frequencyMaximum
frequency (Hz)

Maximu
m
frequenc
y

p.90

0530

0h1505

V1 input

0~12.00(V) or

0.00

p.90

30‘IN-05’ setting range can be changed according to the ‘IN-06’ settings.

436

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0:
Unipolar

p.90

voltage display Monitor(V)

-12.00~12.00 (V)
0

Unipolar

0h1506

V1 input
polarity
selection

V1 Polarity

Bipolar

0h1507

Time constant
of V1 input
filter

V1 Filter

0–10000 (ms)

p.90

0h1508

V1 minimum
input voltage

V1 Volt x1

0.00-10.00 (V)

0.00

p.90

0h1509

Output at V1
minimum
voltage (%)

V1 Perc y1

0.00-100.00 (%)

0.00

p.90

0h150A

V1 maximum
input voltage
(%)

V1 Volt x2

0.00-12.00 (V)

10.00

p.90

0h150B

Output at V1
maximum
voltage (%)

V1 Perc y2

0.00-100.00 (%)

100.00

p.90

1231

0h150C

V1 input at
minimum
voltage (%)

V1 –Volt x1’

-10.00- 0.00 (V)

0.00

p.93

0h150D

Output at V1
minimum
voltage (%)

V1 –Perc y1’

-100.00-0.00 (%)

0.00

p.93

0h150E

V1 maximum
input voltage
(%)

V1 –Volt x2’

-12.00- 0.00 (V)

-10.00

p.93

0h150F

Output at V1
maximum
voltage (%)

V1 –Perc y2’

-100.00-0.00 (%)

-100.00

p.93

0h1510

V2 rotation

V1 Inverting 0

0: No

p.90

31IN-12–17 are displayed when IN-06 is set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’.

437

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

direction
change

Setting Range
1

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Yes

0h1511

V1quantizatio
n change

V1
Quantizing

0.0032, 0.04-10.00
(%)

0.04

p.90

2033

0h1514

Temperature
monitor

T1 Monitor

0.00 - 100.00 (%)

p.323

3534

0h1523

V2 input rate
monitor

V2 Monitor
(V)

0.00-12.00 (V)

0.00

p.99

0h1525

V2 input filter
time

V2 Filter

0-10000 (msec)

p.99

0h1526

V2 minimum
input voltage

V2 Volt x1

0.00-10.00 (V)

0.00

p.99

0h1527

Output at V2
minimum
voltage (%)

V2 Perc y1

0.00-100.00 (%)

0.00

p.99

0h1528

V2 maximum
input voltage

V2 Volt x2

0.00-10.00 (V)

10.00

p.99

0h1529

Output at V2
maximum
voltage (%)

V2 Perc y2

0.00-100.00 (%)

100.00

p.99

0h152E

V2 Rotation
direction
options

V2 Inverting

0: No

p.99

0h152F

V2 Quantizing
level

V2
Quantizing

0.04

p.99

Yes

0.0035,

32* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
33IN-20 is displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW3) is

selected on T1.
34IN-35–47 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW4) is

selected on V2.
35* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

438

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0.04- 10.00 (%)
5036

0h1532

I2 input
monitor

I2 Monitor
(mA)

0–24 (mA)

p.96

0h1534

I2 input filter
time

I2 Filter

0–10000 (msec)

p.96

0h1535

I2 minimum
input power
supply

I2 Curr x1

0.00-20.00 (mA)

4.00

p.96

0h1536

Output at I2
maximum
current (%)

I2 Perc y1

0.00-100.00 (%)

0.00

p.96

0h1537

I2 maximum
input current

I2 Curr x2

0.00-24.00 (mA)

20.00

p.96

0h1538

Output at I2
maximum
current (%)

I2 Perc y2

0.00-100.00 (%)

100.00

p.96

0h153D

I2 rotation
direction
options

I2 Inverting

0: No

p.96

0h153E

I2 Quantizing
level

I2
Quantizing

0.04

p.96

0h1541

P1 Px terminal
configuration

P1 Define

1: Fx

p.106

0h1542

P2 Px terminal
configuration

0h1543

0h1544

Yes

0.0037
0.04-10.00 (%)
0

None

P2 Define

2: Rx

p.106

P3 Px terminal
configuration

P3 Define

RST

5: BX

p.343

P4 Px terminal

P4 Define

External

3: RST

p.342

36IN-50–62 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW5) is

selected on I2.
37* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

439

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

configuration

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Trip

0h1545

P5 Px terminal
configuration

P5 Define

7: Sp-L

p.342

0h1546

P6 Px terminal
configuration

P6 Define

JOG

8: Sp-M

p.153

0h1547

P7 Px terminal
configuration

P7 Define

Speed-L

9: Sp-H

p.104

Speed-M

p.104

Speed-H

p.104

XCEL-L

p.118

XCEL-M

p.118

XCEL-H

p.118

XCEL
Stop

p.124

RUN
Enable

p.158

3-Wire

p.157

2nd
Source

p.141

Exchange

p.253

p.155

Down

p.155

U/D Clear

p.155

Analog
Hold

p.102

I-Term
Clear

p.164

PID
Openloo
p

p.164

440

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

PID Gain2

p.164

PID Ref
Change

p.124

2nd
Motor

p.251

Interlock
1

p.286

Interlock
2

p.286

Interlock
3

p.286

Interlock
4

p.286

Interlock
5

p.286

Pre Excite

Timer In

p.265

dis Aux
Ref

p.147

FWD JOG

p.154

REV JOG

p.154

Fire
Mode

p.240

EPID1
Run

p.184

EPID1
ItermClr

p.184

Time
Event En

p.222

Pre Heat

p.216

Damper
Open

p.194

441

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

PumpCle
an

p.200

EPID2
Run

p.184

EPID2
ItermClr

p.184

Sleep
Wake
Chg

p.184

PID Step
Ref L

p.164

PID Step
Ref M

p.164

PID Step
Ref H

p.164

5338

Interlock
6

Interlock
7

Interlock
8

0h1553

DI On Delay
Selection

DI On
DelayEn

000 0000 ~

111

111 1111

1111

0h1554

DI Off Delay DI Off
Selection
DelayEn

000 0000 ~

111

111 1111

1111

0h1555

Multi-function
input terminal
On filter

0–10000 (msec)

Ref.

DI On Delay

Prope
rty*

p.142

‘53(Interlock6)~55(Interlock8)’ of IN-65~71 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information
442

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1556

Multi-function
input terminal
Off filter

DI Off Delay

0–10000 (msec)

p.142

000 0000 Δ

p.142

p.104

000 0000 O

p.142

P7 – P1
87

0h1557

Multi-function
input terminal
selection

0h1559

Multi-step
command
delay time

0h155A

Multi-function
input terminal
status

DI NC/NO
Sel

InCheck
Time

A Terminal
(NO)

B Terminal
(NC)

1–5000 (msec)
P7 – P1

DI Status

Contact
(Off)

Contact (On)

0h155B

Pulse input
amount
display

TI Monitor

0.00-50.00 (kHz)

0.00

p.100

0h155C

TI minimum
input pulse

TI Filter

0–9999 (msec)

p.100

0h155D

TI minimum
input pulse

TI Pls x1

0 - TI Pls x2

0.00

p.100

0h153E

Output at TI
minimum
pulse (%)

TI Perc y1

0.00-100.00 (%)

0.00

p.100

0h155F

TI maximum
input pulse

TI Pls x2

TI Pls x1-32.00

32.00

p.100

0h1560

Output at TI
maximum
pulse (%)

TI Perc y2

0.00-100.00 (%)

100.00

p.100

0h1561

TI rotation

TI Inverting

0: No

443

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1562

Name

LCD Display

direction
change

TI quantization TI
level
Quantizing

0.0039,
0.04-10.00 (%)

Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
444

Setting Range

Initial
Value

Prope
rty*

Yes

Ref.
p.100

0.04

p.100

Table of Functions

8.6 Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump
Code

1-99

p.70

0: Frequency

p.303

100.0

p.303

0.0

p.303

0h1601

Analog
output1

AO1
Mode

Frequency

Output
Current

Output
Voltage

DCLink
Voltage

Output Power

Target Freq

Ramp Freq

PID Ref Value

PID Fdb Value

PID Output

Constant

EPID1 Output

EPID1 RefVal

EPID1 FdbVal

EPID2 Output

EPID2 RefVal

EPID2 FdbVal

0h1602

Analog
output1
gain

AO1
Gain

0h1603

Analog

AO1 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%)

-1000.0-1000.0 (%)

445

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

output1
bias
04

0h1604

Analog
output1
filter

AO1
Filter

0–10000 (msec)

p.303

0h1605

Analog
constant
output1

AO1
Const %

0.0-100.0 (%)

0.0

p.303

0h1606

Analog
output1
monitor

AO1
Monitor

0.0-1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.303

0h1607

Analog
output2

AO2
Mode

Identical to the OUT02 AO1 Mode
selected range

0: Frequency

p.303

0h1608

Analog
output2
gain

AO2
Gain

-1000.0-1000.0 (%)

100.0

p.303

0h1609

Analog
output2
bias

AO2 Bias -100.0-100.0 (%)

0.0

p.303

0h160A

Analog
output2
filter

AO2
Filter

0–10000 (msec)

p.303

0h160B

Analog
constant
output2

AO2
Const %

0.0-100.0 (%)

0.0

p.303

0h160C

Analog
output2
monitor

AO2
Monitor

0.0-1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.303

010

p.314

bit
30

0h161E

446

Fault
output
item

Trip
Bit
OutMod 0
e
Bit
1

000-111
Low voltage
Any faults
other than low

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

23:Trip

p.308

voltage

0h161F

Multifunction
relay1

Relay 1

Bit
2

Automatic
restart final
failure

None

FDT-1

FDT-2

FDT-3

FDT-4

Over Load

IOL

Under Load

Fan Warning

Stall

Over Voltage

Low Voltage

Over Heat

Lost
Command

Run

Stop

Steady

Inverter Line

Comm Line

Speed Search

Ready

MMC

Timer Out

447

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting
23

Trip

Lost Keypad

DB Warn%ED

On/Off Control

Fire Mode

Pipe Broken

Damper Err

Lubrication

Pump Clean

Level Detect

Damper
Control

CAP.Warning

Fan Exchange

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1620

Multifunction
relay2

Relay 2

AUTO State

14: RUN

p.308

0h1621

Multifunction
relay3

Relay 3

Hand State

0: None

p.308

0h1622

Multifunction
relay4

Relay 4

0: None

p.308

0h1623

Multifunction
relay5

Relay 5

Except Date

0: None

p.308

Q1
Define

KEB Operating

0h1624

Multifunction
1 item

0: None

p.308

Multi-

00 0000

p.308

0h1629

448

BrokenBelt

DO Status

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name
function
output
monitor

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Status

0h1632

Multifunction
output
On delay

DO On
Delay

0.00-100.00 (sec)

0.00

p.315

0h1633

Multifunction
output
Off delay

DO Off
Delay

0.00-100.00 (sec)

0.00

p.315

0h1634

Multifunction
output
contact
selection

DO
NC/NO
Sel

00 0000

p.315

Q1,Relay5-Relay1
0

A contact (NO)

B contact (NC)

0h1635

Fault
output
On delay

TripOut
OnDly

0.00-100.00 (sec)

0.00

p.314

0h1636

Fault
output
Off delay

TripOut
OffDly

0.00-100.00 (sec)

0.00

p.314

0h1637

Timer On
delay

TimerOn
0.00-100.00 (sec)
Delay

0.00

p.264

0h1638

Timer Off
delay

TimerOff
0.00-100.00 (sec)
Delay

0.00

p.264

0h1639

Detected
frequenc
y

FDT
Frequen
cy

0.00-Maximum
frequency (Hz)

30.00

p.308

0h163A

Detected
frequenc
y band

FDT
Band

0.00-Maximum
frequency (Hz)

10.00

p.308

0h163D

Pulse
output

TO
Mode

Frequency

Output

0: Frequency

p.306

449

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

item

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Current
2

Output
Voltage

DCLink
Voltage

Output Power

Target Freq

Ramp Freq

PID Ref Value

PID Fdb Value

PID Output

Constant

EPID1 Output

EPID1 RefVal

EPID1 FdbVal

EPID2 Output

EPID2 RefVal

EPID2 FdbVal

0h163E

Pulse
output
gain

TO Gain

-1000.0-1000.0 (%)

100.0

p.306

0h163F

Pulse
output
bias

TO Bias

-100.0-100.0 (%)

0.0

p.306

0h1640

Pulse
output
filter

TO Filter

0–10000 (msec)

p.306

0h1641

Pulse
output
constant
output 2

TO
Const %

0.0-100.0 (%)

0.0

p.306

450

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1642

Pulse
output
monitor

TO
Monitor

0.0-1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.306

8.7 Communication Function Group (COM)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when operation stops, X: Write-disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump
Code

1-99

p.70

0h1701

Built-in
communic
ation
inverter ID

Int485 St
ID

1-MaxComID40

p.357

0:
ModBusRT
U

p.357

3: 9600 bps

p.357

0h1702

0h1703

Built-in
communic
ation
protocol

Built-in
communic

Int485
Proto

Int485
BaudR

ModBus RTU

LS Inv 485

BACnet

Metasys-N2

641

ModBus Master

1200 bps

2400 bps

If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet), MaxComID is
‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
41

COM-02 is automatically set to ‘6(Modbus Master)’ when AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’. Otherwise a
user can set the parameter value at user’s choice.
451

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

ation
speed

0643

Built-in
communic
ation
frame
setting

Int485
Mode

0h1705

Transmissi
on delay
after
reception

Resp
Delay

0h1706

Communic
ation
option S/W
version

0h1707

Communic
ation
FBus ID
option
inverter ID

0h1708

FIELD BUS
communic
ation
speed

0h1704

FBus S/W
Ver

Parameter Setting
2

4800 bps

9600 bps

19200 bps

38400 bps

56 Kbps

76.8 kbps

115.2 Kbps42

D8/PN/S1

D8/PN/S2

D8/PE/S1

D8/PO/S1

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: D8/PN/S1 O

p.357

0-1000 (msec)

p.357

0-255

12 Mbps

FBUS
BaudRate

42115,200 bps
43COM-06–09 are displayed only when a communication option card is installed.

Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
452

Table of Functions

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1709

Communic
ation
FieldBus
option LED LED
status

0h1714

BACnet
maximum
master
number

BAC Max
Master

1~127

127

p.398

0h1715

BACnet
device
number1

BAC Dev
Inst1

0~4194

237

p.398

0h1716

BACnet
device
number2

BAC Dev
Inst2

0-999

p.398

0h1717

BACnet
password

BAC
0-32767
PassWord

p.398

0h171C

USB
Protocol

2: LS Inv
485

0h171E

Number of
output
parameters

p.366

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Modbus RTU

LS Inv 485

ParaStatu
0-8
sNum

0h171F

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-1
address1

0000-FFFF Hex

000A

p.366

0h1720

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-2
address2

0000-FFFF Hex

000E

p.366

0h1721

Output
Communic Para
ation
Statuss-3
address3

0000-FFFF Hex

000F

p.366

0h1722

Output
Para
Communic Status-4

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

453

Table of Functions

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1723

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-5
address5

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1724

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-6
address6

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1725

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-7
address7

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1726

Output
Communic Para
ation
Status-8
address8

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1732

0-8

p.366

0h1733

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-1
address1

0000-FFFF Hex

0005

p.366

0h1734

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-2
address2

0000-FFFF Hex

0006

p.366

0h1735

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-3
address3

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1736

Input
Para
Communic
Control-4
ation

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

ation
address4
35

454

Number of
input
parameters

Para Ctrl
Num

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1737

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-5
address 5

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1738

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-6
address 6

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1739

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-7
address 7

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h173A

Input
Communic Para
ation
Control-8
address 8

0000-FFFF Hex

0000

p.366

0h1746

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi1
function
input 1

None

0: None

p.393

0h1747

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi2
function
input 2

0: None

p.393

0h1748

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi3
function
input 3

0: None

p.393

0h1749

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi4
function

RST

0: None

p.393

Name

LCD
Display

address 4
55

455

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h174A

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi5
function
input 5

External Trip

0: None

p.393

0h174B

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi6
function
input 6

0: None

p.393

0h174C

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi7
function
input 7

JOG

0: None

p.393

Speed-L

Speed-M

Speed-H

XCEL-L

XCEL-M

XCEL-H

XCEL-Stop

0: None

p.393

Run Enable

3-wire

2nd source

Exchange

Down

Name

LCD
Display

input 4

0h174D

456

Communic
ation
Virtual DI
multi8
function
input 8

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting
22

U/D Clear

Analog Hold

I-Term Clear

PID Openloop

PID Gain 2

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

27 PID Ref Change
28

2nd Motor

Interlock1

Interlock2

Interlock3

Interlock4

Interlock5

Pre Excite

Timer In

dis Aux Ref

FWD JOG

REV JOG

Fire Mode

EPID1 Run

EPID1 ItermClr

Time Event En

Pre Heat

Damper Open

Pump Clean

457

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Parameter Setting
47

EPID2 Run

EPID2 ItermClr

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

49 Sleep Wake Chg
50

PID Step Ref L

PID Step Ref M

PID Step Ref H

53
44

Interlock6

Interlock7

Interlock8

0h1756

Communic
ation
Virt DI
multifunction
Status
input
monitoring

0000 0000
– 1111 1111

0000 0000

p.362

0h173C

Communic
ation
Power
operation On
auto
Resume
resume

0: No

p.319

8.8 Advanced Function Group(PID Functions)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.

‘53 (Interlock6)~55(Interlock8)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is equipped.
Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
458

Table of Functions

Unit MAX = PID Unit100%(PID-68)
Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0%(PID-67)-PID Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%

*O /X: Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

p.70

0h1801

PID mode
selection

PID Sel

0: No

p.164

0h1802

E-PID
selection

E-PID Sel

0: No

p.184

0h1803

PID output
monitor

PID Output -

p.164

0h1804

PID
reference
monitor

PID Ref
Value

p.164

0h1805

PID
feedback
monitor

PID Fdb
Value

p.164

0h1806

PID error
monitor
value

PID Err
Value

p.164

0:
Keypad

p.164

0h180A

PID
reference 1
source
selection

PID Ref 1
Src

1–99
0

Yes

KeyPad

Int485

459

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting
6

Fieldbus

Pulse

EPID1
Output

10
45

11
11

0h180B

0h180C

PID
reference 1
keypad
value

PID
reference 1
auxiliary
source
selection

PID Ref 1
Set

PIDRef1Au
xSrc

Ref.

Unit
Default

p.164

0: None

p.164

None

Pulse

Int 485

FieldBus

EPID1
Output

E-PID Fdb Val

Prope
rty*

Unit Min–Unit Max

Initial Value

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-10 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.

‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-12 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
460

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h180D

0h180E

0h180F

Name

PID
reference 1
auxiliary
mode
selection

PID
reference
auxiliary
gain

PID
reference 2
auxiliary
source
selection

LCD Display Parameter Setting

PID
Ref1AuxM
od

PID Ref1
Aux G

PID Ref 2
Src

M+(G*A)

M*(G*A)

M/(G*A)

M+(M*(G*A))

M+G*2*(A-50)

M*(G*2*(A50))

M/(G*2*(A50))

M+M*G*2*(A50)

(M-A)^2

M^2+A^2

MAX(M,A)

MIN(M,A)

(M + A)/2

Root(M+A)

-200.0–200.0 (%)
0

Keypad

Int 485

Fieldbus

Pulse

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: M+(G*A)

p.164

0.0

p.164

0: KeyPad

p.164

461

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting
9
10
47

11
16

0h1810

0h1811

PID
reference 2
keypad
setting

PID
reference 2
auxiliary
source
selection

PID Ref 2
Set

0h1812

PID
reference 2

PID
Ref2AuxM

Unit
Default

p.164

0: None

p.164

0: M+(G*A)

p.164

None

Pulse
Int 485
FieldBus

EPID1
Output

EPID1 Fdb Val

Ref.

Prope
rty*

E-PID Output

Unit Min–Unit Max

7
PID
Ref2AuxSrc 8

Initial Value

M+(G*A)

M*(G*A)

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-15 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.

‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-17 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
462

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1813

0h1814

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

auxiliary
mode
selection

PID
reference 2
auxiliary
gain

PID
feedback
selection

PID Ref2
Aux G

PIDFdb
Source

M/(G*A)

M+(M*(G*A))

M+G*2*(A-50)

M*(G*2*(A50))

M/(G*2*(A50))

M+M*G*2*(A50)

(M-A)^2

M^2+A^2

MAX(M,A)

MIN(M,A)

(M + A)/2

Root(M+A)

-200.0–200.0 (%)
0

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

EPID1
Output

EPID1 Fdb Val

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0.0

p.164

0: V1

p.164

463

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.164

0: M+(G*A)

p.164

0h1815

PID
feedback
auxiliary
source
selection

PID Fdb
Aux Src

None

Pulse

Int 485

FieldBus

EPID1
Output

EPID1 Fdb Val

12
50

0h1816

PID
feedback
auxiliary
mode
selection

M+(G*A)

M*(G*A)

2
PID
FdbAuxMo 3
d
4

M/(G*A)

M+(M*(G*A))
M+G*2*(A-50)
M*(G*2*(A50))

‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-20 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.

‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-21 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
464

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

0h1817

PID
feedback
auxiliary
gain

0h1818

PID feed
back band

0h1819

PID
controller
PID P-Gain
proportiona 1
l gain 1

0h181A

PID contro
ller integral
time 1

PID
controller
differential
time 1

M/(G*2*(A50))

M+M*G*2*(A50)

(M-A)^2

M^2+A^2

MAX(M,A)

MIN(M,A)

(M+A)/2

Root(M+A)

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

PID Fdb
Aux G

-200.0–200.0 (%)

0.0

p.164

PID Fdb
Band

0.00 – Unit Band

0.00

p.164

0.00–300.00 (%)

50.00

p.164

0.0–200.0 (sec)

10.0

p.164

PID D-Time
0.00–1.00 (sec)
1

0.00

p.164

0.0–1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.164

PID I-Time
1

0h181B

0h181C

0h181D

PID output
filter

PID Out
LPF

0.00–10.00 (sec)

0.00

p.164

0h181E

PID output

PID Limit

PID Limit Lo–

100.00

p.164

PID controller
PID FFfeed forward
Gain
gain

465

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

-100.00–PID Limit
Hi

0.00

p.164

0h1820

PID
controller
PID P-Gain
proportiona 2
l gain 2

0.00–300.00 (%)

50.0

p.164

0h1821

PID
controller
integral
time 2

PID I-Time
2

0.0–200.0 (sec)

10.0

p.164

0h1822

PID
controller
differential
time 2

PID D-Time
0.00–1.00 (sec)
2

0.00

p.164

4 : PID or
Main

p.164

0: No

p.164

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting

upper limit

100.00

0h181F

PID output
lower limit

PID Limit
Lo

0h1823

PID output
mode

PID Out
Mode

PID Output

PID+ Main
Freq

PID+EPID1
Out

PID+EPID1+
Main

PID or Main

Yes

0h1824

PID output
inverse

PID Out Inv

0h1825

PID output
scale

PID Out
Scale

0.1–1000.0 (%)

100.0

p.164

0h1828

PID multistep
reference
setting 1

PID Step
Ref 1

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

0h1829

PID multistep

PID Step
Ref 2

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

466

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

LCD Display Parameter Setting

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h182A

PID multistep
reference
setting 3

PID Step
Ref 3

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

0h182B

PID multistep
reference
setting 4

PID Step
Ref 4

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

0h182C

PID multistep
reference
setting 5

PID Step
Ref 5

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

0h182D

PID multistep
reference
setting 6

PID Step
Ref 6

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

0h182E

PID multistep
reference
setting 7

PID Step
Ref 7

Unit Min–Unit Max

Unit
Default

p.164

1: %

p.164

Name
reference
setting 2

Refer to the Unit
List

0h1832

PID
controller
unit
selection

PID Unit
Sel

CUST

PSI

˚F

˚C

inWC

inM

mBar

467

Table of Functions

Code

468

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD Display Parameter Setting
8

Bar

kPa

rpm

mpm

m/s

m3/s

m3/m

m 3/h

l/s

l/m

l/h

kg/s

kg/m

kg/h

gl/s

gl/m

gl/h

ft/s

f3/s

f3/m

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1833

0h1834

0h1835

Name

PID unit
scale

PID control
0% setting
figure

PID control
100%
setting
figure

LCD Display Parameter Setting

PID Unit
Scale

PID Unit
0%

PID Unit
100%

f3/h

lb/s

lb/m

lb/h

ppm

pps

x100

x10

x 0.1

x0.01

X100

-30000–
Unit Max

X10

-3000.0–
Unit Max

-300.00–
Unit Max

X0.1

-30.000–
Unit Max

X0.01

-3.0000–
Unit Max

X100

Unit Min
–30000

X10

Unit Min
–3000.0

Unit Min
–300.00

X0.1

Unit Min
–30.000

X0.01

Unit Min
–3.0000

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

2: x 1

p.164

Range
varies
depending
on PID-50
setting

p.164

Range
differs
depending
on PID-50
setting

p.164

469

Table of Functions

8.9 EPID Function Group (EPID)51
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
Unit MAX = EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%
Unit Min = (2xEPID1 (EPID2) Unit0%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit100%)
Unit Default = (EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 0%)/2
*O/X : Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

0: None

p.184

0h1901

0252

0h1902

0h1903

0h1904

0h1905

EPID 1
Mode
Selection

EPID1outp
ut monitor
value
EPID1
standard
monitor
EPID1
feedback
monitor
value
EPID1error
monitor
value

EPID1
Mode

None

Always ON

During Run

DI
dependent

EPID1
Output

-100.00–100.00%

0.00

p.184

EPID1 Ref
Val

p.184

EPID1
Fdb Val

p.184

EPID1 Err
Val

p.184

EPID Group is displayed when PID-02 code is set to 'Yes'.

52EPID-02–20 are displayed when EPID-01 code is not ‘0 (None)’.

470

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1906

0h1907

0h1908

0h1909

Name

EPID1
command
source
selection

EPID1
keypad
command
value

EPID1
feedback
source
selection

EPID1
proportion
al gain

LCD
Display

EPID1 Ref
Src

EPID1 Ref
Set

EPID1
FdbSrc

EPID1 PGain

Setting Range
0

Keypad

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

953

Unit Min–Unit Max
0

Int485

FieldBus

Pulse

854

0.00–300.00 (%)

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: KeyPad

p.184

Unit Min

p.184

0: V1

p.184

50.00

p.184

‘9(V3)~10(I3)’ of EPID-06 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.

‘8(V3)~9(I3)’ of EPID-08 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
471

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h190A

EPID1
integral
time

EPID1 ITime

0.0–200.0 (sec)

10.0

p.184

0h190B

EPID1
EPID1 Ddifferentiati
Time
on time

0.00–1.00 (sec)

0.00

p.184

0h190C

EPID1 feedEPID1 FFforward
Gain
gain

0.0–1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.184

0h190D

EPID1
output
filter

EPID1
Out LPF

0.00–10.00 (sec)

0.00

p.184

0h190E

EPID1
output
upper limit

EPID1
Limit Hi

EPID1 Limit Lo–
100.00

100.00

p.184

0h190F

EPID1
lower limit

EPID1
Limit Lo

-100.00–EPID1
Limit Hi

0.00

p.184

EPID1
Out Inv

0h1910

EPID1
output
inverse

0: No

p.184

Yes

EPID1 unit

EPID1
Unit Sel

1: %

p.184

2: X1

p.184

Values vary
depending
on the unit
setting

p.184

0h1911

0h1912

0h1913

472

EPID1 unit
scale

EPID1 unit
0% value

EPID1
Unit Scl

EPID1
Unit0%

Refer to the EPID
Unit details table
(p.184)
0

X100

X10

X0.1

X0.01

X
100

-30000
–Unit Max
-3000.0–Unit
Max

X10

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range
X1

-300.00–Unit
Max

X
0.1

-30.000–Unit
Max

-3.0000–Unit
Max

0.01

3255

0h1914

0h191F

X
100

Unit Min–
30000

X10

Unit Min–
3000.0

EPID1 unit EPID1
100% value Unit100% X1

EPID2
Mode
selection

EPID2
Mode

Unit Min–
300.00

X
0.1

Unit Min–
30.000

X
0.01

Unit Min–
3.0000

None

Always ON

During Run

DI
dependent

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Values vary
depending
on the unit
setting

p.184

0: None

p.184

0h1920

EPID2
output
monitor
value

EPID2
Output

-100.00–100.00%

0.00

p.184

0h1921

EPID2
reference
monitor
value

EPID2 Ref
Val

p.184

55EPID-32–50 are displayed when EPID-31 code is not ‘0 (None)’.

473

Table of Functions

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1922

EPID2
feedback
monitor
value

EPID2
Fdb Val

p.184

0h1923

EPID2 error
EPID2 Err
monitor
Val
value

p.184

0: Keypad

p.184

Unit Min

p.184

0: V1

p.184

Code

0h1924

0h1925

0h1926

EPID2
command
source
selection

EPID2
keypad
command
value

EPID2
feedback
source
selection

EPID2 Ref
Src

EPID2 Ref
Set

EPID2
FdbSrc

Keypad

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

956

Unit Min–Unit Max
0

Int 485

FieldBus

Pulse

‘9(V3)~10(I3)’ of EPID-36 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
474

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range
857

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1927

EPID2
proportion
al gain

EPID2 PGain

0.00–300.00 (%)

50.0

p.184

0h1928

EPID2
integral
time

EPID2 ITime

0.0–200.0 (sec)

10.0

p.184

0h1929

EPID2
EPID2 Ddifferentiati
Time
on time

0.00–1.00 (sec)

0.00

p.184

0h192A

EPID2 feedEPID2 FFforward
Gain
gain

0.0–1000.0 (%)

0.0

p.184

0h192B

EPID2
output
filter

EPID2
Out LPF

0.00–10.00 (sec)

0.00

p.184

0h192C

EPID2
output
upper limit

EPID2
Limit Hi

EPID2 Limit Lo–
100.00

100.00

p.184

0h192D

EPID2
output
lower limit

EPID2
Limit Lo

-100.00–EPID2
Limit Hi

0.00

p.184

0h192E

EPID2
output
inverse

EPID2
Out Inv

0: No

p.184

0h192F

EPID2 unit

EPID2
Unit Sel

Refer to EPID Unit
0: CUST
details table (p.184)

p.184

0h1930

EPID2 unit
scale

EPID2
Unit Scl

X100

X10

p.184

Yes

2: X1

‘8(V3)~9(I3)’ of EPID-38 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to Extension
IO option manual for more detailed information.
475

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1931

Name

EPID2 unit
0% value

LCD
Display

Setting Range
2

X0.1

X0.01

X
100

-30000–Unit
Max

X10

-3000.0–
Unit Max

X
0.1

Values vary
-300.00–Unit depending
on the unit
Max
setting
-30.000–
Unit Max

X
0.01

-3.0000–Unit
Max

X
100

EPID2
Unit100% X1

Unit Min–
30000
Unit Min–
3000.0
Unit Min–
300.00

X
0.1

Unit Min–
30.000

X
0.01

Unit Min–
3.0000

EPID2
Unit0%

X10
50

0h1932

476

EPID2 unit
0% value

Initial Value

Values vary
depending
on the unit
setting

Prope
rty*

Ref.

p.184

Table of Functions

8.10 Application 1 Function Group (AP1)
Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
Unit MAX = PID Unit 100%
Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0%-PID Unit 100%)
Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

0h1A05

Sleep boost
amount

Sleep Bst
Set

0.00–Unit Max

0.00

p.180

0h1A06

Sleep boost
speed

Sleep
BstFreq

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq

60.00

p.180

0h1A07

PID sleep mode
1 delay time

PID Sleep
0.0–6000.0 (sec)
1 DT

20.0

p.180

0h1A08

PID sleep mode
1 frequency

PID
0.00, Low Freq–
Sleep1Fre
High Freq
q

0.00

p.180

0h1A09

PID wakeup 1
delay time

PID
WakeUp1 0.0–6000.0 (sec)
DT

20.0

p.180

0h1A0A

PID wakeup 1
value

PID
WakeUp1 0.00–Unit Band
Dev

20.00

p.180

0h1A0B

PID sleep mode
2 delay time

PID Sleep
0.0–6000.0 (sec)
2 DT

20.0

p.180

0h1A0C

PID sleep mode
2 frequency

PID
0.00, Low Freq–
Sleep2Fre
High Freq
q

0.00

p.180

477

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

0h1A0D

PID wakeup 2
delay time

0h1A0E

PID wakeup 2
value

0h1A14

Soft Fill function Soft Fill
options
Sel

0h1A15

Pre- PID
operation
frequency

Pre-PID
Freq

0h1A16

Pre- PID delay
time

0h1A17

Soft Fill escape
value

0h1A18

Soft Fill
Fill Step
reference
Set
increasing value

0h1A19

Soft Fill reference
increasing cycle

0h1A1A

478

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

PID
WakeUp2 0.0–6000.0 (sec)
DT

20.0

p.180

PID
WakeUp2 0.00–Unit Band
Dev

20.00

p.180

0: No

p.179

Low Freq– High
Freq

30.00

p.179

Pre-PID
Delay

0.0–600.0 (sec)

60.0

p.179

Soft Fill
Set

Unit Min–Unit
Max

20.00

p.179

0.00–Unit Band

2.00

p.179

Fill Step
Time

0–9999 (sec)

p.179

Soft Fill
changing
amount

Fill Fdb
Diff

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.179

0h1A1E

Flow Comp
function
options

0
Flow
Comp Sel 1

0: No

p.194

0h1A1F

Max Comp
amount

Max
Comp
Value

0.00

p.194

0h1A28

MMC option
selection

0: None

MMC Sel

Setting Range

Yes

No
Yes

0.00–Unit Band
0

None

Single Ctrl

Multi

p.266

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: No

p.38

Follower
4058

Multi
Master

Serve Drv

Yes

4159

0h1A29

Bypass selection

Regul
Bypass

0h1A2A

Number of
auxiliary motors

Num of
Aux

1–5

p.266

0h1A2B

Select starting
auxiliary motor

Starting
Aux

1–5

p.266

0h1A2C

Display the
number of
running
auxiliary motors

Aux
Motor
Run

p.266

0h1A2D

Display auxiliary
Aux
motors 1– 4
Priority 1
priority

p.266

0h1A2E

Display auxiliary
Aux
motors 5– 8
Priority 2
priority

p.266

0h1A30

Auxiliary motor
options for
inverter stop

Aux All
Stop

1: Yes

p.266

Auxiliary motor
stop order.

Aux
On/Off
Seq

0: FILO

p.266

0h1A31

Set PID-1 to 'YES' to configure AP1-40.

Set AP1-40 to 'YES' to configure AP1-41.

Yes

FILO

FIFO

Op time
Order

479

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1A32

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Auxiliary motors
Aux Start
pressure
Diff
difference

0–100 (%)

p.266

0h1A33

Main motor
acceleration
time when the
number of
auxiliary motors
is reduced

Aux Acc
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

2.0

p.266

0h1A34

Main motor
acceleration
time when the
number of
auxiliary motors
is increased

Aux Dec
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

2.0

p.266

0h1A35

Auxiliary motors Aux Start
start delay time DT

0.0–3600.0 (sec)

60.0

p.266

0h1A36

Auxiliary motors Aux Stop
stop delay time DT

0.0–3600.0 (sec)

60.0

p.266

1: AUX
Exchange

p.266

0h1A37

Auto change
mode selection

LCD
Display

Auto Ch
Mode

None

AUX
Exchange

Main
Exchange

0h1A38

Auto change
time

Auto Ch
Time

00: 00–99: 00

72: 00

p.266

0h1A39

Auto change
frequency

Auto Ch
Level

Low Freq–
High Freq

20.00

p.266

0h1A3A

Auto change
operation time

Auto Op
Time

p.266

0h1A3B

Auxiliary motor
pressure
difference

Aux Stop
Diff

0~100

480

Table of Functions

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

6060

0h1A3C

Target
frequency of
Aux motor
during Multi
Master

Follower
Freq

Low Freq ~ High
Freq

60.00

0h1A3D

#1 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Freq Low Limit–
Start Freq
Freq High limit
1
(Hz)

45.00

p.266

0h1A3E

#2 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq Low Freq–
2
High Freq

45.00

p.266

0h1A3F

Start Freq Low Freq–
3
High Freq

45.00

p.266

0h1A40

Start Freq Low Freq–
4
High Freq

45.00

p.266

0h1A41

#5 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

Start Freq Low Freq–
5
High Freq

45.00

p.266

0h1A46

#1 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq Low Freq–
1
High Freq

20.00

p.266

0h1A47

#2 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq Low Freq–
2
High Freq

20.00

p.266

0h1A48

#3 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq Low Freq–
3
High Freq

20.00

p.266

0h1A49

#4 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq Low Freq–
4
High Freq

20.00

p.266

Code

#3 auxiliary
motor start
frequency
#4 auxiliary
motor start
frequency

API-60 only appears when AP1-40 MMC Sel is set to '2' or '3'.
481

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1A4A

#5 auxiliary
motor stop
frequency

Stop Freq Low Freq–
5
High Freq

20.00

p.266

0h1A50

#1 auxiliary
motor’s
reference
compensation

Aux1 Ref
Comp

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.266

0h1A51

#2 auxiliary
Aux2 Ref
motor reference
Comp
compensation

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.266

0h1A52

#3 auxiliary
Aux3 Ref
motor reference
Comp
compensation

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.266

0h1A53

#4 auxiliary
Aux4 Ref
motor reference
Comp
compensation

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.266

0h1A54

#5 auxiliary
Aux5 Ref
motor reference
Comp
compensation

0.00–Unit Band

0.00

p.266

0h1A5A

Interlock
selection

Interlock

0: No

p.286

0h1A5B

Delay time
before next
motor operates
when an
interlock or an
auto change on
the main motor
occurs.

Interlock
DT

5.0

p.286

0h1A5F

Selection of
Auxiliary motor

AuxRunTi
me Sel

0: Aux1

482

Setting Range

YES

0.1–360.0 (Sec)

Aux 1

Aux 2

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

LCD
Display

to display [AP196] [AP1-97]

9561

Name

Setting Range
2

Aux 3

Aux 4

Aux 5

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

0h1A60

Operation
time(Day) of
Auxiliary motor
selected in
[AP1-95]

AuxRunTi
0 – 65535
me Day

0h1A61

Operation time
of Auxiliary
motor selected
in [AP1-95]
(Hour:Minute)

AuxRunTi
00:00 - 23:59
me Min

00:00

0: None

0h1A62

Deleting
operation time
of Auxiliary
motor

AuxRunTi
me Clr

None

All

Aux 1

Aux 2

Aux 3

Aux 4

Aux 5

Ref.

8.11 Application 2 Function Group (AP2)
61

AP1-95~98 is available when MMC and Master Follower functions are performed.
483

Table of Functions

Data In the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation,Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

0162

0h1B01

Load curve
Tuning

Load Tune

p.207

0h1B02

Low Freq
load curve

Load Fit
Lfreq

Base Freq*15%–
Load Fit HFreq

30.00

p.207

0h1B03

Low Freq
current

Load Fit
LCurr

0.0–80.0 (%)

40.0

p.207

0h1B04

Low Freq
power total

Load Fit
LPwr

0.0–80.0 (%)

30.0

p.207

0h1B08

High Freq
load curve

Load Fit
Hfreq

Load Fit LFreq–
HighFreq

51.00

p.207

0h1B09

High Freq
current.

Load Fit
HCurr

Load Fit LCurr –
200.0 (%)

80.0

p.207

0h1B0A

High Freq
total power

Load Fit
HPwr

Load Fit LPwr –
200.0 (%)

80.0

p.207

0h1B0B

Current load
curve

Load Curve
Cur

p.207

0h1B0C

Power load
curve

Load Curve
Pwr

p.207

0h1B0F

Pump clean
setting1

Pump
Clean

0: None

p.200

Yes

None

Set the operation mode to AUTO to configure AP2-01.
484

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Mode1

0h1B10

Pump clean
setting2

Pump
Clean
Mode2

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.200

Dependent
2

Output
Power

Output
Current

None

Start

Stop

Start and
Stop

0h1B11

Pump clean
load setting

PC Curve
Rate

0.1–200.0 (%)

100.0

p.200

0h1B12

Pump clean
reference
band

PC Curve
Band

0.0–100.0 (%)

5.0

p.200

0h1B13

Pump clean
operation
delay time

PC Curve
DT

0.0–6000.0 (sec)

60.0

p.200

0h1B14

Pump clean
start delay
time

PC Start DT 0.0–6000.0 (sec)

10.0

p.200

0h1B15

0 speed
operating
time at Fx/Rx
switching

PC Step DT 0.1–6000.0 (sec)

5.0

p.200

0h1B16

Pump clean
Acc time

PC Acc
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

10.0

p.200

0h1B17

Pump clean
Dec time

PC Dec
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

10.0

p.200

0h1B18

Forward step
maintaining
time

FwdSteady
0.0–600.0 (sec)
Time

10.0

p.200

0h1B19

FwdSteady 0.00, Low Freq–

30.00

p.200

Forward

485

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name
step
maintaining
frequency

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Freq

High Freq

Rev
SteadyTim
e

0.0–600.0 (sec)

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

10.0

p.200

0h1B1A

Reverse step
running time

0h1B1B

Reverse step
0.00, Low Freq–
Rev
running
SteadyFreq High Freq
frequency

30.00

p.200

0h1B1C

Pump clean
number of
Fx/Rx steps

PC Num of
Steps

1–10

p.200

0h1B1D

Pump clean
function
cycle
monitoring

Repeat
Num Mon

p.200

0h1B1E

Number of
pump clean
repetitions

Repeat
Num Set

0–10

p.200

0h1B1F

Operation
after pump
clean end

PC End
Mode

0:Stop

p.200

0h1B20

Pump clean
continuous
limit time

PC Limit
Time

6–60 (min)

p.200

0h1B21

Pump clean
continuous
limit numbers

PC Limit
Num

0–10

p.200

0h1B26

Dec Valve
operation
frequency

Dec Valve
Freq

Low Freq–
High Freq

40.00

p.206

0h1B27

Dev Valve
Dec time

Dev Valve
Time

0.0–6000.0 (sec)

0.0

p.206

0h1B28

Start and

Start&End

0: No

p.204

486

Stop

Run

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

End ramp
settings

Ramp

Setting Range
1

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Yes

0h1B29

Start Ramp
Acc time

Start Ramp
0.0–600.0 (sec)
Acc

10.0

p.204

0h1B2A

End Ramp
Dec time

End Ramp
Dec

0.0–600.0 (sec)

10.0

p.204

0h1B2D

Damper
check time

Damper
DT

0.0 – 600.0 (sec)

5.0

p.194

0h1B2E

Lub Op
Time

0.0–600.0 (sec)

5.0

p.196

4863

0h1B30

Lubrication
operation
time
Pre heat
level

Pre Heat
Level

1–100 (%)

p.216

0h1B31

p.216

0h1B32

Pre-Heat
Duty
DC Inj
Delay T

1–100 (%)

0.0–600.0 (sec)

60.0

p.216

0h1B57

Pre-heat
duty
DC input
delay time
#1 Motor
average
power

M1 AVG
PWR

0.1–500.0 (kW)

p.198

0h1B58

M2 AVG
PWR

0.1–500.0 (kW)

p.198

0h1B59

#2 Motor
average
power
Cost per
kWh

Cost per
kWh

0.0–1000.0

0.0

p.198

0h1B5A

Saved kWh

Saved kWh -

0.0

p.198

0h1B5B

Saved MWh

Saved
MWh

p.198

0h1B5C

Saved Cost
below 1000
unit

Saved
Cost1

0.0

p.198

AP2-48–49 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Pre-Heat’.
487

Table of Functions

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1B5D

Saved Cost
over 1000
unit

Saved
Cost2

p.198

0h1B5E

CO2 Factor 0.0–5.0

0.0

p.198

0h1B5F

Saved CO2
–1

0.0

p.198

0h1B60

Saved CO2
(kTon)

Saved CO2
–2

p.198

0h1B61

Saved energy Reset
reset
Energy

0.No

p.198

Code

488

Saved CO2
conversion
Factor
Saved CO2
(Ton)

Yes

Table of Functions

8.12 Application 3 Function Group (AP3)
Data In the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Writing available when operation stops
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

0h1C01

Current date

Now Date

01/01/2000 ~
01/01/2000
12/31/2099 (Date)

p.222

0h1C02

Current time

Now Time 0: 00–23: 59 (min)

0: 00

p.222

0h1C03

Current day

Now
Weekday

0000000–
1111111 (Bit)

0000001

p.222

0h1C04

Summer
Time
Start date

Summer
T Start

01/01 ~
Summer T Stop

04/01

p.222

0h1C05

Summer
Time
Finish date

Summer
T Stop

Summer T Start
~12/31(Date)

11/31

p.222

0h1C06

Date display
format

Date
Format

p.222

0 YYYY/MM/DD
0664

1 MM/DD/YYYY Date Format
2 DD/MM/YYYY

0h1C0A

Period
connection
status

0h1C0B

Time Period1
Start time
configuration

Period1
Start T

0: 00–24: 00
(min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C0C

Time Period1
End time
configuration

Period1
Stop T

Period1 Start T –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

Period
Status

p.222

The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.
489

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Period1
Day

0000000–
1111111 (Bit)

0000000

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1C0D

Time Period1
Day of the
week
configuration

0h1C0E

Time Period2
Start time
configuration

Period2
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C0F

Time Period2
End time
configuration

Period2
Stop T

Period2 Start T –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C10

Time Period2
Day of the
week
configuration

Period2
Day

0000000–
1111111 (Bit)

00000000

p.222

0h1C11

Time Period3
Start time
configuration

Period3
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C12

Time Period3
End time
configuration

Period3
Stop T

Period3 Start T –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C13

Time Period3
Day of the
week
configuration

Period3
Day

0000000–
1111111 (Bit)

0000000

p.222

0h1C14

Time Period4
Start time
configuration

Period4
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C15

Time Period4
End time
configuration

Period4
Stop T

Period4 Start T –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C16

Time Period
Day of the
week
configuration

Period4
Day

0000000–
1111111 (Bit)

0000000

p.222

490

p.222

Table of Functions

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1C1E

Except1 Date
Start time
configuration

Except1
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C1F

Except1 Date
End time
configuration

Except1
Stop T

Except1 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C20

Except1 Date
configuration

Except1D
ate

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C21

Except2 Date
Start time
configuration

Except2
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C22

Except2 Date
Stop time
configuration

Except2
Stop T

Except2 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C23

Except2 Date
configuration

Except2D
ate

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C24

Except3 Date
Start time
configuration

Except3
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C25

Except3 Date
End time
configuration

Except3
Stop T

Except3 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C26

Except3
Date
configuration

Except3D
ate

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C27

Except4 Date
Start time
configuration

Except4
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C28

Except4 Date
End time
configuration

Except4
Stop T

Except4 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C29

Except4
Date
configuration

Except4D
ate

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C2A

Except5 Date

Except5

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

Code

491

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name
Start time
configuration

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Start T

0h1C2B

Except5 Date
End time
configuration

Except5
Stop T

Except5 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C2C

Except5 Date
configuration

Except5
Date

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C2D

Except6 Date
Start time
configuration

Except6
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C2E

Except6 Date
End time
configuration

Except6
Stop T

Except6 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C2F

Except6 Date
configuration

Except6
Date

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C30

Except7 Date
Start time
configuration

Except7
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C31

Except7 Date
End time
configuration

Except7
Stop T

Except7 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C32

Except7 Date
configuration

Except7
Date

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C33

Except8 Date
Start time
configuration

Except8
Start T

0: 00–24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C34

Except8 Date
End time
configuration

Except8
Stop T

Except8 StartT –
24: 00 (min)

24: 00

p.222

0h1C35

Except8 Date
configuration

Except8
Date

01/01–12/31
(Date)

01/01

p.222

0h1C46

Time Event

Time

0: NO

p.222

492

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name
function
configuration

LCD
Display
Event En

Setting Range
1

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Yes

0h1C47

Time Event
configuration
status

T-Event
Status

p.222

0h1C48

Time Event 1
connection
status

T-Event1
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0: None

p.222

0h1C49

Time Event 1
functions

T-Event1
Define

None

Speed-L

Speed-M

Speed-H

Xcel-L

Xcel-M

Xcel-H

Xcel Stop

Run Enable

2nd Source

Exchange

Analog Hold

I-Term Clear

PID
Openloop

PID Gain 2

PID Ref
Change

2nd Motor

493

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range
20

Timer In

Dias Aux Ref

EPID1 Run

EPID1
ITermClr

Pre Heat

EPID2 Run
EPID2
ITermClr

26
27

Sleep Wake
Chg

PID Step Ref
L

PID Step Ref
M

PID Step Ref
H

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1C4A

Time Event 2
connection
configuration

T-Event2
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C4B

Time Event 2
functions

T-Event2
Define

Identical to the
setting range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C4C

Time Event 3
connection
configuration

T-Event2
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C4D

Time Event 3
functions

T-Event3
Define

Identical to the
setting range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C4E

Time Event 4
connection
configuration

T-Event4
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

494

Table of Functions

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1C4F

Time Event 4
functions

T-Event4
Define

Identical to the
setting range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C50

Time Event 5
connection
configuration

T-Event5
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C51

Time Event 5
functions

T-Event5
Define

Identical to the
setting range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C52

Time Event 6
connection
configuration

T-Event6
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C53

Time Event 6
functions

T-Event6
Define

Identical to the
setting range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C54

Time Event 7
connection
configuration

T-Event7
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C55

Time Event 7
functions

T-Event7
Define

Same setting
range for
AP3-73

0: None

p.222

0h1C56

Time Event 8
connection
configuration

T-Event8
Period

000000000000 –
111111111111

00000000000
Δ
0

p.222

0h1C57

Time Event 8
functions

T-Event8
Define

Same setting
range as AP3-73

0: None

p.222

Code

495

Table of Functions

8.13 Protection Function Group (PRT)
Data In the following table will be displayed only when the related code has been selected.
O : Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when stopped, X: Write disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump Code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

p.331

p.248

Input/output
open-phase
protection

Phase
Loss Chk

0h1D06

Input voltage
range during
open-phase

IPO V
Band

0h1D07

Deceleration
time at fault
trip

Trip Dec
Time

0h1D05

0h1D08

Selection of
startup on trip
reset

RST
Restart

Bit

00–11

Bit
0

Output
open
phase

Bit
1

Input open
phase

1–100 (V)

3.0

0.75~
90kW

90.0

110~
500kW

0.0–600.0 (sec)

Bit

00–11

Bit
0

Fault trips
other than
LV trip

Bit
1

LV Trip

0h1D09

Number of
automatic
restarts

Retry
Number

0–10

p.248

0h1D0A

Automatic
restart delay
time

Retry
Delay

0.1–600.0 (sec)

5.0

p.248

0h1D0B

Keypad
command loss

Lost KPD
Mode

p.334

496

None

Warning

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

operation
mode

0h1D0C

Speed
command loss
operation
mode

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.334

Setting Range

Initial Value

Free-Run

0: None

Dec

None

Free-Run

2
Lost Cmd
3
Mode

Dec
Hold Input

Hold
Output

Lost Preset

0h1D0D

Time to
determine
speed
command loss

Lost Cmd
0.1–120.0 (sec)
Time

1.0

p.334

0h1D0E

Operation
frequency at
speed
command loss

Lost
Preset F

0.00

p.334

0h1D0F

Analog input
loss decision
level

AI Lost
Level

0: Half of x1

p.334

0h1D11

Overload
warning
selection

OL Warn
Select

0: No

p.323

0h1D12

Overload
warning level

OL Warn
Level

30–OL Trip
Level(%)

110

p.323

0h1D13

Overload
warning time

OL Warn
Time

0.0–30.0 (sec)

10.0

p.323

0h1D14

Motion at
overload trip

OL Trip
Select

1: Free-Run

p.323

1365

0.00, Low Freq–
High Freq
0

Half of x1

Below x1

Yes

None

Free-Run

Dec

65PRT-13–15 are displayed when PRT-12 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.

497

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1D15

Overload trip
level

OL Trip
Level

30–150 (%)

120

p.323

0h1D16

Overload trip
time

OL Trip
Time

0.0–60.0 (sec)

60.0

p.323

0h1D17

Under load
detection
Source

UL
Source

0: Output
Current

p.340

10.0

p.340

0: No

p.340

10.0

p.340

0: None

p.340

30.0

p.340

0: None

p.345

3.0

p.345

0: None

p.323

0h1D18

Under load
detection
band

UL Band

0h1D19

Under load
warning
selection

UL Warn
Sel

0h1D1A

Under load
warning time

UL Warn
Time

0h1D1B

Under load trip UL Trip
selection
Sel

Output
Current

Output
Power

0.0–100.0 (%)
0

Yes

0.0–600.0 (sec)
0

None

Free-Run

Dec

0h1D1C

Under load trip UL Trip
timer
Time

0h1D1F

Operation on
no motor trip

No Motor 0
Trip
1

0h1D20

No motor trip
current level

No Motor
1–100 (%)
Level

0h1D21

No motor
No Motor
0.1–10.0 (sec)
detection time Time

0h1D22

Operation at
motor
overheat
detection

498

ThermalT Sel

0.0–600.0 (sec)
None
Free-Run

None

Free-Run

Dec

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

0h1D23

Thermal
sensor input

Thermal
In Src

0h1D24

Thermal
sensor fault
level

ThermalT Lev

0h1D25

Thermal
sensor fault
range

ThermalT

0h1D26

Motor
overheat
detection
sensor

Thermal
Monitor

0h1D28

Electronic
thermal
prevention
fault trip
selection

ETH Trip
Sel

Motor
Cooling

ETH Cont–150
(%)

3866

Setting Range
0

Thermal In

0.0–100.0 (%)
0

Low

High

None

Free-Run

Dec

Self-cool

Forcedcool

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: Thermal In

p.323

50.0

p.323

0: Low

p.323

0: None

p.321

0: Self-cool

p.321

120

p.321

0h1D29

Motor cooling
fan type

0h1D2A

Electronic
thermal one
minute rating

ETH 1
min

0h1D2B

Electronic
thermal
prevention
continuous
rating

ETH Cont 50–120 (%)

100

p.321

0h1D2C

Fire mode
password

Fire
Mode
PW

3473

p.240

0~9999
0

None

66PRT-38 is displayed when PRT-34 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.

499

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

4567

0h1D2D

Fire mode
setting

1
Fire
Mode Sel 2

Fire Mode

4668

Fire mode
direction
setting

0
Fire
Mode Dir 1

Reverse

0h1D2E

4769

0h1D2F

Fire mode
frequency
setting

Fire
Mode
Freq

0h1D30

Number of fire
mode
operations

Fire
Mode
Cnt

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.334

1: Forward

p.334

0.00–max Freq

60.00

p.334

0100

p.327

Start frequencyStall
frequency2 (Hz)

60.00

p.327

30-150 (%)

130

p.327

Setting Range

bit

Test Mode

Forward

0000–1111

Bit At
0 acceleration
50

0h1D32

Stall
prevention
and flux
braking

Stall
Prevent

Bit At constant
1 speed
Bit At
2 deceleration
Bit
Flux braking
3

0h1D33

Stall frequency Stall Freq
1
1

0h1D34

Stall level 1

Stall
Level 1

PRT-45 can only be set when PRT-44 is in Fire mode. To change the mode in PRT-44, create a
new password for PRT-44.

68PRT-46–47 are displayed when PRT-45 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
69

When Fire mode is set at PRT-45, PRT-46 is automatically set to forward, and the frequency set
at PRT-47 cannot be edited. When PRT-45 is set to Test mode, PRT-46 and PRT-47 settings are
editable.
500

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1D35

Stall frequency Stall Freq
2
2

0h1D36

Stall level 2

0h1D37

Stall frequency Stall Freq
3
3

0h1D38

Stall level 3

0h1D39

Stall frequency Stall Freq
4
4

0h1D3A

Stall level 4

0h1D3B

0h1D3C

Flux braking
gain

Pipe break
detection
setting

LCD
Display

Stall
Level 2

Stall
Level 3

Stall
Level 4
Flux
Brake Kp

PipeBrok
enSel

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Stall frequency1Stall frequency3 60.00
(Hz)

p.327

30-150 (%)

p.327

Stall frequency2Stall frequency 4 60.00
(Hz)

p.327

30–150 (%)

p.327

Stall frequency3Maximum
60.00
frequency (Hz)

p.327

30–150 (%)

130

p.327

0: None

p.213

0.0–100.0 (%)

97.5

p.213

Setting Range

0.7590kW

0–150
(%)

110500kW

0–10
(%)

None

Warning

Free-Run

Dec

Initial Value

130

0h1D3D

Pipe break
detection
variation

0h1D3E

Pipe break
PipeBrok
detection time en DT

0.0–6000.0 (Sec)

10.0

p.213

0h1D42

Braking
resistor
configuration

0–30 (%)

p.338

PipeBrok
en Lev

DB
Warn %E
D

None

501

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

0h1D46

Level detect
mode
selection

LDT Sel

Level detect
range setting

LDT Area
Sel

0h1D47

0h1D48

Level detect
source

LCD
Display

LDT
Source

Setting Range
1

Warning

Free-Run

Dec

Below Level

Above
Level

Output
Current

DC Link
Voltage

Output

PID Ref

PID Fdb

PID Output

EPID1 Fdb

EPID2 Fdb
Val

0h1D49

Level detect
delay time

LDT
DlyTime

0h1D4A

Level detect
standard set
value

LDT Level Source setting

502

0–9999 (sec)

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0: None

p.209

0: Below Level

p.209

0: Output
Current

p.209

Source setting

p.209

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

0h1D4B

Level detect
band width

LDT Band
Source setting
width

0h1D4C

Level detect
frequency

LDT Freq

0h1D4D

Level detect
trip restart
time

LDT
Restart
DT

0h1D4F

Cooling fan
fault selection

Fan Trip
Mode

0h1D50

Operation
mode on
optional card
trip

Opt Trip
Mode

0h1D51

Low voltage
trip decision
delay time

LVT
Delay

0h1D52

Low voltage
trip decision
during
operation

LV2
Trip Sel

Remaining
capacitor life
diagnosis level

CAP.Diag
Perc

8470

0h1D53

Capacitor life
diagnosis
mode

CAP.
Diag

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Source setting

p.209

0.00–High Freq
(Hz)

20.00

p.209

0.0–3000.0 (Min)

60.0

p.209

0: Trip

p.341

1: Free-Run

p.344

0.0

p.342

0: No

p.342

p.346

0: None

p.346

Setting Range

Trip

Warning

None

Free-Run

Dec

0.0–60.0 (sec)
0

Yes

10–100 (%)
0

None

Cap.Diag 1

Cap.Diag 2

Cap.Init

PRT-84 is displayed when PRT-83 is set to more than ‘0(%)’. PRT- 84 can only be set in Auto-State.
503

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1D55

Capacitor life
diagnosis level
1

CAP.
Level1

50.0–95.0 (%)

0.0

p.346

8671

0h1D56

Capacitor life
diagnosis level
2

CAP.
Level2

0.0

p.346

0h1D57

Fan
accumulated
Fan Time
operating time Perc
operation %

p.348

0h1D58

Fan
replacement
alarm level

0.0–100.0 (%)

0.0

p.348

0h1D5A

Low battery
Low
voltage setting Battery

0:None

p.339

0h1D5B

0:None

BrokenBe
15.00~MzxFreq
lt Freq

15.00

Current
Trq

Torque current BrokenBe
of operating
lt Trq
0.0~100.0%
Broken belt

10.0

Delay of
operating
Broken belt

10.0

0h1D5C

0h1D5D

0h1D5E

0 h1D5F

Setting the
function of
Broken belt

Operating the
frequency of
Broken belt
Motor torque
current

PRT-86 is read only.
504

Fan
Exchange

None

Warning

BrokenBe 0
lt Sel
1

Warning

Free-Run

None

BrokenBe
0~600.0[sec]
lt Dly

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

0h1D60

0h1D61

0h1D62

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

LDT Auto
restart count

LDT Rst
Cnt

0~6000

P205

LDT Auto
restart cycle
count
LDT Auto
restart cycle
Initialization

LDT Rst
Cnt M

0~6000

P205

LDT Cnt
Clr T

0~5000

P205

505

Table of Functions

8.14 2nd Motor Function Group (M2)
The second motor function group is displayed when one or more of the IN-65–71 codes is set to
‘28 (2nd MOTOR)’. Data in the following table will be displayed only when the related code has
been selected.
*O: Write-enabled during operation, Δ: Write-enabled when stopped, X: Write disabled
Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

Jump code

Jump
Code

1–99

p.70

p.251

0h1E04

0h1E05

0h1E06

506

Acceleratio M2-Acc
n time
Time

Decelerati
on time

Motor
capacity

M2-Dec
Time

M2Capacity

0.0–600.0 (sec)

0.2 kW
(0.3HP)

0.4 kW
(0.5HP)

0.75 kW
(1.0HP)

1.1 kW
(1.5HP)

1.5 kW
(2.0HP)

20.0

0.75~
90kW

60.0

110~
250kW

100.0

315~
500kW

30.0

0.75~
90kW

90.0

110~
250kW

150.0

315~
500kW

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range
5

2.2 kW
(3.0HP)

3.0 kW
(4.0HP)

3.7 kW
(5.0HP)

4.0 kW
(5.5HP)

5.5 kW
(7.5HP)

7.5 Kw
(10.0HP)

11.0 kW
(15.0HP)

15.0 kW
(20.0HP)

18.5 kW
(25.0HP)

22.0 kW
(30.0HP)

30.0 kW
(40.0HP)

37.0 kW
(50.0HP)

45.0 kW
(60.0HP)

55.0 kW
(75.0HP)

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

507

Table of Functions

Code

508

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

0h1E07

Base
frequency

M2-Base
Freq

0h1E08

Control
mode

M2-Ctrl
Mode

Setting Range
19

75.0kW
(100.0HP)

90.0kW
(125.0HP)

110.0kW
(150.0HP)

132.0kW
(200.0HP)

160.0kW
(250.0HP)

185.0kW
(300.0HP)

220.0kW
(350.0HP)

250.0kW
(400.0HP)

315.0kW
(500.0HP)

355.0kW
(550.0HP)

400.0kW
(650.0HP)

500.0kW
(800.0HP)

30.00–400.00
(Hz)
0

V/F

Slip
Compen

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

60.00

p.251

0: V/F

p.251

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Prope
rty*

Ref.

0h1E0A

Number of
motor
poles

M2-Pole
Num

2–48

p.251

0h1E0B

Rated slip
speed

M2-Rated
Slip

0–3000 (RPM)

p.251

0h1E0C

Motor
rated
current

M2-Rated
Curr

1.0–1000.0 (A)

p.251

0h1E0D

Motor noload
current

M2Noload
Curr

0.0–1000.0 (A)

p.251

0h1E0E

Motor
rated
voltage

M2-Rated
Volt

072, 170–480 (V)

p.251

0h1E0F

Motor
efficiency

M2Efficiency

70–100 (%)

p.251

Stator
resistor

M2-Rs

0.000–9.999 (Ω)

p.251

0h1E12

Leakage
inductance

M2Lsigma

0.00–99.99 (mH)

p.251

0h1E19

M2-V/F
V/F pattern
Patt

p.251

0h1E1A

0h1E1B

Forward
torque
boost

M2-Fwd
Boost

Reverse
torque
boost

M2-Rev
Boost

Linear

Square

User V/F

Initial Value

Dependent on
motor settings

0: Linear

2.0

0.75~
90kW

1.0

110~
500kW

2.0

0.75~
90kW

0.0–15.0 (%)

1.0

110~

Refer to <4.15 Output Voltage Setting>
509

Table of Functions

Code

Comm.
Address

Name

LCD
Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Prope
rty*

Ref.

500kW
28

0h1E1C

Stall
M2-Stall
prevention
Lev
level

30–150 (%)

130

p.251

0h1E1D

Electronic
thermal 1
minute
rating

100–150 (%)

120

p.251

0h1E1E

Electronic
thermal
M2-ETH
continuous Cont
rating

50–120 (%)

100

p.251

M2-ETH 1
min

8.15 Trip (TRIP Last-x) and Config (CNF) Mode
8.15.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x)
Code

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Ref.

Trip type display

Trip Name(x)

Frequency reference at
trip

Output Freq

Output current at trip

Output Current

Acceleration/
Deceleration state at trip

Inverter State

DC section state

DCLink Voltage

NTC temperature

Temperature

Input terminal state

DI State

0000 0000

510

Table of Functions

Code

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Ref.

Output terminal state

DO State

000

Trip time after Power on

Trip On Time

00/00/00 00: 00

Trip time after operation
start

Trip Run Time

00/00/00 00: 00

Delete trip history

Trip Delete?

Yes

8.15.2 Config Mode (CNF)
Code

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Ref.

Jump code

Jump Code

1–99

p.70

Keypad language
selection

Language Sel

0: English

LCD contrast
adjustment
Inverter S/W
version

LCD Contrast

p.263

Inv S/W Ver

p.263

Keypad S/W
version
Keypad title
version

KeypadS/W Ver

p.263

KPD Title Ver

p.263

Anytime Para

Frequency

0: Frequency

p.316

Monitor Line-1

Speed

0: Frequency

p.316

Output Current

2:
OutputCurrent

p.316

Output Voltage

p.316

Output Power

3:
OutputVoltage

02
10
11
12
20
21

Display item
condition
display window
Monitor mode
display 1

Monitor mode
display 2

Monitor Line-2

Monitor mode
display 3

Monitor Line-3

511

Table of Functions

Code

Name

LCD Display

Setting Range
5

WHour Counter

DCLink Voltage

DI State

DO State

V1 Monitor(V)

V1 Monitor(%)

V2 Monitor(V)

V2 Monitor(%)

I2 Monitor(mA)

I2 Monitor(%)

PID Output

PID Ref Value

PID Fdb Value

EPID1 Out

EPID1 Ref Val

EPID1 Fdb Val

EPID2 Out

EPID2 Ref Val

EPID2Fdb Val

Yes

Initial Value

Ref.

0: No

p.316

Monitor mode
initialize

Mon Mode Init

3073

Option slot 1 type
display

Option-1 Type

p.263

Option slot 2 type
display

Option-2 Type

p.263

Option slot 3 type
display

Option-3 Type

p.263

Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
512

Table of Functions

Code

Name

Parameter
initialization

LCD Display

Parameter Init

Display changed
Parameter

Changed Para

Multi key item

Multi Key Sel

Macro function
item

Macro Select

Setting Range
0

All Grp

DRV Grp

BAS Grp

ADV Grp

CON Grp

IN Grp

OUT Grp

COM Grp

PID Grp

EPI Grp

AP1 Grp

AP2 Grp

AP3 Grp

PRT Grp

M2 Grp

View All

View Changed

None

UserGrpSelKey

Basic

Compressor

Supply Fan

Exhaust Fan

Cooling Tower

Circul. Pump

Vacuum Pump

Constant Torque

Initial Value

Ref.

0: No

p.257

0: View All

p.259

0: None

p.259

0: Basic

p.264

513

Table of Functions

Code

Name

LCD Display

Trip history
deletion

Erase All Trip

User registration
code deletion

UserGrpAllDel

Read parameters

Parameter Read

Write parameters

Parameter
Write

Save parameters

Parameter Save

Hide parameter
mode

View Lock Set

Password
protection (hide
parameters)

Lock parameter
edit

Initial Value

Ref.

0: No

p.263

0: No

p.260

0: No

p.256

0: No

p.256

0: No

p.256

0-9999

Un-locked

p.258

View Lock Pw

0-9999

Password

p.258

Key Lock Set

0–9999

Un-locked

p.258

Password for
locking parameter Key Lock Pw
edit

0–9999

Password

p.258

Additional title
update

Add Title Up

0: No

p.263

Simple parameter
setting

Easy Start On

1: Yes

p.261

Power
consumption
initialization

WHCount Reset

0: No

p.261

514

Setting Range
0

Yes

Table of Functions

Code
70

Name
Accumulated
inverter motion
time
Accumulated
inverter operation
time

LCD Display

Setting Range

Initial Value

Ref.

On-time

00000DAY 00:00

p.318

Run-time

00000DAY 00:00

p.318

0: No

Accumulated
inverter operation
time initialization

Time Reset

7374

Real Time

Date-Format

Accumulated
cooling fan
operation time

Fan Time

00000DAY 00:00

Reset of
accumulated
cooling fan
operation time

p.318
1

Yes

Fan Time Rst

p.318

0: No

p.318

The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.
515

Table of Functions

8.16 Macro Groups
The following table lists detailed parameter settings for each macro configuration.

8.16.1 Compressor (MC1) Group

516

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90k
W

20.0

110~250
kW

60.0

315~500
kW

100.0

Code

LCD
Display

DRV-3 Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90k
W

10.0

110~250
kW

30.0

315~500
kW

50.0

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequenc 20.00
y

1: Keypad-2

Control
DRV-9
Mode

DRV12

JOG
Acc
Time

13.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS70

Acc Time10.0
1

BAS71

Dec
Time-1

20.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

ADV65

U/D
Save
Mode

1: Yes

CON4

Carrier
Freq

3.0

CON70

SS
Mode

0: Flying Start-1

CON77

KEB
Select

1: Yes

OUT32

Relay 2

14: Run

PID-1

PID Sel

1: Yes

PID-3

PID
Output

0.00

PID-4

PID Ref
Value

PID-5

PID Fdb
Value

PID10

PID Ref 1
Src

4: I2

20.0

517

Table of Functions

PID11

PID Ref
1 Set

0.5000

PID25

PID PGain 1

70.00

PID26

PID ITime 1

5.0

PID50

PID Unit
Sel

5: inWC

Macro
Code

Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

Macro
Code

Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

PID-51

PID Unit
Scale

4: x0.01

AP-1 8

PID
Sleep1Freq

5.00

AP1-21

Pre-PID Freq

30.00

AP1-22

Pre-PID Delay 120.0

PRT-8

RST Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT-10

Retry Delay

4.0

PRT011

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT-12

Lost Cmd
Mode

2: Dec

PRT-13

Lost Cmd
Time

4.0

PRT-40

ETH Trip Sel

1: Free Run

PRT-42

ETH 1 min

120

PRT-52

Stall Level 1

130

PRT-66

DB
Warn %ED

PRT-70

LDT Sel

1: Warning

PRT-72

LDT Source

0: Output
Current

PRT-75

LDT Band
Width

LDT
Source/10%
of the Max.
value

PRT-76

LDT Freq

20.00

M2-4

M2-Acc Time

10.0

M2-5

M2-Dec Time

20.0

M2-8

M2-Ctrl
Mode

1: Slip
Compen

M2-28

M2-Stall Lev

125

M2-29

M2-ETH 1
min

120

518

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

Macro
Code

Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

PID-51

PID Unit
Scale

4: x0.01

AP-1 8

PID
Sleep1Freq

5.00

AP1-21

Pre-PID Freq

30.00

AP1-22

Pre-PID Delay 120.0

PRT-8

RST Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT-10

Retry Delay

4.0

PRT011

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT-12

Lost Cmd
Mode

2: Dec

PRT-13

Lost Cmd
Time

4.0

PRT-40

ETH Trip Sel

1: Free Run

PRT-42

ETH 1 min

120

PRT-52

Stall Level 1

130

PRT-66

DB
Warn %ED

PRT-70

LDT Sel

1: Warning

PRT-72

LDT Source

0: Output
Current

PRT-75

LDT Band
Width

LDT
Source/10%
of the Max.
value

PRT-76

LDT Freq

20.00

M2-4

M2-Acc Time

10.0

M2-5

M2-Dec Time

20.0

M2-8

M2-Ctrl
Mode

1: Slip
Compen

M2-28

M2-Stall Lev

125

M2-29

M2-ETH 1
min

120

8.16.2 Supply Fan (MC2) Group

519

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

DRV-11

LCD
Display

Initial Value

8
10

ADV-64

CON-4

PID-1

PID-4

PID-10

PID-25

PID-36

PID-51

AP1-22

520

LCD
Display

Initial Value
0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

1: CODE

DRV-3

Acc
Time

Dec
Time

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref 1:
Src
Keypad-2

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

BAS-71

FAN
Control

Carrier
Freq
KEB
CON-77
Select

Code

Jump
Code

JOG
Frequen 15.00
cy
Acc
20.0
BAS-70
Time-1
Power1: Yes
ADV-10
on Run

Macro
Code

PID Sel
PID Ref
Value
PID Ref
1 Src
PID PGain 1
PID Out
Inv
PID Unit
Scale
Pre-PID
Delay

Dec
Time-1
E-Save
ADV-50
Mode
U/D
ADV-65 Save
Mode
SS
CON-70
Mode

2: Temp Control

3.0

1: Yes

OUT-32 Relay 2

1: Yes

PID-3

PID-5

4: I2

PID-11

40.00

PID-26

1: Yes

PID-50

4: x0.01

AP- 21

120.0

PRT- 8

PID
Output
PID Fdb
Value
PID Ref
1 Set
PID ITime 1
PID Unit
Sel
Pre-PID
Freq
RST
Restart

1: Square
30.0
2: Auto
1: Yes
1: Flying Start-2
10: Over Voltage
0.5000
20.0
5: inWC
30.00
11

Table of Functions

PRT-9

PRT-11

PRT-40

PRT-52

Retry
Number
Lost
KPD
Mode
ETH Trip
Sel
Stall
Level 1

PRT-10

3: Dec

PRT-12

1: Free Run

PRT-42

130

PRT-70

PRT-72

LDT
Source

PRT-76

LDT
Freq

10.00

PRT-77

M2-25

M2-V/F
Patt

1: Square

M2-28

M2-29

M2-ETH
110
1 min

0: Output Current

PRT-75

Retry
Delay
Lost
Cmd
Mode
ETH 1
min

20.0
3: Hold Input
120

LDT Sel

1: Warning

LDT
Band
Width
LDT
Restart
DT
M2-Stall
Lev

LDT Source
/10% of the Max.
value
500.0
110

8.16.3 Exhaust Fan (MC3) Group

521

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20
22

ADV-

522

U/D

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

1: Yes

CON-4 Carrier

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control
3.0

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
65

Save

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Freq

523

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

Mode

524

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20
24

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
CON-

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

2: Temp Control

1: Flying Start-2

CON-

KEB

1: Yes

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

525

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

526

Mode

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Select

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20
26

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
OUT-

Relay

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

2: Temp Control

10: Over Voltage

PID-1

PID Sel

1: Yes

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

527

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

528

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20
28

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
PID-3

PID

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

2: Temp Control

PID-4

PID Ref

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

529

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

Outp

530

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

Value

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

531

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20
30

PID-5

532

PID

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

PID-10 PID Ref 1

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control
4: I2

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
Fdb

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Src

533

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

Value

534

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20
32

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
PID-11 PID

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

0.5000

PID-25 PID P-

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control
35.00

535

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

Ref 1

536

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

Gain 1

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Set

537

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20
34

PID-26 PID I-

538

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

15.0

PID-36 PID Out

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control
1: Yes

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

18
20

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode
Time

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Inv

539

Table of Functions

Macro
Code

Code

DRV-4

LCD
Displa Initial Value
y

JOG
DRV-11 Frequ
ency
Acc
BAS-70 Time1
Acc
BAS-72 Time2
Acc
BAS-74 Time3
Acc
BAS-76 Time4
Acc
BAS-78 Time5
Dec
BAS-81 Time6
Dec
BAS-83 Time7
ADVE-Save
50
Mode

18
20

540

Code

LCD
Display

Initial Value

DRV-3

Acc Time

0.75~90
20.0
kW
110~250k
60.0
W
315~500k
100.0
W

0.75~90
30.0
kW
110~250k
90.0
W
315~500k
150.0
W

DRV-7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

20.0

BAS-71

Dec Time30.0
1

22.5

BAS-73

Dec Time32.5
2

25.0

BAS-75

Dec Time35.0
3

27.5

BAS-77

Dec Time37.5
4

30.0

BAS-80

Acc Time32.5
6

42.5

BAS-82

Acc Time35.0
7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

Jump
1: CODE
Code

Dec
Time

Macro
Code

2: Temp Control

Table of Functions

PID-50 PID Unit Sel

5: inWC

PID-51

PID Unit
Scale

4: x0.01

AP121

Pre-PID Freq

30.00

PRT-8

RST
Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT-10

Retry
Delay

10.0

PRT-11

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT-12

Lost Cmd
Mode

3: Hold Input

PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel

1:Free-Run

PRT-42 ETH 1 min 120

PRT-52 Stall Level 1

130

PRT-70 LDT Sel

PRT-72 LDT Source

0: Output
Current

PRT-75

LDT Band
Width

PRT-76 LDT Freq

10.00

PRT-77

LDT
300.0
Restart DT

M2-Acc Time 10.0

M2-5

M2-4

M225

M2-V/F Patt

1: Square

M229

M2-ETH 1
min

110

M228

1: Warning
LDT Source/10% of
the Max. value

M2-Dec
Time

20.0

M2-Stall
Lev

110

541

Table of Functions

8.16.4 Cooling Tower (MC4) Group

542

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD Display

Jump Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

20.0

110~250
kW

60.0

315~500
kW

100.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV11

JOG
Frequency

15.00

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time-1

20.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

30.0

BAS072

Acc Time-2

22.5

BAS73

Dec Time2

32.5

BAS74

Acc Time-3

25.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

35.0

BAS76

Acc Time-4

27.5

BAS77

Dec Time4

37.5

BAS78

Acc Time-5

30.0

BAS80

Acc Time6

32.5

BAS81

Dec Time-6

42.5

BAS82

Acc Time7

35.0

BAS83

Dec Time-7

45.0

ADV10

Power-on
Run

1: Yes

ADV50

E-Save
Mode

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN
Control

2: Temp Control

ADV65

U/D Save
Mode

1: Yes

CON4

Carrier
Freq

3.0

543

Table of Functions

CON70

SS Mode

1: Flying Start-2

CON77

KEB Select 1: Yes

OUT32

Relay 2

10: Over Voltage

PID-1

PID Sel

PID-3

PID Output

PID-4

PID Ref Value

PID -5

PID Fdb
Value

PID-10

PID Ref 1 Src

4: I2

PID-11

PID Ref 1 Set

50.00

PID-25

PID P-Gain 1

40.00

PID-26

PID I-Time 1

15.0

PID-36

PID Out Inv

1: Yes

PID-50

PID Unit Sel

3: °F

PID-51

PID Unit
Scale

2: x1

AP1-21

Pre-PID Freq

30.00

AP1-22

Pre-PID Delay 120.0

PRT-8

RST Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT-10

Retry Delay

10.0

PRT-11

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT-12

Lost Cmd
Mode

3: Hold Input

PRT-40

ETH Trip Sel

1: Free Run

PRT-42

ETH 1 min

120

PRT-52

Stall Level 1

130

PRT-70

LDT Sel

1: Warning

PRT-72

LDT Source

0: Output
Current

PRT-75

LDT Band
Width

LDT
Source/10%
of the Max.
value

PRT-76

LDT Freq

10.00

PRT 77

LDT Restart
DT

300.0

M2-25 M2-V/F Patt

M2 28

M2-Stall Lev

110

M2-29

544

M2-ETH 1
min

1: Yes

1: Square
110

Table of Functions

8.16.5 Circulation Pump (MC5) Group

545

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1:CODE

0.75~90
kW

50.0

110~250
kW

150.0

315~500
kW

250.0

DRV-3

LCD Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV-7

Freq Ref Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequency

15.00

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

50.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time30.0
1

BAS71

Dec Time-1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time32.0
2

BAS73

Dec Time-2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time34.0
3

BAS75

Dec Time-3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time36.0
4

BAS77

Dec Time-4

56.0

BAS78

Acc Time38.0
5

BAS79

Dec Time-5

58.0

BAS80

Acc Time40.0
6

BAS81

Dec Time-6

59.0

BAS82

Acc Time42.0
7

BAS83

Dec Time-7

60.0

546

Table of Functions

ADV10

Power-on
1: Yes
Run

ADV25

Freq Limit Lo 20.00

ADV50

E-Save
Mode

2: Auto

ADV64

FAN Control

2: Temp Control

ADV65

U/D Save
Mode

1: Yes

CON-4

Carrier Freq

3.0

CON70

SS Mode

0: Flying Start-1

CON-77

KEB Select

1: Yes

OUT32

Relay 2

14: Run

PID-1

PID Sel

1: Yes

PID-3

PID Output

PID-4

PID Ref
Value

PID-5

PID Fdb
Value

PID-10

PID Ref 1 Src 4: I2

PID11

PID Ref 1
Set

5.000

PID-25

PID P-Gain 1 50.00

PID26

PID I-Time 1

5.0

PID-50

PID Unit Sel

2: PSI

PID51

PID Unit
Scale

3: x0.1

AP1-8

PID
Sleep1Freq

10.00

AP121

Pre-PID Freq 30.00

AP1-22

Pre-PID
Delay

120.0

PRT-8

RST Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT10

Retry Delay

5.0

PRT-11

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT12

Lost Cmd
Mode

3: Hold Input

PRT-40

ETH Trip Sel

1: Free Run

PRT42

ETH 1 min

120

PRT-52

Stall Level 1

130

PRT60

PipeBroken
Sel

1: Warning

PRT-61

PipeBroken
Lev

90.0

PRT62

Pipe Broken
DT

22.0

PRT-70

LDT Sel

1: Warning

547

Table of Functions

PRT72

PRT-76 LDT Freq

M2-4

LDT Source

0: Output
Current
10.00

M2-Acc
Time

10.0

63
65

M225

M2-V/F Patt

1: Square

M229

M2-ETH 1
min

120

548

PRT-75

LDT Band
Width

LDT Source/10%
of the Max. value

PRT-77 LDT Restart DT
M2-5
M228

100.0

M2-Dec Time

20.0

M2-Stall Lev

125

Table of Functions

8.16.6 Vacuum Pump (MC6) Group

549

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

BAS78

Acc Time5

38.0

BAS79

Dec Time5

58.0

BAS80

Acc Time6

40.0

BAS81

Dec Time6

59.0

BAS82

Acc Time7

42.0

BAS83

Dec Time7

60.0

550

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

ADV10

Power-on
Run

1: Yes

ADV25

Freq Limit
Lo

40.00

ADV64

FAN
Control

2: Temp Control

ADV65

U/D Save
Mode

1: Yes

CON4

Carrier
Freq

3.0

CON70

SS Mode

0: Flying Start-1

551

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

CON77

KEB Select

1: Yes

OUT32

Relay 2

14: Run

PID-1

PID Sel

1: Yes

PID-3

PID
Output

PID-4

PID Ref
Value

PID-5

PID Fdb
Value

552

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

PID10

PID Ref 1
Src

4: I2

PID11

PID Ref 1
Set

5.000

PID25

PID P-Gain
50.00
1

PID26

PID I-Time
1

2.5

PID50

PID Unit
Sel

PID51

PID Unit
Scale

3: x0.1

5: inWC

553

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

AP121

Pre-PID
Freq

30.00

PRT-8

RST
Restart

PRT-9

Retry
Number

PRT10

Retry
Delay

4.0

PRT11

Lost KPD
Mode

3: Dec

PRT12

Lost Cmd
Mode

3: Hold Input

554

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

PRT40

ETH Trip
Sel

1: Free Run

PRT42

ETH 1 min 120

PRT52

Stall Level
1

130

PRT60

PipeBroke
1: Warning
n Sel

PRT61

PipeBroke
n Lev

90.0

PRT62

Pipe
22.0
Broken DT

555

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

PRT66

DB
10
Warn %ED

PRT70

LDT Sel

1: Warning

PRT72

LDT
Source

0: Output Current

PRT75

LDT Band
Width

LDT Source /10%
of the Max. value

PRT76

LDT Freq

15.00

PRT77

LDT
100.0
Restart DT

556

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

DRV4

LCD
Display

Jump
Code

Dec Time

Macro
Code
Code

Initial Value

1: CODE

0.75~90
kW

60.0

110~250
kW

180.0

315~500
kW

300.0

DRV3

LCD
Display

Acc Time

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

30.0

110~250
kW

90.0

315~500
kW

150.0

DRV7

Freq Ref
Src

1: Keypad-2

JOG
Frequenc
y

20.00

DRV9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV11

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

30.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

60.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS-7

V/F
Pattern

1: Square

BAS70

Acc Time1

30.0

BAS71

Dec Time1

50.0

BAS72

Acc Time2

32.0

BAS73

Dec Time2

52.0

BAS74

Acc Time3

34.0

BAS75

Dec Time3

54.0

BAS76

Acc Time4

36.0

BAS77

Dec Time4

56.0

M24

M2-Acc
Time

10.0

M25

M2-Dec
Time

20.0

M28

M2-Ctrl
Mode

1: Slip Compen

M225

M2-V/F
Patt

1: Square

M228

M2-Stall
Lev

125

M229

M2-ETH 1
min

120

557

Table of Functions

8.16.7 Constant Torque (MC7) Group
Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

Jump Code

1:CODE

DRV-3

Acc Time

30.0

110~250
90.0
kW
315~500
150.0
kW

0.75~90
kW
2

DRV-4

Dec Time

32.0

110~250
60.0
kW

DRV-7

Freq Ref Src 1: Keypad-2

315~500
100.0
kW
4

DRV-9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

10.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

20.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS70

Acc Time-1

10.0

BAS71

Dec Time-1

20.0

BAS72

Acc Time-2

12.5

BAS73

Dec Time-2

22.5

BAS74

Acc Time-3

15.0

BAS75

Dec Time-3

25.0

BAS76

Acc Time-4

17.5

BAS77

Dec Time-4

27.5

BAS78

Acc Time-5

20.0

BAS79

Dec Time-5

30.0

BAS80

Acc Time-6

22.5

BAS81

Dec Time-6

32.5

BAS82

Acc Time-7

25.0

BAS83

Dec Time-7

35.0

558

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

Jump Code

1:CODE

DRV-3

Acc Time

30.0

110~250
90.0
kW
315~500
150.0
kW

0.75~90
kW
2

DRV-4

Dec Time

32.0

110~250
60.0
kW

DRV-7

Freq Ref Src 1: Keypad-2

315~500
100.0
kW
4

DRV-9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

10.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

20.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS70

Acc Time-1

10.0

BAS71

Dec Time-1

20.0

BAS72

Acc Time-2

12.5

BAS73

Dec Time-2

22.5

ADV-1

Acc Pattern

1: S-curve

ADV-2

Dec Pattern 1: S-curve

ADV25

Freq Limit
Lo

20.00

ADV74

RegenAvd
Sel

1: Yes

CON-4 Carrier Freq

3.0

CON70

SS Mode

0: Flying Start-1

CON77

KEB Select

1: Yes

OUT32

Relay 2

14: Run

AP121

Pre-PID Freq 30.00

AP122

Pre-PID
Delay

120.0

PRT12

Lost Cmd
Mode

PRT-40 ETH-Trip Sel 2:Dec

2: Dec

559

Table of Functions

Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value

Macro
Code
Code

LCD Display

Initial Value
0.75~90
kW

Jump Code

1:CODE

DRV-3

Acc Time

30.0

110~250
90.0
kW
315~500
150.0
kW

0.75~90
kW
2

DRV-4

Dec Time

32.0

110~250
60.0
kW

DRV-7

Freq Ref Src 1: Keypad-2

315~500
100.0
kW
4

DRV-9

Control
Mode

1: Slip Compen

DRV12

JOG Acc
Time

10.0

DRV13

JOG Dec
Time

20.0

DRV15

Torque
Boost

1: Auto1

BAS70

Acc Time-1

10.0

BAS71

Dec Time-1

20.0

BAS72

Acc Time-2

12.5

BAS73

Dec Time-2

22.5

PRT66

DB
Warn %ED

PRT-70 LDT Sel

1: Warning

PRT72

LDT Source

0:Output
Current

LDT Band
PRT-75
Width

LDT Source/10%
of the Max.
value

PRT76

LDT Freq

5.00

PRT-77

LDT Restart
DT

250.0

M2-4

M2-Acc
Time

10.0

M2-5

M2-Dec
Time

20.0

M2-8

M2-Ctrl
Mode

1: Slip Compen

560

Troubleshooting

9 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions, fault
trips, warning signals, or faults occur. If the inverter does not work normally after following the
suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the LSIS customer service center.

9.1 Trip and Warning
When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operation (trips) or sends out a warning signal. When
a trip or warning occurs, the keypad displays the information briefly. Detailed information is
shown on the LCD display. Users can read the warning message at PRT-90. When more than 2 trips
occur at roughly the same time, the keypad displays the higher priority fault information. In the
keypad, fault trips with higher priority are displayed first. Use the [Up], [Down], [Left] or [Right]
cursor key on the keypad to view the fault trip information. The fault conditions can be
categorized as follows
•

Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is not
saved in the fault history.

•

Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or warning
signal disappears.

•

Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after the
user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns the inverter
on again. If the inverter is still in a fault condition after powering it on again, please contact
the supplier or the LSIS customer service center.

9.1.1 Fault Trips
Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage
LCD Display

Type

Description

Over Load

Latch

Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated and the actual
load level exceeds the set level. Operates when PRT-20 is set to a
value other than ‘0’.

561

Troubleshooting

LCD Display

Type

Description

Under Load

Latch

Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated and the
actual load level is less than the set level. Operates when PRT-27 is
set to a value other than ‘0’.

Over Current1

Latch

Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 180% of the rated
current.

Over Voltage

Latch

Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the specified
value.

Low Voltage

Level

Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than the specified
value.

Low Voltage2

Latch

Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than the specified
value during inverter operation.

Ground Trip

Latch

Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output side of the
inverter and causes the current to exceed the specified value. The
specified value varies depending on inverter capacity.

E-Thermal

Latch

Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal characteristics to
prevent motor overheating. Operates when PRT-40 is set to a value
other than ‘0’.

Out Phase Open

Latch

Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or more phases
in an open circuit condition. Operates when bit 1 of PRT-05 is set to
‘1’.

In Phase Open

Latch

Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or more phases in
an open circuit condition. Operates only when bit 2 of PRT-05 is set
to ‘1’.

Inverter OLT

Latch

Displayed when the inverter has been protected from overload and
resultant overheating, based on inverse time-limit thermal
characteristics. Allowable overload rates for the inverter are 120%
for 1 min and 140% for 5 sec.

No Motor Trip

Latch

Displayed when the motor is not connected during inverter
operation. Operates when PRT-31 is set to ‘1’.

Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External Signals
LCD Display

Type

Description

Over Heat

Latch

Displayed when the temperature of the inverter heat sink exceeds

562

Troubleshooting

LCD Display

Type

Description
the specified value.

Over Current2

Latch

Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter detects a specified
level of excessive, short circuit current.

External Trip

Latch

Displayed when an external fault signal is provided by the multifunction terminal. Set one of the multi-function input terminals at
IN-65-71 to ‘4 (External Trip)’ to enable external trip.

Level

Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a signal provided
from the multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-function
input terminals at IN-65-71 to ‘5 (BX)’ to enable input block function.
Displayed when an error is detected in the memory (EEPRom),
analog-digital converter output (ADC Off Set) or CPU watchdog
(Watch Dog-1, Watch Dog-2).

H/W-Diag

Fatal

EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters due to keypad or
memory (EEPRom) fault.
ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit
(U/V/W terminal, current sensor, etc.).

NTC Open

Latch

Displayed when an error is detected in the temperature sensor of
the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT).

Fan Trip

Latch

Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling fan. Set PRT-79
to ‘0’ to activate fan trip (for models below 22 kW capacity).

InFan Trip

Latch

Thermal Trip

Latch

Triggered when the input temperature is higher than the
temperature set by the user.

Lost KeyPad

Latch

Triggered when a communication error occurs between the
keypad and the inverter, when the keypad is the command source,
and PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) is set to any other value than ‘0’.

Fuse Open

Latch

If an input stage fuse breaks with an inverter of 315 kW or more, a
fault will occur.

It occurs when an abnormality is detected in the cooling fan inside
the inverter with inverter capacity of 110 kW to 500 kW.
Selecting PRT - 79 code to 0 will work.

563

Troubleshooting

General Fault Trips
LCD Display

Type

Description

Damper Err

Latch

Triggered when the damper open signal or run command signal is
longer than the value set at AP2-45 (Damper Check T) during a fan
operation.

MMC Interlock

Latch

Triggered when AP1-55 is set to ‘2’ and all auxiliary motors are
interlocked during an MMC operation.

CleanRPTErr

Latch

Triggered when the pump clean operation is operated frequently.
The conditions may be modified with theAP2-36–AP2-37 settings.

Pipe Broken

Latch

Triggered when a pipe is broken during the pump operation. Set
PRT-60.

Level Detect

Latch

Triggered when the inverter output current or power is lower or
higher than the values set by the user. Set the values at PRT-71–
PRT-77.

Broken Belt

Latch

Triggered when PRT-91 is set to Free Run

Type

Description

Lost Command

Level

Displayed when a frequency or operation command error is
detected during inverter operation by controllers other than the
keypad (e.g., using a terminal block and a communication mode).
Activate by setting PRT-12 to any value other than ‘0’.

IO Board Trip

Latch

Displayed when the I/O board or external communication card is
not connected to the inverter or there is a bad connection.

ParaWrite Trip

Latch

Displayed when communication fails during parameter writing.
Occurs due to a control cable fault or a bad connection.

Latch

Displayed when a communication error is detected between the
inverter and the communication board. Occurs when the
communication option card is installed.

Option Protection
LCD Display

Option Trip-1

564

Troubleshooting

9.1.2 Warning Message
LCD Display

Description

Over Load

Displayed when a motor is overloaded. Set PRT-17 to ‘1’ to enable. Set OUT31–35 or OUT-36 to ‘5 (Over Load)’ to receive the overload warning output
signals.

Under Load

Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Set PRT-25 is to ‘1’. Set the digital
output terminal or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to’ 7 (Under Load)’ to receive
the underload warning output signals.

INV Over Load

Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the inverter overheat
protection (inverter IOLT) level, is accumulated. Set the digital output
terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘6 (IOL)’ to receive the inverter
overload warning output signals.

Lost Command

Lost command warning alarm occurs even with PRT-12 set to ‘0’. The warning
alarm occurs based on the condition set at PRT-13-15. Set the digital output
terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘13 (Lost Command)’ to receive
the lost command warning output signals.

Fan Warning

Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while PRT-79 is set
to’1’. Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘8 (Fan
Warning)’ to receive the fan warning output signals.

DB Warn %ED

Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value. Set the
detection level at PRT-66.

Fire Mode

When there is a fire, Fire Mode forces the inverter to ignore certain fault trips
and continue to operate. Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35
or OUT-36) to ‘27 (Fire Mode)’ to receive the fire mode warning output signals.

Pipe Broken

Displayed when a pipe is broken during pump operation. Set the digital
output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘28 (Pipe Broken)’ to
receive the pipe break warning output signals.

Lost Keypad

Displayed when a communication error occurs between the keypad and the
inverter, when PRT-11 (Lost KPD Mode) is set to any other value than ‘0’, and a
run command is given from the keypad. Set the digital output terminals or
relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘24 (Lost KPD)’ to receive the lost keypad
warning output signals.

Level Detect

Displayed during a level detect state. Set PRT-70 to ‘1 (warning)’ to enable.

CAP. Warning

Displayed when capacitor life expectancy level goes below the level set by the

565

Troubleshooting

LCD Display

Description
user. Set the digital output terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘34
(CAPWarning)’ to receive the capacitor life warning output signals.

Fan ExChange

Displayed when the cooling fans need replacing. Set the digital output
terminals or relay (OUT-31–35 or OUT-36) to ‘35 (FanExChange)’ to receive the
fan replacement warning output signals.

Low Battery

Displayed when the RTC battery voltage drops to or below 2 V. To receive a
warning output signal, set PRT-90 (Low Battery) to ‘Yes’.

Broken Belt

Displayed when PRT-91 is set to warning and the inverter becomes on the
condition of broken belt.

Load Tune

Displayed when the values of ‘AP2-03 and AP2-04’ are more than the values of
‘AP2-09 and AP2-10’ and the function of load tuning is not normal.

PareWrite Fail

Displayed when the function of smart copier is not normal.

Rs Tune Err

Displayed when the function of Rs tuning is not normal . For example, auto
tuning is performed without wiring the motor.

Lsig Tune Err

Displayed when the function of Lsigma tuning is not normal . For example,
auto tuning is performed without wiring the motor.

KPD H.O.A Lock

If [DRV-05 KPD H.O.A Lock] sets HAND-OFF-AUTO disabled, it lasts one second
when HAND-OFF-AUTO key is pressed using user keypad

InFan Warning

It occurs when an abnormality is detected in the cooling fan inside the
inverter with inverter capacity of 110 kW to 500 kW.

9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips
When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table for
possible causes and remedies.
Type

Over Load

Under Load

566

Cause

Remedy

The load is greater than the motor’s
rated capacity.

Ensure that the motor and inverter have
appropriate capacity ratings.

The set value for the overload trip level
(PRT-21) is too low.

Increase the set value for the overload trip
level.

There is a motor-load connection

Replace the motor and inverter with

Troubleshooting

Type

Over
Current1

Over Voltage

Low Voltage

Cause

Remedy

problem.

models with lower capacity.

The set value for underload level (PRT24) is less than the system’s minimum
load.

Reduce the set value for the underload
level.

Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to
load inertia (GD2).

Increase Acc/Dec time.

The inverter load is greater than the
rated capacity.

Replace the inverter with a model that has
increased capacity.

The inverter supplied an output while
the motor was idling.

Operate the inverter after the motor has
stopped or use the speed search function
(CON-70).

The mechanical brake of the motor is
operating too fast.

Check the mechanical brake.

Deceleration time is too short for the
load inertia (GD2).

Increase the acceleration time.

A generative load occurs at the inverter
output.

Use the braking unit.

The input voltage is too high.

Determine if the input voltage is above the
specified value.

The input voltage is too low.

Determine if the input voltage is below the
specified value.

A load greater than the power capacity
is connected to the system ( a welder,
direct motor connection, etc.)

Increase the power capacity.

The magnetic contactor connected to
the power source has a faulty
connection.

Replace the magnetic contactor.

The input voltage has decreased during Determine if the input voltage is above the
the operation.
specified value.
Low
Voltage2

An input phase-loss has occurred.

Check the input wiring.

The power supply magnetic contactor
is faulty.

Replace the magnetic contractor.

567

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

Remedy

Ground Trip

A ground fault has occurred in the
inverter output wiring.

Check the output wiring.

The motor insulation is damaged.

Replace the motor.

The motor has overheated.

Reduce the load or operation frequency.

The inverter load is greater than the
rated capacity.

Replace the inverter with a model that has
increased capacity.

The set value for electronic thermal
protection is too low.

Set an appropriate electronic thermal level.

The inverter has been operated at low
speed for an extended duration.

Replace the motor with a model that
supplies extra power to the cooling fan.

The magnetic contactor on the output
side has a connection fault.

Check the magnetic contactor on the
output side.

The output wiring is faulty.

Check the output wiring.

The magnetic contactor on the input
side has a connection fault.

Check the magnetic contactor on the
input side.

The input wiring is faulty.

Check the input wiring.

The DC link capacitor needs to be
replaced.

Replace the DC link capacitor. Contact the
retailer or the LSIS customer service center.

E-Thermal

Out Phase
Open

In Phase
Open

Inverter OLT

Over Heat

Over
Current2
NTC Open

568

The load is greater than the rated motor Replace the motor and inverter with
capacity.
models that have increased capacity.
The torque boost level is too high.

Reduce the torque boost level.

There is a problem with the cooling
system.

Determine if a foreign object is obstructing
the air inlet, outlet, or vent.

The inverter cooling fan has been
operated for an extended period.

Replace the cooling fan.

The ambient temperature is too high.

Keep the ambient temperature below
50 ℃.

Output wiring is short-circuited.

Check the output wiring.

There is a fault with the electronic
semiconductor (IGBT).

Do not operate the inverter. Contact the
retailer or the LSIS customer service center.

The ambient temperature is too low.

Keep the ambient temperature above 10 ℃.

Troubleshooting

Type

Fan Lock
/ In Fan

Cause

Remedy

There is a fault with the internal
temperature sensor.

Contact the retailer or the LSIS customer
service center.

A foreign object is obstructing the fan’s
air vent.

Remove the foreign object from the air
inlet or outlet.

The cooling fan needs to be replaced.

Replace the cooling fan.

9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults
When a fault other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occurs, refer to the following
table for possible causes and remedies.
Type

Parameters
cannot be set.

The motor does
not rotate.

Cause

Remedy

The inverter is in operation (driving
mode).

Stop the inverter to change to
program mode and set the
parameter.

The parameter access is incorrect.

Check the correct parameter access
level and set the parameter.

The password is incorrect.

Check the password, disable the
parameter lock and set the parameter.

Low voltage is detected.

Check the power input to resolve the
low voltage and set the parameter.

The frequency command source is set
incorrectly.

Check the frequency command
source setting.

The operation command source is set
incorrectly.

Check the operation command
source setting.

Power is not supplied to the terminal
R/S/T.

Check the terminal connections R/S/T
and U/V/W.

The charge lamp is turned off.

Turn on the inverter.

The operation command is off.

Turn on the operation command.
(RUN).

The motor is locked.

Unlock the motor or lower the load

569

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

Remedy
level.

The load is too high.

Operate the motor independently.

An emergency stop signal is input.

Reset the emergency stop signal.

The wiring for the control circuit terminal Check the wiring for the control circuit
is incorrect.
terminal.

The motor
rotates in the
opposite
direction to the
command.

The motor only
rotates in one
direction.
The motor is

570

The input option for the frequency
command is incorrect.

Check the input option for the
frequency command.

The input voltage or current for the
frequency command is incorrect.

Check the input voltage or current for
the frequency command.

The PNP/NPN mode is selected
incorrectly.

Check the PNP/NPN mode setting.

The frequency command value is too
low.

Check the frequency command and
input a value above the minimum
frequency.

The [OFF] key is pressed.

Check that the stop state is normal, if
so resume operation normally.

Motor torque is too low.

Increase the volume of the torque
boost. If the fault remains, replace the
inverter with a model with increased
capacity.

The wiring for the motor output cable is
incorrect.

Determine if the cable on the output
side is wired correctly to the phase
(U/V/W) of the motor.

The signal connection between the
control circuit terminal (forward/reverse
rotation) of the inverter and the
forward/reverse rotation signal on the
control panel side is incorrect.

Check the forward/reverse rotation
wiring.

Reverse rotation prevention is selected.

Remove the reverse rotation
prevention.

The reverse rotation signal is not
provided, even when a 3-wire sequence
is selected.

Check the input signal associated
with the 3-wire operation and adjust
as necessary.

The load is too heavy.

Reduce the load.

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

overheating.

Remedy
Increase the Acc/Dec time.
Check the motor parameters and set
the correct values.
Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with appropriate
capacity for the load.

The ambient temperature of the motor
is too high.

Lower the ambient temperature of
the motor.
Use a motor that can withstand
phase-to-phase voltages surges
greater than the maximum surge
voltage.

The phase-to-phase voltage of the
motor is insufficient.

Only use motors suitable for
applications with inverters.
Connect the AC reactor to the inverter
output (set the carrier frequency to 3
kHz).

The motor fan has stopped or the fan is
obstructed with debris.

Check the motor fan and remove any
foreign objects.
Reduce the load.

The motor stops
during
acceleration.

The load is too high.

Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with capacity
appropriate for the load.
The current is too big.

The motor stops
when connected The load is too high.
to load.
The motor does

Increase the volume of the torque
boost.

The frequency command value is low.

If the output current exceeds the
rated load, decrease the torque boost.
Reduce the load.
Replace the motor and the inverter
with models with capacity
appropriate for the load.
Set an appropriate value.

571

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

Remedy

The load is too high.

Reduce the load and increase the
acceleration time. Check the
mechanical brake status.

The acceleration time is too long.

Change the acceleration time.

The combined values of the motor
properties and the inverter parameter
are incorrect.

Change the motor related
parameters.

The stall prevention level during
acceleration is low.

Change the stall prevention level.

The stall prevention level during
operation is low.

Change the stall prevention level.

There is a high variance in load.
Motor speed
varies during
operation.

Replace the motor and inverter with
models with increased capacity.

The input voltage varies.

Reduce input voltage variation.

Motor speed variations occur at a
specific frequency.

Adjust the output frequency to avoid
a resonance area.

The motor
rotation is
different from
the setting.

The V/F pattern is set incorrectly.

Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for
the motor specification.

not accelerate.
/The
acceleration
time is too long.

The deceleration time is set too long.
The motor
deceleration
time is too long The motor torque is insufficient.
even with
Dynamic Braking
The load is higher than the internal
(DB) resistor
connected.
torque limit determined by the rated
current of the inverter.
While the
inverter is in
operation, a
control unit
malfunctions or
noise occurs.

572

Noise occurs due to switching inside the
inverter.

Change the setting accordingly.
If motor parameters are normal, it is
likely to be a motor capacity fault.
Replace the motor with a model with
increased capacity.
Replace the inverter with a model
with increased capacity.
Change the carrier frequency to the
minimum value.
Install a micro surge filter in the
inverter output.

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

Remedy
Connect the inverter to a ground
terminal.

When the
inverter is
operating, the
earth leakage
breaker is
activated.

Check that the ground resistance is
less than 100Ω for 200 V inverters and
less than 10Ω for 400 V inverters.
An earth leakage breaker will interrupt
the supply if current flows to ground
during inverter operation.

Check the capacity of the earth
leakage breaker and make the
appropriate connection, based on the
rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.

The motor
vibrates severely
and does not
rotate normally.

The motor
makes
humming, or
loud noises.

Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase
power source is not balanced.
Resonance occurs between the motor's
natural frequency and the carrier
frequency.
Resonance occurs between the motor's
natural frequency and the inverter’s
output frequency.

Check and test the motor’s insulation.
Slightly increase or decrease the
carrier frequency.
Slightly increase or decrease the
carrier frequency.
Use the frequency jump function to
avoid the frequency band where
resonance occurs.

The frequency input command is an
external, analog command.

In situations of noise inflow on the
analog input side that results in
command interference, change the
input filter time constant (IN-07).

The wiring length between the inverter
and the motor is too long.

Ensure that the total cable length
between the inverter and the motor is
less than 200 m (50 m for motors
rated 3.7 kW or lower).

It is difficult to decelerate sufficiently,

Adjust the DC braking parameter.

The motor
vibrates/hunts.

The motor does

Check the input voltage and balance
the voltage.

573

Troubleshooting

Type

Cause

Remedy

not come to a
complete stop
when the
inverter output
stops.

because DC braking is not operating
normally.

Increase the set value for the DC
braking current.

The output
frequency does
not increase to
the frequency
reference.
The cooling fan
does not rotate.

574

Increase the set value for the DC
braking stopping time.
The frequency reference is within the
jump frequency range.

Set the frequency reference higher
than the jump frequency range.

The frequency reference is exceeding
the upper limit of the frequency
command.

Set the upper limit of the frequency
command higher than the frequency
reference.

Because the load is too heavy, the stall
prevention function is working.

Replace the inverter with a model
with increased capacity.

The control parameter for the cooling
fan is set incorrectly.

Check the control parameter setting
for the cooling fan.

Troubleshooting

575

Maintenance

10 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to complete, and
how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental conditions
and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns, please follow the
maintenance recommendations in this section.

•

Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual.

•

Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off.

•

Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or detergents may
result in electric shock or damage to the product .

10.1 Regular Inspection Lists
10.1.1 Daily Inspection
Inspection
area

Inspection
item

Inspection details

Inspection
method

Inspection
standard

Inspection
equipment

Ambient
environm
ent

Is the ambient
temperature and
humidity within
the design range,
and is there any
dust or foreign
objects present?

Refer to 1.3
Installation
Considerations
on page 10

No icing (ambient
temperature: -10 +50) and no
condensation
(ambient
humidity below
95%)

Thermomete
r,
hygrometer,
recorder

Inverter

Is there any
abnormal
vibration or
noise?

Visual
inspection

No abnormality

Power
voltage

Is the input and
output voltages
normal?

Measure
Refer to 11.1 Input
voltages
and Output
between R/ S/ T- Specifications on

All

576

Digital
multimeter
tester

Maintenance

Inspection
area

Inspection
item

Inspection details

Inspection
method

Inspection
standard

Inspection
equipment

phases in. the
page 585
inverter terminal
block.

Input/Outp
ut circuit

Smoothin
g
capacitor

Is there any
leakage from the
inside?

Is there any
abnormal
vibration or
noise?

Cooling
fan

Display

Measuring Is the display
device
value normal?

All

No abnormality

Turn off the
system and
check operation
by rotating the
fan manually.

Fan rotates
smoothly

Check the
display value on
the panel.

Check and
manage specified
values.

Voltmeter,
ammeter, etc.

No abnormality

Is the capacitor
swollen?

Cooling
system

Motor

Visual
inspection

Is there any
abnormal
vibration or
noise?

Visual
inspection

Is there any
abnormal smell?

Check for
overheating or
damage.

10.1.2 Annual Inspection
Inspection
area

Input/Outp
ut circuit

Inspection
item

Inspection details

Inspection
method

Judgment
standard

All

Megger test
(between
input/output
terminals and
earth terminal)

Disconnect
inverter and
short
R/S/T/U/V/W
terminals, and
then measure
from each

Must be above
5 MΩ

Inspection
equipment

DC 500 V
Megger

577
577

Maintenance

Inspection
area

Inspection
item

Inspection details

Inspection
method

Judgment
standard

Inspection
equipment

terminal to the
ground
terminal using
a Megger.
Is there anything
loose in the
device?

Tighten all
screws.

Is there any
evidence of parts
overheating?

Visual
inspection

Are there any
corroded cables?

Cable
connections Is there any
damage to cable
insulation?

Is there any
damage?

Visual
inspection

No
abnormality

Smoothing
condenser

Measure
electrostatic
capacity.

Measure with
capacity
meter.

Rated capacity
over 85%

Capacity meter

Is there any
chattering noise
during operation?

Visual
inspection

Is there any
damage to the
contacts?

Visual
inspection

No
abnormality

Is there any
damage from
resistance?

Visual
inspection

Braking
resistor

578

No
abnormality

Terminal
block

Relay

Control
circuit

Visual
inspection

No
abnormality

Operation
check

Check for
disconnection.

Disconnect
one side and
measure with
a tester.

Check for output Measure
voltage imbalance voltage

No
abnormality
Must be within
±10% of the
rated value of
the resistor.
Balance the
voltage

Digital
multimeter /
analog tester

Digital
multimeter or

Maintenance

Inspection
area

Inspection
item

Protection
circuit

Inspection details
while the inverter
is in operation.

Inspection
method

Judgment
standard

Inspection
equipment

between the
inverter
output
terminal U/ V/
W.

between
phases: within
4 V for 200 V
series and
within 8 V for
400 V series.

DC voltmeter

Is there an error in
the display circuit
after the
sequence
protection test?

Test the
inverter
output
protection in
both short
and open
circuit
conditions.

The circuit
must work
according to
the sequence.

No
abnormality

Cooling
system

Cooling fan

Are any of the fan
parts loose?

Check all
connected
parts and
tighten all
screws.

Display

Display
device

Is the display
value normal?

Check the
command
value on the
display device.

Specified and
managed
values must
match.

Voltmeter,
Ammeter, etc.

Inspection
method

Judgment
standard

Inspection
equipment

Must be above
5 MΩ

DC 500 V
Megger

10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspection
Inspection
area

Motor

Inspection
item

Inspection details

Insulation
resistance

Disconnect
Megger test
the cables for
(between the input,
terminals U/V/
output and earth
W and test the
terminals)
wiring.

579
579

Maintenance

Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in damage to
the product.

10.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement
A CR2032 Lithium-Manganese battery to power the inverter’s built-in RTC (real time clock) is
installed on the main PCB. When the battery charge is low, a low battery voltage level warning is
given on the keypad display.
The RTC feature and any other features related to the RTC feature, such as the time event control,
do not work properly when the battery runs out. Refer to the following battery specifications
when a battery replacement is required.

RTC Battery Specifications
Model type: CR 2032 (lithium-manganese)
Nominal voltage: 3 V
Nominal capacity: 220 mAh
Operating temperature range: -20–80 degrees C
Life span (approximately): 53,300 hrs (inverter on) / 25,800 hrs (inverter off)

Follow the instructions below to replace the RTC battery.

ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic components on
the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the components on the PCB with bare
hands while you work on the main PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge any
electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a metal object.

580

Maintenance

Turn off the inverter and make sure that DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level.

Loosen the screw on the power cover then remove the power cover.

0.75–30 kW Models

110~185kW Models

37–90 kW Models

220~500kW Models

581
581

Maintenance

Remove the keypad from the inverter body.

0.75–30 kW Models

37–90 kW Models

Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The main
PCB is exposed.

0.75–30 kW Models

582

37–90 kW Models

Maintenance

Locate the RTC battery holder on the main PCB, and replace the battery.

Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body

Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before opening
the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.

583
583

Maintenance

10.3 Storage and Disposal
10.3.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
•

Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation (Refer to
Installation Considerationson page 10).

•

When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between -10 ˚C and 30
˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.

•

Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.

•

Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture level
below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.

•

Do not allow the inverter to be exposed to dusty or humid environments. If the inverter is
installed in such environments (for example, a construction site) and the inverter will be
unused for an extended period, remove the inverter and store it in a safe place.

10.3.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable materials are
included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing materials and all metal
parts can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can be incinerated under controlled
conditions in some regions.

If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging characteristics and
are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and allow the device to operate for
30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.

584

Technical Specification

11 Technical Specification
11.1 Input and Output Specifications
Three Phase 200 V (0.75–3.7 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–2
Applied Motor

0008

0015

0022

0037

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

1.9

3.0

4.5

6.1

Three-Phase

Single-Phase

2.9

4.4

6.4

8.4

Rated Capacity (kVA)
Rated
output

Rated
input

Rated
Current (A)

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase 200–240 V

Working
Voltage (V)

Three-Phase

Input
Frequency

Three-Phase

Single-Phase 1-Phase 240 VAC (-5%–+10%)
50–60 Hz (±5%)

Single-Phase 60 Hz(±5%)

Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)

3-Phase 200–240 VAC (-15%–+10%)

4.9

8.4

12.9

17.5

3.3

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

585

Technical Specification

Three Phase 200 V (5.5–18.5 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–2

0055

0075

0110

0150

0185

7.5

5.5

7.5

18.5

Rated Capacity (kVA)

8.4

11.4

16.0

21.3

26.3

Three-Phase
Rated
Current (A) Single-Phase

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase 200–240 V

Applied Motor

Rated
output

Rated
input

Working
Voltage (V)

Three-Phase

3-Phase 200–240 VAC (-15%–+10%)

Single-Phase

1-Phase 240 VAC (-5%–+10%)

Input
Frequency

Three-Phase

50–60 Hz (±5%)

Single-Phase

60 Hz(±5%)

Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)

23.7

32.7

46.4

62.3

77.2

3.3

4.6

7.1

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

586

Technical Specification

Three Phase 400 V (0.75–3.7 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–4
Applied Motor

0008

0015

0022

0037

1.0

2.0

3.0

5.0

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

1.9

3.0

4.5

6.1

Three-Phase

2.5

Single-Phase

1.6

2.4

3.5

4.6

Rated Capacity (kVA)
Rated
output

Rated
input

Rated
Current (A)

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase 380–480 V

Working
Voltage (V)

Three-Phase

Input
Frequency

Three-Phase

Single-Phase 1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)
50–60 Hz (±5%)

Single-Phase 60 Hz(±5%)

Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)

3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)

2.4

4.2

6.5

8.7

3.3

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

587

Technical Specification

Three Phase 400 V (5.5–22 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–4
Applied Motor

0055

0075

0110

0150

0185

0220

7.5

5.5

7.5

18.5

9.1

12.2

18.3

23.0

29.0

34.3

Three-Phase

Single-Phase

6.8

9.2

Rated Capacity(kVA)
Rated
output

Rated
input

Rated
Current(A)

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage(V)

3-Phase 380–480 V

Working
Voltage(V)

Three-Phase

Input
Frequency

Three-Phase

Single-Phase 1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)
50–60 Hz (±5%)

Single-Phase 60 Hz(±5%)

Rated Current(A)
Weight(kg)

3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)

12.2

17.5

26.5

33.4

42.5

50.7

3.3

3.4

4.6

4.8

7.5

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

588

Technical Specification

Three Phase 400 V (30.0–90.0 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–4
Applied Motor

0300

0370

0450

0550

0750

0900

100

125

46.5

57.1

69.4

82.0

108.2

128.8

Three-Phase

107

142

169

Single-Phase

Rated Capacity (kVA)

Rated
output

Rated
input

Rated
Current (A)

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase 380–480 V

Working
Voltage (V)

Three-Phase

3-Phase 380–480 VAC (-15%–+10%)

Single-Phase

1-Phase 480 VAC (-5%–+10%)

Input
Frequency

Three-Phase

50–60 Hz (±5%)

Single-Phase

60 Hz(±5%)

Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)

69.1

69.3

84.6

100.1

133.6

160.0

7.5

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

589

Technical Specification

Three Phase 400 V (110.0–500.0 kW)
Model H100 XXXX–4

1100

1320 1600

1850

2200

2500 3150

3550

4000

5000

150

200

250

300

350

400

500

550

650

800

110

132

160

185

220

250

315

355

400

500

Rated Capacity
(kVA)

170

201

248

282

329

367

467

520

587

733

Rated
Three
Current (A) Phase

223

264

325

370

432

481

613

683

770

962

Output Frequency

0–400 Hz

Output Voltage (V)

3-Phase 380–500 V

Working
Three
Voltage (V) Phase

3-Phase 380–500VAC (-15%–+10%)

Input
Three
Frequency Phase

50–60 Hz (±5%)

Applied Motor

Rated
outpu
t

Rated
input

Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)

215.1 254.6 315.3 358.9 419.1 469.3 598.1 666.4 751.3 938.6
55.8

55.8

74.7

120.0 120.0 185.5 185.5 185.5

265

•

The standard motor capacity is based on a standard 4-pole motor.

•

The standard used for 200 V inverters is based on a 220 V supply voltage, and 400 V inverters
are based on a 440 V supply voltage.

•

The rated output current is limited based on the carrier frequency set at CON-04.

590

Technical Specification

11.2 Product Specification Details
Items

Description
Control method

V/F control, Slip compensation.

Frequency settings
power resolution

Digital command: 0.01 Hz
Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)

Frequency accuracy 1% of maximum output frequency.
Control

V/F pattern
Overload capacity

Operation

Linear, square reduction, user V/F.
0.75~90kW

Rated current: 120% 1 min.

110~500kW

Rated current: 110% 1 min.

Torque boost

Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost.

Operation type

Select key pad, terminal strip, or communication operation.

Frequency settings

Analog type: -10–10 V, 0–10 V, 0–20 mA
Digital type: key pad, pulse train input

Operation function

PID control
3-wire
operation
Frequency
limit
Second
function
Anti-forward
and reverse
direction
rotation
Commercial
transition
Speed search
Power braking
Leakage
reduction

Input

Multi
function
terminal

Up-down operation
DC braking
Frequency jump
Slip compensation
Automatic restart
Automatic tuning
Energy buffering
Flux braking
Energy Saving

Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode. Functions can be
set according to IN-65- IN-71 codes and parameter settings.

591

Technical Specification

Items

Description
(7EA)
P1-P7

Pulse
train

Forward
direction
operation
Reset
Emergency
stop
Multi step
speed
frequencyhigh/med/low
DC braking
during stop
Frequency
increase
3-wire
Select
acc/dec/stop
MMC Interlock

0–32 kHz, Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V

Multi
function
open
collector
terminal

Output

Fault
signal
relay
terminal
Multi
function
relay
terminal

592

Reverse direction operation
External trip
Jog operation
Multi step acc/dec-high/med/low
Second motor selection
Frequency reduction
Fix analog command frequency
Transtion from PID to general operation Pre
Heat
Pump Cleaning
RTC(Time Event)

Less than DC 26 V, 50 mA
Fault output
and inverter
operation
status output

N.O.: Less than AC 250 V 2A, DC 30 V, 3A
N.C.: Less than AC 250 V 1A, DC 30 V 1A

Less than AC 250 V, 5 A
Less than DC 30 V, 5 A

Analog
output

0–12 Vdc(0–20 mA): Select frequency, output current, output
voltage, DC terminal voltage, and others.

Pulse
train

Maximum 32 kHz, 0–12 V

Technical Specification

Items

Description

Trip

Protection
function

Structure/
working
environment

Over current
trip
External signal
trip
ARM short
circuit current
trip
Over heat trip
Input imaging
trip
Ground trip
Motor over
heat trip
I/O board link
trip
No motor trip
Parameter
writing trip
Emergency
stop trip
Command
loss trip
External
memory error
CPU
watchdog trip
Motor under
load trip

Over voltage trip
Temperature sensor trip
Inverter over heat
Option trip
Output imaging trip
Inverter overload trip
Fan trip
Low voltage trip during operation
Low voltage trip
Analog input error
Motor overload trip
Pipe broken trip
Keypad command lost trip
Damper trip
Level Detect trip
MMC Interlock trip
PumpCleannig trip

Alarm

Command loss trip alarm, overload alarm, normal load
alarm, inverter overload alarm, fan operation alarm,
resistance braking rate alarm, Capacitor life alarm, Pump
Clean alarm, Fire Mode Alarm, LDT Alarm.

Instantaneous
blackout

Less than 8 ms: Continue Operation (must be within the
rated input voltage and rated output range)
More than 8 ms: Auto restart operation

Cooling type

Forced fan cooling structure

IP 20(0.75~185kW), IP 00(220~500kW)
Protection structure UL Open & Enclosed Type 1 (option)
(UL Enclosed Type 1 is satisfied by conduit installation

593

Technical Specification

Items

Description
option.)

594

Ambient
temperature

-10 ℃–50 ℃ (2.5% current derating is applied above
40 ℃)
No ice or frost should be present.
Working under normal load at 50 ℃ (122 °F), it is
recommended that less than 75% load is applied.

Ambient humidity

Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to avoid condensation
forming)

Storage
temperature.

-20 °C-65 °C (-4–149 °F)

Surrounding
environment

Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil
stains, dust, and other pollutants.
(0.75~90kW Pollution Degree 3 Environment)
(110~500kW Pollution Degree 2 Environment)

Operation
altitude

Maximum 3,280 ft (1,000m) above sea level for standard
operation.
After that the driver rated voltage and the rated output
current derating by 1% for every extra 328 ft (100m) up to
13,123 ft (4,000m).

Operation
oscillation

Less than 1.0 G (9.8 m/sec2).

Pressure

70-106 kPa

Technical Specification

11.3 External Dimensions
0.75–30 kW (3-phase)

37–90 kW (3-phase)

595

Technical Specification

110–185 kW (3-phase)

596

Technical Specification

220–500 kW (3-phase)

Units: mm

3phase
200 V

Items

0008H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0015H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0022H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0037H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0055H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0075H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0110H100-2

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0150H100-2

180

157

290

273.7

11.3

205.3

0185H100-2

220

193.8

350

331

223.2

597

Technical Specification

3phase
400 V

598

Items

0008H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0015H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0022H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0037H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0055H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0075H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0110H100-4

160

137

232

216.5

10.5

181

0150H100-4

180

157

290

273.7

11.3

205.3

0185H100-4

180

157

290

273.7

11.3

205.3

0220H100-4

220

193.8

350

331

223.2

0300H100-4

220

193.8

350

331

223.2

0370H100-4

275

232

450

428.5

284

0450H100-4

325

282

510

486.5

284

0550H100-4

325

282

510

486.5

284

0750H100-4

325

275

550

524.5

309

0900H100-4

325

275

550

524.5

309

1100H100-4

300

200

240

706

688.5

9.5

386

1320H100-4

300

200

240

706

688.5

9.5

386

1600H100-4

380

300

705

685.5

9.5

396

1850H100-4

380

300

705

685.5

9.5

396

2200H100-4

440

320

922.3

895.5

15.5

440

2500H100-4

440

320

922.3

895.5

15.5

440

3150H100-4

600

420

1000

972

500

3550H100-4

600

420

1000

972

500

4000H100-4

600

420

1000

972

500

5000H100-4

776

500

1054

1021

500

Technical Specification

Units : inches
Items

3phase
200 V

3Phase
400 V

0008H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0015H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0022H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0037H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0055H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0075H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0110H100-2

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0150H100-2

7.09

6.18

11.42

10.78

0.45

8.08

0.20

0185H100-2

8.66

7.63

13.78

13.03

0.51

8.79

0.24

0008H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0015H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0022H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0037H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0055H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0075H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0110H100-4

6.30

5.39

9.13

8.52

0.41

7.13

0.20

0150H100-4

7.09

6.18

11.42

10.78

0.45

8.08

0.20

0185H100-4

7.09

6.18

11.42

10.78

0.45

8.08

0.20

0220H100-4

8.66

7.63

13.78

13.03

0.51

8.79

0.24

0300H100-4

8.66

7.63

13.78

13.03

0.51

8.79

0.24

0370H100-4

10.83

9.13

17.72

16.87

0.55

11.18

0.28

0450H100-4

12.80

11.10

20.08

19.15

0.63

11.18

0.28

0550H100-4

12.80

11.10

20.08

19.15

0.63

11.18

0.28

0750H100-4

12.80

10.83

21.65

20.65

0.63

12.17

0.35

0900H100-4

12.80

10.83

21.65

20.65

0.63

12.17

0.35

1100H100-4

11.81

7.87

9.45

27.80

27.11

0.37

15.20

0.35

599

Technical Specification

Items

1320H100-4

11.81

7.87

9.45

27.80

27.11

0.37

15.20

0.35

1600H100-4

14.96

11.81

27.76

26.99

0.37

15.59

0.35

1850H100-4

14.96

11.81

27.76

26.99

0.37

15.59

0.35

2200H100-4

17.32

12.60

36.31

35.26

0.61

17.32

0.43

2500H100-4

17.32

12.60

36.31

35.26

0.61

17.32

0.43

3150H100-4

23.62

16.54

39.37

38.27

0.59

19.69

0.55

3550H100-4

23.62

16.54

39.37

38.27

0.59

19.69

0.55

4000H100-4

23.62

16.54

39.37

38.27

0.59

19.69

0.55

5000H100-4

30.55

19.69

41.50

40.20

0.79

19.69

0.55

11.4 Peripheral Devices
Compatible Circuit Breaker, Leakage Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models
(manufactured by LSIS)
Circuit Breaker
Product (kW)
Model
0.75
1.5
2.2
3-Phase
200 V

600

ABS33c

15
30

Model

15
UTE100

15
15

EBS33c

Rated
Current

Model

Rated
Current

MC-9a

MC-18a

MC-32a

15
50

EBS53c

MC-50a

EBS63c

MC-65a

EBS103c

100

MC-85a

MC-130a

130

ABS53c

7.5

ABS63c

ABS103c

Rated
Current

Magnetic Contactor

5.5

Model

3.7

3-Phase

Rated
Current

Leakage Breaker

100

UTE100

100

100
100

18.5

ABS203c

150

UTS150

150

EBS203c

200

MC-150a

150

0.75

ABS33c

UTE100

EBS33C

MC-6a

Technical Specification

Circuit Breaker
Product (kW)
Model
400 V

Model

Rated
Current

Model

Magnetic Contactor

Rated
Current

Model

Rated
Current

1.5

MC-6a

2.2

MC-9a

3.7

MC-12a

MC-22b

MC-32a

5.5
7.5

3Phase

Rated
Current

Leakage Breaker

ABS53c

ABS63c

18.5

UTE100

EBS33C

EBS53c

MC-50a

EBS63c

MC-65a

ABS103c

100

MC-85a

ABS103c

125

MC-100a

105

ABS103c

125

MC-130a

130

ABS203c

175

200

MC-150a

150

ABS203c

225

MC-185a

185

ABS203c

250

MC-185a

185

ABS403c

300

MC-225a

225

ABS403c

350

MC-330a

330

110

ABS603c

500

132

ABS603c

600

160

ABS603c

185

UTS150

UTS250

125

225

EBS103c

EBS203c

250
UTS400

300
350

EBS403C

500

EBS603c

500

MC-400a

400

600

EBS603c

630

MC-400a

400

630

600

EBS603c

630

MC-630a

630

ABS803c

800

EBS803c

800

MC-630a

630

220

ABS803c

800

EBS803c

800

MC-800a

800

250

ABS1003c

1000

800

EBS1003b

1000

MC-800a

800

315

ABS1203b

1200

EBS1203b

1200

1200a

1200

355

ABS1203b

1200

EBS1203b

1200

1200a

1200

400

1600

500

1600

110

ABS603c

500

EBS603c

500

MC-400a

400

132

ABS603c

600

EBS603c

630

MC-400a

400

UTS600

UTS800

UTS1200

UTS600

601

Technical Specification

Circuit Breaker
Product (kW)
500V

Model

Rated
Current

160

ABS603c

185

Leakage Breaker

Magnetic Contactor

Rated
Current

Model

Rated
Current

Model

Rated
Current

630

600

EBS603c

630

MC-630a

630

ABS803c

800

EBS803c

800

MC-630a

630

220

ABS803c

800

EBS803c

800

MC-800a

800

250

ABS803c

800

EBS803c

800

MC-800a

800

315

ABS1203b

1200

EBS1203c

1200

1200a

1200

355

ABS1203b

1200

EBS1203c

1200

1200a

1200

400

1600

500

1600

Model

UTS800

UTS1200

* In the case of inverter 400/500 kW, there is no Circuit Brake capacity qualified as UL standard.
* If you want to use UL Type products, please use that ACB product.

Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined in
IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LSLV-H100 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the selected MCCB. RMS
symmetrical amperes for recommended MCCB are the following table.

Working
Voltage

UTE100
(E/N)

UTS150
(N/H/L)

UTS250
(N/H/L)

UTS400
(N/H/L)

240V(50/60Hz)

50/65kA

65/100/150kA

480V(50/60Hz)

25/35kA

35/65/100kA

Working

ABS33c

ABS53c

ABS63c

ABS103c

ABS203c

ABS403c

240V(50/60Hz)

30kA

35kA

85kA

75kA

480V(50/60Hz)

7.5kA

10kA

26kA

35kA

Voltage

602

Technical Specification

11.5 Fuse and Reactors Specifications
AC Input Fuse
Products(kW)

3-Phase
200 V

3-Phase
400 V

Current
(A)

AC reactor
Voltage
(V)

DC Reactor

Inductance
(mH)

Current
(A)

Inductance
(mH)

Current
(A)

0.75

2.02

4.04

1.5

1.26

2.53

2.2

0.78

1.68

3.7

0.59

1.26

5.5

0.43

0.93

7.5

0.31

0.73

0.22

0.53

100

0.16

0.32

18.5

125

0.13

0.29

0.75

8.09

2.5

16.17

1.5

5.05

10.11

2.2

3.37

6.74

3.7

2.25

5.05

5.5

1.56

3.56

7.5

1.16

2.53

0.76

1.64

0.61

1.42

18.5

0.48

0.98

100

0.40

0.88

0.29

0.59

0.29

30
37

125

600[V]

160

0.24

200

0.20

100

250

0.15

134

350

0.13

160

Built-In

603

Technical Specification

AC Input Fuse
Products(kW)

Current
(A)

AC reactor
Voltage
(V)

DC Reactor

Inductance
(mH)

Current
(A)

110

350

0.1

217

132

400

0.08

257

160

450

0.07

318

185

550

0.06

362

220

630

0.05

423

250

700

0.05

474

315

800

0.04

604

355

1000

0.03

673

400

1100

0.03

759

Inductance
(mH)

Current
(A)

Use Class H or RK5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only. See the table above for the Voltage
and Current rating of the fuse and the breaker.

Attention
Utiliser UNIQUEMENT des fusibles d’entrée homologués de Classe H ou RK5 UL et des disjoncteurs UL .
Se reporter au tableau ci-dessus pour la tension et le courant nominal des fusibless et des disjoncteurs.

11.6 Terminal Screw Specifications
Input/Output Termianl Screw Specification
Product (kW)

Terminal Screw Size

Screw Torque (Kgfc m/Nm)

7.1–12.2/0.7–1.2

0.75
1.5
3-Phase
200 V

2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

604

Technical Specification

Product (kW)

Terminal Screw Size

Screw Torque (Kgfc m/Nm)

24.5~31.8/2.4~3.1

7.1–12.2/0.7–1.2

24.5~31.8/2.4~3.1

61.2–91.8/6–9

M10

89.7~122.0/8.8~11.96

M12

182.4~215.0/17.87~21.07

M8 X 2
M12 X 1

61.2–91.8/6–9
182.4~215.0/17.87~21.07

M10 X 2

89.7~122.0/8.8~11.96

11
15
18.5
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
3-Phase
400 V

45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
250
315
355
400
500

605

Technical Specification

Product (kW)

Terminal Screw Size

Screw Torque (Kgfc m/Nm)

M16 X 1

490.9~511.0/48.05~50.11

Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification
Terminal

Terminal Screw Size

Screw Torque(Kgfcm/Nm)

P1–P7/
CM/VR/V1/I2/AO/Q1/EG/24/TI/
TO/SA,SB,SC/S+,S-,SG
A1/B1/C1

2.2–2.5/0.22–0.25

Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and malfunctions.
Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short circuits and malfuctions.
Use copper wires only with 600 V, 90 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300 V, 75 ℃ rating
for the control terminal wiring.

Attention
Appliquer des couples de marche aux vis des bornes. Des vis desserrées peuvent provoquer des
courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements. Ne pas trop serrer la vis, car cela risque d’endommager les
bornes et de provoquer des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements. Utiliser uniquement des fils de
cuivre avec une valeur nominale de 600 V, 90 ℃ pour le câblage de la borne d’alimentation, et une
valeur nominale de 300 V, 75 ℃ pour le câblage de la borne de commande.

11.7 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU) and Resistors
11.7.1 Dynamic breaking unit (DBU)
UL form

Type

Volta
ge

UL type

Type A

200V

606

Capacity of
applied motor

Braking unit

30, 37 kW

SV370DBU-2U

Terminal
arrangement
&Dimensions
Refer to the

Technical Specification

(Resistance
of DB
Resistor
refer to the
table of
“11.7.6 DB
Resistors”)

400V

200V
Type B
(Resistance
of DB
Resistor
refer to the
manual of
DB Unit)

45, 55 kW
75 kW
30, 37 kW
45, 55 kW
75 kW
90 kW
110, 132kW
160kW
30, 37 kW
30, 37 kW
45, 55, 75 kW

400V

SV550DBU-2U
SV370DBU-2U, 2Set
SV370DBU-4U
SV550DBU-4U
SV750DBU-4U
SV550DBU-4U, 2Set
SV750DBU-4U, 2Set
SV750DBU-4U, 3Set
SV037DBH-2
SV037DBH-4
SV075DBH-4
SV075DB-4

185, 220kW

SV2200DB-4

250~355kW

SV2200DB-4, 2Set
LSLV0370DBU-2LN

30, 37 kW
LSLV0370DBU-2HN
200V
LSLV0750DBU-2LN

Non UL
type

45, 55, 75 kW

Type C
(Resistance
of DB
Resistor
refer to the
manual of
DB Unit)

LSLV0750DBU-2HN

LSLV0370DBU-4LN
30, 37 kW
LSLV0370DBU-4HN
400V

45, 55, 75kW

LSLV0750DBU-4LN

90 kW
110, 132kW
160kW
185, 220kW

LSLV0900DBU-4HN
LSLV1320DBU-4HN
LSLV1600DBU-4HN
LSLV2200DBU-4HN

appearance of
Group 1.

Refer to the
appearance of
Group 2
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 3
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 4
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 5
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 6
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 5
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 6
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 5
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 6
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 5
Refer to the
appearance of
Group 6

607

Technical Specification

250~355kW
400, 500kW

LSLV2200DBU-4HN,
2Set
LSLV2200DBU-4HN,
2Set

Note
•

It is not necessary to use option type dynamic braking unit for H100 0.75~18.5kW(200V)
and 0.75~30kW(400V) because basically the dynamic braking unit is built in.

•

You must refer to dynamic braking unit manual for usage recommended dynamic braking
unit in the table above due to changeable table.

•

Resistance/watt/breaking torque/%ED of DB Resistor for Type A DB Unit refer to the table
of “11.7.6 DB Resistors" and Resistance of DB Resistor for type B and C refer to the manual
of DB Unit.

11.7.2 Terminal arrangement
Group 1:
Group 2:

Terminals

P/B1

Functions

Ground Terminal
G
Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
B2
Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
B1
Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
N
Terminal for connection with P1 of Inverter
P
* Note: READ DBU User manual certainly when selecting DB resistors.
Group 3:
608

Technical Specification

Group 4:

Terminals

Functions

G
B2
B1
N
P

Ground Terminal
Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
Terminal for connection with P of Inverter

Group 5:
P(+) N(N(-)

Terminals

N.C

Functions
P(+)
N(-)
B1

Terminal for connection with P of Inverter
Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
609

Technical Specification

Terminals

Functions
B2
N.C
E

Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
Unused
Ground Terminal

Group6:

A Frame (37kW, 75kW-4)
P(+) N(N(-)

N.C

B /C Frame (75kW-2, 90~220kW)

P(+)

Terminals
P(+)
N(-)
B1
B2
E

610

N(N(-)

Functions

Terminal for connection with P of Inverter
Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
Unused

Technical Specification

Note
You must refer to dynamic braking unit manual for choice the braking resistor to use
the dynamic braking unit.

611

Technical Specification

11.7.3 Dynamic Breaking (DB)Unit & DB resistor basic wiring

0.75~90kW
110~500kW

DBU Terminals
B1,B2

Description
Wire correctly referring to wiring diagram. DB Resistors connect with
B1, B2 of DB Unit.

In case of large capacity, it may be necessary to connect more than 2 sets of DB Unit
according to the usage environment.
In such cases, check the DB Unit manual.

612

Technical Specification

11.7.4 Dimensions
-Group1

- Group2
80
2-

RESE
POWE
RUN
OHT
OCT

24
25
231

Dynamic

166.2

5.
80
123

15
27

130

-Group3

- Group4

613

Technical Specification

Group5

Voltage

Capacity
of applied
motor

(V)

(kW)

Dimension (mm)
W

Hole position
for
installation
(mm)
W1
H1

Weight

Hole size for
installation

(kg)

(φ
φ)

1.50

1.55

1.57

220
75

1.84
140

227.4

192

76.4

125

215.4

1.53

1.55

1.56

1.85

440

614

Technical Specification

F
R
A
M
E

Group6

Volta
ge

Capacity
of
applied
motor

%
E
D

Dimension (mm)

W
A
Fram
e
B
Fram
e

220
[V]

37 [kW]

440
[V]

37 [kW]

75 [kW]

220
[V]

75 [kW]

90 [kW]

440

90 [kW]

Hole
position for
installation
(mm)

Weig
ht

Hole size
for
installati
on

(Kg)

(φ
φ)

3.77
200

219

190

160

208.5

3.84
3.98

165.2

8.26
215

340

311

175

329.5

8.48
8.30

615

Technical Specification

C
Fram
e

[V]

132 [kW]

440
[V]

160 [kW]

220 [kW]

8.40
240

380

351

200

369.5

9.40
9.70

11.7.5 Display Functions
DB Resistors connect with B1, B2 of DB Unit. DBU has 3 LEDs. Red LED which is located in middle displays
supplying main power, one Green LED which is right side displays under breaking and another green
LED which is left side displays Over Heat Trip(OHT).
Displays
POWER
(Red LED)
RUN
(Green LED)
OHT
(Green LED)

Function description
POWER LED is turned On when main power is supplied.Generally, POWER LED is turn
On while main power supplied because DBU is connected with inverter.
RUN LED is turned off while DBU is ON by regenerative energy of Motor.
Under Breaking, if the temperature is exceeded over setting value due to over heat of
Heatsink, Cut the TURN ON signal of DBU and LED is turn on by working overheat
protection function.

11.7.6 DB Resistors
Torque 100%
Product
(kW)

3Phase
200 V

616

DB unit

Resistor
(Ω)

Torque 150%

Wattage
[W]

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

Resistor
(Ω)

Wattage
[W]

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

0.75

200

100

200

150

300

1.5

100

200

400

300

600

2.2

300

600

400

800

3.7

500

1000

600

1200

5.5

600

1200

800

1600

7.5

800

1600

1200

2400

1200

2400

4800

2400

4800

2400

4800

Technical Specification

Torque 100%
Product
(kW)

Torque 150%

Wattage
[W]

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

2400

4800

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

2600

5200

900

100

200

600

150

300

450

200

400

300

600

2.2

300

600

200

400

800

3.7

200

400

800

130

600

120

700

1400

1000

1200
2000

5.5
7.5

1000

2000

1200

2400

1200

2400

2000

4000

2000

4000

2400

4800

DB unit

Resistor
(Ω)

18.5

0.75

1.5

Resistor
(Ω)

18.5

2400

4800

3600

7200

2400

4800

3600

7200

3600

7200

5000

10000

DBU-U

16.9

3200

6400

DBH

16.9

3200

6400

5000

10000

LSLV-DB

16.9

3200

6400

5000

10000

DBU-U

11.4

4800

9600

DBH

11.4

4800

9600

6400

12800

LSLV-DB

11.4

4800

9600

6400

12800

DBU-U

11.4

4800

9600

DBH

11.4

4800

9600

8.4

7200

14400

LSLV-DB

11.4

4800

9600

8.4

7200

14400

DBU-U

8.4

6400

12800

DBH

8.4

6400

12800

10000

20000

8.4

6400

12800

10000

20000

LSLV-DB

10000

20000

13000

26000

110

LSLV-DB

13000

26000

16000

32000

132

LSLV-DB

16000

32000

3.4

20000

40000

160

LSLV-DB

3.4

20000

40000

2.8

24000

48000

185

LSLV-DB

2.8

24000

48000

2.4

26000

52000

37
3Phase
400 V
45

617

Technical Specification

Torque 100%
Product
(kW)
220

DB unit

Resistor
(Ω)

LSLV-DB

2.4

Torque 150%

Wattage
[W]

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

26000

52000

250

132kW DB Unit and Resistor * 2 Set (Parallel)

315

160kW DB Unit and Resistor * 2 Set (Parallel)

355

185kW DB Unit and Resistor * 2 Set (Parallel)

400

220kW DB Unit and Resistor * 2 Set (Parallel)

500

185kW DB Unit and Resistor * 3 Set (Parallel)

Resistor
(Ω)
2

Wattage
[W]

(%ED=5%)

(%ED=10%)

30000

60000

Note
•

It is not necessary to use option type dynamic braking unit for H100 0.75~18.5kW(200V) and
0.75~30kW(400V) because basically the dynamic braking unit is built in.

•

The resistance/rated capacity/breaking torque/%ED of DB Resistor are valid only for the DB unit
of type A and the values of DB Resistor for type B and C refer to the manual of DB Unit..

•

Rating Watt of DBU has to be doubled when %ED is doubled.

11.8 Inverter Continuous Rated Current Derating
Derating by carrier frequency
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency. Refer to the
following graph.
<200[V], 0.75[kW]–18.5[kW], 400[V] 0.75–30[kW] Current Derating Rate>

618

Technical Specification

<400[V] 37–500[kW] Current Derating Rate >

619

Technical Specification

200 V

400 V

Item

Unit

0.75–
18.5 kW

22–
30 kW

37–
55 kW

75–
90 kW

110355 kW

400 kW

500 kW

fs,def

kHz

1.5

fs,c

kHz

fs,max kHz

DR1 % %

DR2 % %

*fs,def: Switching frequency for continued operation
fs,c: Switching frequency where the first current derating ends.
ffs.max: The maximum switching frequency (where the second current derating begins)

620

Technical Specification

Derating by Input Voltage
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage. Refer to the
following graph.
정격 전류[%]
100%
91%

200[V]
380[V]
380[V]

240[V]
480[V]
500[V]

264[V]
528[V]
550[V]

입력전압
110[kW] 이상만 해당

Derating by Ambient Temperature and Installation Type
Ambient temperature and installation type determine the constant-rated current of the inverter.
Refer to the following graph. A 2.5% current derating is applied during operation when the
ambient temperature is above 40℃. The inverter must be operated at less than 75% of its rated
capacity when the ambient temperature is above 50℃.

621

Applying Drives to Single-phase
Input Application

12 Applying Drives to Single-phase Input
Application
12.1 Introduction
LSLV-H100 is a three-phase standard variable frequency drive(VFD). When applying single-phase
power to a three-phase VFD, there are several constraints that need to be considered. Standard
Pulse-Width-Modulated (PWM) VFDs use a 6-pulse diode rectifier. The 6-pulse rectification results
in 360 Hz DC bus ripple when used with a three-phase 60 Hz supply.
However, under single-phase use, the DC bus ripple becomes 120 Hz and the VFDs DC bus circuit
is subject to higher stress in order to deliver equivalent power.
Additionally, input currents and harmonics increase beyond those encountered with three-phase
input.
Input current distortion of 90% THD and greater can be expected under single-phase input,
compared to approximately 40% with three-phase input as indicated in Figure 2.
Therefore, single-phase use requires the three-phase VFD power rating be reduced (derated) to
avoid over stressing the rectifier and DC link components.

Figure-1 Typical Three-Phase Configuration

622

Applying Drives to Single-phase
Input Application

Figure-2 Typical Single-Phase Configuration

12.2 Power(HP), Input Current and Output Current
When using a three-phase VFD with single-phase input, derating the drive’s output current and
horsepower will be necessary because of the increase in DC bus ripple voltage and current.
In addition, the input current through the remaining two phases on the diode bridge converter
will approximately double, creating another derating consideration for the VFD. Input current
harmonic distortion will increase beyond that with a three-phase supply making the overall input
power factor low. Input current distortion over 100% is likely under single-phase conditions
without a reactor.
Therefore, the reactor is always required. When using a motor that is selected by the three-phase
drive rating criteria when using single-phase input, it may result in poor performance, premature
drive failure. The selected drive of single-phase current ratings must meet or exceed the motor
current rating.
In case of single-phase input, the rating of the inverter is smaller than that of the motor.
Please check the rating table of 11.1.

623

Applying Drives to Single-phase
Input Application

12.3 Input Frequency and Voltage Tolerance
The single-phase current ratings are valid for 60Hz input only.
For single-phase input AC voltage, products with 90 kW or less are within -5% to + 10% of 240/480
Vac. Products with 110 kW or more are in the range of -5% to + 10% of 380/500 Vac. Standard
product with three-phase voltage input has an allowable range of +10% to –15%. Therefore, a
stricter input voltage tolerance of +10 to –5% applies when using the drive with a single-phase
supply. The average bus voltage with single-phase input is lower than the equivalent of a threephase input.
Therefore, the maximum output voltage (motor voltage) will be lower with a single-phase input.
The minimum input voltage must be no less than 228Vac for 240 volt models and 456Vac for 480
volt models, to ensure motor voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac, respectively.
Thus, if full motor torque must be developed near base speed (full power) it will be necessary to
maintain a rigid incoming line voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be produced.
Operating a motor at reduced speed (reduced power), or using a motor with a base voltage that is
lower than the incoming AC supply rating (ex. 208Vac motor with a 240Vac supply), will also
minimize the effect of voltage deprivation. ( 240VAC Input 208V motor, 480VAC Input  400V
motor )

624

Applying Drives to Single-phase
Input Application

12.4 Wiring
Please connect single-phase input to R(L1) and T(L3).

Figure-3 Terminal Wiring Diagram

12.5 Precautions for 1–phase input to 3-phase drive
•

Please connect single-phase input to R(L1) and T(L3).

•

AC or DC reactor is necessary to reduce DC ripple. Please select built-in reactor type for
37~500kW. For 0.75~30kW, external AC or DC reactor should be installed.

•

Same peripheral devices (including a fuse and reactor) as 3 phases can be used for single
phase as well.

•

If phase open trip occurs, please turn off the input phase open protection(PRT-05).

•

Protection for output current like OCT or IOLT is based on 3-phase input ratings which is
larger than single-phase input. User should set the parameters that are relative to motor
information(BAS-11~16), overload trip(PRT-17~22) and E-thermal functions(PRT-40~43).

•

The minimum input voltage must be larger than 228Vac for 240Vac supply and 456Vac for 480Vac supply
to ensure motor voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac, respectively.

•

To minimize the effect of voltage deprivation, please choose 208Vac motor for 240Vac supply
and 400Vac motor for 480Vac supply.

625

Product Warranty

Product Warranty
Warranty Information
Fill in this warranty information form and keep this page for future reference or when warranty service
may be required.
Product Name

LSIS Standard Inverter

Date of Installation

Model Name

LSLV-H100

Warranty Period

Name
(or company)
Customer Info

Address
Contact Info.
Name

Retailer Info

Address
Contact info.

Warranty Period
The product warranty covers product malfunctions, under normal operating conditions, for 12
months from the date of installation. If the date of installation is unknown, the product warranty
is valid for 18 months from the date of manufacturing. Please note that the product warranty
terms may vary depending on purchase or installation contracts.

Warranty Service Information
During the product warranty period, warranty service (free of charge) is provided for product
malfunctions caused under normal operating conditions. For warranty service, contact an official LSIS
agent or service center.

626

Product Warranty

Non-Warranty Service
A service fee will be incurred for malfunctions in the following cases:
•

intentional abuse or negligence

•

power supply problems or from other appliances being connected to the product

•

acts of nature (fire, flood, earthquake, gas accidents, etc.)

•

modifications or repair by unauthorized persons

•

missing authentic LSIS rating plates

•

expired warranty period

Visit Our Website
Visit us at http: //www.lsis.com for detailed service information.

627

UL mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that UL has
tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL standards for
product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all components inside the
product had been certified for UL standards as well. Suitable for Installation in a Compartment
Handing Conditioned Air

CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety and
environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for machine
manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the EMC guidelines
for safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive
We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used
within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers requirements stated
for drives.

EAC mark
The EAC (EurAsian Conformity) mark is applied to the products before they are placed on the
market of the Eurasian Customs Union member states.
628

It indicates the compliance of the products with the following technical regulations and
requirements of the Eurasian Customs Union:
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 004/2011 “On safety of low voltage equipment”
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 020/2011 “On electromagnetic compatibility of
technical products”

629

630

631

632

Index
[
[AUTO] key ........................................................................................ 53
[DOWN] key..................................................................................... 53
[ESC] key ............................................................................................. 53
[HAND] key....................................................................................... 53
[LEFT] key............................................................................................ 53

Ａ
A terminal (Normally Open) ............................................. 138
A1/C1/B1 terminal....................................................................... 40
AC power input terminal ..... Refer to R/S/T terminal
Acc/Dec pattern ................................................................ 79, 117

[Mode] key ........................................................................................ 53

linear pattern.............................................................................117
S-curve pattern ........................................................................117

[MULTI] key ....................................................................................... 53

Acc/Dec reference .................................................................... 113

[MULTI] key configuration ..................................................... 55
[OFF] key............................................................................................. 53

Delta Freq....................................................................................112
Max Freq ......................................................................................112

[PROG / Ent] key........................................................................... 53

Acc/Dec reference frequency .......................................... 112

[RIGHT] key ....................................................................................... 53
[UP] key................................................................................................ 53

Ramp T Mode............................................................................112
Acc/Dec stop ....................................................................... 79, 120
Acc/Dec time................................................................................ 111

24 terminal ............................................................................... 40, 41

Acc/Dec time switch frequency......................................116
configuration via multi-function terminal ................114
maximum frequency............................................................111
operation frequency .............................................................113

2nd motor operation ............................................................... 239

Acc/Dec time configuration................................................. 79

2nd operation mode ................................................................ 136

accelerating start .......................................................................... 80

２

2 command source ............................................................136
Shared command (Main Source) ...................................136
Shared command (Main Source))..................................136

３
3-wire operation ........................................................................ 151

add User group
UserGrp SelKey ........................................................................247
ADV (advanced) ............................................................................ 60
ADV (Expanded funtction group)................................. 401
advanced features group....................................................... 60
Advanced function groupRefer to ADV (advanced)
function group

４
4-pole standard motor .........529, 530, 531, 532, 533,
534

analog frequency hold.......................................................... 100
analog hold ................................................................................100
analog hold ................Refer to analog frequency hold
analog input............................................................................ 38, 60
I2 current input ...........................................................................94
I2 voltage input...........................................................................96
TI pulse input................................................................................97
V1 voltage input .........................................................................88

633

analog input selection switch (SW2)............................. 96
analog input selection switch (SW4)............................. 36
analog output..................................................................... 39, 288
AO terminal ...................................................................................39
pulse output ..............................................................................291
voltage and current output ..............................................288

auxiliary reference ..................................................................142
auxiliary reference gain .......................................................143
final command frequency calculation ........................144
main reference .........................................................................142
auxiliary motor PID compensation ................. 279, 280

Ｂ

analog output selection switch (SW5)............. 36, 288
anti-hunting regulation ........................................................ 228
AO terminal .......................................................................... 39, 288
analog output selection switch (SW5) ...........................36
AP1 (Application 1 function group) ........................... 452
AP1 (Application1 function group) ................................ 60
AP2 (Application 2 function group) .................. 60, 459
AP3 (Application 3 function group) .................. 60, 464
ARM short current fault trip..................... Refer to Over

Current2
ASCII code ...................................................................................... 349
asymmetric ground power ................................................... 43
asymmetric ground structure
disabling the EMC filter...........................................................43
asynchronous communications system................... 335
auto restart .................................................................................... 236
auto restart settings ..............................................................236
auto torque boost .................................................................... 126
auto torque boost 1...............................................................126
auto torque boost 2...............................................................126
auto tuning ................................................................................208

B terminal (Normally Closed) .......................................... 138
BACnet................................................................................... 337, 373
analog input object ...............................................................380
analog value object ...............................................................378
binary input object ................................................................382
binary object .............................................................................379
communication standard ..................................................373
data link layer ............................................................................376
defining ........................................................................................373
error message ...........................................................................383
MAC ID/Sevice object Instance .......................................376
Max Master Property ............................................................376
multi-state input object ......................................................383
multi-state object ...................................................................379
object map .................................................................................376
parameter setup......................................................................373
protocol........................................................................................373
protocol implement ..............................................................376
quick start ...................................................................................373
BACnet object

All (rotating) ...............................................................................210
All (static) .....................................................................................211
default parameter setting ..................................................209

analog ...........................................................................................378
analog input ..............................................................................380
binary ............................................................................................379
binary input ...............................................................................382
error message ...........................................................................383
multi-state...................................................................................379
multi-state input......................................................................383

automatic reset after a trip .................................................. 79

BAS (Basic function group)................................................ 394

automatic start-up at power-on....................................... 79

BAS (Basic group) ........................................................................ 60

automatic torque boost.......................................................... 80

basic configuration diagram ........................................... 18

auto-tuning.................................................................................... 208

Basic group .......Refer to BAS (Basic function group)

auxiliary command source.................................................... 81

basic operation .............................................................................. 52

auxiliary frequency ................................................................... 142

battery replacement ............................................................... 524

auxiliary frequency reference configuration ...........143

bipolar.......................................................................................... 39, 92

auto tuning ........................................................................ 208, 398

634

RS-485 ...........................................................................................106

bit 138
bit (Off) .........................................................................................138
bit (On) ..........................................................................................138
bit setting ....................................................................................138
multi-function input setting .................................. 138, 139
multi-function output setting..........................................298
Reset Restart configuration..........................................236
speed search configuration ..............................................233
stall prevention ........................................................................311
brake unit ........................................................................................ 287
braking resistor .............................................................................. 31
braking resistors............................................................................ 18
broadcast......................................................................................... 346
built-in communication ...........................Refer to RS-485
BX 332, 507

commercial power source transition ......................... 241
common terminal .......................... Refer to EG terminal
communication........................................................................... 335
BACnet..........................................................................................373
command loss protective operation ...........................339
communication address.....................................................351
communication line connection....................................336
communication parameters.............................................337
communication speed ........................................................337
communication standards ................................................335
memory map ............................................................................342
parameter group for data transmission .....................343
PLC ..................................................................................................335
saving parameters defined by communication ....341
setting virtual multi-function input ..............................341
Communication function group........... Refer to COM

Ｃ

(communication function group)
communication system configuration ...................... 336

cable....................................................................14, 27, 28, 29, 36
ground cable specifications .................................................14
power cable specifications ...................................................14
selection........................................................... 14, 27, 28, 29, 36
shielded twisted pair ...............................................................49
cable tie ............................................................................................... 40
CAP. Warning ................................................................................ 509
carrier frequency........................................................................ 238
derating........................................................................................561
factory default .......................................................................239
charge indicator .................................................... 26, 505, 513
charge lamp ..................................................................................... 26
Circululation Pump (MC5).................................................. 499

compatible common area parameter....................... 355
CON (Control function group)............................... 60, 408
Config (CNF) mode ................................................................. 250
inverter S/W version ..........................................................250
keypad S/W version............................................................250
keypad title update ............................................................250
LCD contrast ............................................................................250
reset cumulative power consuption.......................250
Config mode ................................................................................ 486
Config mode (CNF) ................................................................. 487
configuration mode ................................................................... 59
considerations for installation
air pressure ....................................................................................10

cleaning ............................................................................................ 520

considerations for installation ............................................ 10

CleanRPTErr ................................................................................... 508

altitude/vibration.......................................................................10
ambient humidity .....................................................................10
ambient temperature..............................................................10
environmental factors.............................................................10
storing temperature.................................................................10

CM terminal ............................................................................ 38, 41
COM (Communication function group)..................... 60
command........................................................................................ 103
Cmd Source ...............................................................................103
configuration ............................................................................103
command source
fwd/rev command terminal .............................................104
keypad ..........................................................................................103

Control group ............ Refer to CON (control function
group)
control terminal board wiring ............................................ 36
cooling fan

635

cumulated fan operation time ........................................302
fan control...................................................................................242
fan malfunctions .....................................................................323
initialize cumulated fan operation time .....................302

Drive group........................... Refer to DRV (Drive group)

Cooling Tower (MC4) ............................................................. 497

dwell operation........................................................................... 154

cursor keys ........................................................................................ 53

Acc/Dec dewel frequency..................................................154
acceleration dwell ..................................................................154
deceleration dwell..................................................................154

[DOWN] key ..................................................................................53
[LEFT] key .......................................................................................53
[RIGHT] key....................................................................................53
[UP] key ...........................................................................................53

Ｄ

DRV (Drive function group) ................................................. 60
DRV (Drive group).................................................................... 389

dynamic braking (DB) resistor configuration....... 320

Ｅ
earth leakage breaker............................................................ 516

damper.............................................................................................. 186

Easy Start On................................................................................ 249

Damper Err Trip ..................... Refer to Damper Err Trip

EEP Rom Empty.......................................................................... 244

damper operation .................................................................... 186

EG terminal ....................................................................................... 40

damper open delay time....................................................186
DB resistor
braking resistor circuit..........................................................320
DB Warn %ED............................................................................320

electronic thermal overheating protection (ETH)
.......................................................................................................... 304
EMC filter ............................................................................................ 43

DC braking after stop............................................................ 130

asymmetric power source ....................................................43
disabling ..................................................................43, 44, 45, 46
enable ..............................................................................................44
enabling.......................................................................... 44, 45, 46

DC braking frequency ........................................................... 130

emergency stop fault trip.................................Refer to BX

DC link voltage ........................................................................... 140

Enclosed Type 1 ......................................................................... 537

Dec valve ramping ................................................................... 198

energy saving............................................................................... 190

deceleration stop ......................................................................... 80

energy saving operation ..................................................... 231

delta wiring ....................................................................................... 43

automatic energy saving operation .............................231
manual energy saving operation...................................231

DB Warn %ED.................................................................. 320, 509
DC braking after start............................................................ 128

derating ............................................................................... 239, 561
digital output................................................................................ 293
display................................................................................................... 54
command source.......................................................................54
display mode table ...................................................................59
display modes .............................................................................58
frequency reference .................................................................54
operation mode .........................................................................54
rotational direction ...................................................................54
disposal ................................................................................. 520, 528
draw operation ........................................................................... 140

636

EPID (EPID control) group..................................................... 60
EPID (External PID function group) ............................. 445
EPID control
external PID................................................................................177
EPID control group ..................................................................... 60
ETH .................Refer to electronic thermal overheating

protection (ETH)
E-Thermal ........................................................................................ 506
Exception Date ............................................................................ 212
Exhaust Fan (MC3) ................................................................... 495

external 24V power terminal.... Refer to 24 terminal
External Trip ................................................................................... 507
external trip signal.................................................................... 315

Ｆ
falut trips.......................................................................................... 505
fan life estimation ..................................................................... 331
fan replacement level ...........................................................331
fan time ........................................................................................331
fan operation warning .......................................................... 332
fan replacement warning.................................................... 510
Fan Trip.................................................................................. 323, 507

Low Battery Warning ............................................................332
Low Voltage ...............................................................................332
Low Voltage2 ............................................................................332
No Motor Trip ............................................................................332
NTC Open....................................................................................332
Option Trip-x .............................................................................332
Out Phase Open ......................................................................332
Over Current1 ...........................................................................332
Over Current2 ...........................................................................332
Over Heat ....................................................................................332
Over Load Trip ..........................................................................332
Over Voltage ..............................................................................332
ParaWrite Trip ............................................................................332
Pipe Broken Trip .......................................................................332
Pipe Broken Warning ............................................................332
Under Load Trip .......................................................................332

Fan Warning...................................................................... 323, 509

FE (Frame Error).......................................................................... 349

fatal ...................................................................................................... 505

ferrite...................................................................................................... 40

fault ...................................................................................................... 332

fieldbus..................................................................................... 86, 103

fatal .................................................................................................505
latch................................................................................................505
level ................................................................................................505
major fault ..................................................................................332

FIFO/FILO......................................................................................... 259

fault monitoring ............................................................................ 75

filter time constant number.............................................. 137

multiple fault trips .....................................................................76

Fire mode........................................................................................ 229

fault signal output terminal ........ Refer to A1/C1/B1

Fire Mode Warning ................................................................509

terminal
fault trip mode............................................................................... 59
fault/warning list ........................................................................ 332
braking resistor braking rate warning.........................332
capacitor lifetime warning.................................................332
CleanRPTErr Trip ......................................................................332
CPU Watch Dog fault trip....................................................332
Damper Err Trip ........................................................................332
E-Thermal ....................................................................................332
External Trip ...............................................................................332
fan replacement warning...................................................332
Fan Trip .........................................................................................332
Fan Warning...............................................................................332
Fire mode Warning ................................................................332
Ground Trip ................................................................................332
In Phase Open ..........................................................................332
IO Board Trip ..............................................................................332
Level Detect trip ......................................................................332
Level Detect Warning ...........................................................332
Lost Command ........................................................................332

communication option .......................................................136
filter time constant...................................................................... 88

flow compensation .................................................................. 189
maximum compensation value .....................................189
flux braking .................................................................................... 310
forward or reverse run prevention .............................. 107
free-run stop........................................................................ 81, 131
frequency hold by analog input ................................... 100
frequency jump ................................................................. 81, 135
frequency limit ................................................................... 81, 133
frequency jump .......................................................................135
frequency upper and lower limit value ......................133
maximum/start frequency ................................................133
frequency reference ....................................................... 87, 128
frequency reference for 0–10V input ........................... 88
frequency reference for -10–10V Input ...................... 92
frequency reference source configuration ............... 78
frequency setting ......................................................................... 86
I2 current input ...........................................................................94

637

I2 voltage input...........................................................................96
keypad .............................................................................................87
RS-485 ..............................................................................................99
TI pulse input................................................................................97
V1 voltage input .........................................................................88
frequency setting (Pulse train) terminal...Refer to TI

terminal
terminal

In Phase Open............................................................................. 506
initializing accumulated electric energy count... 250
input and output specifications..529, 564, 565, 566

Open
input phase open

frequency upper and lower limit value
Frequency lower limit value..............................................133
Frequency upper limit value ............................................133
fuse specifications..................................................................... 547

input open-phase protection ..........................................314
input power frequency ......................................................... 243
input power voltage ............................................................... 243
input power voltage settings........................................... 243
input terminal ..................................................................... 38, 138

Ｇ
ground.................................................................................................. 27
class 3 ground..............................................................................29
ground cable specifications .................................................14
ground fault trip ............................... Refer to Ground Trip
Ground Trip.................................................................................... 506

Ｈ

A (NO) or B (NC) terminal configuration.....................138
bit setting ....................................................................................138
CM terminal ..................................................................................38
I2 terminal ......................................................................................39
NO/NC configuration ...........................................................138
P1–P7 terminal ............................................................................38
TI terminal ......................................................................................39
V1 terminal ....................................................................................38
VR terminal ....................................................................................38
input terminal contact

H100 expansion common area parameter........... 359
control area parameter (Read/Write) ...........................368
memory control area parameter (Read/Write).......371
monitor area parameter (read only) .............................359
half duplex system ................................................................... 335

A contact .....................................................................................315
B contact......................................................................................315
Input terminal function group ...... Refer to IN (Input
terminal function group)
inspection
annual inspection...................................................................521
bi-annual inspection .............................................................523
daily inspection........................................................................520

Ｉ
I/O point map.............................................................................. 385
I2 39
analog input selection switch (SW4)...............................39
frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal .............39
I2 Terminal ......................................................................................... 94
IA (illegal data address)........................................................ 349
ID (illegal data value) ............................................................. 349
(illegal

638

IN (Input terminal function group) .................... 60, 411

input open-phase fault trip.............. Refer to In Phase

frequency setting(voltage) terminal..........Refer to V1

function) .................................................................................... 349

installation.......................................................................................... 17
basic configuration diagram...........................................18
installation flowchart ...............................................................17
location............................................................................................11
mounting the Inverter ............................................................19
side-by-side installation .........................................................12
wiring ...............................................................................................26
installation conditions............................................................... 10
INV Over Load

Inv Over Load Warning ........................................................509
Inverter OLT................................................................................... 506
inverter overload protection (IOLT)............................. 316
Inverter overload warning.................................................. 332
IO Board connection fault trip...... Refer to IO Board

Trip
IO Board Trip ................................................................................ 508
IP 20 .................................................................................................... 537
IP 20 Type external dimensions..................................... 539

Ｊ
Jog operation............................................................................... 147
FWD Jog.......................................................................................147
Jog frequency ...........................................................................147
Jog operation 2 by terminal input.................................148
Jog operation 2-Rev Jog by terminal input ......... 148
jump frequency .......................................................................... 135

Ｋ
keypad .................................................................................................. 52
[AUTO] key .....................................................................................53
[ESC] key .........................................................................................53
[HAND] key....................................................................................53
[Mode] key.....................................................................................53
[MULTI] key ............................................................................ 53, 56
[OFF] key .........................................................................................53
[PROG / Ent] key..........................................................................53
code information .......................................................................57
Config mode (CNF) ................................................................487
configuration mode .................................................................59
cursor keys .................................................................................53
display ...................................................................................... 52, 54
display item...................................................................................57
display mode................................................................................58
LCD brightness/contrast .....................................................250
monitor mode .............................................................................59
monitor mode cursor ..............................................................55
monitor mode item ..................................................................55
navigating between groups ................................................58
operating status ................................................................. 55, 57
operation keys .............................................................................52

operation mode .........................................................................56
parameter group .......................................................................56
parameter mode ........................................................................59
parameter value .........................................................................57
rotational direction ...................................................................56
S/W version ................................................................................250
set value ..........................................................................................57
setting range ................................................................................57
status bar configuration .........................................................55
trip mode .......................................................................................59
User & Macro mode..................................................................59
wiring length................................................................................40
keypad display................................................................................ 54
keypad features
fault monitoring .........................................................................75
navigating directly to different codes ............................68
navigating through the codes............................................66
operation modes .......................................................................62
parameter settings....................................................................70
selecting a display mode .......................................................61
selecting the status bar display item...............................73
setting the monitor display items.....................................71
switching between groups in Parameter Display
mode .........................................................................................64
switching between groups in User & Macro mode 65
keypad title update ................................................................. 250
keypad trip mode ..................................................................... 486
kinetic energy buffering....................................................... 226

Ｌ
latch ..................................................................................................... 505
LCD display ....................................................................................... 54
leakage breaker .......................................................................... 544
learning basic features ............................................................. 78
level...................................................................................................... 505
level dectectiontrip restart time..................................... 201
Level Detect................................................................................... 508
Level Detect Warning ...........................................................509
Level Detect Trip ........................................................................ 332
level detection control .......................................................... 201
lift-type load...................................................................... 117, 125
linear pattern ................................................................................ 117

639

linear V/F operation ................................................................... 80
linear V/F pattern operation............................................. 121
base frequency ........................................................................121
start frequency .........................................................................121
load tuning..................................................................................... 199
Lost Command ........................................................................... 508
command loss fault trip warning...................................332
command loss trip .................................................................332
Lost Command Warning ....................................................509

motor-related features) group .................................... 60
Macro
Circulation Pump (MC5)......................................................499
Constant Torque (MC7)........................................................503
Cooling Tower (MC4) ............................................................497
Exhaust Fan (MC3)..................................................................495
Supply Fan (MC2)....................................................................494
Vacuum Pump (MC6) ...........................................................501
Macro function group........................................................... 492

Lost KeyPad ................................................................................... 507

Macro group................................................................................. 492

Lost KeyPad Warning ............................................................509

Macro mode .................................................................................... 61

Low Battery

macro selection .......................................................................... 251

low battery warning..............................................................510
low battery warning................................................................ 321
low voltage .................................................................................... 324
low voltage fault trip .................................................. 324, 332
Low Voltage................................................................................... 506
Low voltage fault trip during operation .......Refer to

Low Voltage2 Trip

Macro selection
Basic ...............................................................................................251
Circulation Pump ....................................................................251
Compressor................................................................................251
Constant Torque ......................................................................251
Coolong Tower .........................................................................251
Supply Fan ..................................................................................251
Vacuum Pump..........................................................................251

Low Voltage2................................................................................ 506

magnetic contactor ........................................................ 35, 544

LowLeakage PWM ................................................................... 238

main capacitor life estimation......................................... 329

LS INV 485 communication.............................................. 341

CAP Level 1.................................................................................330
CAP Level 2.................................................................................330

LS INV 485 Detailed Read Protocol............................ 346
LS INV 485 Detailed Write Protocol........................... 347
LS INV 485 error code .......................................................... 349
FE (Frame Error)........................................................................349
IA (illegal data address)........................................................349
ID (illegal data value).........................................................349
IF (illegal function) ..................................................................349
WM (write mode error) ........................................................349
LS INV 485 protocol ............................................................... 345
LSINV 485 ....................................................................................... 337
lubrication ....................................................................................... 188
lubrication operation.............................................................. 188

Ｍ
M2 (Secondary Motor function group)................... 482
M2

(secondary

640

maintenance ................................................................................. 520
manual torque boost .................................................... 80, 125
master ................................................................................................ 336
maximum allowed prospective short-circuit
current ............................................................................................. iii
megger test ....................................................................... 521, 524
Metasys-N2 ................................................................................... 337
analog input ..............................................................................386
analog output...........................................................................385
binary input ...............................................................................387
binary output............................................................................386
communication standard ..................................................384
error code....................................................................................388
I/O point map ...........................................................................385
protocol........................................................................................384
metasys-N2 communication ............................................ 384

Metasys-N2 I/O map
analog input ..............................................................................386
analog output...........................................................................385
binary input ...............................................................................387
binary output............................................................................386
MMC ................................................................................................... 253
auto cahnge................................................265, 266, 276, 277
auto change aux .....................................................................270
basic sequence.........................................................................260
interlock .......................................................................................272

mounting bolt ................................................................................ 19
Multi Key
Multi key item ...........................................................................489
Multi Key Sel ..............................................................................489
multi-drop link system.......................................................... 335
multi-function input terminal ............................................. 38

Modbus-RTU ................................................................................ 337

factory default .............................................................................38
IN 65–71 .......................................................................................414
multi-function input terminal Off filter .......................137
multi-function input terminal On filter .......................137
P1–P7................................................................................................38
Px Define .....................................................................................414
Px terminal configuration ..................................................414

Modbus-RTU communication ........................................ 341

multi-function input terminal control ........... 137, 139

Modbus-RTU function code and protocol ........... 351

multi-function input terminals

레귤러 바이패스 ..................................281, 282, 283, 284
MMC Interlock ............................................................................ 508

Modbus-RTU protocol
exception code ......................................................................354
read holding resister .............................................................351
read input resister...................................................................351
momentary power interruption..................................... 233
monitoring
monitor mode .............................................................................59
monitor mode cursor ..............................................................55
monitor mode display ............................................................54
monitor mode item ..................................................................55
monitor registration protocol details...........................348
operation state monitoring...............................................300
operation time monitoring ...............................................302
motor features
capacity ........................................................................................156
efficiency .....................................................................................156
no-load current ........................................................................156
operation display options .....................................................78
output voltage adjustment...............................................127
overheat sensor .......................................................................306
protection ...................................................................................304
rotation control ...........................................................................79
thermal protection(ETH)
E-Thermal .......................................................................... 304

factory default .............................................................................38
multi-function output terminal
multi-function output category (Q1 Define) ...........424
multi-function output on/off control.....................285
multi-function output terminal and relay settings
....................................................................................................293
multi-function output terminal delay time settings
....................................................................................................299
multi-function relay1 category (Relay 1)....................422
multi-function relay2 category (Relay 2)....................423
multi-function relay3category (Relay 3).....................423
multi-function relay4 category (Relay 4)....................423
multi-function relay5 category (Relay 5)....................423
trip output by multi-function output terminal and relay
....................................................................................................298
multi-function terminal configuration.......................... 81
multiple motor control ......................................................... 253
multi-step frequency .............................................................. 101
setting ...........................................................................................101
Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H .............................................102
multi-step speed (frequency).............................................. 78

Ｎ

verifying rotational direction...............................................51

N- terminal (- DC link terminal) ............ 31, 32, 33, 34

Motor overheat fault trip .................................................... 332

no motor trip ............................................................................... 326

motor thermal protection(ETH)

No Motor Trip.............................................................................. 506

ETH trip .........................................................................................304

noise.............................................................................................. 43, 89

641

Normal PWM ............................................................................... 238

Over Heat........................................................................................ 506

NPN mode (Sink) ......................................................................... 42

over heat fault trip .............................. Refer to Over Heat

NTC Open ....................................................................................... 507

Over Load ....................................................................................... 505

number of motor poles ....................................................... 156

Over Load Warning................................................................509
overload fault trip ...................................................................332
overload warning ...................................................................332

Ｏ

Over Voltage................................................................................. 506

open-phase protection......................................................... 314

over voltage trip ............................ Refer to Over Voltage

operation frequency .........Refer to frequency setting
operation mode selection..................................................... 78

overload.......................................................Refer to Over Load
overload trip ..............................................................................308
overload warning ...................................................................308

operation noise .......................................................................... 238

overload rate ................................................................................ 239

carrier frequency .....................................................................238
frequency jump .......................................................................135

overload trip.............................................Refer to Over Load

operation time ............................................................................ 302

Ｐ

cumulated operation time ................................................302
initialize cumulated operation time .............................302
inverter power-on time .......................................................302

P(+) terminal (+ DC link terminal) ......................... 33, 34

option trip...............................326, Refer to Option Trip-x

P/I gain.............................................................................................. 233

Option Trip-1 ................................................................................ 508

P1+ terminal (+ DC link terminal) .................................. 31

Option Trip-x

P2+ terminal (+ DC link terminal) ......................... 31, 32

option trip ...................................................................................332

P2+/B terminal............................................................................... 31

OUT (Output terminal function group) .......... 60, 420

P3+ terminals (+ DC link terminal) ................................ 32

Out Phase Open ........................................................................ 506

parameter........................................................................................... 70

output block by multi-function terminal................ 325

display changed parameter..............................................247
hide parameter mode ..........................................................245
initializing the parameters ....................................................77
parameter initialization ..................................................244
parameter lock .........................................................................246
parameter settings....................................................................70
password .......................................................................... 245, 246

output open-phase fault trip......Refer to Out Phase

Open
output terminal............................ Refer to R/S/T terminal
Output terminal function group ............Refer to OUT
(Output terminal function group)
output/communication terminal...................................... 39
24 terminal ..................................................................................40
A1/C1/B1 terminal..................................................................40
AO terminal .................................................................................39
EG terminal..................................................................................40
S+/S-/SG terminal ...................................................................40
over current trip .......................... Refer to Over Current1
Over Current1 .............................................................................. 506
Over Current2 .............................................................................. 507

642

Parameter Initialization ......................................................... 244
parameter mode........................................................................... 59
parameter setting mode ........................................................ 60
ParaWrite Trip............................................................................... 508
parmeter
read/write/save ........................................................................243
part names ........................................................................................... 3
parts illustrated ................................................................................. 3
parts life............................................................................................ 329

capacitor life estimation......................................................329
fan life ............................................................................................331
password.................................................................. 245, 246, 372
payback counter ........................................................................ 190
peripheral devices..................................................................... 544
phase-to-phase voltage....................................................... 515
PID
flow control ................................................................................157
pressure control.......................................................................157
speed control ............................................................................157
temperature control..............................................................157
PID (Advanced function group) ..................................... 434
PID (PID control) group .......................................................... 60
PID control
PID openloop ............................................................................176
PID operation sleep mode .................................................174
PID operation switching .....................................................176
PID reference .............................................................................168
PID control group................ Refer to PID (PID control)
group)
pipe break....................................................................................... 204
pipe break dectection control
Pipe Broken ................................................................................204
pipe break detection control
Pipe Broken ................................................................................508
Pipe Broken Warning ............................................................509

power terminals ................................................................... 32, 33
N- terminal..............................................................31, 32, 33, 34
P(+) terminal ......................................................................... 33, 34
P(+)/B terminal ............................................................................33
P1+ terminal .................................................................................31
P2+ terminal ......................................................................... 31, 32
P2+/B terminal ............................................................................31
P3+ terminal .................................................................................32
R/S/T terminals .....................................................31, 32, 33, 34
U/V/W terminal ....................................................31, 32, 33, 34
PowerOn Resume ..................................................................... 303
PowerOn Resume by serial communication........ 303
Power-on Run .............................................................................. 108
pre-heating .................................................................................... 206
preparing the installation.......................................................... 1
press regeneration prevention ....................................... 286
P gain/I gain ...............................................................................287
product identification................................................................... 1
product specification details ............................................ 535
protocol
BACnet protocol ......................................................................373
LS INV 485 protocol ...............................................................345
Metasys-N2 protocol.............................................................384
PRT (protection features) group ....................................... 60
PRT (Protection function group) ................................... 472
Pulse output terminal ................. Refer to TO terminal

Pipe Broken fault trip ........... Refer to PipeBroken Trip

pump clean.................................................................................... 192

PNP mode (Source).................................................................... 41

Pump clean trip................... Refer to Pump Clean Trip

PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2) ................... 36

PWM ................................................................................................... 238

NPN mode (Sink)........................................................................42
PNP mode (Source)...................................................................41

frequency modulation.........................................................238

post-installation checklist ....................................................... 48

Ｑ

potentiometer................................................................................. 38
power braking ................................................................................ 81

quantizing .......................................................................................... 89

power consumption ................................................... 300, 301

Quantizing

power input terminalRefer to R/S/T terminal, Refer
to R/S/T terminal, Refer to R/S/T terminal
power output terminal ......... Refer to R/S/T terminal,
Refer to R/S/T terminal, Refer to R/S/T terminal
power terminal board wiring .............................................. 29

noise..................................................................................................89
quick reference ................................................................................ iv

Ｒ
R/S/T terminals ........................................31, 32, 33, 34, 513

643

R/S/T terminals .............................................................................. 35

Ｓ

rating
derating........................................................................................561
rated motor current...............................................................156
rated motor voltage ..............................................................208
rated slip frequency...............................................................156
rated slip speed........................................................................156
rating plate........................................................................................... 1
reactor.......................................................................................... 18, 19
reactors specifications ........................................................... 547
real-time clock................................................................................ 23
regenerated energy................................................................. 132
Reset Restart ................................................................................. 110
settings .......................................................................................236
resonance frequency
carrier frequency .....................................................................238
restarting after a trip
Reset Restart..............................................................................110

S/W version ................................................................................... 250
inverter .........................................................................................250
keypad ..........................................................................................250
S+/S-/SG terminal ....................................................................... 40
safe operation mode ............................................................. 152
safety information ...........................................................................ii
screw specification
control circuit terminal screw...........................................550
input/output terminal screw............................................549
screw size ....................................................................................549
screw torque..............................................................................549
S-curve pattern ........................................................................... 117
actual Acc/Dec time ..............................................................119
secondary motor-related features group.....Refer to
M2 (the secondary motor-related features)
group

retry number ................................................................................ 110

selecting operation modes ......................................... 62, 81

ripple...................................................................................................... 89

auto mode operation ..............................................................82
basic operation ...........................................................................83
function codes.............................................................................84
hand mode operation.............................................................81
mode keys and indicators .....................................................82
Power-on Run/PowerOn Resume in each mode .....85
switching between the modes ..........................................84

RS-232 ............................................................................................... 336
communication .......................................................................336
RS-485 ............................................................................................... 335
communication .......................................................................336
converter .....................................................................................336
integrated communication..................................................99
setting command and frequency..................................339
signal terminal ..................................................................... 40, 99

side-by-side installation .......................................................... 12

RS-485 signal input terminal ...... Refer to S+/S-/SG

slave..................................................................................................... 336

terminal
RTC battery ........................................................................... 23, 524
enabling..........................................................................................23
replacing......................................................................................524
specifications.............................................................................524
run prevention
Fwd .................................................................................................107
Rev ..................................................................................................107

sequence common terminal ..Refer to CM terminal

slip......................................................................................................... 156
slip compensation operation........................................... 156
soft fill control
soft fill operation .....................................................................172
speed command loss ............................................................ 317
speed search operation ....................................................... 232
Flying Start-1 .............................................................................233
Flying Start-2 .............................................................................233
options..........................................................................................233
P/I gain ..........................................................................................233
speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm) ................................ 101

644

square reduction........................................................................... 80
square reduction load ..........................................................122
V/F pattern operation...........................................................122

Ｔ
target frequency

stall ....................................................................................................... 310

Cmd frequency ........................................................................389

bit On/Off ....................................................................................311
stall prevention ........................................................................310

Temperature sensor fault trip ......................... NTC Open

start after DC braking............................................................... 80
start at power-on
PowerOn Resume...................................................................109
Power-on Run ...........................................................................108
start mode...................................................................................... 128
acceleration start.....................................................................128
start after DC braking ...........................................................128

terminal
A terminal......................................................................... 138, 299
B terminal ......................................................................... 138, 299
terminal for frequency reference setting ......Refer to

VR terminal
terminal screw specifications ........................................... 548
Terminating Resistor selection switch (SW1) .......... 36

Start&End Ramp operation .............................................. 196

test run ................................................................................................. 50

Station ID......................................................................................... 351

Thermal Trip .................................................................................. 507

stop mode...................................................................................... 129

TI terminal................................................................................. 39, 97

DC braking after stop ...........................................................130
deceleration stop ....................................................................129
free run stop ..............................................................................131
power braking ..........................................................................132

Time Event...................................................................................... 212

storage .............................................................................................. 528
Supply Fan (MC2) ..................................................................... 494
surge killer ................................................................................ 35, 49
SW1 .............. Refer to Terminating Resistor selection
switch (SW1)
SW2 .........Refer to PNP/NPN mode selection switch
(SW2)
SW3 .... Refer to V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch
(SW3)
SW4 ..Refer to analog input selection switch (SW4)
SW5 ............ Refer to analog output selection switch
(SW5)
switch
analog input selection switch (SW4)...............................36
analog output selection switch (SW5) ...........................36
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2) .......................36
Terminating Resistor selection switch (SW1)..............36
V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3) ...................36
Switches............................................................................................... 36

time event scheduling........................................................... 212
Exception Date .........................................................................212
module types ............................................................................212
parameters .................................................................................212
RTC battery.................................................................................212
RTC clock .....................................................................................212
Time Event ..................................................................................212
Time Period Module..............................................................212
Time Period Module............................................................... 212
time scale setting ...................................................................... 112
0.01sec ..........................................................................................112
0.1sec .............................................................................................112
1sec.................................................................................................112
timer ................................................................................................... 252
protection features groupPRT (protection features)
group
TO terminal .................................................................................... 291
torque.................................................................................................... 26
torque boost................................................................................. 125
auto torque boost ..................................................................126
manual torque boost............................................................125
overexcitation ...........................................................................125
trip ........................................................................................................ 505
erasing trip history .................................................................250
fault/waring list ........................................................................332

645

trip no motor trip ......................................................... 326, 328
trip status reset.........................................................................325
troubleshooting ......................................................................510

square reductionV/F pattern operation .....................122
user V/F pattern operation ................................................123
V/F pattern configuration .....................................................80

Trip mode........................................................................................... 59

V1 terminal............................................................................... 38, 88

Trip mode........................................................................................ 486

V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3)............... 36

troubleshooting.......................................................................... 505

fault trips......................................................................................510
other faults .................................................................................513

analog input selection switch (SW4)...............................39
V2 input............................................................................................... 96
I2 voltage input...........................................................................96

Ｕ
U&M mode ....................................................................... 248, 344
U/V/W terminals............................31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 513
Under Load
Under Load Trip ............................................................ 322, 505
Under Load Warning.................................................. 322, 509
underload fault trip................................................................332
underload warning................................................................332
underload fault trip ........................ Refer to Under Load
Unipolar ............................................................................................... 39

Vacuum Pump (MC6) ............................................................ 501
variable torque load................................................................ 122
vent cover .......................................................................................... 12
virtual multi-function input ............................................... 341
voltage/current output terminal................ Refer to AO
terminal
VR terminal ....................................................................................... 38

Ｗ

up-down operation ................................................................. 149

warning ................................................................................. 332, 505

User & Macro mode............................................... 58, 59, 61

fault/warning list .....................................................................332
warning message ...................................................................509

User group ..................................................................................... 247
delete parameters ..................................................................248
parameter registration.........................................................247
User mode......................................................................................... 61
user V/F pattern operation................................................ 123
User/Macro group
parameter group ....................................................................344
U&M mode .................................................................................344
using the keypad.......................................................................... 61

Warning ............................................................................................ 332
wiring............................................................................................ 14, 26
circuit breaker ...........................................................................544
control terminal board wiring.............................................36
copper cable.................................................................................26
disassembling the cover ........................................................27
ferrite ................................................................................................40
ground.............................................................................................27
power terminal board .............................................................29
re-assembling the cover ........................................................47
wiring length................................................................................40

Ｖ

WM (write mode error)........................................................ 349

V/F control...................................................................................... 121

Write parameter fault trip .... Refer to ParaWrite Trip

linear V/F pattern operation..............................................121

646

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Creator                         : nPDF (pdftk 1.41)
Producer                        : itext-paulo-155 (itextpdf.sf.net-lowagie.com)
Modify Date                     : 2018:09:19 18:06:12-08:00
Create Date                     : 2018:09:19 18:06:12-08:00
Page Count                      : 659

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

H100 Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation